All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The following letter formally requesting the termination of the secretive Japan-US Joint Committee responsible for deciding through classified directives American and Japanese policy will be submitted to Brigadier General George B. Rowell IV, Deputy Commander for United States Forces Japan, at 10:30 AM on February 1, 2024 at formal gathering. The public is invited to attend (New Sano Hotel, 2-12 Minami Azabu, Minato-ku Tokyo ニュー山王ホテル 港区南麻布4丁目12).

The text for the letter from American citizens is as follows.

***

February 1, 2024

Topic: The abolition of the Japan-U.S. Joint Committee

Brigadier General George B. Rowell IV

Deputy Commander, United States Forces Japan

Dear General Rowell:

We are writing you as U.S. citizens who are devoted to constructive, positive, and transparent cooperation between the United States and Japan. We are concerned about the unconstitutional Japan-U.S. Joint Committee (“Nichibei Goudou Iinkai” in Japanese) that dominates U.S.-Japan relations today. 

This letter accompanies another letter concerning that selfsame committee that was drafted by a group of thoughtful Japanese citizens and describes its problems in detail.

The secretive Japan-U.S. Joint Committee has taken on malevolent tendencies in recent years, serving as a platform for the determination of policy in secret without any accountability to elected officials, or to the citizens of Japan, or of the United States.

The very concept of a secret Japan-U.S. Joint Committee was unconstitutional and unethical from the beginning. This opaque institution that meets regularly in downtown Tokyo to determine policy between unelected American military officers and Japanese government officials undermines the process of deliberative democracy and the rule of law in both Japan and the United States. Its actions encourage and abet the dangerous trend towards unconstitutional secret governance that has crept through the federal government and military of the United States over the past two decades.

Such secret governance has its origins in the British Empire, with its grotesque mixture of government, private bankers, and mercenaries known as the British East India Company. Such secret, imperial governance is precisely what our nation’s forefathers, men like George Washington and Thomas Jefferson, rightfully rejected when they signed the Declaration of Independence.

The United States of America is a republic, and its government is defined by the Declaration of Independence of 1776 and the Constitution of 1787. Our nation cannot tolerate secret governance by rich and influential individuals, or the privatization of the military as took place in the British Empire. Sadly, that is precisely what the Japan-U.S. Joint Committee practices.

Imposing this unaccountable and secretive institution on our ally Japan is an insulting infringement on Japan’s sovereignty, but it is also unconstitutional on the U.S. side, and violates both the legal and moral imperatives behind the founding of our country.  

The oath of enlistment for military officers, which you signed, contains the words, “I do solemnly swear that I will support and defend the Constitution of the United States against all enemies, foreign and domestic.” As citizens of the U.S., we share this commitment to the Constitution.

In other words, the primary duty of the United States Forces Japan is to serve the American people according to the Constitution. Upholding the Constitution demands transparent and accountable government.

Our honorable Japanese colleagues have submitted a letter in defense of the sovereignty of the nation of Japan. This letter contains within it three demands of the U.S. Forces Japan (USFJ), the US military as a whole, and the federal government. We  feel that those demands are justified and appropriate.

1) Abolish the Japan-U.S. Joint Committee.

2) Make public all the records of the proceedings of the Japan-U.S. Joint Committee since its founding, and make them accessible to all Japanese citizens.

3) In addition to releasing to the Japanese public all the secret agreements decided on by the Japan-U.S. Joint Committee without the authorization of the citizens of Japan through a democratic process, take immediate action to assure that all such secret agreements are from this day forward null and void.

All three actions are required in light of the extensive examples already revealed in declassified documents of secret agreements made by the Japan-U.S. Joint Committee that violate the constitution and the sovereignty of Japan, and also violate the constitution of the United States of America.

It is critical that our alliance remain between the peoples of the United States and Japan and that it be completely in accord with the constitutions of the two nations.  

Our military must follow the Constitution and its members must refuse any secret directives issued within the Japan-U.S. Joint Committee, or elsewhere, that violate either the letter or the spirit of the Constitution. Consultants, corporations, banks, and their representatives can play no role in the decision-making process because our government is defined by that selfsame Constitution.

Finally, it is our responsibility as Americans to consider the malevolent forces at work in the military, and throughout the entire Federal government, that are dragging us away from an economy based on productive and sustainable economic activity of a transparent and morally sound nature, and towards one based on war, expansion, extraction, and domination.  

Whether it is the illegal and unconstitutional use of military personnel to sell the weapons of arms manufactures (many of whom pay almost no taxes in the United States) or the demands made on the military by consulting firms and lobbyists representing the super-rich, we must stop such unaccountable governance and endless territorial expansion. The historical records of the last five thousand years tell us exactly what tragic end that path of endless military expansion leads to. 

Governance in the United States was compromised in the 20th century by the subversion of the Constitution and federal lawby a vaguely defined concept of national security.  The result has been the establishment of a national security state that follows the economic and structural imperatives of imperialism while pretending to uphold the republic defined by the Constitution.

The existence of the Japan-U.S. Joint Committee declares to Americans and the world that the United States is not a republic. It is shameful that we behave like a global empire and treat Japan, supposedly our ally, as a client state.

We call on you to take action regarding the Japan-U.S. Joint Committee today. And we welcome your response to this letter.

Most respectfully,

*

The text of the letter from our Japanese colleagues and allies is as follows.

***

February 1, 2023

Brigadier General George B. Rowell IV

Deputy Commander, United States Forces Japan 

Dear General Rowell,

We have gathered here today as Japanese citizens for the purpose of presenting to you, in your capacity as Deputy Commander of the United States Forces Japan, this formal demand for immediate policy changes, specifically as a protest against the Japan-US Joint Committee.

The Japan-US Joint Committee is an organization made up of high ranking officers in the United States Forces Japan and of high ranking officials in the government of Japan that meets in secret at the New Sanno U.S.Force Center in downtown Tokyo on a regular basis.

The following is our formal demand:

When the Treaty of San Francisco that formally established peaceful relations between the United States and Japan took effect on April 28, 1952 the “US-Japan Security Treaty” and the “Administrative Agreement under Article III of the Security Treaty between Japan and the United States of America” also took effect. 

The Japan-US Joint Committee was set up as an institution assigned the purpose of carrying out all consultation regarding the administration of the “U.S.–Japan Status of Forces Agreement” (which replaced the “Administrative Agreement” in 1960).

If we considered the intention of the U.S.–Japan Status of Forces Agreement, we would assume that the Japan-US Joint Committee must be a place where a discussion is held in the open about what is in the interests of both nations, and that this discussion would be carried out by members of the Diet (for Japan) and members of the Congress (for the United States) who are empowered with the solemn trust of the citizens of both countries, the citizens in whom the ultimate sovereignty is vested. The members of the committee would thereby represent all of the citizens of the two allied nations.

However, the Japan-US Joint Committee consists of Japanese civil servants who are not elected in any election and unelected American military officers assigned to Japan. Moreover, the meetings are held in absolute secrecy.

We the people of Japan are incensed that this consultative meeting is being carried out in a manner that degrades the sovereignty of Japan as an independent nation.

The members of the Japan-US Joint Committee have no obligation to make public the agenda, or the topics discussed, at the regular meetings, nor to make available any of the documents describing what agreements have been reached.

It is precisely for this reason that the Japan-US Joint Committee is viewed as a black box wherein numerous secret agreements have been made.

As far as all previous meetings of the Japan-US Joint Committee are concerned, it is recorded that an agreement was reached “not to make public the content without a mutual agreement by Japan and the United States.” The reason given for this secrecy is that “there is a concern that the relationship of trust between Japan and the United States might be damaged, that the stable stationing of American troops, and the smooth carrying out of their activities, might be impinged on, and that the safety of Japan might be harmed” if this information were made public.

The result is that all records of the meetings, and all written agreements that result from the meetings, are, in principle, secret and unavailable to the public.

But various secret agreements have been made public as a result of requests following the American Freedom of Information Act in the United States and the documents released demonstrate that these secret agreements reached by the Japan-US Joint Committee openly violate the sovereignty of Japan.

For example, at a meeting of the Japan-US Joint Committee in October, 1953, the subcommittee on criminal proceedings within the special committee on legal jurisdiction carried out deliberations on policy at which they agreed to an “secret agreement relinquishing rights of jurisdiction for Japan,” stating that “regarding criminal actions by members of the US military in Japan, with the exception of extremely important incidents for the nation of Japan, legal jurisdiction will not be exercised.”

The comments of the Japanese representative at that subcommittee, Tsuda Minoru, who was at that time director general for the criminal justice division at the Ministry of Justice, were recorded and they remain in the transcripts made public since then.

Another case made public involves the deliberations at a meeting of the Committee on Commercial Aviation of the Japan-US Joint Committee in May, 1975 which produced an “Agreement concerning traffic control for aviation and transportation.” This agreement resulted in the complete control of the airspace around the Yokota Base, the Iwakuni Base, and the Kadena Base by the United States military in violation of Japanese sovereignty.

Even though the Ministry of Foreign Affairs has formally stated that “even though there may be an agreement of the Japan-US Joint Committee in effect, there is no pressing legal basis for it to take precedence over Japanese aviation law,” the reality today is that aviation management continues to follow exclusively the agreements reached in secret by the Japan-US Joint Committee for takeoff and landing in the airspace at the Yokoda Base and Atsugi Base. Moreover. In addition, air control for the airspace of all of Japan for the altitude of 2450 meters to 7000 meters is reserved for US military aircraft and in placed entirely in the hands of the US military. The result is that Japanese civil aircraft that wish to use that airspace are required to have permission from the US military command.

The cases described above are but two examples of the numerous secret agreements reached at the Japan-US Joint Committee which grant special rights to the US military in Japan. The fact that the records of the meetings cannot be made public means that we have no way of knowing how many other secret agreements have been reached. These secret agreements are kept hidden from the citizens of Japan who have sovereignty in this republic in accord with the constitution. Moreover, the elected representatives of the Japanese people in the Diet, who are entrusted with legislative authority, are also not privy to these agreements. 

These egregious special powers and privileges assigned by the Japan-US Joint Committee have no legal basis in the original “U.S.–Japan Status of Forces Agreement” and are by their very nature unacceptable for an independent nation state.

These embargoed agreements decided in secret rooms have eaten away at the very foundations of the rule of law in Japan, creating a world of shadows that is incompatible with the Japanese constitution which must serve as the highest legal authority in the nation.

The grave consequence is that our sovereignty is transgressed and degraded by these secret agreements.

We Japanese of conscience cannot tolerate the reduction of our nation to a vassal nation in blatant violation of our constitution and our sovereignty.

We therefore, in place of the members of the Japanese Diet who have been stripped by the United States and the United States military of the authority granted by our constitution, respectfully request that you, honorable Brigadier General George B. Rowell IV, in your capacity as Deputy Commander of United States Forces Japan, carry out the following actions:

First, abolish the US-Japan Joint Committee.

Second, make public all records of the proceeds of the US-Japan Joint Committee since its founding, and make them accessible to all Japanese citizens.

Third, in addition to releasing to the Japanese public all the secret agreements decided on by the Japan-US Joint Committee without authorization by the citizens of Japan, take immediate action to assure that all such secret agreements are from this moment null and void.

Respectfully,

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Emanuel Pastreich served as the president of the Asia Institute, a think tank with offices in Washington DC, Seoul, Tokyo and Hanoi. Pastreich also serves as director general of the Institute for Future Urban Environments. Pastreich declared his candidacy for president of the United States as an independent in February, 2020.

He is a regular contributor to Global Research.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Jan. 15, 2024 – TikTok and Youtube Reptile Expert Brian Barczyk (age 54) died on Jan. 15, 2024 from pancreatic cancer diagnosed on Feb. 27, 2023 “Stage 2 but quickly became Stage 4”. He was COVID-19 vaccinated.

Image

Image

Sep. 2021 – “Fully vaccinated”

Click here to watch the video

My Take…

I will draw your attention to several details:

  1. Sep. 2021: “I’m also fully vaccinated” “I’ve had COVID in the past” “I feel really sick” (he already had some side effects from the COVID-19 Vaccines)
  2. Pancreatic cancer Stage 2 diagnosed Feb. 27, 2023 then progressed rapidly to Stage 4.
  3. Diagnosis to death: 10 months.
  4. Note how much he has aged in 2 years (I do believe rapid aging is a real phenomenon in the COVID-19 mRNA Vaccinated)

*

A Few Other Recent Cases 

Dec. 19, 2023 – Toronto, ON – 58 year old Basil John William Arvanitis died on Dec. 19, 2023 following a “courageous battle with pancreatic cancer.”

Image

Dec. 4, 2023 – 46 year old Kelly Boening died suddenly after a few months battle with Stage 2 pancreatic cancer. Diagnosis to death: few months.

Image

Nov. 14, 2023 – CLEVELAND CLINIC DOCTOR with TURBO CANCER Dr. Bruce Wilkoff is a cardiologist at Cleveland Clinic. He was just diagnosed with Stage 4 Pancreatic Turbo Cancer. He worked with top mRNA con artist & fraudster Dr. Eric Topol.

Image

Nov. 11, 2023 – TURBO CANCER – 51 year old firefighter, Assistant Chief of Prospect Volunteer Fire Department died on Nov. 11, 2023. He was diagnosed with pancreatic cancer in Aug. 2023. COVID-19 mRNA Vaccine Turbo Cancer Diagnosis to death: 2 months.

Image

Oct. 31, 2023 – Mississauga, ON, CANADA – 34 year old Jordan Costa, lacrosse player, died suddenly on Oct. 31, 2023 after a “fierce battle with pancreatic cancer.”

Image

Oct. 26, 2023 – TURBO CANCER – CO – Diane Talbot used medical assistance in dying (MAID) and ended her life on Oct. 26, 2023 after a two year battle with pancreatic cancer “her health deteriorated rapidly in recent days.”

Image

Oct. 1, 2023 – 57 year old Red Sox baseball pitcher Tim Wakefield died this morning on Oct. 1, 2023 I reported yesterday he had aggressive brain cancer and his wife has aggressive pancreatic cancer COVID-19 mRNA Vaccine Turbo Cancers in families.

Image

Sep. 29, 2023 – TURBO CANCER – Bolivian model, 28 year old Mayra Copas, was diagnosed with pancreatic cancer in October 2022. She died 11 months later on Sep. 29, 2023.

Image

Sep. 21, 2023 – TURBO CANCER – Sep.21, 2023 – Cedar Rapids, IA 53 year old Chris Cruise State champion swimmer, coach and teacher, died 1 month after being diagnosed with Stage 4 Pancreatic Cancer.

Image

Sep. 15, 2023 – TURBO CANCER – Sep. 15, 2023 – Forked River, NJ 54 year old Kimberly Elick died after a 3 month battle with Stage 4 Pancreatic and Liver cancer.

Click here to read the full article.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Dr. William Makis is a Canadian physician with expertise in Radiology, Oncology and Immunology. Governor General’s Medal, University of Toronto Scholar. Author of 100+ peer-reviewed medical publications.


The Worldwide Corona Crisis, Global Coup d’Etat Against Humanity

by Michel Chossudovsky

Michel Chossudovsky reviews in detail how this insidious project “destroys people’s lives”. He provides a comprehensive analysis of everything you need to know about the “pandemic” — from the medical dimensions to the economic and social repercussions, political underpinnings, and mental and psychological impacts.

“My objective as an author is to inform people worldwide and refute the official narrative which has been used as a justification to destabilize the economic and social fabric of entire countries, followed by the imposition of the “deadly” COVID-19 “vaccine”. This crisis affects humanity in its entirety: almost 8 billion people. We stand in solidarity with our fellow human beings and our children worldwide. Truth is a powerful instrument.”

Reviews

This is an in-depth resource of great interest if it is the wider perspective you are motivated to understand a little better, the author is very knowledgeable about geopolitics and this comes out in the way Covid is contextualized. —Dr. Mike Yeadon

In this war against humanity in which we find ourselves, in this singular, irregular and massive assault against liberty and the goodness of people, Chossudovsky’s book is a rock upon which to sustain our fight. –Dr. Emanuel Garcia

In fifteen concise science-based chapters, Michel traces the false covid pandemic, explaining how a PCR test, producing up to 97% proven false positives, combined with a relentless 24/7 fear campaign, was able to create a worldwide panic-laden “plandemic”; that this plandemic would never have been possible without the infamous DNA-modifying Polymerase Chain Reaction test – which to this day is being pushed on a majority of innocent people who have no clue. His conclusions are evidenced by renown scientists. —Peter Koenig 

Professor Chossudovsky exposes the truth that “there is no causal relationship between the virus and economic variables.” In other words, it was not COVID-19 but, rather, the deliberate implementation of the illogical, scientifically baseless lockdowns that caused the shutdown of the global economy. –David Skripac

A reading of  Chossudovsky’s book provides a comprehensive lesson in how there is a global coup d’état under way called “The Great Reset” that if not resisted and defeated by freedom loving people everywhere will result in a dystopian future not yet imagined. Pass on this free gift from Professor Chossudovsky before it’s too late.  You will not find so much valuable information and analysis in one place. –Edward Curtin

ISBN: 978-0-9879389-3-0,  Year: 2022,  PDF Ebook,  Pages: 164, 15 Chapters

Price: $11.50 FREE COPY! Click here (docsend) and download.

We encourage you to support the eBook project by making a donation through Global Research’s DonorBox “Worldwide Corona Crisis” Campaign Page

Are COVID-19 Vaccine Babies Toddling and Babbling Normally?

January 23rd, 2024 by Dr. Peter McCullough

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The rush to mass vaccinate the world with genetic vaccines launched in 2021 with a reckless hubris that will go down in history. With no assurances on safety or efficacy, the American College of Obstetrics and Gynecology broke the time-honored conservative stance on novel products in pregnant women and broadly endorsed the shots that skipped all preclinical and clinical testing during gestation.

Now years later, scientists are filling in the knowledge gaps, and in the case of a rat study by Erdogan et al, with results that are making many in the clinical community uncomfortable. In short, they found that pregnant rats injected with the Pfizer BNT162b2 vaccine had male progeny in particular, that tended to have concordant neurodegenerative changes with impaired behaviors on standardized testing.

“In conclusion, our study presents evidence that the COVID-19 mRNA BNT162b2 vaccine impacts the Wnt pathway (one of the most crucial morphogens in development and during the maturation of central nervous system) and brain-derived neurotrophic factor [BDNF] levels in rats, with particularly pronounced effects observed in males. These male-specific outcomes, including autism-like behaviors, reduced neuronal counts, and impaired motor performance, emphasize the potential neurodevelopmental implications of the vaccine, aligning with existing literature on the roles of the WNT pathway and BDNF signaling in neurodevelopmental disorders.”

Click here to read the full article.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.


The Worldwide Corona Crisis, Global Coup d’Etat Against Humanity

by Michel Chossudovsky

Michel Chossudovsky reviews in detail how this insidious project “destroys people’s lives”. He provides a comprehensive analysis of everything you need to know about the “pandemic” — from the medical dimensions to the economic and social repercussions, political underpinnings, and mental and psychological impacts.

“My objective as an author is to inform people worldwide and refute the official narrative which has been used as a justification to destabilize the economic and social fabric of entire countries, followed by the imposition of the “deadly” COVID-19 “vaccine”. This crisis affects humanity in its entirety: almost 8 billion people. We stand in solidarity with our fellow human beings and our children worldwide. Truth is a powerful instrument.”

Reviews

This is an in-depth resource of great interest if it is the wider perspective you are motivated to understand a little better, the author is very knowledgeable about geopolitics and this comes out in the way Covid is contextualized. —Dr. Mike Yeadon

In this war against humanity in which we find ourselves, in this singular, irregular and massive assault against liberty and the goodness of people, Chossudovsky’s book is a rock upon which to sustain our fight. –Dr. Emanuel Garcia

In fifteen concise science-based chapters, Michel traces the false covid pandemic, explaining how a PCR test, producing up to 97% proven false positives, combined with a relentless 24/7 fear campaign, was able to create a worldwide panic-laden “plandemic”; that this plandemic would never have been possible without the infamous DNA-modifying Polymerase Chain Reaction test – which to this day is being pushed on a majority of innocent people who have no clue. His conclusions are evidenced by renown scientists. —Peter Koenig 

Professor Chossudovsky exposes the truth that “there is no causal relationship between the virus and economic variables.” In other words, it was not COVID-19 but, rather, the deliberate implementation of the illogical, scientifically baseless lockdowns that caused the shutdown of the global economy. –David Skripac

A reading of  Chossudovsky’s book provides a comprehensive lesson in how there is a global coup d’état under way called “The Great Reset” that if not resisted and defeated by freedom loving people everywhere will result in a dystopian future not yet imagined. Pass on this free gift from Professor Chossudovsky before it’s too late.  You will not find so much valuable information and analysis in one place. –Edward Curtin

ISBN: 978-0-9879389-3-0,  Year: 2022,  PDF Ebook,  Pages: 164, 15 Chapters

Price: $11.50 FREE COPY! Click here (docsend) and download.

We encourage you to support the eBook project by making a donation through Global Research’s DonorBox “Worldwide Corona Crisis” Campaign Page

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

South Africa is hopeful that the International Court of Justice (ICJ) will find that “the killing of on average 1,000 people per day” in the besieged Gaza Strip is reason enough to meet the demands set out in its submission to the Court. 

Amongst the nine provisional measures that South Africa has called for, are most notably,  that Israel immediately suspend any military operations in or against Gaza, and that humanitarian aid be allowed in as quickly as possible.

“It’s the World Court, so its judgments, (it) doesn’t get higher than that,” the spokesperson for South Africa’s Minister of Justice, Ronald Lamola, told The Palestine Chronicle.

“So we doubt that the Court wouldn’t find that the killing of at least, on average 1,000 people per day, is not something that isn’t an urgent condition that requires to be addressed,” said Chrispin Phiri.

The South African government brought the case against Israel on December 29, accusing it of “genocidal acts” in its military assaults on Gaza. The case was heard on January 11 in The Hague. 

Describing the ICJ case as “a measure of last resort,” Phiri said, “we do not want to pre-empt the judgment.”

However, he added

“We would want to read the judgment and understand how it has reached its position. And once we are capable of understanding that, we would then respond accordingly.”

“In any event,” Phiri stressed, “the judgment would also have to be tabled at the United Nations Security Council, which will also then have to ensure that it is adequately enforced.”

Asked what South Africa’s next step would be, should the Court not meet its requests, Phiri said,

“We will really have to understand what the reasoning is, and then act in accordance with the reasoning.”

The spokesperson remains optimistic saying “we are hoping that the court will uphold what we required (listed) in our provisional measures” in particular, the conditions for a ceasefire and humanitarian aid be allowed in.

He said,

“These are the most significant which we believe will have a long-lasting impact in the current conflict, but also to stop the killing that we are seeing.”

‘Evidence of Genocidal Intent’

Advocate Adila Hassim who opened the arguments at the ICJ said,

“South Africa contends that Israel has transgressed Article II of the (Geneva) Convention, by committing actions that fall within the definition of acts of genocide. The actions show a systematic pattern of conduct from which genocide can be inferred.”

Another member of the legal team, Advocate Tembeka Ngcukaitobi submitted that “the evidence of genocidal intent” by Israel in Gaza “is not only chilling” but “also overwhelming and incontrovertible.”

Read the full report on South Africa’s submission here.

Addressing the media after its submission in The Hague, Minister Lamola said that the case against Israel presents the ICJ with “an opportunity to act, in real time, to prevent genocide from continuing in Gaza.”

Israel has rejected as false the accusations of genocide brought by South Africa at the ICJ. 

Tal Becker, the Israeli foreign ministry’s legal adviser, told the court that

“If there were acts of genocide, they have been perpetrated against Israel.” Becker accused South Africa of “seeking to undermine Israel’s inherent right to defend itself.”

South Africa, a former apartheid state, has also referred Israel to the International Criminal Court (ICC) for alleged war crimes committed in its ongoing assault on Gaza.  

According to Gaza’s Ministry of Health, 25,295 Palestinians have been killed, and 63,000 wounded in Israel’s ongoing genocide in Gaza starting on October 7.

Palestinian and international estimates say that the majority of those killed and wounded are women and children.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Nurah Tape is a South Africa-based journalist. She is an editor with The Palestine Chronicle. 

Featured image: South African Justice Minister Ronald Lamola. (Image: Palestine Chronicle)

The Four Horsemen of Gaza’s Apocalypse. Chris Hedges

January 23rd, 2024 by Chris Hedges

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Joe Biden’s inner circle of strategists for the Middle East — Antony Blinken, Jake Sullivan and Brett McGurk — have little understanding of the Muslim world and a deep animus towards Islamic resistance movements. They see Europe, the United States and Israel as involved in a clash of civilizations between the enlightened West and a barbaric Middle East. They believe that violence can bend Palestinians and other Arabs to their will. They champion the overwhelming firepower of the U.S. and Israeli military as the key to regional stability — an illusion that fuels the flames of regional war and perpetuates the genocide in Gaza.

In short, these four men are grossly incompetent. They join the club of other clueless leaders, such as those who waltzed into the suicidal slaughter of World War One, waded into the quagmire of Vietnam or who orchestrated the series of recent military debacles in Iraq, Libya, Syria and Ukraine. They are endowed with the presumptive power vested in the Executive Branch to bypass Congress, to provide weapons to Israel and carry out military strikes in Yemen and Iraq. This inner circle of true believers dismiss the more nuanced and informed counsels in the State Department and the intelligence communities, who view the refusal of the Biden administration to pressure Israel to halt the ongoing genocide as ill-advised and dangerous. 

Biden has always been an ardent militarist — he was calling for war with Iraq five years before the U.S. invaded. He built his political career by catering to the distaste of the white middle class for the popular movements, including the anti-war and civil rights movements, that convulsed the country in the 1960s and 1970s. He is a Republican masquerading as a Democrat. He joined Southern segregationists to oppose bringing Black students into Whites-only schools. He opposed federal funding for abortions and supported a constitutional amendment allowing states to restrict abortions. He attacked President George H. W. Bush in 1989 for being too soft in the “war on drugs.” He was one of the architects of the 1994 crime bill and a raft of other draconian laws that more than doubled the U.S. prison population, militarized the police and pushed through drug laws that saw people incarcerated for life without parole. He supported the North American Free Trade Agreement, the greatest betrayal of the working class since the 1947 Taft-Hartley Act. He has always been a strident defender of Israel, bragging that he did more fundraisers for the American Israel Public Affairs Committee (AIPAC) than any other Senator. 

“As many of you heard me say before, were there no Israel, America would have to invent one.  We’d have to invent one because… you protect our interests like we protect yours,” Biden said in 2015, to an audience that included the Israeli ambassador, at the 67th Annual Israeli Independence Day Celebration in Washington D.C. During the same speech he said, “The truth of the matter is we need you.  The world needs you. Imagine what it would say about humanity and the future of the 21st century if Israel were not sustained, vibrant and free.”

The year before Biden gave a gushing eulogy for Ariel Sharon, the former Israeli prime minister and general who was implicated in massacres of Palestinians, Lebanese and others in Palestine, Jordan and Lebanon — as well as Egyptian prisoners of war — going back to the 1950s. He described Sharon as “part of one of the most remarkable founding generations in the history not of this nation, but of any nation.”

While repudiating Donald Trump and his administration, Biden has not reversed Trump’s abrogation of the Iran nuclear deal negotiated by Barack Obama, or Trump’s sanctions against Iran. He has embraced Trump’s close ties with Saudi Arabia, including the rehabilitation of Crown Prince and Prime Minister Mohammed bin Salman, following the assassination of the Saudi journalist Jamal Khashoggi in 2017 in the consulate of Saudi Arabia in Istanbul. He has not intervened to curb Israeli attacks on Palestinians and settlement expansion in the West Bank. He did not reverse Trump’s moving of the U.S. Embassy to Jerusalem, although the embassy includes land Israel illegally colonized after invading the West Bank and Gaza in 1967. 

As a seven-term senator of Delaware, Biden received more financial support from pro-Israel donors than any other senator, since 1990. Biden retains this record despite the fact that his senatorial career ended in 2009, when he became Obama’s vice president. Biden explains his commitment to Israel as “personal” and “political.” 

He has parroted back Israeli propaganda — including fabrications about beheaded babies and widespread rape of Israeli women by Hamas fighters — and asked Congress to provide $14 billion in additional aid to Israel since the Oct. 7 attack. He has twice bypassed Congress to supply Israel with thousands of bombs and munitions, including at least 100 2,000-pound bombs, used in the scorched earth campaign in Gaza. 

Israel has killed or seriously wounded close to 90,000 Palestinians in Gaza, almost one in every 20 inhabitants. It has destroyed or damaged over 60 percent of the housing. The “safe areas,” to which some 2 million Gazans were instructed to flee in southern Gaza, have been bombed, with thousands of casualties. Palestinians in Gaza now make up 80 percent of all the people facing famine or catastrophic hunger worldwide, according to the U.N. Every person in Gaza is hungry. A quarter of the population are starving and struggling to find food and drinkable water. Famine is imminent. The 335,000 children under the age of five are at high risk of malnutrition. Some 50,000 pregnant women lack healthcare and adequate nutrition.

And it could all end if the U.S. chose to intervene.

“All of our missiles, the ammunition, the precision-guided bombs, all the airplanes and bombs, it’s all from the U.S.,” retired Israeli Major General Yitzhak Brick told the Jewish News Syndicate. “The minute they turn off the tap, you can’t keep fighting. You have no capability… Everyone understands that we can’t fight this war without the United States. Period.” 

Blinken was Biden’s principal foreign policy adviser when Biden was the ranking Democrat on the Foreign Relations Committee. He, along with Biden, lobbied for the invasion of Iraq. When he was Obama’s deputy national security advisor, he advocated the 2011 overthrow of Muammar Gaddafi in Libya. He opposed withdrawing U.S. forces from Syria. He worked on the disastrous Biden Plan to partition Iraq along ethnic lines.

“Within the Obama White House, Blinken played an influential role in the imposition of sanctions against Russia over the 2014 invasion of Crimea and eastern Ukraine, and subsequently led ultimately unsuccessful calls for the U.S. to arm Ukraine,” according to the Atlantic Council, NATO’s unofficial think tank. 

Image: US Secretary of State Antony Blinken meets with Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu in Tel Aviv, Oct. 12, 2023. – Secretary Antony Blinken on X

When Blinken landed in Israel following the attacks by Hamas and other resistance groups on Oct. 7, he announced at a press conference with Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu:

“I come before you not only as the United States Secretary of State, but also as a Jew.”

He attempted, on Israel’s behalf, to lobby Arab leaders to accept the 2.3 million Palestinian refugees Israel intends to ethnically cleanse from Gaza, a request that evoked outrage among Arab leaders.

Sullivan, Biden’s national security advisor, and McGurk, are consummate opportunists, Machiavellian bureaucrats who cater to the reigning centers of power, including the Israel lobby.  

Sullivan was the chief architect of Hillary Clinton’s Asia pivot. He backed the corporate and investor rights Trans-Pacific Partnership Agreement, which was sold as helping the U.S. contain China. Trump ultimately killed the trade agreement in the face of mass opposition from the U.S. public. His focus is thwarting a rising China, including through the expansion of the U.S. military. 

While not focused on the Middle East, Sullivan is a foreign policy hawk who has a knee jerk embrace of force to shape the world to U.S. demands. He embraces military Keynesianism, arguing that massive government spending on the weapons industry benefits the domestic economy.

In a 7,000-word essay for Foreign Affairs magazine published five days before the Oct. 7 attacks, which left some 1,200 Israelis dead, Sullivan exposed his lack of understanding of the dynamics of the Middle East.

Screenshot from The New York Times

“Although the Middle East remains beset with perennial challenges,” he writes in the original version of the essay, “the region is quieter than it has been for decades,” adding that in the face of “serious” frictions, “we have de-escalated crises in Gaza.”

Sullivan ignores Palestinian aspirations and Washington’s rhetorical backing for a two-state solution in the article, hastily rewritten in the online version after the Oct. 7 attacks. He writes in his original piece:

At a meeting in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia, last year, the president set forth his policy for the Middle East in an address to the leaders of members of the Gulf Cooperation Council, Egypt, Iraq, and Jordan. His approach returns discipline to US policy. It emphasizes deterring aggression, de-escalating conflicts, and integrating the region through joint infrastructure projects and new partnerships, including between Israel and its Arab neighbors.

McGurk, the deputy assistant to President Biden and the coordinator for the Middle East and North Africa at the White House National Security Council, was a chief architect of Bush’s “surge” in Iraq, which accelerated the bloodletting. He worked as a legal advisor to the Coalition Provisional Authority and the U.S. ambassador in Baghdad. He then became Trump’s anti-ISIS czar.

He does not speak Arabic — none of the four men does — and came to Iraq with no knowledge of its history, peoples or culture. Nevertheless, he helped draft Iraq’s interim constitution and oversaw the legal transition from the Coalition Provisional Authority to an Interim Iraqi Government led by Prime Minister Ayad Allawi. McGurk was an early backer of Nouri al-Maliki, who was Iraq’s prime minister between 2006 and 2014. Al-Maliki built a Shi’ite-controlled sectarian state that deeply alienated Sunni Arabs and Kurds. In 2005, McGurk transferred to the National Security Council (NSC), where he served as director for Iraq, and later as special assistant to the president and senior director for Iraq and Afghanistan. He served on the NSC staff from 2005 to 2009. In 2015, he was appointed as Obama’s Special Presidential Envoy for the Global Coalition to Counter ISIL. He was retained by Trump until his resignation in Dec. 2018. 

An article in April 2021 titled “Brett McGurk: A Hero of Our Times,” in New Lines Magazine by former BBC foreign correspondent Paul Wood, paints a scathing portrait of McGurk. Wood writes:

A senior Western diplomat who served in Baghdad told me that McGurk had been an absolute disaster for Iraq. “He is a consummate operator in Washington, but I saw no sign that he was interested in Iraqis or Iraq as a place full of real people. It was simply a bureaucratic and political challenge for him.” One critic who was in Baghdad with McGurk called him Machiavelli reincarnated. “It’s intellect plus ambition plus the utter ruthlessness to rise no matter the cost.”

[….]

A U.S. diplomat who was in the embassy when McGurk arrived found his steady advance astonishing. “Brett only meets people who speak English. … There are like four people in the government who speak English. And somehow he’s now the person who should decide the fate of Iraq? How did this happen?”

Even those who didn’t like McGurk had to admit that he had a formidable intellect — and was a hard worker. He was also a gifted writer, no surprise as he had clerked for Supreme Court Chief Justice William Rehnquist. His rise mirrored that of an Iraqi politician named Nouri al-Maliki, one careerist helping the other. That is McGurk’s tragedy — and Iraq’s.

[….]

McGurk’s critics say his lack of Arabic meant he missed the vicious, sectarian undertones of what al-Maliki was saying in meetings right from the start. Translators censored or failed to keep up. Like many Americans in Iraq, McGurk was deaf to what was happening around him.

Al-Maliki was the consequence of two mistakes by the U.S. How much McGurk had to do with them remains in dispute. The first mistake was the “80 Percent Solution” for ruling Iraq. The Sunni Arabs were mounting a bloody insurgency, but they were just 20% of the population. The theory was that you could run Iraq with the Kurds and the Shiites. The second error was to identify the Shiites with hardline, religious parties backed by Iran. Al-Maliki, a member of the religious Da’wa Party, was the beneficiary of this.

In a piece in HuffPost in May 2022 by Akbar Shahid Ahmed, titled “Biden’s Top Middle East Advisor ‘Torched the House and Showed Up With a Firehose,’” McGurk is described by a colleague, who asked not to be named, as “the most talented bureaucrat they’ve ever seen, with the worst foreign policy judgment they’ve ever seen.”

McGurk, like others in the Biden administration, is bizarrely focused on what comes after Israel’s genocidal campaign, rather than trying to halt it. McGurk proposed denying humanitarian aid and refusing to implement a pause in the fighting in Gaza until all the Israeli hostages were freed. Biden and his three closest policy advisors have called for the Palestinian Authority —  an Israeli puppet regime that is reviled by most Palestinians — to take control of Gaza once Israel finishes leveling it. They have called on Israel — since Oct. 7 — to take steps towards a two-state solution, a plan rejected in an humiliating public rebuke to the the Biden White House by Netanyahu. 

The Biden White House spends more time talking to the Israelis and Saudis, who are being lobbied to normalize relations with Israel and help rebuild Gaza, than the Palestinians, who are at best, an afterthought. It believes the key to ending Palestinian resistance is found in Riyadh, summed up in a top-secret document peddled by McGurk called the “Jerusalem-Jeddah Pact,” the HuffPost reported. It is unable or unwilling to curb Israel’s bloodlust, which included missile strikes in a residential neighborhood in Damascus, Syria, on Saturday that killed five military advisors from Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps, and a drone attack in South Lebanon on Sunday, which killed two senior members of Hezbollah. These Israeli provocations will not go unanswered, evidenced by the ballistic missiles and rockets launched on Sunday by militants in western Iraq that targeted U.S. personnel stationed at the al-Assad Airbase.

The Alice-in-Wonderland idea that once the slaughter in Gaza ends a diplomatic pact between Israel and Saudi Arabia will be the key to regional stability is stupefying. Israel’s genocide, and Washington’s complicity, is shredding U.S. credibility and influence, especially in the Global South and the Muslim world. It ensures another generation of enraged Palestinians — whose families have been obliterated and whose homes have been destroyed — seeking vengeance.  

The policies embraced by the Biden administration not only blithely ignore the realities in the Arab world, but the realities of an extremist Israeli state that, with Congress bought and paid for by the Israel lobby, couldn’t care less what the Biden White House dreams up. Israel has no intention of creating a viable Palestinian state. Its goal is the ethnic cleansing of the 2.3 million Palestinians from Gaza and the annexation of Gaza by Israel. And when Israel is done with Gaza, it will turn on the West Bank, where Israeli raids now occur on an almost nightly basis and where thousands have been arrested and detained without charge since Oct. 7. 

Those running the show in the Biden White House are chasing after rainbows. The march of folly led by these four blind mice perpetuates the cataclysmic suffering of the Palestinians, stokes a regional war and presages another tragic and self-defeating chapter in the two decades of U.S. military fiascos in the Middle East.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image: Blood Brothers – by Mr. Fish via Chris Hedges

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The week-long melodrama has ended on a happy note, marking a turning point in Pakistan–Iran relations. On Friday, Islamabad extended an olive branch to Tehran by indicating its willingness to collaborate with them on “all issues.” Although Iran’s longstanding security concerns were not explicitly mentioned, credible sources reveal a significant development.

Insiders inform The Cradle that Pakistan’s powerful military has already approved a “combined border surveillance mechanism” to track and engage Jaish al-Adl’s anti-Iran operations from Pakistani soil. 

In another proactive move from Islamabad, Pakistan’s National Security Committee, a civil-military consultative panel, has resolved to address the mutual security concerns of Islamabad and Tehran by re-opening the diplomatic route and bolstering border surveillance and communication systems.

IRGC’s missile attacks on Iraqi Kurdistan, Syria and Pakistan

‘Army of Justice’ 

Cyril Almeida, a seasoned Pakistani journalist and former editor of the Dawn, sarcastically remarked on X that “never have two countries bombed each other and expressed such warmth for each other within 48 hrs … almost got to wonder …”

Iran’s decision to launch a cross-border operation in Pakistan’s restive Balochistan region, targeting the hideouts of Jaish al-Adl militants, was not impulsive. Iran had exhausted diplomatic avenues to convey the imminent threat posed by the group, formerly known as Jundullah, to Pakistan, alleging support from the US and Israel

Tehran views the Sunni, Baluch organization with secure sanctuaries in Balochistan, near the Iran–Pakistan border, as a terrorist group, a designation Washington, ironically, also recognizes.

With a combined force of 1,250,000 active-duty personnel and 900,000 reserved forces, as well as untold missile and nuclear arsenals, Iran and Pakistan would present a formidable military force in West Asia if they collaborated more closely; hence the use of intermediaries like Jaish al-Adl by hostile states to keep the two brotherly nations at odds. 

Balochistan on the Brink 

The ongoing standoff with Jaish al-Adl has deep-rooted history. The group has claimed responsibility for multiple attacks against Iranian troops since its first major assault in August 2012. Between 2012 and December 2013, 150 Iranian soldiers were killed in terrorist attacks, with thousands more casualties from the unchecked violence of the terror group in the following decade.

In December, Iran’s tolerance reached its limit when an assault on a police station in the Iranian town of Rask, located in the south-eastern border region of Sistan-Baluchestan, resulted in the death of 11 Iranian security officers. This was followed by another attack on 10 January near the town, close to the village of Bidlad Jangal, which left at least one police officer dead. 

In response, Iran launched a missile strike on Pakistan on 16 January, in which Islamabad claims two children were killed and three others injured. While Pakistan charged Iran with a general violation of its airspace, Iranian state media claimed the missiles specifically targeted two sites utilized by the militant separatist group. 

The following day, Islamabad officially issued a strong condemnation of the incident and subsequently recalled its ambassador from Tehran. 

In retaliation, Pakistan conducted air attacks on alleged terrorist hideouts in Iran, which it claims led to the deaths of at least nine Baloch separatists. 

US-Israel Influence on Pakistan-Iran Dynamics

According to Chris Blackburn, a political analyst specializing in counterterrorism and security issues, Pakistan and Iran previously had a mutual interest in fighting militant groups in the region, particularly in Afghanistan. 

But in February 2019, Blackburn tells The Cradle, a suicide car bombing by Jaish al-Adl resulted in the death of 27 Iranian Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) soldiers, which created a trust deficit between the two countries. 

In a stunning interview with Pakistan’s GTV News, former Pakistan foreign secretary, UN envoy, and ambassador to Iran, Shamshad Ahmad, declared that Iran was fully justified in striking Jaish al-Adl inside Pakistani territory. He believes that these organizations serve US and Israeli interests, and have been ignored by Islamabad for too long.

“I have been addressing this issue since I first started dealing with it,” he stated, noting that Iran had made numerous attempts to collaborate with Pakistan to address the urgent security threat. However, the Pakistani army and intelligence services persistently offered refuge to separatist groups located in Iran who were responsible for the extensive slaughter of Iranian border forces.

Ahmad alleges that the US and Israel were pressuring the Pakistani army to initiate military offensives against Iran, and that this action is aligned with their strategies to divert attention away from other geopolitical issues: 

“Iran is a sovereign nation and possibly the sole sovereign nation in the region that has expelled the US from its territory. The purpose of these clashes among the neighboring nations is to exert pressure on Iran. The Iranian airstrike served as a cautionary message to Pakistan, urging them to avoid being manipulated by the US and Israel.” 

China’s Role in Mediation 

In contrast, Daud Khattak, managing editor for Radio Free Europe’s Pashto language Mashaal Radio, tells The Cradle that Iran and Pakistan harbor mutual distrust regarding extremist groups and are already engaged in border operations, but often in a way that undermines relations. 

For example, Iran has deployed artillery along the border with Pakistan, while the arrest of Indian national Kulbhushan Yadav in Balochistan was based on Pakistan’s accusation that he was conducting operations from the border territories of Iran. “This intelligence game is played as follows. However, launching missiles within Pakistani borders in this manner constituted a direct provocation towards Pakistan,” Khattak explains.

Amid the hostilities last weekend, China offered to facilitate dialogue between Iran and Pakistan, considering its considerable economic and geopolitical interests in both countries. Khattak emphasizes Beijing’s concern over South Asian instability and its impact on the Belt & Road Initiative (BRI):

“China was active from day one but Chinese diplomacy could not stop Pakistan from retaliating because a predominantly Sunni Pakistan was targeted by Shia Iran and the Pakistani military had to prove to the people of Pakistan that they are not weak. Additionally, Islamabad was under ‘immense pressure’ to return a stern reply and, importantly, Pakistan wanted to show the neighbors, especially the Taliban, not to mess with Pakistan.” 

Was the Standoff Pre-approved?

What is noteworthy is that neither Iran nor Pakistan activated their air defense systems to intercept the rockets that struck their territory. Equally astonishing is the recent revelation that Iranian missiles targeted Iranian individuals, while Pakistani missiles exclusively targeted Pakistani Balochis, with no damage inflicted upon civilian and military facilities in either country. 

Moreover, the stalemate was resolved through a mutual gesture of goodwill between the two neighbors within 48 hours, without the need for any external mediation. These aspects fuel suspicions that the events were premeditated. 

Dr. Mohammad Marandi, a renowned political analyst and professor at Tehran University, as well as advisor to Iranian nuclear talks, says that Jaish al-Adl has perpetrated several massacres of innocent Iranian citizens, and that a response was long overdue: 

“Due to the poor governance of Pakistan in the regions near the Iranian border, Iran perceived that it had no alternative but to launch an attack on this particular group.”

Marandi reveals that, although Pakistan officially denounced the attacks, there exists a deeper level of understanding on the matter between the Iranian and Pakistani governments, as the two states have exceptionally strong relations and engage in ongoing communication.

Likewise, The Cradle columnist and West Asian geopolitical analyst Sharmine Narwani stated on X:

“This week’s mutual airstrikes gave Tehran and Islamabad the justification to eliminate these armed extremist groups – for each other – without having to deal with the fallout from the terrorists’ foreign funders and their local supporters.”

“Both states targeted Baluch separatist militant groups that have long plagued the Iran-Pakistan border – in the case of Iran, killing thousands of border security guards over the years – which are funded and armed by foreign interests that want the strife to continue,” she adds.

Islamabad and Tehran have demonstrated that adept diplomacy, rather than impulsive brute force, can effectively address local disputes in the region. This is especially the case when dealing with separatist groups susceptible to external manipulation and weaponization. 

Both states have wisely chosen not to succumb to provocations, opting instead to prioritize mutual security over hostility. Ultimately, the recognition of shared interests serves the best interests of both Islamabad and Tehran.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image is from The Cradle

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

In the video above, Del Bigtree with The Highwire interviews Barbara Loe Fisher, cofounder and president of the National Vaccine Information Center (NVIC), about the National Childhood Vaccine Injury Act of 1986 (NCVIA), which she pioneered. Unfortunately, the law has not lived up to its initial purpose, and has instead allowed the drug industry to become the most influential industry on earth.

In this interview, Fisher tells the untold, behind-the-scenes story of how this law came into being, how it has been bastardized, and “the betrayal that paved the way for vaccine manufacturers to secure immunity from liability for their products, opening the door for the complete capture of the agencies charged with regulating the vaccine industry and protecting the public trust.”1

Who’s Liable for Vaccine Injuries?

As I’ve reported on numerous occasions over the past four years, the COVID-19 mRNA shots are the most dangerous “vaccines” ever rolled out. Who’s paying the medical expenses incurred by the hundreds of thousands of Americans injured by these shots?2

Common sense might tell you it ought to be the vaccine manufacturer, but you’d be wrong. As noted by Ken Paxton, attorney general of Texas, they have “special protection through the federal government.”

This liability protection was granted because the insurance industry argued they were too dangerous to insure, and the drug companies threatened to stop making vaccines altogether unless they were protected from lawsuits.

So, the truth is, no one can be held liable for vaccine injuries in a U.S. court of law — not the manufacturer, not the distributors or the medical providers, and not the government, even when it mandates the shots. And that’s precisely the predicament that the NCVIA was supposed to prevent.

The NCVIA, passed into law in 1986, established a federal “no-fault” system to compensate victims injured by mandated childhood vaccines. In her 1985 book, “DPT: A Shot in the Dark,” coauthored with medical historian Harris Coulter, Ph.D., Fisher details the struggle to get the NCVIA passed.

Her son was 2.5 years old when he had a bad reaction to his third DPT vaccine, ultimately resulting in his being diagnosed with mild brain damage, multiple learning disabilities, ADD, dyslexia, fine motor skill delay and severe auditory processing deficit. In the interview, she details what his initial reactions looked like, how they started and how they progressed.

His injury is what drove her to become an advocate for vaccine injured children, and to push for legal protections. As explained by Fisher, the bill was originally intended to not only help children damaged by vaccines with their lifelong medical expenses, but also to “institute safety reforms in the mass vaccination system” to “prevent future vaccine damage.”

“When parents don’t have the right to say no to vaccines that are highly reactive, we have no way of putting economic pressure on the system to bring in a safer product,” she says.

“Parents ought to have the option to become fully informed about the vaccine and the disease, and then make a choice, including choosing whether or not their child will have the disease and have permanent immunity versus temporary immunity.

Parents have got to take responsibility for making these decisions in conjunction with their doctor … Obviously, the system has failed us and we have to take responsibility, become educated, and then in the end, we have to make that decision, and live with that decision. I believe that a society that has mandated a vaccine has the responsibility to provide for these children who have given their lives.”

How the NCVIA Came to be

Some politicians are now proposing getting rid of the NCVIA altogether, but this would be a serious mistake, Fisher says. But why? It’s clearly not working, so why not get rid of it, and with it the legal protections enjoyed by the vaccine manufacturers? Fisher explains:

“There’s a lot of myth that has grown up around that Act and what it really was, what it was intended to be; what happened. So I welcome the opportunity to set the record straight.”

Fisher tells the story of how she ended up meeting two other parents — Kathi Williams and Jeff Schwartz — whose children were severely damaged by the DPT vaccine and how they joined forces to lobby for the creation of a bill that would protect children from the horrors they’d experienced first-hand.

Williams was in charge of organization, Schwartz, an environmental law attorney, negotiated with representatives on the Hill, and Fisher was a medical writer. The trio first met in April 1982, and within weeks, they agreed that there needed to be a congressional investigation, as there was no oversight on vaccine safety whatsoever.

“The first thing we wanted [was] a safer pertussis vaccine … a purified pertussis vaccine, because I already had found out from the literature that Japan had been using a purified acellular pertussis vaccine for a couple of years … and it was far less reactive than the whole cell pertussis vaccine.

We wanted information given to parents by doctors that would tell them how to recognize a vaccine reaction. We wanted the doctors to have to write down, in the child’s medical record, the manufacturer’s name, lot number, any reactions that occurred … We wanted research done to look into creating safer vaccines and finding out why some kids are vulnerable to vaccine reactions.”

Vaccine Makers Demand Liability Protections in Wake of Lawsuits

Democrat congressman Dan Mica, whose nephews had reacted to the DPT shot and were severely brain injured, and Republican Sen. Paula Hawkins, known for her interest in child health, held the congressional hearings. In all, there were more than a dozen hearings during the 4.5 years that the bill was being negotiated, and Fisher, Williams and Schwartz testified at most of them.

The 1982 documentary “DPT: Vaccine Roulette” had sent shockwaves through the country, awakening parents to the idea that childhood vaccines may not be safe. The congressional hearings added fuel to the fire, and parents were lining up to sue the makers of DPT vaccines.

The vaccine makers approached Congress saying they were being ruined by all these lawsuits and threatened to stop making childhood vaccines for sale in the U.S. unless they were granted liability protections.

“Here’s how it happened,” Fisher says. “The vaccine stakeholders, that would be medical trade, that would be [American] Academy of Pediatrics and the vaccine manufacturers. At that point, there were four vaccine manufacturers in this country. Wyeth, Lederle, and Connaught were producing DPT vaccine. Lederle was a sole source for oral polio vaccine. Merck was a sole source of MMR vaccine. [There were] seven vaccines.

Just so people know, Lederle is now part of Pfizer. Connaught is now part of Sanofi, Wyeth is now part of Pfizer, and of course we have Merck. Merck was on the sidelines on this. Nobody was looking at them, but we had polio vaccine lawsuits. There were some very important polio vaccine lawsuits, and of course DPT.

So what do the manufacturers do? They say ‘We’re going to leave the country without any vaccine.’ And Congress said, ‘We’ve got to protect the vaccine supply in this country.’

And they said to Jeff [Schwartz], ‘You can come to the table and fight for what you think the parents and the children should get, or you can not come to the table, but we’re going to pass this legislation to protect the vaccine supply, and we’re going to do it with or without you.’

We had to fight for what we thought the children and the parents should get, and we tried our best, coming up against the government, the administration. This is 1982. From the very beginning … they were going to protect the vaccine supply … So we said we’ll come to the table, but there is three things.

We will never agree to complete liability protection for doctors or for manufacturers. No. 2, if you’re going to protect the vaccine supply, you have to protect the children by safety provisions … Equal emphasis. And third … if there’s going to be a federal compensation program, it has to be an alternative to a lawsuit.

In other words, parents can choose to either go to court or they can choose to get compensation … [and] if there’s a compensation program, it has to be fair, expedited, less traumatic, less expensive, more predictable than a court.

And remember, back then, doctors weren’t keeping records. They were giving kids shots, they weren’t even saying what manufacturer it was. If you couldn’t prove what manufacturer it was, you couldn’t sue them. Same with doctors. They were destroying medical records and you could never prove that the vaccine was given that day, and the kid had those reactions. Records were disappearing all over the place.

They weren’t reporting reactions. There was two ways to report. Public health clinics reported to the CDC, private doctors reported to the FDA. Manufacturers are supposed to report to the FDA. So we said ‘You’ve got to centralize the reporting system. You’ve got to make it open and transparent so parents can report too.

You’ve got to have a safety part of this law, and the compensation has to work properly, because if the compensation system doesn’t work properly, you put no pressure on the companies. Keep the liability for the companies because then it forces them to make a better [product].’”

Blaming the Victims

By 1984, after two years of negotiations, the original bill, S. 2117, was introduced. It was written by Schwartz and the AAP. It contained all the things demanded by the NVIC and did not provide liability protection for the companies or the doctors.

All the safety provisions were in there, including the requirement for true informed consent in the form of a 15-page parent booklet that described the disease and possible complications thereof, as well as the potential complications for each vaccine. Fisher participated in the writing of that original parent information booklet. After the bill was passed, that booklet was boiled down to a single page.

“So, we’re in ’82, ’83, ’84. What did the companies start doing? Wyeth says, ‘We’re dropping out. We’re not going to make any more pertussis vaccine.’ Causes a vaccine shortage. They go to Congress. ‘You need to protect us from liability.’

It was brought out in hearings on Capitol Hill that all three manufacturers are manufacturing this vaccine [but] Connaught is stockpiling it. Wyeth is selling it to Lederle, and Lederle is distributing it for Wyeth. Connaught made it very clear that they will not distribute what they have until the Congress passes legislation absolving them of all financial liability for vaccine damage.

Then we got whooping cough outbreaks, [which were blamed on] parents complaining about this vaccine … They start to raise their prices. At one point it was like a 10,000% price increase on pertussis vaccine. They did everything to put pressure [on Congress], the media carried the stories and everybody blamed us.

What happened was that we broke with the AAP over this issue … because they put out a press release saying that eight states had whooping cough epidemics. This is in ’85. And it was all because of this false information being put out about pertussis vaccine risks …

I did an investigation. I contacted the health departments of the states and asked them for their cases, which cases were lab confirmed, which were fluorescent antibody confirmed, which were epidemiologically linked, and I did a full report. And I realized that over half of the people were vaccinated; that we had a problem with the effectiveness of this vaccine, not just the safety of the vaccine.

Well, they were furious. And the other thing was, ‘DPT: A Shot in the Dark’ was published in December 1984, and we had a big press conference on Capitol Hill in February 1985 … which was another shot across the bow.

I mean, it was the first time anyone had really documented and made the argument that the mandatory vaccination system was broken and that this vaccine was very dangerous and had been allowed to not be improved for all these years.”

The Betrayal

So, by the mid-1980s, “DPT: A Shot in the Dark” was causing public outrage, vaccine manufacturers were fighting lawsuits brought by the vaccine injured, the price of DPT vaccines were skyrocketing, there were vaccine shortages, whooping cough epidemics were flourishing, and bills were being rewritten.

When the break with the AAP happened in 1985, congressman Henry Waxman, who had initially fought for the rights of parents and railed against government guaranteeing profits to the drug industry, suddenly put forth a bill that granted vaccine makers immunity against lawsuits provided they complied with FDA standards, eliminated most of the original safety provisions, and restricted compensation.

“The drug manufacturers loved it. We opposed it. Jeff said it does more to protect the drug company bottom line than it does to protect health of children.

We also did an investigation into what the drug companies were telling the Securities and Exchange Commission about their liability problems versus what they were telling Congress and the public and the media, and we found that they were telling the Securities and Exchange Commission that they had no problems with these lawsuits, that it wasn’t materially affecting them.

So they were crying liability all the way to the bank, is what they were doing. And so we continued to come up against this opposition on this bill in the various incarnations, by the administration, the drug companies, and now the AAP was not playing well in the sandbox. So when Waxman did this and we blasted him, all of a sudden everybody said, wait a minute, this is all going south, we’ve got to do something.

And so they went back [and] created legislation that had a lot of the stuff that we wanted. The clock was ticking, and a bill was put together that we were able to support.

We had to give up some things, but we never agreed to full liability protection for the doctors or for the manufacturers. But we could not get past the administration. The administration refused. And the person who held it up the longest was attorney general Ed Meese from Justice.

He didn’t want any lawsuits. The whole thing was about no lawsuits. They didn’t want anybody to be able to sue manufacturers for vaccine injuries and deaths.

The argument that was made by the manufacturers from the very beginning was, ‘The FDA licenses the vaccine as safe and effective. The CDC recommends the vaccine for universal use by all children. The states mandate the vaccine for school entry. We should not be liable for vaccine injuries and deaths.’ And they never gave that up. And they never have.”

The NCVIA Was Gutted as Soon as It Was Passed

When the 1986 Act was originally passed, vaccine makers were still on the hook for design defects and doctors could still be sued for medical malpractice if they didn’t fulfill the requirements of the law, which included providing parents with informed consent, recordkeeping and reporting side effects to the Vaccine Adverse Event Reporting System (VAERS), jointly run by the FDA and CDC.

As noted by Fisher, the implementation of VAERS was “a remarkable accomplishment.” Not just doctors and manufacturers could file reports but also parents. The public could also view the injury reports.

Many do not realize this, but health care providers who administer vaccines are REQUIRED by the NCVIA to report adverse events following vaccination. The problem is there’s no punishment for noncompliance with the safety provisions. This is why vaccine side effects are underreported by anywhere from 90%3 to 99%.4,5

The NCVIA also included an alternative administrative compensation program to provide parents with rapid compensation without having to go through the court system.

“That compensation system, if it worked the way it was designed to work, would do two things,” Fisher says. “It would protect the vaccine supply because people would go for federal compensation. They wouldn’t sue the manufacturers, they’d go for the sure thing. I thought it was an intelligent and rational compromise …

The thing that breaks my heart [and] makes me so upset is that after the law was passed, they immediately gutted it. Congress, with amendments, HHS with rulemaking … justice is their legal arm … gutted the safety provisions, they gutted the compensation provisions.

We had created a table of compensable events for the seven vaccines … the symptoms of a vaccine reaction and the injury that could occur within certain time periods. If you fit that table, you could have automatic compensation. It was something to help facilitate compensation.

What’s one of the first things they did? They gutted the table of compensable events. They took residual seizure disorder off as a means to automatic compensation … They just did what they wanted to. Who was going to tell them no?

And what’s the most severe on that table? Encephalopathy. They rewrote the definition of encephalopathy with a definition that you cannot find in the medical literature. A definition that’s so strict that my son, even though he was out for a total of 18 hours … wouldn’t qualify for because he was not unconscious for 24 hours.

They rewrote the definition of the most serious adverse event to deny those children compensation. So when I look back over my documents and the history, it’s so clear to me. They wanted to protect the companies from liability.

It was a huge betrayal of the trust that we put in government, that we put in the people that we came to the table with, even though we knew we were at odds with each other. I at least thought that Congress would provide oversight on that law along the way.

I testified in several hearings in Congress after the law was passed, in 1999, most notably, on hepatitis B vaccine, when they in ’91 made that a newborn recommendation and for all teenagers.

The National Vaccine Information Center has received hundreds of reports of injuries and deaths following hepatitis B vaccination. There’s a clear pattern to hepatitis B vaccine reaction symptoms. There are families with two or three members who have become disabled after hepatitis B shots. Tragically, for newborns and babies under two months of age, a hepatitis B vaccine reaction can end in death …

So when I look back, I say, who do you trust? Who can you trust? You only really can trust your own ability to intellectually look at information, try to find the information, the most that you can, and to be able to have the legal ability to make a choice without being sanctioned for the choice that you make.

There is no justice in the compensation program. It’s a cruel joke. It’s a poor imitation of a court trial, in Washington, DC, in the US Court of Federal Claims. The better the case, the longer it takes.”

Manufacturers Got Their Way

As mentioned, when the 1986 Act was originally passed, vaccine makers were still on the hook for design defects, and they were none too happy about it. So, it didn’t take long before that provision was erased as well.

As explained by Fisher, they argued that without a government standards defense, “a devastating number of claims could be brought against U.S. manufacturers on the grounds that there are other safer, better or more technologically advanced DPT vaccines available.”

In short, vaccine manufacturers didn’t even want competition to prevail. They didn’t want to have to compete with companies that could make a better, potentially safer, product. So not just one but two market forces were removed: liability and competition.

In 2011, in the case of Bruesewitz versus Wyeth (a design defect case), the Supreme Court argued that Congress intended to give companies design defect protection, yet the history of the Act clearly shows that was never the case. “The history of the law shows that is not true. That was a tragic miscarriage of justice,” Fisher says.

Why the Cover-Up?

In a relatively short amount of time, the 1986 Act was stripped of its safeguards through a slew of amendments. Design defect liability was removed. Medical malpractice was removed. Compensations were lowered. Why? Because every incidence of liability and financial award is an admission that vaccines can cause harm.

“That’s been the biggest problem,” Fisher says. “Nobody wants to acknowledge the extent of the problem with vaccine injury and death. So it’s minimize, cover up, deny.

Why should the companies get protection for failure to make a safer vaccine? Why should negligent doctors be protected from medical malpractice lawsuits? Why is nobody who makes profit from, develops, regulates, makes policy for, and mandates vaccines, why is nobody accountable in a court of law in front of a jury of our peers? There’s no other product that has that kind of protection.”

Bigtree comments:

“People are like, ‘What is the motive, why would they be covering this up?’ And I say, it’s simple. You have a product that everybody has to take in order for it to work. It’s not like a drug. It doesn’t just handle the person that’s sick. Everyone else in the world has to take it. So the confidence in the product has to be 100%. It has to be 100% because we want 100% of everybody take it …”

Dr. Bernadine Healy, former director of the National Institute of Health, also basically admitted that fear of creating “vaccine hesitancy” is placing vulnerable children and adults in harm’s way even though we could protect them:6

“This is the time when we do have the opportunity to understand whether or not there are susceptible children, perhaps genetically, perhaps they have a metabolic issue, mitochondrial disorder, immunological issue, that makes them more susceptible to vaccines, plural, or to one particular vaccine, or to a component of vaccine, like mercury.

The fact that there is concern that you don’t want to know that susceptible group is a real disappointment to me. If you know that’s susceptible group, you can save those children. The reason why they didn’t want to look for those susceptibility groups was because they’re afraid that if they found them, however big or small they were, that that would scare the public away.”

Without Informed Consent, You Have No Freedom

The interview, which is over two hours long, covers more details than what I’ve included here, so I encourage you to listen to it in its entirety. In closing, as stressed by Fisher and Bigtree, the right to physical autonomy, the right to make medical decisions for ourselves, underpins all human freedom.

“The choices that we make in this life about risks that concern our physical body or the bodies of our children are among the most important choices that we make, because our physical body houses our mind and our soul. And if we can’t make choices about our physical body, protection of bodily integrity, autonomy, we’re not free in any sense of the word,” Fisher says.

“I always quote Albert Einstein who, in the 30s, risked arrest to say something like ‘Never do anything against conscience, even if the state demands it.’

And the quote that I’m probably known for most is, ‘If the state can tag, track down and force individuals to be injected with biologicals of known and unknown toxicity today, then there will be no limit on which individual freedoms the state can take away in the name of the greater good tomorrow.’”

Bigtree agrees, saying:

“If you do not control your body and the government can inject you, just like the farmer injects his cows and his pigs, then you are a farm animal … you’re not a free person. And that’s why I will fight this till the day I die. This is the most important issue, I think, [for] humanity.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image is from Children’s Health Defense

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The UN’s International Court of Justice (ICJ) has now concluded its two-day public hearing of South Africa’s legal case that charges Zionist Israel’s leaders, and their brutal-savage-racist settler-colonist project, with genocidal intent, that continues to be waged against innocent Palestinian people.

The collective pain of 75 years of unmentionable hideosity began anew during the infamous Oct 7th Last Straw military defense action taken on behalf of the Palestinians by their legally-elected Hamas protectors in Gaza; when no other Western or Middle Eastern power, beside independent paramilitary guerilla forces, like Hamas, Hezbollah and the Houthi, would dare to lift so much as a finger on behalf of the Palestinians.

As things now stand, the reality of the poor enforcement track record by the UN’s many General Assembly and Security Council Resolutions that already have been evoked against Zionist Israel, which its Zionist leaders and Jewish citizenry arrogantly and indifferently continue to flaunt with impunity, is blatantly obvious. The sad reality of the ICJ’s deliberations is that it will take many years yet, if ever, before its ponderously-slow, archaic, labyrinthine political process, and that of the United Nations and ICJ will ever be able to answer the legal question of Zionist Israel’s guilt or innocence in the genocidal charges that South Africa has now leveled against them.

Will All the World’s Legal Trials Ever Make Any Difference?

This one is reminded in his lifetime of the once miserably-failed results of the world’s largest anti-war/pro-peace demonstrations ever held in modern history, when an estimated 11 million citizens of every nation on the globe took to the streets in protest of the then anticipated illegal war in 2003 against Saddam Hussein, the so-called weapons of mass destruction (WMD’s), and entire countries of the Middle East themselves.

In retrospect, in light of the failed results that came for naught to prevent that war, and all the related wars that since have followed, in places like Iraq, Iran, Syria, Libya, Yemen, and now Gaza – all the murders, political assassinations, destruction to whole non-Western societies and cultures – all the citizen and legal actions taken in 2003 haven’t made a damn bit of difference to the trajectory humankind has since taken. So, in regard to the plight of the Palestinians, one shouldn’t hold their breath for any ultimate positive outcome in 2024 in Gaza and Israel. The human race still is just too primitive a species.

Meanwhile. the horrible fate of the Palestinians will only continue, unabated, to deteriorate; with the on-going military aggression of Zionist forces, aided by the military, financial, diplomatic, ideological cover of the Western world’s virtually silent, passive, weak-kneed, lily-livered American, Canadian, French, English, and Germany’s neo-conservative leaders, (Prime Minister Justin Trudeau, President Emmanual Macron, Prime Minister Rishi Sunak, German Chancellor Olaf Scholz) all hopelessly-passive, along with the bulk of their silent citizenry in tow, under the immoral leadership of President ‘Genocidal Joe’ Biden; a self-declared ‘Zionist’ himself, and sound supporter of an AIPAC-riddled Zionist U.S. House of Representatives, and dumbed-down populace, along with the United States ultimate trump card of a Veto in the UN Security Council and, perhaps, even more ultimate future “Trump’ card in the White House that will spin everything even harder towards the fascist right.

History Repeating Its Sordid Self Again in the 21st Century

Once again, the whole scene of the world’s dismal geo-political tip again towards authoritarian ‘Strong Man’ fascism is a déjà vu repeat of early 20 century history, with the same abject appeasement shown by Western and Eastern powers towards Yetanyahu’s Hitler-like rise to ruthless power. If nothing dramatic is done to stop him, and soon, it’s another: Here goes the world again down the rabbit hole together in Gaza.

Will the UN and ICJ be Able to Counter This New Fascist Threat

The only immediate help the ICJ may be able to provide, because it doesn’t have any ultimate military army at its disposal or powers of enforcement, other than to undertake provisional measures to try to immediately stop the savage slaughter of innocent Palestinians by the Zionists forces. 

But one only has to consider how many years it took the world’s powers to finally mobilize against Nazi Germany’s similar attacks against the Jews and Hitler’s desire for world expansion and conquest. By the time the whole world had mobilized back then, and marshalled its forces, many more millions of innocents needlessly had to die. Before that happens, many more innocent Palestinians, unfortunately, may have to die because of humankind’s ignorance and stupidity.

The antecedents of this non-stop genocidal intent by Zionist Israel’s political and military forces to wipe out all of the Palestinians, in truth of fact, goes back to the original ethnic cleansing, apartheid and genocidal intent that began to be pressed in earnest in 1948 with Zionist Israel’s forced removal of over a million helpless, innocent Palestinians, and total obliteration of over 400 of their towns, villages, neighborhoods, even all the historic place names of their streets, natural sites, historic landmarks, and, of course, humanity’s collective memory of a softer, more peaceful, Palestine world of amicable colloquy that once was. 

This intolerable outrage back in 1948 against humanity, that the United Nation, was guilty of due to sheer ignorance and neglect of its mandated duties to protect them, came to be known as the First Nakba Catastrophe perpetrated by Zionist Israel against over one million helpless, innocent Palestinians. The same thing has since followed in 2023, in Gaza, following the ‘Last Straw’ military actions taken by Hamas that has so infuriated Israel’s vengeful Zionists that they now have decided that their own fascist Final Solution will require perpetrating however more vengeful, savage ‘Nakba Catastrophe’s’ than all the catastrophe’s that have ever come before.

There Will be No Two-State Solution Whatsoever

The Zionist Israel’s leader Bibi Netanyahu, the Knesset and their rabid followers have made it clear they never ever will tolerate a Two State Solution. Even if the United Nations could work out some conceivable partition scheme between the two states, Israel would have to agree to give up a certain degree of Ersatz Israel’s entire stolen real estate and all the infrastructure it has developed in the Occupied Territories of Palestine since 1948. That would only seem conceivable if the world was once again willing to go to an all-out world war against Israel and its allies, as it did against Nazi Germany and its Axis Powers, 

Imagine for a moment, if all the Old World Powers who originally invaded the New World and massacred or displaced all its original inhabitants so they could take possession of their ‘homelands’ for themselves, if they would be willing to give back any part of the lands, natural resources, new societal infrastructure to the original inhabitants.

To begin with, Israel’s dyed-in-the-wool main ally – the United States – together with Israel’s military might would seem to be an almost insurmountable challenge to overcome; even if the rest of the entire world collectively mounted the most unbelievable military force against them. 

And yet, the world is now faced with exactly those imponderable existential choices between choosing between a world of the future, predicated upon humankind’s ever-evolving higher ideals and concepts, such as: Democracy, Freedom, Equality for all men and women of humankind, or; revert back, forever more, to some even more ghastly form of Homo sapien’s original primitive philosophy of “Might Makes Right” and “Brute Power Rules”; which, with the constant evolution of weaponry and high-tech methods of killing, will only inevitably lead to one ultimate conclusion for the species.

Revelations of the ICJ Findings of Genocide

Chilling testimonials made to the ICJ about the fate of the Palestinian people, uttered by everyone from Israel’s Prime Minister Bibi Netanyahu, President Isaac Herzog, its Ministers of Defense, National Security, Military Intelligence, Energy and Infrastructure and so many others within Israel’s Zionist government, were heard of Israel finding ever more diabolical new ways to treat Gaza, Hamas and Palestinian men, women, especially pregnant women, children, and infants, equally, as if they all were one and the same; equally guilty of being nothing more than terrorist enemies, likened to those of ISIS, or wild human animals, who must all be destroyed in ever more diabolically-cunning ways; more painful than those of even the perpetual fires of Hell or Death itself; obliterated as if by a nuclear bomb, so nothing remains as even a reminder to those who come after, of who they once were. 

This was followed by Israel’s disavowal of South Africa’s charges. Yet, the $64,000 dollar question remains unanswered, “Will the UN’s ICJ, Security Council and General Assembly significantly address: the plight of the actual lives and welfare of the Palestinian people, and; bring about a genuine ceasing of the military slaughter by Israel’s Zionist military forces on-going, methodical, on-going, ethnic cleansing, apartheid, genocidal policies towards the Palestinian people in Occupied Palestine? Especially when the U.S. possesses the Unholy Veto? Or are they simply to be thrown to the wolves?”

The hope is that the world will listen in time to so many good voices who exist out there everywhere in the universe, who are desperately trying in every which way they can, to speak truth to power in their hope-against-hope that their words of wisdom will finally reach the higher minds and principles of the world in time.

Words That Speak Truth to Power

The reader is called upon to take the time to educate themselves as much as they can, and spread their new understandings of what all is going on at this time and place in the history of the world, to come to bear, in the hope that they will make a difference to Israel and all its allies to avert this tragedy of humankind. 

Peruse the brief library provided below of some of those wisdoms. Tariq Ramadan’s reflections: on his own personal life, and: that of Gaza; and; the future of Islam in the West, are among this writer’s personal favorite, humanistic insights on the War in Gaza and Life in general.

A Final Thought

A traditional way to begin and end a greeting with a Muslim to show one’s respect, is to say, “Peace Be With You” Spoken in the Muslim’s mother tongue, IT goes, “As-Salem-u-Alaikum” (As-saa-laam-muu-ah-lay-kum”)

Another form of greeting, if one so chooses to use the even longer, more respectful greeting that means “Peace Be Unto You, and So May the Mercy of Allah and His Blessings”, goes (As-saa-laam-muu-alie-kum, waa-rah-ma-tull-taa-laa-hee-wa-bara-kaa-tu-hu.”)

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

The writer Jerome Irwin is a Canadian-American writer who originally was a Criminology student working in one of America’s local police departments. For decades, Irwin has sought to call world attention to problems of environmental degradation and unsustainability caused by a host of environmental-ecological-spiritual issues that exist between the conflicting world philosophies of indigenous and non-indigenous peoples.

Irwin is the author of the book, “The Wild Gentle Ones; A Turtle Island Odyssey” (www.turtle-island-odyssey.com), a spiritual odyssey among the native peoples of North America that has led to numerous articles pertaining to: Ireland’s Fenian Movement; native peoples Dakota Access Pipeline Resistance Movement; AIPAC, Israel & the U.S. Congress anti-BDS Movement; the historic Battle for Palestine & Siege of Gaza, as well as; the many violations constantly being waged by industrial-corporate-military-propaganda interests against the World’s Collective Soul. The author and his wife are long-time residents on the North Shore of British Columbia.

He is a regular contributor to Global Research.

Featured image: Israeli troops resting against Jerusalem’s Holy Wailing Wall during 1967 six-day war that tripled the expansion of Zionist Israel’s illegal occupation of Historic Palestine’s West Bank, East Jerusalem, and Gaza Strip

Don’t Tax the Rich. End the Fed!

January 23rd, 2024 by Rep. Ron Paul

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Select politicians, government officials, economic elites, and experts arriving at the annual World Economic Forum meeting in Davos, Switzerland were greeted with an open letter signed by more than 250 billionaires and millionaires. The signers request their respective governments raise their taxes.

The letter signers are concerned about “inequality” that they say “has reached a tipping point.” The cost of this inequality “to our economic, societal and ecological stability risk,” the letter continues, “is severe — and growing every day.” They may have a point. Since the 2008 market meltdown, resentment against those at the top of the income ladder has been growing. However, this is not because people are envious of those able to profit in a free market. Rather, the resentment is rooted in the corporatist system that rewards those who manipulate the political process.

If the signatories to the letter want to truly end the type of inequality that fuels populist rage, they should stop calling for tax increases and instead call for an end to government programs and policies that benefit the rich and powerful. Included are programs like the Export-Import Bank that subsidize large corporations, health and safety regulations that cartelize markets while failing to protect consumers, and interventionist foreign policy that enriches the military-industrial complex while making the rest of us poorer and more vulnerable to terrorist attacks.

The Federal Reserve is the leading cause of inequality. This is not surprising considering it was created at the behest of bankers and rushed through Congress just before Christmas when few Americans were paying attention. Many Americans became aware of how the central bank tailors its policies to benefit the financial elites following the 2008 meltdown. Then, the US government, enabled by Fed money printing, bailed out large financial institutions while average Americans suffered.

The Fed had been helping big firms for many years. In the 1990s it was common for the Federal Reserve, then under the leadership of Alan Greenspan, to pump money into the market in response to apparent crises. This was named the “Greenspan put” by the financial press. The new money would help some companies and their wealthy owners, while reducing most Americans’ purchasing power.

Middle- and working-class Americans suffer the brunt of inflation, which is properly defined as the central bank pumping money into the economy thus reducing the dollar’s purchasing power.

In a free market, most people will be able to have a satisfactory standard of living and recognize that the “super rich” earned their fortunes by offering goods and services that served the needs and wants of consumers while providing good jobs at good wages to fellow citizens. In contrast, in a “mixed economy” supported by a fiat money system, the average person will suffer a steady erosion of his standard of living thanks to the central bank’s inflationary policies, while the crony capitalists prosper. This is a recipe for social instability.

Those concerned with the detrimental effects of rising resentment of income inequality should support repealing all federal programs that reward crony capitalists — including programs masquerading as providing national defense. They should also work to audit then end the Fed.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

In a “huge win for transparency,” a federal judge this month ordered the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) to disclose the entirety of a critical COVID-19 vaccine safety database to independent researchers and the public.

The ruling requires the CDC to produce more than 7.8 million free-text reports detailing adverse reactions submitted by COVID-19 vaccine recipients through the V-safe monitoring app. The agency must release the texts according to a strict schedule over the next year.

The judge rejected the CDC’s claims that confidentiality concerns and resource limitations prevented the agency from publicly releasing the trove of first-hand testimonies.

Instead, U.S. District Judge Matthew Kacsmaryk for the Northern District of Texas, Amarillo Division, embraced arguments from the plaintiffs — the nonprofit watchdog group Freedom Coalition of Doctors for Choice — that obscuring the data enabled potentially misleading safety conclusions by hindering full understanding of the vaccines’ impacts.

Prior lawsuits forced the CDC to release superficial, check-the-box summaries of common symptoms generated by the V-safe system. However, the free-text fields that the CDC is now required to release represent the lone channel for reporting serious conditions like myocarditis, blood clots or strokes.

The CDC so far has analyzed data only from the first one to two weeks after vaccination, painting an incomplete picture of the long-term dangers of the mRNA shots. The release of the full qualitative accounts offers the public the opportunity to undertake more detailed and accurate safety assessments.

In his ruling, Kacsmaryk wrote:

“If ‘some scientists’ — sponsored or platformed by Defendants — ‘have chosen to use’ only the first week or two of data to report the vaccine is safe and effective, then other scientists should be permitted to access the data to ‘pierce the veil of administrative secrecy,’ ‘open agency action to the light of public scrutiny,’ and ‘promote the disclosure of information.’ …

“With billions of taxpayer dollars expended to develop, distribute, administer, and fund messaging campaigns, Plaintiff assumes a hefty and viable public interest in examining the raw clinical data.”

“This is a huge win for transparency,” Aaron Siri, attorney for the plaintiff, told Del Bigtree on the Jan. 11 episode of The Highwire. “It’ll be an incredible opportunity to actually see what was being told to the CDC by the public.”

“There is substantial public interest in the data that supported, and continues to support, the government’s promotion of the COVID-19 vaccines and boosters,” Kacsmaryk wrote, adding that the data should be provided to “treating physicians, researchers, parents, [vaccine] recipients, and non-recipients.”

Brian Hooker, Ph.D., chief scientific officer for Children’s Health Defense, told The Defender, “It is criminal that the CDC would not make this information public automatically.”

“It belies the fact that they don’t want the American people to know the extent of the damage from the COVID-19 vaccine,” Hooker added. “The judge’s order represents a clarion call for transparency around vaccine harms and stands to impact pivotal decision-making processes for future public health emergencies.”

“I think this is going to be the death blow to this cover-up,” speculated Bigtree. “This may change this whole conversation forever.”

The first tranche of nearly 400,000 free-text entries, which the judge ordered to be released by Feb. 15, will be available for public viewing and analysis on the Informed Consent Action Network’s (ICAN) V-safe data page.

Details on Lawsuit and Court Ruling

The legal effort to unseal the V-safe data originated with a Freedom of Information Act (FOIA) request for the free-text entries and associated registration codes filed Jan. 3, 2023, by the Freedom Coalition of Doctors for Choice.

The Texas-based group was formed specifically to procure and circulate the V-safe’s user-reported vaccine impacts to enable outside evaluation.

Despite acknowledging that some redaction of respondents’ identifying details could prove necessary, the CDC refused to produce any records, citing confidentiality concerns and resource limitations.

“The non-exempt information within the Free-Text Responses is not reasonably segregable, because having to review and redact 7.8 million Free-Text Responses to segregate non-exempt information would impose an unreasonable burden on the agency,” the CDC contended, according to court documents.

The plaintiff coalition pushed back on those claims in follow-up appeals, arguing the urgency of understanding the vaccines’ complete safety profile justified the effort to supply the raw narratives.

Coalition attorney Siri specifically called the single week of data the CDC wanted to disclose “misleading,” adding, “Those free text fields and the data in those free text fields are so critical,” because “those 10 million individuals [who took the COVID-19 vaccine] could write in whatever they wanted.”

The 10 million who signed up for the V-safe were “clearly all fans of the vaccine,” who were “not forced” to get the shots and “wanted the vaccine to work for them … [and] to track [their] health,” Bigtree said.

The fact that 7.8 million entries were made “should be troubling, because I don’t think people are writing in, ‘Thank you,’” Siri said. “They’re writing in symptoms, they’re writing in issues of concern.”

Siri shared what one V-safe user reported, without receiving any response from the CDC:

Of the 10.1 million people enrolled in V-safe, 782,913 (7.7%) needed medical care after getting the vaccine, while 2.5 million (25%) suffered a side effect serious enough that it affected their day-to-day lives.

The CDC wanted to deny access to the text fields. Instead, it wanted to categorize the vaccine recipients’ input, and put a code on different issues, according to Bigtree.

“So you ended up getting around that,” Bigtree told Siri. “They didn’t get to code this and say, ‘Well, there was like about 500 that were about some sort of chest pains.’”

Kacsmaryk said the plaintiffs presented information that some of the CDC’s vaccine studies “may be misleading or based upon cherry-picked data.” He wrote:

“One study reported that 0.8% to 1.1% of users reported needing medical care according to the check-the-box data. … However, when the raw data was released pursuant to separate FOIA litigation, it showed some 7.7% of V-safe users reported needing medical care and an additional 25% missing school or work or unable to perform normal activities.”

Kacsmaryk adopted the plaintiff’s transparency stance and downplayed the confidentiality risk with the expectation that names and birthdates could be scrubbed through software review. He wrote:

“Production is not unreasonably burdensome for at least four reasons: the requested records are not so voluminous; only a small percent of records will require any redaction; the redaction process is largely straightforward and capable of automated assistance; and blanket exemption claims covering a mass of records are impermissible.”

While accepting that the assessment could tax CDC resources, Kacsmaryk insisted the unprecedented scale of the vaccination campaign warranted commensurate accountability. “Even if production entails a heavy burden, production is still warranted,” he wrote.

Beyond compelling the release of all entries, the judge also granted the plaintiff’s requests for expedited processing and a fee waiver in acknowledgment of the extreme public benefit.

Free-text Data Sole Channel for Conveying Full Depth of Vaccine Injuries

The V-safe system was designed to capture survey data from vaccine recipients daily for the first seven days, weekly for the following five weeks, and at three-, six- and 12-month intervals.

While the prior check-the-box disclosures offered a superficial glimpse into common reactions, the free-text narratives represent the sole channel for conveying the full depth of vaccine experiences, including severe and unintended consequences.

The check-box categories focused narrowly on acute symptoms like pain, swelling, fatigue and nausea — symptoms the CDC claimed demonstrate the vaccine is working, according to the court document — and provided little room for conveying substantive harms.

Source: The Highwire, Ep. 354

“Any concerning symptoms would necessarily be restricted to only the free-text responses, to date unexamined by independent researchers not sponsored by Defendants,” Kacsmaryk wrote.

“They [CDC policymakers] relegate[d] [serious symptoms] to the free-text fields,” Siri told Bigtree. “And that’s what makes getting that data, those 7.8 million free-text entries, so critical so we could see what symptoms were reported.”

In its analyses, the CDC has thus far predominantly emphasized check-box outcomes from only the first week post-vaccination.

“Notably, Plaintiff points to several studies published and presented by CDC that rely upon … the V-safe data,” Kacsmaryk said in his ruling. “All but one of these studies considered only the first seven days after receiving a vaccine.”

In a Substack article, Siri explained why the V-safe is better than the Vaccine Adverse Event Reporting System (VAERS):

“Unlike VAERS, the data in v-safe is gathered from a known and quantifiable universe of individuals. In fact, v-safe has precisely 10,108,273 registered users as of August 2022. These users are asked to answer the same questions. By aggregating answers to identical questions in v-safe, the rate of an adverse reaction can be calculated. That is not possible with VAERS.”

Source: The Highwire, Ep. 354

According to the lawsuit complaint, the CDC’s V-safe protocol clearly anticipated that all data might eventually be shared.

“A final data set at the end of the v-safe program with de-identified aggregate data will be made available for external data requests or through Freedom of Information Act (FOIA) requests,” the protocol stated.

What Happens Next

The court order mandated the release of the first tranche of at least 390,000 individual V-safe free text submissions by Feb. 15, 2024, and the remainder on a monthly timeline, through Jan. 15, 2025.

ICAN, which bankrolled the FOIA lawsuit, pledged to immediately publish those initial entries upon receipt with no restrictions.

Source: Court order

“Scientists around the world are going to be getting real science in their hands, real data that they can start crunching so all of us in the world can actually know what happened here,” Bigtree said, confirming ICAN’s intentions of sharing the revelations publicly.

The ICAN press release stated:

“This ruling sends a clear message to our federal agencies: we are not moving on and forgetting about the pandemic or the actions they. ICAN will not stop until ALL the data is released to the public and there is true transparency and accountability around COVID-19.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

John-Michael Dumais is a news editor for The Defender. He has been a writer and community organizer on a variety of issues, including the death penalty, war, health freedom and all things related to the COVID-19 pandemic.

Featured image is from CHD


The Worldwide Corona Crisis, Global Coup d’Etat Against Humanity

by Michel Chossudovsky

Michel Chossudovsky reviews in detail how this insidious project “destroys people’s lives”. He provides a comprehensive analysis of everything you need to know about the “pandemic” — from the medical dimensions to the economic and social repercussions, political underpinnings, and mental and psychological impacts.

“My objective as an author is to inform people worldwide and refute the official narrative which has been used as a justification to destabilize the economic and social fabric of entire countries, followed by the imposition of the “deadly” COVID-19 “vaccine”. This crisis affects humanity in its entirety: almost 8 billion people. We stand in solidarity with our fellow human beings and our children worldwide. Truth is a powerful instrument.”

Reviews

This is an in-depth resource of great interest if it is the wider perspective you are motivated to understand a little better, the author is very knowledgeable about geopolitics and this comes out in the way Covid is contextualized. —Dr. Mike Yeadon

In this war against humanity in which we find ourselves, in this singular, irregular and massive assault against liberty and the goodness of people, Chossudovsky’s book is a rock upon which to sustain our fight. –Dr. Emanuel Garcia

In fifteen concise science-based chapters, Michel traces the false covid pandemic, explaining how a PCR test, producing up to 97% proven false positives, combined with a relentless 24/7 fear campaign, was able to create a worldwide panic-laden “plandemic”; that this plandemic would never have been possible without the infamous DNA-modifying Polymerase Chain Reaction test – which to this day is being pushed on a majority of innocent people who have no clue. His conclusions are evidenced by renown scientists. —Peter Koenig 

Professor Chossudovsky exposes the truth that “there is no causal relationship between the virus and economic variables.” In other words, it was not COVID-19 but, rather, the deliberate implementation of the illogical, scientifically baseless lockdowns that caused the shutdown of the global economy. –David Skripac

A reading of  Chossudovsky’s book provides a comprehensive lesson in how there is a global coup d’état under way called “The Great Reset” that if not resisted and defeated by freedom loving people everywhere will result in a dystopian future not yet imagined. Pass on this free gift from Professor Chossudovsky before it’s too late.  You will not find so much valuable information and analysis in one place. –Edward Curtin

ISBN: 978-0-9879389-3-0,  Year: 2022,  PDF Ebook,  Pages: 164, 15 Chapters

Price: $11.50 FREE COPY! Click here (docsend) and download.

We encourage you to support the eBook project by making a donation through Global Research’s DonorBox “Worldwide Corona Crisis” Campaign Page

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

A new agreement signed by Rishi Sunak and Ukrainian President Volodymr Zelensky on 12 January provides UK “security commitments” to Ukraine in the event of “new aggression” by Moscow.

It states:

“In the event of future Russian armed attack against Ukraine, at the request of either of the Participants, the Participants will consult within 24 hours to determine measures needed to counter or deter the aggression”.

It then says the UK “undertakes” to “provide Ukraine with swift and sustained security assistance, modern military equipment across all domains as necessary.”

Strikingly, the text also encourages Ukraine to “provide effective military assistance” to Britain in the event of an attack on the UK – similar to Nato’s mutual defence pledge – although it does not make this a formal commitment for Kyiv.

Zelensky used the words “security guarantees” or “guarantees” when describing the agreement at a press conference in Kyiv following its signing. 

Sunak has tended to use the phrase “security assurances”. The text does not refer to “guarantees” but to “security commitments”.

Assurances

Some commentators say such “commitments” are toothless and do not provide a hard defence guarantee. They compare them to the 1994 Budapest Memorandum when Ukraine agreed to give up its Soviet nuclear arsenal in exchange for “security assurances” which never materialised.

Neither has the agreement yet been ratified by either country’s parliament, meaning its legal position is uncertain. 

Perhaps most importantly, the accord does not explicitly commit Britain to despatching military forces to Ukraine by providing boots on the ground. However, a risk is that it could embroil the UK in any future war with Russia. 

Describing the agreement in parliament, Sunak stated that

“if Russia ever invades Ukraine again, we will provide swift and sustained assistance, including modern equipment across land, air and sea. Together with our allies, the UK will be there from the first moment until the last.”

The accord is a further step towards Nato membership for Ukraine. It increases UK military cooperation with Kyiv intending “to deepen Ukraine’s interoperability with Nato”, “accelerate Ukraine’s transition to Nato equipment and standards” and develop “a pathway to a future in Nato”.   

The accord has arisen from Nato’s summit in Lithuania last July in which G7 states pledged to make a series of bilateral security agreements with Ukraine.

More Arms

But the agreement goes beyond security commitments, and Britain’s arms exporters will likely be major beneficiaries. 

In a section on “defence industry cooperation”, the text says the UK will work with arms companies and Ukraine to “identify opportunities for closer defence industrial partnerships and collaboration including for mutual commercial benefit”. 

Britain “will encourage its defence industry to work with Ukraine” on “manufacturing of UK defence products” in the country. 

The Ukraine war has been a boon for UK arms firms. Since Russia’s invasion in February 2022, they have exported £437m worth of military equipment to Ukraine – over 12 times more than they sold in the previous ten years. 

Both Babcock and BAE, the UK’s largest arms exporter, have recently set up offices in Ukraine, positioning themselves to secure new deals. 

BAE’s agreement with Ukraine will “ramp up the company’s support to Ukraine’s armed forces” and enable BAE “to work alongside” them “to… support its future force structure”.

Disinformation

A section in the text on “information security” notes that Britain will also help Ukraine counter Russian propaganda “globally” – or “support each other’s efforts to tell the truth well”, as the document quaintly puts it. 

The two countries will work together “offering the world a truthful alternative to the Russian Federation’s disinformation campaigns” which will involve “closer collaboration of communications output”.

Britain’s Foreign Office is already spending millions on private “counter-disinformation” groups which tend to support UK government policy positions, such as over Ukraine.

Declassified found before Russia’s invasion of Ukraine that the British government ploughed at least £82.7m of public money into media projects in countries bordering or near Russia in the four years to 2021.

The UK government’s funding of the “counter-disinformation” industry looks more like an information operation in itself rather than a neutral effort to combat fake news.

Private Sector

A  further commitment is ensuring Ukraine promotes pro-Western economic policies through reforms and postwar reconstruction. 

“Before this terrible war, Ukraine’s economy was becoming a huge investment opportunity,” then foreign minister Leo Docherty said at the Ukraine Recovery Conference hosted in London last June.

That conference urged “international businesses” to invest in Ukraine in its “ambitious reform agenda”, including “reducing the size of the government”,  “privatization”, “deregulation” and “investment freedom”.

The new agreement reinforces these goals. Ukraine will have “a strong private sector-led economy… that is integrated into global markets”, the text states. This involves Kyiv fully implementing IMF reforms, promoting measures “to increase investor confidence” and “unlock private investment”.

In this, the UK will “support” activities in economic sectors such as energy, infrastructure and tech.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Mark Curtis is the editor of Declassified UK, and the author of five books and many articles on UK foreign policy.

Featured image: Volodymr Zelensky greets Rishi Sunak. (Photo: Ukraine Presidency)

The Federal Reserve Cartel: The Eight Families

January 23rd, 2024 by Dean Henderson

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name.

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

 

*** 

Of relevance to the current crisis, this carefully researched article was first published by Global Research more than ten years ago on June 1, 2011.

***

The Four Horsemen of Banking (Bank of America, JP Morgan Chase, Citigroup and Wells Fargo) own the Four Horsemen of Oil (Exxon Mobil, Royal Dutch/Shell, BP and Chevron Texaco); in tandem with Deutsche Bank, BNP, Barclays and other European old money behemoths. But their monopoly over the global economy does not end at the edge of the oil patch.

According to company 10K filings to the SEC, the Four Horsemen of Banking are among the top ten stock holders of virtually every Fortune 500 corporation.[1]

So who then are the stockholders in these money center banks?

This information is guarded much more closely. My queries to bank regulatory agencies regarding stock ownership in the top 25 US bank holding companies were given Freedom of Information Act status, before being denied on “national security” grounds. This is rather ironic, since many of the bank’s stockholders reside in Europe.

One important repository for the wealth of the global oligarchy that owns these bank holding companies is US Trust Corporation – founded in 1853 and now owned by Bank of America. A recent US Trust Corporate Director and Honorary Trustee was Walter Rothschild. Other directors included Daniel Davison of JP Morgan Chase, Richard Tucker of Exxon Mobil, Daniel Roberts of Citigroup and Marshall Schwartz of Morgan Stanley. [2]

J. W. McCallister, an oil industry insider with House of Saud connections, wrote in The Grim Reaper that information he acquired from Saudi bankers cited 80% ownership of the New York Federal Reserve Bank- by far the most powerful Fed branch- by just eight families, four of which reside in the US. They are the Goldman Sachs, Rockefellers, Lehmans and Kuhn Loebs of New York; the Rothschilds of Paris and London; the Warburgs of Hamburg; the Lazards of Paris; and the Israel Moses Seifs of Rome.

CPA Thomas D. Schauf corroborates McCallister’s claims, adding that ten banks control all twelve Federal Reserve Bank branches.

He names N.M. Rothschild of London, Rothschild Bank of Berlin, Warburg Bank of Hamburg, Warburg Bank of Amsterdam, Lehman Brothers of New York, Lazard Brothers of Paris, Kuhn Loeb Bank of New York, Israel Moses Seif Bank of Italy, Goldman Sachs of New York and JP Morgan Chase Bank of New York.

Schauf lists William Rockefeller, Paul Warburg, Jacob Schiff and James Stillman as individuals who own large shares of the Fed. [3]

The Schiffs are insiders at Kuhn Loeb. The Stillmans are Citigroup insiders, who married into the Rockefeller clan at the turn of the century.

Eustace Mullins came to the same conclusions in his book The Secrets of the Federal Reserve, in which he displays charts connecting the Fed and its member banks to the families of Rothschild, Warburg, Rockefeller and the others. [4]

The control that these banking families exert over the global economy cannot be overstated and is quite intentionally shrouded in secrecy. Their corporate media arm is quick to discredit any information exposing this private central banking cartel as “conspiracy theory”. Yet the facts remain.

The House of Morgan

The Federal Reserve Bank was born in 1913, the same year US banking scion J. Pierpont Morgan died and the Rockefeller Foundation was formed. The House of Morgan presided over American finance from the corner of Wall Street and Broad, acting as quasi-US central bank since 1838, when George Peabody founded it in London.

Peabody was a business associate of the Rothschilds. In 1952 Fed researcher Eustace Mullins put forth the supposition that the Morgans were nothing more than Rothschild agents. Mullins wrote that the Rothschilds, “…preferred to operate anonymously in the US behind the facade of J.P. Morgan & Company”. [5]

Author Gabriel Kolko stated, “Morgan’s activities in 1895-1896 in selling US gold bonds in Europe were based on an alliance with the House of Rothschild.” [6]

The Morgan financial octopus wrapped its tentacles quickly around the globe. Morgan Grenfell operated in London. Morgan et Ce ruled Paris. The Rothschild’s Lambert cousins set up Drexel & Company in Philadelphia.

The House of Morgan catered to the Astors, DuPonts, Guggenheims, Vanderbilts and Rockefellers. It financed the launch of AT&T, General Motors, General Electric and DuPont. Like the London-based Rothschild and Barings banks, Morgan became part of the power structure in many countries.

By 1890 the House of Morgan was lending to Egypt’s central bank, financing Russian railroads, floating Brazilian provincial government bonds and funding Argentine public works projects. A recession in 1893 enhanced Morgan’s power. That year Morgan saved the US government from a bank panic, forming a syndicate to prop up government reserves with a shipment of $62 million worth of Rothschild gold. [7]

Morgan was the driving force behind Western expansion in the US, financing and controlling West-bound railroads through voting trusts. In 1879 Cornelius Vanderbilt’s Morgan-financed New York Central Railroad gave preferential shipping rates to John D. Rockefeller’s budding Standard Oil monopoly, cementing the Rockefeller/Morgan relationship.

The House of Morgan now fell under Rothschild and Rockefeller family control. A New York Herald headline read, “Railroad Kings Form Gigantic Trust”. J. Pierpont Morgan, who once stated, “Competition is a sin”, now opined gleefully, “Think of it. All competing railroad traffic west of St. Louis placed in the control of about thirty men.”[8]

Morgan and Edward Harriman’s banker Kuhn Loeb held a monopoly over the railroads, while banking dynasties Lehman, Goldman Sachs and Lazard joined the Rockefellers in controlling the US industrial base. [9]

In 1903 Banker’s Trust was set up by the Eight Families. Benjamin Strong of Banker’s Trust was the first Governor of the New York Federal Reserve Bank. The 1913 creation of the Fed fused the power of the Eight Families to the military and diplomatic might of the US government. If their overseas loans went unpaid, the oligarchs could now deploy US Marines to collect the debts. Morgan, Chase and Citibank formed an international lending syndicate.

The House of Morgan was cozy with the British House of Windsor and the Italian House of Savoy. The Kuhn Loebs, Warburgs, Lehmans, Lazards, Israel Moses Seifs and Goldman Sachs also had close ties to European royalty. By 1895 Morgan controlled the flow of gold in and out of the US. The first American wave of mergers was in its infancy and was being promoted by the bankers. In 1897 there were sixty-nine industrial mergers. By 1899 there were twelve-hundred. In 1904 John Moody – founder of Moody’s Investor Services – said it was impossible to talk of Rockefeller and Morgan interests as separate. [10]

Public distrust of the combine spread. Many considered them traitors working for European old money. Rockefeller’s Standard Oil, Andrew Carnegie’s US Steel and Edward Harriman’s railroads were all financed by banker Jacob Schiff at Kuhn Loeb, who worked closely with the European Rothschilds.

Several Western states banned the bankers. Populist preacher William Jennings Bryan was thrice the Democratic nominee for President from 1896 -1908. The central theme of his anti-imperialist campaign was that America was falling into a trap of “financial servitude to British capital”. Teddy Roosevelt defeated Bryan in 1908, but was forced by this spreading populist wildfire to enact the Sherman Anti-Trust Act. He then went after the Standard Oil Trust.

In 1912 the Pujo hearings were held, addressing concentration of power on Wall Street. That same year Mrs. Edward Harriman sold her substantial shares in New York’s Guaranty Trust Bank to J.P. Morgan, creating Morgan Guaranty Trust. Judge Louis Brandeis convinced President Woodrow Wilson to call for an end to interlocking board directorates. In 1914 the Clayton Anti-Trust Act was passed.

Jack Morgan – J. Pierpont’s son and successor – responded by calling on Morgan clients Remington and Winchester to increase arms production. He argued that the US needed to enter WWI. Goaded by the Carnegie Foundation and other oligarchy fronts, Wilson accommodated. As Charles Tansill wrote in America Goes to War, “Even before the clash of arms, the French firm of Rothschild Freres cabled to Morgan & Company in New York suggesting the flotation of a loan of $100 million, a substantial part of which was to be left in the US to pay for French purchases of American goods.”

The House of Morgan financed half the US war effort, while receiving commissions for lining up contractors like GE, Du Pont, US Steel, Kennecott and ASARCO. All were Morgan clients. Morgan also financed the British Boer War in South Africa and the Franco-Prussian War. The 1919 Paris Peace Conference was presided over by Morgan, which led both German and Allied reconstruction efforts. [11]

In the 1930’s populism resurfaced in America after Goldman Sachs, Lehman Bank and others profited from the Crash of 1929. [12] House Banking Committee Chairman Louis McFadden (D-NY) said of the Great Depression, “It was no accident. It was a carefully contrived occurrence…The international bankers sought to bring about a condition of despair here so they might emerge as rulers of us all”.

Sen. Gerald Nye (D-ND) chaired a munitions investigation in 1936. Nye concluded that the House of Morgan had plunged the US into WWI to protect loans and create a booming arms industry. Nye later produced a document titled The Next War, which cynically referred to “the old goddess of democracy trick”, through which Japan could be used to lure the US into WWII.

In 1937 Interior Secretary Harold Ickes warned of the influence of “America’s 60 Families”. Historian Ferdinand Lundberg later penned a book of the exact same title. Supreme Court Justice William O. Douglas decried, “Morgan influence…the most pernicious one in industry and finance today.”

Jack Morgan responded by nudging the US towards WWII. Morgan had close relations with the Iwasaki and Dan families – Japan’s two wealthiest clans – who have owned Mitsubishi and Mitsui, respectively, since the companies emerged from 17th Century shogunates. When Japan invaded Manchuria, slaughtering Chinese peasants at Nanking, Morgan downplayed the incident. Morgan also had close relations with Italian fascist Benito Mussolini, while German Nazi Dr. Hjalmer Schacht was a Morgan Bank liaison during WWII. After the war Morgan representatives met with Schacht at the Bank of International Settlements (BIS) in Basel, Switzerland. [13]

The House of Rockefeller

BIS is the most powerful bank in the world, a global central bank for the Eight Families who control the private central banks of almost all Western and developing nations. The first President of BIS was Rockefeller banker Gates McGarrah- an official at Chase Manhattan and the Federal Reserve. McGarrah was the grandfather of former CIA director Richard Helms. The Rockefellers- like the Morgans- had close ties to London. David Icke writes in Children of the Matrix, that the Rockefellers and Morgans were just “gofers” for the European Rothschilds. [14]

BIS is owned by the Federal Reserve, Bank of England, Bank of Italy, Bank of Canada, Swiss National Bank, Nederlandsche Bank, Bundesbank and Bank of France.

Historian Carroll Quigley wrote in his epic book Tragedy and Hope that BIS was part of a plan,

“to create a world system of financial control in private hands able to dominate the political system of each country and the economy of the world as a whole…to be controlled in a feudalistic fashion by the central banks of the world acting in concert by secret agreements.”

The US government had a historical distrust of BIS, lobbying unsuccessfully for its demise at the 1944 post-WWII Bretton Woods Conference. Instead the Eight Families’ power was exacerbated, with the Bretton Woods creation of the IMF and the World Bank. The US Federal Reserve only took shares in BIS in September 1994. [15]

BIS holds at least 10% of monetary reserves for at least 80 of the world’s central banks, the IMF and other multilateral institutions. It serves as financial agent for international agreements, collects information on the global economy and serves as lender of last resort to prevent global financial collapse.

BIS promotes an agenda of monopoly capitalist fascism. It gave a bridge loan to Hungary in the 1990’s to ensure privatization of that country’s economy. It served as conduit for Eight Families funding of Adolf Hitler- led by the Warburg’s J. Henry Schroeder and Mendelsohn Bank of Amsterdam. Many researchers assert that BIS is at the nadir of global drug money laundering. [16]

It is no coincidence that BIS is headquartered in Switzerland, favorite hiding place for the wealth of the global aristocracy and headquarters for the P-2 Italian Freemason’s Alpina Lodge and Nazi International. Other institutions which the Eight Families control include the World Economic Forum, the International Monetary Conference and the World Trade Organization.

Bretton Woods was a boon to the Eight Families. The IMF and World Bank were central to this “new world order”. In 1944 the first World Bank bonds were floated by Morgan Stanley and First Boston. The French Lazard family became more involved in House of Morgan interests. Lazard Freres- France’s biggest investment bank- is owned by the Lazard and David-Weill families- old Genoese banking scions represented by Michelle Davive. A recent Chairman and CEO of Citigroup was Sanford Weill.

In 1968 Morgan Guaranty launched Euro-Clear, a Brussels-based bank clearing system for Eurodollar securities. It was the first such automated endeavor. Some took to calling Euro-Clear “The Beast”. Brussels serves as headquarters for the new European Central Bank and for NATO. In 1973 Morgan officials met secretly in Bermuda to illegally resurrect the old House of Morgan, twenty years before Glass Steagal Act was repealed. Morgan and the Rockefellers provided the financial backing for Merrill Lynch, boosting it into the Big 5 of US investment banking. Merrill is now part of Bank of America.

John D. Rockefeller used his oil wealth to acquire Equitable Trust, which had gobbled up several large banks and corporations by the 1920’s. The Great Depression helped consolidate Rockefeller’s power. His Chase Bank merged with Kuhn Loeb’s Manhattan Bank to form Chase Manhattan, cementing a long-time family relationship. The Kuhn-Loeb’s had financed – along with Rothschilds – Rockefeller’s quest to become king of the oil patch. National City Bank of Cleveland provided John D. with the money needed to embark upon his monopolization of the US oil industry. The bank was identified in Congressional hearings as being one of three Rothschild-owned banks in the US during the 1870’s, when Rockefeller first incorporated as Standard Oil of Ohio. [17]

One Rockefeller Standard Oil partner was Edward Harkness, whose family came to control Chemical Bank. Another was James Stillman, whose family controlled Manufacturers Hanover Trust. Both banks have merged under the JP Morgan Chase umbrella. Two of James Stillman’s daughters married two of William Rockefeller’s sons. The two families control a big chunk of Citigroup as well. [18]

In the insurance business, the Rockefellers control Metropolitan Life, Equitable Life, Prudential and New York Life. Rockefeller banks control 25% of all assets of the 50 largest US commercial banks and 30% of all assets of the 50 largest insurance companies. [19] Insurance companies- the first in the US was launched by Freemasons through their Woodman’s of America- play a key role in the Bermuda drug money shuffle.

Companies under Rockefeller control include Exxon Mobil, Chevron Texaco, BP Amoco, Marathon Oil, Freeport McMoran, Quaker Oats, ASARCO, United, Delta, Northwest, ITT, International Harvester, Xerox, Boeing, Westinghouse, Hewlett-Packard, Honeywell, International Paper, Pfizer, Motorola, Monsanto, Union Carbide and General Foods.

The Rockefeller Foundation has close financial ties to both Ford and Carnegie Foundations. Other family philanthropic endeavors include Rockefeller Brothers Fund, Rockefeller Institute for Medical Research, General Education Board, Rockefeller University and the University of Chicago- which churns out a steady stream of far right economists as apologists for international capital, including Milton Friedman.

The family owns 30 Rockefeller Plaza, where the national Christmas tree is lighted every year, and Rockefeller Center. David Rockefeller was instrumental in the construction of the World Trade Center towers. The main Rockefeller family home is a hulking complex in upstate New York known as Pocantico Hills. They also own a 32-room 5th Avenue duplex in Manhattan, a mansion in Washington, DC, Monte Sacro Ranch in Venezuela, coffee plantations in Ecuador, several farms in Brazil, an estate at Seal Harbor, Maine and resorts in the Caribbean, Hawaii and Puerto Rico. [20]

The Dulles and Rockefeller families are cousins. Allen Dulles created the CIA, assisted the Nazis, covered up the Kennedy hit from his Warren Commission perch and struck a deal with the Muslim Brotherhood to create mind-controlled assassins. [21]

Brother John Foster Dulles presided over the phony Goldman Sachs trusts before the 1929 stock market crash and helped his brother overthrow governments in Iran and Guatemala. Both were Skull & Bones, Council on Foreign Relations (CFR) insiders and 33rd Degree Masons. [22]

The Rockefellers were instrumental in forming the depopulation-oriented Club of Rome at their family estate in Bellagio, Italy. Their Pocantico Hills estate gave birth to the Trilateral Commission. The family is a major funder of the eugenics movement which spawned Hitler, human cloning and the current DNA obsession in US scientific circles.

John Rockefeller Jr. headed the Population Council until his death. [23] His namesake son is a Senator from West Virginia. Brother Winthrop Rockefeller was Lieutenant Governor of Arkansas and remains the most powerful man in that state. In an October 1975 interview with Playboy magazine, Vice-President Nelson Rockefeller- who was also Governor of New York- articulated his family’s patronizing worldview, “I am a great believer in planning- economic, social, political, military, total world planning.”

But of all the Rockefeller brothers, it is Trilateral Commission (TC) founder and Chase Manhattan Chairman David who has spearheaded the family’s fascist agenda on a global scale. He defended the Shah of Iran, the South African apartheid regime and the Chilean Pinochet junta. He was the biggest financier of the CFR, the TC and (during the Vietnam War) the Committee for an Effective and Durable Peace in Asia- a contract bonanza for those who made their living off the conflict.

Nixon asked him to be Secretary of Treasury, but Rockefeller declined the job, knowing his power was much greater at the helm of the Chase. Author Gary Allen writes in The Rockefeller File that in 1973, “David Rockefeller met with twenty-seven heads of state, including the rulers of Russia and Red China.”

Following the 1975 Nugan Hand Bank/CIA coup against Australian Prime Minister Gough Whitlam, his British Crown-appointed successor Malcolm Fraser sped to the US, where he met with President Gerald Ford after conferring with David Rockefeller. [24]


Read Part II:

History: The Federal Reserve Cartel: Freemasons and The House of Rothschild

By Dean Henderson, May 08, 2023


Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Dean Henderson is the author of Big Oil & Their Bankers in the Persian Gulf: Four Horsemen, Eight Families & Their Global Intelligence, Narcotics & Terror Network and The Grateful Unrich: Revolution in 50 Countries. His Left Hook blog is at www.deanhenderson.wordpress.com

Notes

[1] 10K Filings of Fortune 500 Corporations to SEC. 3-91

[2] 10K Filing of US Trust Corporation to SEC. 6-28-95

[3] “The Federal Reserve ‘Fed Up’. Thomas Schauf. www.davidicke.com 1-02

[4] The Secrets of the Federal Reserve. Eustace Mullins. Bankers Research Institute. Staunton, VA. 1983. p.179

[5] Ibid. p.53

[6] The Triumph of Conservatism. Gabriel Kolko. MacMillan and Company New York. 1963. p.142

[7] Rule by Secrecy: The Hidden History that Connects the Trilateral Commission, the Freemasons and the Great Pyramids. Jim Marrs. HarperCollins Publishers. New York. 2000. p.57

[8] The House of Morgan. Ron Chernow. Atlantic Monthly Press NewYork 1990

[9] Marrs. p.57

[10] Democracy for the Few. Michael Parenti. St. Martin’s Press. New York. 1977. p.178

[11] Chernow

[12] The Great Crash of 1929. John Kenneth Galbraith. Houghton, Mifflin Company. Boston. 1979. p.148

[13] Chernow

[14] Children of the Matrix. David Icke. Bridge of Love. Scottsdale, AZ. 2000

[15] The Confidence Game: How Un-Elected Central Bankers are Governing the Changed World Economy. Steven Solomon. Simon & Schuster. New York. 1995. p.112

[16] Marrs. p.180

[17] Ibid. p.45

[18] The Money Lenders: The People and Politics of the World Banking Crisis. Anthony Sampson. Penguin Books. New York. 1981

[19] The Rockefeller File. Gary Allen. ’76 Press. Seal Beach, CA. 1977

[20] Ibid

[21] Dope Inc.: The Book That Drove Kissinger Crazy. Editors of Executive Intelligence Review. Washington, DC. 1992

[22] Marrs.

[23] The Rockefeller Syndrome. Ferdinand Lundberg. Lyle Stuart Inc. Secaucus, NJ. 1975. p.296

[24] Marrs. p.53


Big Oil & Their Bankers In The Persian Gulf: Four Horsemen, Eight Families & Their Global Intelligence, Narcotics & Terror Network: Henderson, Dean: 9781453757734: Amazon.com: BooksBig Oil & Their Bankers In The Persian Gulf: Four Horsemen, Eight Families & Their Global Intelligence, Narcotics & Terror Network

by Dean Henderson

Publisher: ‎ CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform; 3rd edition (September 10, 2010)

Paperback: ‎ 480 pages

ISBN-10: ‎ 1453757732

ISBN-13: ‎ 978-1453757734

Big Oil… pulls back the covers to expose a centuries-old cabal of global oligarchs, whose control over the global economy is based on hegemony over the planet’s three most valuable commodities: oil, guns and drugs- combined with ownership of the world’s central banks.Henderson implicates these oligarchs in the orchestration of a string of conspiracies from Pearl Harbor to the Kennedy Assassination to 911. He follows the trail of dirty money up the food chain to the interbred Eight Families who- from their City of London base- control the Four Horsemen of Oil, the global drug trade and the permanent war economy.”Big Oil… is an extraordinary expose of the powers and events that are exacting a heavy toll on us, the people”.- Nexus New Times Magazine. Australia.”Big Oil… is hair-raising and a masterpiece which deserves not less than the Pulitzer Prize in Journalism. This book should be a requisite for every American to study.”- Dr. Carlos J. Canggiano, M.D., Juana Diaz, Puerto Rico.

Click here to purchase.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name.

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

First published by Global Research on November 10, 2023

***

In the year 1962 the American scientist Allan H. Frey carried out experiments with pulsed microwaves, which produced clicking, buzz, hissing or knocking sounds in the heads of people at a distance of up to several thousands yards. In his report, he also wrote that with the change of parameters he can produce pins and needles sensation or perception of severe buffeting in the head and claimed that this energy “could possibly be used as a tool to explore nervous system coding… and for stimulating the nervous system without the damage caused by electrodes“ (see this).

In other words, Allan Frey was on the path to finding the way how to manipulate the human nervous system at distance. This was quickly understood by the U.S. Government. For the next two decades Frey, funded by the Office of Naval Research and the U.S. Army, was the most active researcher on the bioeffects of microwave radiation in the country. Frey caused rats to become docile by exposing them to radiation at an average power level of only 50 microwatts per square centimeter. He altered specific behaviors of rats at 8 microwatts per square centimeter. He altered the heart rate of live frogs at 3 microwatts per square centimeter. At only 0.6 microwatts per square centimeter, he caused isolated frogs’ hearts to stop beating by timing the microwave pulses at a precise point during the heart’s rhythm (see this and this).

In 1975, Allan Frey published  his research on blood-brain barrier in the Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, where blood-brain barrier (protecting brain from poison entering it together with blood) of rats, illuminated by pulsed radiofrequency, allowed dye to penetrate into their brains. His findings were confirmed by 13 different laboratories in 6 countries and with the use of different animals.

In 2012, Allan H. Frey wrote an article  where he described how the American Brooks Air Force falsified his experiment by selecting a contractor, who injected the dye into the intestines instead of into the blood, and in this way made sure that the dye will not appear in the brain. This was supposed to help the U.S. Air Force to obtain the aproval of people to build radars in their vicinity. According to Frey, the same Brooks Air Force Base later tried to “discredit unclassified research in the microwave area” in order to cover “a classified microwave-bio weapons program.”

Allan Frey concluded: “funding for open microwave-bio research in the United States was essentially shut down.” For that matter the general public (in the whole world) does not know anything about the possibility to control their brain activity at distance by the effects of pulsed microwaves on their nervous system until now.

In March 2021, the American scientist James C. Lin wrote an article on Havana syndrome, where he wrote that this trouble caused to American diplomats and government agents in Cuba and elsewhere, was most probably produced by pulsed microwaves (see this).

On December 5 2020 the U.S. Academy of sciences published a study on Havana syndrome, where it stated:

“Overall, directed pulsed RF (radio frequency) energy, especially in those with the distinct early manifestations, appears to be the most plausible mechanism in explaining these cases among those that the committee considered.”

But on March 2, 2023 the American television CNN published an article on the report of the 7 U.S. intelligence agencies. It said that “there is no credible evidence that a foreign adversary has a weapon or collection device that is capable of causing the mysterious incidents“ (Havana syndrome). In this way the U.S. intelligence agencies tried deny the validity of the scientific report by U.S. Academy of Science and to hide from the world general public the fact that pulsed microwaves can be used to attack their minds.

There is a large body of scientific experiments proving that extra low frequencies of electromagnetic radiation can produce effects in the human nervous system. What is common to microwaves and extra long electromagnetic waves is that both of them carry electric and magnetic fields. The neurons are full of ions and this electrolyte can easily function as an antenna, in which electromagnetic waves will produce electrical currents, which are essetial parts of nervous impulses in the brain.

At the International Conference on Nonlinear Electrodynamics in Biological Systems in 1983, sposored among others by the U.S. Air Force Office of Scientific Research and the Office of Naval Research, Friedeman Kaiser from the Institute of Theoretical Physics at the University of Stuttgart lectured on effects of extra low frequencies of electromagnetic waves on the human nervous system or “extreme high sensitivity of certain biological systems to very weak electromagnetic signals.” He stated:

“In the brain wave model… The external stimulus may only serve as a trigger to start an internal response signal… The system obeys the external drive, it oscillates with the external frequency…the slow external drive leads to an increasing modulation of the amplitude with the external frequency.”

He called this phenomenon “entrainment“ and suggested that “excitations of the proposed types could possibly lead to changes in the behavior and function of biosystems” (pg. 394). There is no better explanation for the Friedman Kaiser’s lecture than that the ELF electromagnetic frequencies produce electrical currents in the electrolyte inside of the nervous tissue. In the closing speech at that conference Samuel Koslov, a leading personality of the mind control project Pandora of the American Navy declared:

”If much of what we have heard is indeed correct, it may be not less significant to the nation than the prospects that faced the physics community in 1939 when the long-time predicted fissionability of the nucleus was actually demonstrated. You may recall the famous letter of Albert Einstein to President Roosvelt. When we’re in a position to do so in terms of our proofs, I would propose that an analogous letter is required” (pg. 596). 

Already in 1980 John B. Alexander, former director of the U.S. Los Alamos National Laboratory in his article in the Military Review on remote control of human brain’s activity, wrote:

”whoever makes the first major breakthrough in this field will have a quantum lead over his opponent, an advantage similar to sole possession of nuclear weapons.”

In 2014, Chinese scientists published the results of an experiment in which they searched for microwave conductivity of electrolyte solutions. In the introduction they stressed that their experiment “plays an important role in investigating the interaction between electromagnetic waves and biological tissues that have high water content and a significant concentration of ions.” For their experiment they used a solution of salt. The chemical formula of salt is NaCl. It means it contains atoms of sodium and chloride. Ions of both of those atoms play an important role in the firing of nerve cells. The experiment proved that this electrolyte is conductive for microwaves up to  20 GHz frequency (see this). It is highly reasonable to expect that if those microwaves are pulsed in the frequencies of the frequencies of activity of neurons in the brain they will be “entrained“ to oscillate with those frequencies.

The MCS America organization, which fights against pollution, confirms this conclusion in its study on Electromagnetic Fields Sensitivity. The study states:

“The body can collect the signal and turn it into electric currents just like the antenna of a radio set or a cell phone. These currents are carried by ions… flowing through the living tissues and in the blood vessels (a system of tubes full of an electrically-conducting salty fluid that connect almost every part of the body) when these currents impinge on cell membranes, which are normally electrically charged, they try to vibrate in time with the current” (let us note that a neuron is a cell as well).

The veracity of those “speculations“ or “conspiracy theories“ is confirmed by the experiment, where 20 volunteers were exposed to the pulses of 217 Hz used in cell phone telephony and at the recordings of their electroencephalograms evoked potentials (or simply told electrical currents in the frequency) of 217 Hz were found (see this) or another one, where cell phone microwaves pulsed in 11 to 15 Hz produced changes in EEG during the sleep in 30 volunteers (see this). As well Australian scientists found out that:

“Not only could the cell phone signals alter a person’s behavior during the call, the effects of the disrupted brain-wave patterns continued long after the phone was switched off (see this).”

To complete this information it is necessary to say that the nervous system functions digitally and nervous actions differ by frequency and number of nervous impulses in which great number of neurons synchronize their action. In this way the activity of the human brain can be completely controlled including the thoughts. Robert Becker, who has been twice nominated for the Nobel prize for his research on electric potentials in organisms published in 1985 a book “Body Electric“, where he quoted the experiment, which was released voluntarily on basis of Freedom of Information Act. The author of the experiment J. F. Schapitz stated:

“In this investigation it will be shown that the spoken word of hypnotist may also be conveyed by modulated electromagnetic energy directly into the subconscious parts of the human brain — i. e. without employing any technical devices for receiving or transcoding the messages and without the person exposed to such influence having a chance to control the information input consciously.”

In one of the four experiments subjects should have been given a test of hundred questions, ranging from easy to technical ones. Later, not knowing they were being irradiated they would be subjected to information beams suggesting the answers to the questions they had left blank, amnesia for some of their correct answers and memory falsification of their correct answers. After 2 weeks they had to pass the test again. The results of those experiments were never published. But evidently already at this time the secret services were working on technologies how to impose thoughts to human beings with the use of pulsed microwaves to transmit into human brains human speech in ultrasound frequencies, which the brain perceives, but the human being does not realize this since it is not hearing the speech.

For governments it is not difficult to pulse the cell phone signals in the brain frequencies and in this way manipulate the thoughts of their own or foreign citizens. The difference between pulsed microwaves and extra long electromagnetic waves is that pulsed microwaves can be targeted on one person (or the whole nation if cell phone signals are pulsed in brain frequencies) while extra long electromagnetic waves, transmitted in brain frequencies, with their length up to 300 hundred thousands kilometers will reach brains in large areas. For sure so far the legislations around the world (except the Chile and Brazil) do not prohibit such actions to the governments or anybody else on human brains (for example Elon Musk is building system of 20.000 satellites around the planet and working on neuralink research at the same time).

Neurotechnologists around the world, who do not dare to disclose the national security information they had to sign, before starting research in the area, are calling for creation of legislations protecting people against such manipulations of their minds (see this).

The proposal of such legislation presented to the European Union, signed by 11 world organizations, you can find at the address (see this).

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Mojmir Babacek was born in 1947 in Prague, Czech Republic. Graduated in 1972 at Charles University in Prague in philosophy and political economy. In 1978 signed the document defending human rights in  communist Czechoslovakia „Charter 77“. Since 1981 until 1988 lived in emigration in the USA. Since 1996 he has published articles on different subjects mostly in the Czech and international alternative media.

In 2010, he published a book on the 9/11 attacks in the Czech language. Since the 1990s he has been striving to help to achieve the international ban of remote control of the activity of the human nervous system and human minds with the use of neurotechnology.

Featured image is from Children’s Health Defense

The WEF Davos 2024 Circus: Their One Objective Is to “Massively Reduce World Population”

By Peter Koenig, January 22, 2024

The WEF circus has been going on for too long – 54 years. The WEF’s naval-glancing organizers and participants are distancing themselves ever-more from reality, while they have one objective and one objective only – massively reducing world population, so that Mother Earth’s remaining natural resources will serve a small elite “forever”, instead of being swallowed by “useless eaters”, who can rapidly be replaced by robots, transhumans (chipped human survivors), and Artificial Intelligence (AI). 

WHO Director General Tedros’ Hypothetical “Disease X”. Pandemic Treaty Is a Fraud. Demands Compliance for “Next Pandemic”

By Steve Watson and Prof Michel Chossudovsky, January 22, 2024

WHO Director General Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, continues to mislead public opinion Worldwide. There is no such thing as  “Disease X”. It’s an invented construct, first presented by Bill Gates two years ago at the February 2022 Munich Security Conference.

The Fate of Global Maritime Trade Does Not Hinge upon the Narrow Red Sea Strait

By Dr. Mathew Maavak, January 22, 2024

Houthi rebels from eastern Yemen, which faces the Red Sea, were the first to create a new frontline by launching missiles, drones and fast attack boats against cargo vessels linked to the West and its allies. Russian and Chinese vessels were eventually assured of safe passage. Some ships have resorted to broadcasting their neutrality via the Automatic Identification System (AIS) used in the maritime industry. 

Biden, Blinken and Burns. Their Roles in the Slaughter in Gaza

By Steven Sahiounie, January 22, 2024

Israel receives its weapons, humanitarian supplies and cash benefits from the US, paid for by the American taxpayers. In good times, the taxpayers don’t seem to mind, but when they see images out of Gaza showing the wholesale destruction of homes, infrastructure, and the accompanying slaughter of over 23,000 people, most of which are women and children, they want it to stop immediately.

Israel, the World Court, and the Conscience of Humanity Are All on Trial at The Hague

By Prof. Anthony J. Hall, January 22, 2024

I don’t think its an overstatement to observe that the future of the world is hanging in the balance as 15 World Court judges at the Hague deliberate over the contending legal submissions made by the governments of Israel and South Africa. At this preliminary stage the core contention comes down to the question of whether or not it is “plausible” that the Genocide Convention is being violated in the course of the Gaza Massacre.

Psoriasis After COVID-19 mRNA Vaccination

By Dr. William Makis, January 22, 2024

COVID-19 mRNA Vaccines can cause a wide variety of autoimmune diseases and the sudden development of any autoimmune disease in an mRNA Vaccinated person should implicate the vaccine.

The World Economic Forum: How It Usurps Treaty-Based Intergovernmental Institutions

By Elizabeth Woodworth, January 22, 2024

This essay will explore the arbitrary merger of state and corporate power that has been brought about by the World Economic Forum (WEF). We will first briefly examine the history of the WEF and its original emphasis on stakeholder capitalism. We will then look briefly at its founder, composition, funding, legal status, mission statement, and original code of ethics.

Brutal Reality: Psychopaths Form Majority of Today’s World Leaders

By Julian Rose, January 22, 2024

When one hears and sees Israel’s Prime Minister Netanyahu, declaring the absolute supremacy of his Zionist tribe and its goals of ‘taking back’ the State of Israel – via the slaughter of any and all Palestinian ‘animals’ whose home land is the Gaza Strip – one is confronting face to face, a clinically insane individual whose medical condition, if it were to be officially assessed, would be described as ‘psychopath’.

WEF Roundup: Disease X. Digital ID ‘Very Necessary’ for Tracking the Unvaccinated. AI Can Speed Up Development of New Vaccines

By Michael Nevradakis, January 22, 2024

The threat of a new pandemic and so-called “misinformation.” The future of democracy. The future impact of artificial intelligence (AI) in society. The “green agenda.” These were just some of the topics on the agenda at the annual meeting of the World Economic Forum (WEF) in Davos, Switzerland, which concluded today.

Remember John Pilger and His Legacy: “The Great Game of Smashing Countries”

By John Pilger, January 22, 2024

As a tsunami of crocodile tears engulfs Western politicians, history is suppressed. More than a generation ago, Afghanistan won its freedom, which the United States, Britain and their “allies” destroyed.

The Military Situation In The Ukraine. Jacques Baud

January 23rd, 2024 by Jacques Baud

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Visit and follow us on InstagramTwitter and Facebook. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

***

First published on May 5, 2022

 

Part One: The Road To War

 

For years, from Mali to Afghanistan, I have worked for peace and risked my life for it. It is therefore not a question of justifying war, but of understanding what led us to it. [….]

Let’s try to examine the roots of the [Ukrainian] conflict. It starts with those who for the last eight years have been talking about “separatists” or “independentists” from Donbass. This is a misnomer. The referendums conducted by the two self-proclaimed Republics of Donetsk and Lugansk in May 2014, were not referendums of “independence” (независимость), as some unscrupulous journalists have claimed, but referendums of “self-determination” or “autonomy” (самостоятельность). The qualifier “pro-Russian” suggests that Russia was a party to the conflict, which was not the case, and the term “Russian speakers” would have been more honest. Moreover, these referendums were conducted against the advice of Vladimir Putin.

In fact, these Republics were not seeking to separate from Ukraine, but to have a status of autonomy, guaranteeing them the use of the Russian language as an official language–because the first legislative act of the new government resulting from the American-sponsored overthrow of [the democratically-elected] President Yanukovych, was the abolition, on February 23, 2014, of the Kivalov-Kolesnichenko law of 2012 that made Russian an official language in Ukraine. A bit like if German putschists decided that French and Italian would no longer be official languages in Switzerland.

This decision caused a storm in the Russian-speaking population. The result was fierce repression against the Russian-speaking regions (Odessa, Dnepropetrovsk, Kharkov, Lugansk and Donetsk) which was carried out beginning in February 2014 and led to a militarization of the situation and some horrific massacres of the Russian population (in Odessa and Mariupol, the most notable).

At this stage, too rigid and engrossed in a doctrinaire approach to operations, the Ukrainian general staff subdued the enemy but without managing to actually prevail. The war waged by the autonomists [consisted in].… highly mobile operations conducted with light means. With a more flexible and less doctrinaire approach, the rebels were able to exploit the inertia of Ukrainian forces to repeatedly “trap” them.

In 2014, when I was at NATO, I was responsible for the fight against the proliferation of small arms, and we were trying to detect Russian arms deliveries to the rebels, to see if Moscow was involved. The information we received then came almost entirely from Polish intelligence services and did not “fit” with the information coming from the OSCE [Organization for Security and Co-operation in Europe]—and despite rather crude allegations, there were no deliveries of weapons and military equipment from Russia.

The rebels were armed thanks to the defection of Russian-speaking Ukrainian units that went over to the rebel side. As Ukrainian failures continued, tank, artillery and anti-aircraft battalions swelled the ranks of the autonomists. This is what pushed the Ukrainians to commit to the Minsk Agreements.

But just after signing the Minsk 1 Agreements, the Ukrainian President Petro Poroshenko launched a massive “anti-terrorist operation” (ATO/Антитерористична операція) against the Donbass. Poorly advised by NATO officers, the Ukrainians suffered a crushing defeat in Debaltsevo, which forced them to engage in the Minsk 2 Agreements.

It is essential to recall here that Minsk 1 (September 2014) and Minsk 2 (February 2015) Agreements did not provide for the separation or independence of the Republics, but their autonomy within the framework of Ukraine. Those who have read the Agreements (there are very few who actually have) will note that it is written that the status of the Republics was to be negotiated between Kiev and the representatives of the Republics, for an internal solution within Ukraine.

That is why since 2014, Russia has systematically demanded the implementation of the Minsk Agreements while refusing to be a party to the negotiations, because it was an internal matter of Ukraine. On the other side, the West—led by France—systematically tried to replace Minsk Agreements with the “Normandy format,” which put Russians and Ukrainians face-to-face. However, let us remember that there were never any Russian troops in the Donbass before 23-24 February 2022. Moreover, OSCE observers have never observed the slightest trace of Russian units operating in the Donbass before then. For example, the U.S. intelligence map published by the Washington Post on December 3, 2021 does not show Russian troops in the Donbass.

In October 2015, Vasyl Hrytsak, director of the Ukrainian Security Service (SBU), confessed that only 56 Russian fighters had been observed in the Donbass. This was exactly comparable to the Swiss who went to fight in Bosnia on weekends, in the 1990s, or the French who go to fight in Ukraine today.

The Ukrainian army was then in a deplorable state. In October 2018, after four years of war, the chief Ukrainian military prosecutor, Anatoly Matios, stated that Ukraine had lost 2,700 men in the Donbass: 891 from illnesses, 318 from road accidents, 177 from other accidents, 175 from poisonings (alcohol, drugs), 172 from careless handling of weapons, 101 from breaches of security regulations, 228 from murders and 615 from suicides.

In fact, the Ukrainian army was undermined by the corruption of its cadres and no longer enjoyed the support of the population. According to a British Home Office report, in the March/April 2014 recall of reservists, 70 percent did not show up for the first session, 80 percent for the second, 90 percent for the third, and 95 percent for the fourth. In October/November 2017, 70% of conscripts did not show up for the “Fall 2017” recall campaign. This is not counting suicides and desertions (often over to the autonomists), which reached up to 30 percent of the workforce in the ATO area. Young Ukrainians refused to go and fight in the Donbass and preferred emigration, which also explains, at least partially, the demographic deficit of the country.

The Ukrainian Ministry of Defense then turned to NATO to help make its armed forces more “attractive.” Having already worked on similar projects within the framework of the United Nations, I was asked by NATO to participate in a program to restore the image of the Ukrainian armed forces. But this is a long-term process and the Ukrainians wanted to move quickly.

So, to compensate for the lack of soldiers, the Ukrainian government resorted to paramilitary militias…. In 2020, they constituted about 40 percent of the Ukrainian forces and numbered about 102,000 men, according to Reuters. They were armed, financed and trained by the United States, Great Britain, Canada and France. There were more than 19 nationalities.

These militias had been operating in the Donbass since 2014, with Western support. Even if one can argue about the term “Nazi,” the fact remains that these militias are violent, convey a nauseating ideology and are virulently anti-Semitic…[and] are composed of fanatical and brutal individuals. The best known of these is the Azov Regiment, whose emblem is reminiscent of the 2nd SS Das Reich Panzer Division, which is revered in the Ukraine for liberating Kharkov from the Soviets in 1943, before carrying out the 1944 Oradour-sur-Glane massacre in France. [….]

The characterization of the Ukrainian paramilitaries as “Nazis” or “neo-Nazis” is considered Russian propaganda. But that’s not the view of the Times of Israel, or the West Point Academy’s Center for Counterterrorism. In 2014, Newsweek magazine seemed to associate them more with… the Islamic State. Take your pick!

So, the West supported and continued to arm militias that have been guilty of numerous crimes against civilian populations since 2014: rape, torture and massacres….

The integration of these paramilitary forces into the Ukrainian National Guard was not at all accompanied by a “denazification,” as some claim.

Among the many examples, that of the Azov Regiment’s insignia is instructive:

In 2022, very schematically, the Ukrainian armed forces fighting the Russian offensive were organized as:

  • The Army, subordinated to the Ministry of Defense. It is organized into 3 army corps and composed of maneuver formations (tanks, heavy artillery, missiles, etc.).
  • The National Guard, which depends on the Ministry of the Interior and is organized into 5 territorial commands.

The National Guard is therefore a territorial defense force that is not part of the Ukrainian army. It includes paramilitary militias, called “volunteer battalions” (добровольчі батальйоні), also known by the evocative name of “reprisal battalions,” and composed of infantry. Primarily trained for urban combat, they now defend cities such as Kharkov, Mariupol, Odessa, Kiev, etc.

Part Two: The War

As a former head of analysis of Warsaw Pact forces in the Swiss strategic intelligence service, I observe with sadness—but not astonishment—that our services are no longer able to understand the military situation in Ukraine. The self-proclaimed “experts” who parade on our TV screens tirelessly relay the same information modulated by the claim that Russia—and Vladimir Putin—is irrational. Let’s take a step back.

  1. The Outbreak Of War

Since November 2021, the Americans have been constantly threatening a Russian invasion of Ukraine. However, the Ukrainians at first did not seem to agree. Why not?

We have to go back to March 24, 2021. On that day, Volodymyr Zelensky issued a decree for the recapture of the Crimea, and began to deploy his forces to the south of the country. At the same time, several NATO exercises were conducted between the Black Sea and the Baltic Sea, accompanied by a significant increase in reconnaissance flights along the Russian border. Russia then conducted several exercises to test the operational readiness of its troops and to show that it was following the evolution of the situation.

Things calmed down until October-November with the end of the ZAPAD 21 exercises, whose troop movements were interpreted as a reinforcement for an offensive against Ukraine. However, even the Ukrainian authorities refuted the idea of Russian preparations for a war, and Oleksiy Reznikov, Ukrainian Minister of Defense, states that there had been no change on its border since the spring.

In violation of the Minsk Agreements, Ukraine was conducting air operations in Donbass using drones, including at least one strike against a fuel depot in Donetsk in October 2021. The American press noted this, but not the Europeans; and no one condemned these violations.

In February 2022, events came to a head. On February 7, during his visit to Moscow, Emmanuel Macron reaffirmed to Vladimir Putin his commitment to the Minsk Agreements, a commitment he would repeat after his meeting with Volodymyr Zelensky the next day. But on February 11, in Berlin, after nine hours of work, the meeting of political advisors to the leaders of the “Normandy format” ended without any concrete result: the Ukrainians still refused to apply the Minsk Agreements, apparently under pressure from the United States. Vladimir Putin noted that Macron had made empty promises and that the West was not ready to enforce the agreements, the same opposition to a settlement it had exhibited for eight years.

Ukrainian preparations in the contact zone continued. The Russian Parliament became alarmed; and on February 15 it asked Vladimir Putin to recognize the independence of the Republics, which he initially refused to do.

On 17 February, President Joe Biden announced that Russia would attack Ukraine in the next few days. How did he know this? It is a mystery. But since the 16th, the artillery shelling of the population of Donbass had increased dramatically, as the daily reports of the OSCE observers show. Naturally, neither the media, nor the European Union, nor NATO, nor any Western government reacted or intervened. It would be said later that this was Russian disinformation. In fact, it seems that the European Union and some countries have deliberately kept silent about the massacre of the Donbass population, knowing that this would provoke a Russian intervention.

At the same time, there were reports of sabotage in the Donbass. On 18 January, Donbass fighters intercepted saboteurs, who spoke Polish and were equipped with Western equipment and who were seeking to create chemical incidents in Gorlivka. They could have been CIA mercenaries, led or “advised” by Americans and composed of Ukrainian or European fighters, to carry out sabotage actions in the Donbass Republics.

In fact, as early as February 16, Joe Biden knew that the Ukrainians had begun intense shelling the civilian population of Donbass, forcing Vladimir Putin to make a difficult choice: to help Donbass militarily and create an international problem, or to stand by and watch the Russian-speaking people of Donbass being crushed.

If he decided to intervene, Putin could invoke the international obligation of “Responsibility To Protect” (R2P). But he knew that whatever its nature or scale, the intervention would trigger a storm of sanctions. Therefore, whether Russian intervention were limited to the Donbass or went further to put pressure on the West over the status of the Ukraine, the price to pay would be the same. This is what he explained in his speech on February 21. On that day, he agreed to the request of the Duma and recognized the independence of the two Donbass Republics and, at the same time, he signed friendship and assistance treaties with them.

The Ukrainian artillery bombardment of the Donbass population continued, and, on 23 February, the two Republics asked for military assistance from Russia. On 24 February, Vladimir Putin invoked Article 51 of the United Nations Charter, which provides for mutual military assistance in the framework of a defensive alliance.

In order to make the Russian intervention seem totally illegal in the eyes of the public, Western powers deliberately hid the fact that the war actually started on February 16. The Ukrainian army was preparing to attack the Donbass as early as 2021, as some Russian and European intelligence services were well aware.

In his speech of February 24, Vladimir Putin stated the two objectives of his operation: “demilitarize” and “denazify” the Ukraine. So, it was not a question of taking over Ukraine, nor even, presumably, of occupying it; and certainly not of destroying it.

From then on, our knowledge of the course of the operation is limited: the Russians have excellent security for their operations (OPSEC) and the details of their planning are not known. But fairly quickly, the course of the operation allows us to understand how the strategic objectives were translated on the operational level.

Demilitarization:

  • ground destruction of Ukrainian aviation, air defense systems and reconnaissance assets;
  • neutralization of command and intelligence structures (C3I), as well as the main logistical routes in the depth of the territory;
  • encirclement of the bulk of the Ukrainian army massed in the southeast of the country.

Denazification:

  • destruction or neutralization of volunteer battalions operating in the cities of Odessa, Kharkov, and Mariupol, as well as in various facilities in the territory.
  1. Demilitarization

The Russian offensive was carried out in a very “classic” manner. Initially—as the Israelis had done in 1967—with the destruction on the ground of the air force in the very first hours. Then, we witnessed a simultaneous progression along several axes according to the principle of “flowing water”: advance everywhere where resistance was weak and leave the cities (very demanding in terms of troops) for later. In the north, the Chernobyl power plant was occupied immediately to prevent acts of sabotage. The images of Ukrainian and Russian soldiers guarding the plant together are of course not shown.

The idea that Russia is trying to take over Kiev, the capital, to eliminate Zelensky, comes typically from the West…. But Vladimir Putin never intended to shoot or topple Zelensky. Instead, Russia seeks to keep him in power by pushing him to negotiate, by surrounding Kiev. The Russians want to obtain the neutrality of Ukraine.

Many Western commentators were surprised that the Russians continued to seek a negotiated solution while conducting military operations. The explanation lies in the Russian strategic outlook since the Soviet era. For the West, war begins when politics ends. However, the Russian approach follows a Clausewitzian inspiration: war is the continuity of politics and one can move fluidly from one to the other, even during combat. This allows one to create pressure on the adversary and push him to negotiate.

From an operational point of view, the Russian offensive was an example of previous military action and planning: in six days, the Russians seized a territory as large as the United Kingdom, with a speed of advance greater than what the Wehrmacht had achieved in 1940.

The bulk of the Ukrainian army was deployed in the south of the country in preparation for a major operation against the Donbass. This is why Russian forces were able to encircle it from the beginning of March in the “cauldron” between Slavyansk, Kramatorsk and Severodonetsk, with a thrust from the East through Kharkov and another from the South from Crimea. Troops from the Donetsk (DPR) and Lugansk (LPR) Republics are complementing the Russian forces with a push from the East.

At this stage, Russian forces are slowly tightening the noose, but are no longer under any time pressure or schedule. Their demilitarization goal is all but achieved and the remaining Ukrainian forces no longer have an operational and strategic command structure.

The “slowdown” that our “experts” attribute to poor logistics is only the consequence of having achieved their objectives. Russia does not want to engage in an occupation of the entire Ukrainian territory. In fact, it appears that Russia is trying to limit its advance to the linguistic border of the country.

Our media speak of indiscriminate bombardments against the civilian population, especially in Kharkov, and horrific images are widely broadcast. However, Gonzalo Lira, a Latin American correspondent who lives there, presents us with a calm city on March 10 and March 11. It is true that it is a large city and we do not see everything—but this seems to indicate that we are not in the total war that we are served continuously on our TV screens. As for the Donbass Republics, they have “liberated” their own territories and are fighting in the city of Mariupol.

  1. Denazification

In cities like Kharkov, Mariupol and Odessa, the Ukrainian defense is provided by the paramilitary militias. They know that the objective of “denazification” is aimed primarily at them. For an attacker in an urbanized area, civilians are a problem. This is why Russia is seeking to create humanitarian corridors to empty cities of civilians and leave only the militias, to fight them more easily.

Conversely, these militias seek to keep civilians in the cities from evacuating in order to dissuade the Russian army from fighting there. This is why they are reluctant to implement these corridors and do everything to ensure that Russian efforts are unsuccessful—they use the civilian population as “human shields.” Videos showing civilians trying to leave Mariupol and beaten up by fighters of the Azov regiment are of course carefully censored by the Western media.

On Facebook, the Azov group was considered in the same category as the Islamic State [ISIS] and subject to the platform’s “policy on dangerous individuals and organizations.” It was therefore forbidden to glorify its activities, and “posts” that were favorable to it were systematically banned. But on February 24, Facebook changed its policy and allowed posts favorable to the militia. In the same spirit, in March, the platform authorized, in the former Eastern countries, calls for the murder of Russian soldiers and leaders. So much for the values that inspire our leaders.

Our media propagate a romantic image of popular resistance by the Ukrainian people. It is this image that led the European Union to finance the distribution of arms to the civilian population. In my capacity as head of peacekeeping at the UN, I worked on the issue of civilian protection. We found that violence against civilians occurred in very specific contexts. In particular, when weapons are abundant and there are no command structures.

These command structures are the essence of armies: their function is to channel the use of force towards an objective. By arming citizens in a haphazard manner, as is currently the case, the EU is turning them into combatants, with the consequential effect of making them potential targets. Moreover, without command, without operational goals, the distribution of arms leads inevitably to settling of scores, banditry and actions that are more deadly than effective. War becomes a matter of emotions. Force becomes violence. This is what happened in Tawarga (Libya) from 11 to 13 August 2011, where 30,000 black Africans were massacred with weapons parachuted (illegally) by France. By the way, the British Royal Institute for Strategic Studies (RUSI) does not see any added value in these arms deliveries.

Moreover, by delivering arms to a country at war, one exposes oneself to being considered a belligerent. The Russian strikes of March 13, 2022, against the Mykolayev air base follow Russian warnings that arms shipments would be treated as hostile targets.

The EU is repeating the disastrous experience of the Third Reich in the final hours of the Battle of Berlin. War must be left to the military and when one side has lost, it must be admitted. And if there is to be resistance, it must be led and structured. But we are doing exactly the opposite—we are pushing citizens to go and fight, and at the same time, Facebook authorizes calls for the murder of Russian soldiers and leaders. So much for the values that inspire us.

Some intelligence services see this irresponsible decision as a way to use the Ukrainian population as cannon fodder to fight Vladimir Putin’s Russia…. It would have been better to engage in negotiations and thus obtain guarantees for the civilian population than to add fuel to the fire. It is easy to be combative with the blood of others.

  1. The Maternity Hospital At Mariupol

It is important to understand beforehand that it is not the Ukrainian army that is defending Mariupol, but the Azov militia, composed of foreign mercenaries.

In its March 7, 2022 summary of the situation, the Russian UN mission in New York stated that “Residents report that Ukrainian armed forces expelled staff from the Mariupol city birth hospital No. 1 and set up a firing post inside the facility.” On March 8, the independent Russian media Lenta.ru, published the testimony of civilians from Mariupol who told that the maternity hospital was taken over by the militia of the Azov regiment, and who drove out the civilian occupants by threatening them with their weapons. They confirmed the statements of the Russian ambassador a few hours earlier.

The hospital in Mariupol occupies a dominant position, perfectly suited for the installation of anti-tank weapons and for observation. On 9 March, Russian forces struck the building. According to CNN, 17 people were wounded, but the images do not show any casualties in the building and there is no evidence that the victims mentioned are related to this strike. There is talk of children, but in reality, there is nothing. This does not prevent the leaders of the EU from seeing this as a war crime. And this allows Zelensky to call for a no-fly zone over Ukraine.

In reality, we do not know exactly what happened. But the sequence of events tends to confirm that Russian forces struck a position of the Azov regiment and that the maternity ward was then free of civilians.

The problem is that the paramilitary militias that defend the cities are encouraged by the international community not to respect the rules of war. It seems that the Ukrainians have replayed the scenario of the Kuwait City maternity hospital in 1990, which was totally staged by the firm Hill & Knowlton for $10.7 million in order to convince the United Nations Security Council to intervene in Iraq for Operation Desert Shield/Storm.

Western politicians have accepted civilian strikes in the Donbass for eight years without adopting any sanctions against the Ukrainian government. We have long since entered a dynamic where Western politicians have agreed to sacrifice international law towards their goal of weakening Russia.

Part Three: Conclusions

As an ex-intelligence professional, the first thing that strikes me is the total absence of Western intelligence services in accurately representing the situation over the past year…. In fact, it seems that throughout the Western world intelligence services have been overwhelmed by the politicians. The problem is that it is the politicians who decide—the best intelligence service in the world is useless if the decision-maker does not listen. This is what has happened during this crisis.

That said, while a few intelligence services had a very accurate and rational picture of the situation, others clearly had the same picture as that propagated by our media… The problem is that, from experience, I have found them to be extremely bad at the analytical level—doctrinaire, they lack the intellectual and political independence necessary to assess a situation with military “quality.”

Second, it seems that in some European countries, politicians have deliberately responded ideologically to the situation. That is why this crisis has been irrational from the beginning. It should be noted that all the documents that were presented to the public during this crisis were presented by politicians based on commercial sources.

Some Western politicians obviously wanted there to be a conflict. In the United States, the attack scenarios presented by Anthony Blinken to the UN Security Council were only the product of the imagination of a Tiger Team working for him—he did exactly as Donald Rumsfeld did in 2002, who “bypassed” the CIA and other intelligence services that were much less assertive about Iraqi chemical weapons.

The dramatic developments we are witnessing today have causes that we knew about but refused to see:

  • on the strategic level, the expansion of NATO (which we have not dealt with here);
  • on the political level, the Western refusal to implement the Minsk Agreements;
  • and operationally, the continuous and repeated attacks on the civilian population of the Donbass over the past years and the dramatic increase in late February 2022.

In other words, we can naturally deplore and condemn the Russian attack. But WE (that is: the United States, France and the European Union in the lead) have created the conditions for a conflict to break out. We show compassion for the Ukrainian people and the two million refugees. That is fine. But if we had had a modicum of compassion for the same number of refugees from the Ukrainian populations of Donbass massacred by their own government and who sought refuge in Russia for eight years, none of this would probably have happened.

[….]

Whether the term “genocide” applies to the abuses suffered by the people of Donbass is an open question. The term is generally reserved for cases of greater magnitude (Holocaust, etc.). But the definition given by the Genocide Convention is probably broad enough to apply to this case.

Clearly, this conflict has led us into hysteria. Sanctions seem to have become the preferred tool of our foreign policies. If we had insisted that Ukraine abide by the Minsk Agreements, which we had negotiated and endorsed, none of this would have happened. Vladimir Putin’s condemnation is also ours. There is no point in whining afterwards—we should have acted earlier. However, neither Emmanuel Macron (as guarantor and member of the UN Security Council), nor Olaf Scholz, nor Volodymyr Zelensky have respected their commitments. In the end, the real defeat is that of those who have no voice.

The European Union was unable to promote the implementation of the Minsk agreements—on the contrary, it did not react when Ukraine was bombing its own population in the Donbass. Had it done so, Vladimir Putin would not have needed to react. Absent from the diplomatic phase, the EU distinguished itself by fueling the conflict. On February 27, the Ukrainian government agreed to enter into negotiations with Russia. But a few hours later, the European Union voted a budget of 450 million euros to supply arms to the Ukraine, adding fuel to the fire. From then on, the Ukrainians felt that they did not need to reach an agreement. The resistance of the Azov militia in Mariupol even led to a boost of 500 million eurosfor weapons.

In Ukraine, with the blessing of the Western countries, those who are in favor of a negotiation have been eliminated. This is the case of Denis Kireyev, one of the Ukrainian negotiators, assassinated on March 5 by the Ukrainian secret service (SBU) because he was too favorable to Russia and was considered a traitor. The same fate befell Dmitry Demyanenko, former deputy head of the SBU’s main directorate for Kiev and its region, who was assassinated on March 10 because he was too favorable to an agreement with Russia—he was shot by the Mirotvorets (“Peacemaker”) militia. This militia is associated with the Mirotvorets website, which lists the “enemies of Ukraine,” with their personal data, addresses and telephone numbers, so that they can be harassed or even eliminated; a practice that is punishable in many countries, but not in the Ukraine. The UN and some European countries have demanded the closure of this site—but that demand was refused by the Rada [Ukrainian parliament].

In the end, the price will be high, but Vladimir Putin will likely achieve the goals he set for himself. We have pushed him into the arms of China. His ties with Beijing have solidified. China is emerging as a mediator in the conflict…. The Americans have to ask Venezuela and Iran for oil to get out of the energy impasse they have put themselves in—and the United States has to piteously backtrack on the sanctions imposed on its enemies.

Western ministers who seek to collapse the Russian economy and make the Russian people suffer, or even call for the assassination of Putin, show (even if they have partially reversed the form of their words, but not the substance!) that our leaders are no better than those we hate—sanctioning Russian athletes in the Para-Olympic Games or Russian artists has nothing to do with fighting Putin. [….]

What makes the conflict in Ukraine more blameworthy than our wars in Iraq, Afghanistan or Libya? What sanctions have we adopted against those who deliberately lied to the international community in order to wage unjust, unjustified and murderous wars?….Have we adopted a single sanction against the countries, companies or politicians who are supplying weapons to the conflict in Yemen, considered to be the “worst humanitarian disaster in the world?”

To ask the question is to answer it… and the answer is not pretty.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, Twitter and Facebook. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Translated from French.  Original source.

Centre Français de Recherche sur le Renseignement

BULLETIN DE DOCUMENTATION N°27 / MARS 2022

LA SITUATION MILITAIRE EN UKRAINE

Our thanks to the CFRR

Jacques Baud is a former colonel of the General Staff, ex-member of the Swiss strategic intelligence, specialist on Eastern countries. He was trained in the American and British intelligence services. He has served as Policy Chief for United Nations Peace Operations. As a UN expert on rule of law and security institutions, he designed and led the first multidimensional UN intelligence unit in the Sudan. He has worked for the African Union and was for 5 years responsible for the fight, at NATO, against the proliferation of small arms. He was involved in discussions with the highest Russian military and intelligence officials just after the fall of the USSR. Within NATO, he followed the 2014 Ukrainian crisis and later participated in programs to assist the Ukraine. He is the author of several books on intelligence, war and terrorism, in particular Le Détournement published by SIGEST, Gouverner par les fake news , L’affaire Navalny . His latest book is Poutine, maître du jeu? published by Max Milo.

Featured image is from TUR

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

This article was first published in April 2020.

When Edward Bernays (the nephew of Sigmund Freud) wrote his famous 1928 book, Propaganda, he titled the first chapter of the book “Organizing Chaos”. The quotes below are taken directly from that chapter.

What was strikingly obvious to me in reading the book is that Bernays – in the year before the Great Wall Street Crash of 1929 – wasn’t making any effort to sugar-coat the fact that he actually believes that propaganda is an essential and desirable fact of modern life.

(Propaganda, by the way, is the way the ruling classes get the working classes to march off to war and how the billionaire CEOs of the multinational Big Pharma, Big Medicine corporations (and Bill Gates, the CDC, the WHO, etc, etc) gets parents to willingly over-vaccinate their vulnerable, immune-compromised infants with vaccines that have never been subjected to FDA-approved, double-blind clinical trials to establish safety or efficacy, especially long-term!)

I suspect that every corrupt crony capitalist that was responsible for the soon-to-occur 1929 Stock Market Crash and subsequent Great Depression heartily agreed with him in 1928.

There has always been an endless series of periodic, often orchestrated, economic crashes that have always harmed workers and destroyed small businesses and the middle class. Prior to the economic crises, the elite, wealthy propagandists (recall that well-done propaganda is very expensive to do) have consistently convinced the gullible public that prosperity is going to last forever and so they should invest heavily in the stock market. Then, just before the crash, the elite propagandists short-sell the market and profit while everybody else loses.

Propaganda has been widely used throughout history, long before Bernays wrote the book, but the propagandists usually don’t identify it as such. Propagandists prefer to use terms like “public relations”, “promotions”, “publicity”, “salesmanship”, “marketing”, and “press conferences” (in order to indoctrinate journalists), when” hype”, “image management” and “manufacturing consent“ is what is being sold to the propagandees.

Propaganda has been long used, over-used and abused in the advertising, public relations, political “science”, medical, pharmaceutical and war industries. The first overlord in ancient history eventually realized that, in order to get his obedient subjects to do what he wanted then to do – without having to resort to torture, public crucifixions, the guillotine, fines, imprisonment or various police state tactics – propaganda could be effective in getting his subjects to even ruin their lives forever by marching off to war.

Having learned the lessons about how to rule from the first overlord, every king, dictator, president or Joint Chiefs of Staff could get their propagandized subjects to willingly send their sons off to war or at least pay the taxes required to fund the fighting. And the corrupt crony capitalist classes, the robber barons, the vulture capitalists, the Big Pharma, Big Medicine CEOs on Wall Street have found out how easy it is to freak out their potential customers over whatever ruse they can come up with so that they will willingly purchase their products and ideas.

I hope that readers will read the following Bernays quotes and then apply them whenever there is a war threatened, whenever a politician or president is proposing new legislation or there is an possibly manufactured pandemic crisis to capitalize on:

Probably the most telling admission from Bernays appears in the tenth paragraph of the first chapter:

“…the manipulation of news, the inflation of personality, and the general ballyhoo by which politicians and commercial products and social ideas are brought to the consciousness of the masses. The instruments by which public opinion is organized and focused may be misused. But such organization and focusing are necessary to orderly life.”

And here are more quotes from Bernays:

“The conscious and intelligent manipulation of the organized habits and opinions of the masses is an important element in democratic society. Those who manipulate this unseen mechanism of society constitute an invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country.

“We are governed, our minds molded, our tastes formed, our ideas suggested, largely by men we have never heard of. This is a logical result of the way in which our democratic society is organized. Vast numbers of human beings must cooperate in this manner if they are to live together as a smoothly functioning society.”

“Our invisible governors are, in many cases, unaware of the identity other fellow members in the inner cabinet.”

“They govern us by their qualities of natural leadership, their ability to supply needed ideas and by their key position in the social structure. … in almost every act of our daily lives, whether in the sphere of politics or business, in our social conduct or our ethical thinking, we are dominated by the relatively small number of persons – a trifling fraction of our hundred and twenty million – who understand the mental processes and social patterns of the masses. It is they who pull the wires which control the public mind…”

“It is not usually realized how necessary these invisible governors are to the orderly functioning of our group life. In theory, every citizen may vote for whom he pleases. Our Constitution does not envisage political parties as part of the mechanism of government … But the American voters soon found that without organization and direction their individual votes, cast, perhaps, for dozens of hundreds of candidates, would produce nothing but confusion.”

“Invisible government, in the shape of rudimentary political parties, arose almost overnight. Ever since then we have agreed, for the sake of simplicity and practicality, that arty machines should narrow down the field of choice to two candidates, or at most three or four.”

“In theory, every citizen makes up his mind on public questions and matters of private conduct. In practice, if all men had to study for themselves the abstruse economic, political and ethical data involved in every question, they would find it impossible to come to a conclusion about anything. We have voluntarily agreed to let an invisible government sift the data and high-spot the outstanding issues so that our field of choice shall be narrowed to practical proportions.”

“From our leaders and the media they use to reach the public, we accept the evidence and the demarcation of issues bearing upon public questions; from some ethical teacher, be it a minister, a favorite essayist, or merely prevailing opinion, we accept a standardized code of social conduct to which we conform most of the time.” 

“It might be better to have, instead of propaganda and special pleading, committees of wise men who would choose our rulers, dictate our conduct, private and public, and decide upon the best types of clothes for us to wear and the best kinds of food for us to eat. But we have chosen the opposite method, that of open competition. We must find a way to make free competition function with reasonable smoothness; To achieve this society has consented to permit free competition to be organized by leadership and propaganda.”

“As civilization has become more complex, and as the need for invisible government has been increasingly demonstrated, the technical means have been invented and developed by which opinion may be regimented.”

“With the printing press and the newspaper, the railroad, the telephone, telegraph, radio and airplanes, ideas can be spread rapidly and even instantaneously all over the whole of America.”

“It is the purpose of this book to explain the structure of the mechanism which controls the public mind, and to tell how it is manipulated by the special pleader who seeks to create public acceptance for a particular idea or commodity.”

In 1965, Jacques Ellul, French author, philosopher, theologian, legal scholar, and sociologist published Propaganda: The Formation of Men’s Attitudes (1965).

In the preface to that book, Konrad Kellen writes:

Most people are easy prey for propaganda …But modern propaganda has long disdained the ridiculous lies of past and outmoded forms of propaganda. It operates instead with many different kinds of truth – half truth, limited truth, truth out of contest. Even Josef Goebbels (the Nazi Party’s Minister of Propaganda and Public Enlightenment) always insisted that the Wehrmacht communiques be as accurate as possible.”

In the introduction of his book, Ellul writes:

“In the midst of increasing mechanization and technological organization, propaganda is simply the means used … to persuade man to submit with good grace. When man … will end by obeying with enthusiasm, convinced of the excellence of what he is forced to do, the constraint of the organizations will no longer be felt by him; the truth is, it will no longer be a constraint, and the police will have nothing to do. The civic and technological good will and the enthusiasm for the right social myths – both created by propaganda – will finally have solved the problem of man.”

In the body of the book, Ellul writes:

“To make the organization of propaganda possible, the media must be concentrated, the number of news agencies reduced, the press brought under single control, and radio and film monopolies established. The effect will be still greater if the various media are concentrated in the same hands. When a newspaper trust (ie, monopoly) also extends its control over films and radio, propaganda can be directed at the masses and the individual can be caught in the wide net of media.”

“Only through concentration in a few hands of a large number of media can one attain a true orchestration, a continuity, and an application of scientific methods of influencing individuals. A state monopoly, or a private (corporate) monopoly, is equally effective. Such a situation is in the making in the United States, France, and Germany – the fact is well known.”

“The number of newspapers decreases while the number of readers increases. Production costs constantly increase and necessitate greater concentration; all statistics converge on that. This concentration itself keeps accelerating, thus making the situation increasingly favorable to propaganda. Of course, one must not conclude from this that the concentration of mass media inevitably produces propaganda. Such concentration is merely a prerequisite for it. But that the media be concentrated is not enough; it is also necessary that the individual will listen to them. This seems to be a truism: ‘Why produce a propaganda paper if nobody will buy it?’”

“In reality, propaganda is at work here, for what is involved is a progression from vague, diffuse opinion on the part of the reader to rigorous, exciting, active expression of that opinion. A feeling or an impression is transformed into a motive for action.Confused thoughts are crystallized. Myths and the reader’s conditioned reflexes are reinforced if he reads that paper. All this is characteristic of propaganda. The reader is really subject to propaganda, even though it be propaganda of his choice. Propaganda is a means of reinforcing opinions, of transforming them into action. The reader himself offers his throat to the knife of the propaganda he chooses.“

Under the section of the book, titled The Need of an Average Standard of Living, Ellul writes:

“More advanced propaganda can influence only a man who is not completely haunted by poverty, a man who can view things from a certain distance and be reasonably unconcerned about his daily bread, and who therefore can take an interest in more general matters and mobilize his actions for purposes other than merely earning a living. It is well known that in Western countries propaganda is particularly effective in the upper segment of the working class and in the middle classes. It faces much greater problems with the proletariat or the peasantry.”

Then, in another of my handful of books that deal with propaganda, “Weapons of Mass Deception: The Uses of Propaganda in Bush’s War on Iraq”, (2003), authors Sheldon Rampton & John Stauber write:

“Propagandists view communications as a set of techniques for indoctrinating ‘target audiences’ whereas the democratic concept of communication defines it as an ongoing process of dialogue among diverse voices. Of course, the propaganda approach becomes more attractive during wartime, when each side (of the issue) becomes preoccupied with manipulating and coercing the thinking of their enemy or domestic population (including was on viruses, perhaps). The propagandist wants to promote his or her own interests or those of an organization – sometimes at the expense of the recipients, sometimes not. The point is that the propagandist does not regard the well-being of the audience as a primary concern. Propagandists also tend to have a low regard for the rationality and intelligence of their audience.”

“The audience that thinks critically and is prepared to challenge (the propagandist’s) message becomes a problem that must be overcome. Whereas democracy is built upon the assumption that ‘the people’ are capable of rational self-governance, propagandists regard rationality as an obstacle to efficient indoctrination. Since propaganda is often aimed at persuading people to do things that are not in their own best interests, it frequently seeks to bypass the rational brain altogether and manipulate us on a more primitive level, appealing to emotional symbolism.”

“Fear is one of the most primitive emotions in the human psyche, and it definitely keeps us watching (television).”

Then Rampton and Stauber quotes Hermann Goering just before he commits suicide during the Nuremberg Trials of Nazi war criminals in 1946:

“Why of course the people don’t want war. Why should some poor slob on a farm want to risk his life in a war when the best he can get out of it is to come back to his farm in one piece? Naturally the common people don’t want war; neither in Russia, nor in England, nor in America, nor in Germany. That is understood. But it is the leaders of the country who determine policy, and it is always a simple matter to drag the people along, whether it is a democracy, or a fascist dictatorship, or a parliament, or a communist dictatorship. Voice or no voice, the people can always be brought to the bidding of the leaders. That is easy. All you have to do is to tell them they are being attacked and denounce the pacifists for lack of patriotism and exposing the country to danger. It works the same in any country.” — Hermann Goering, head of the Nazi army’s equivalent of the US Joint Chiefs of Staff – April 18, 1946. Committed suicide during Nuremberg trials.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Dr Kohls is a retired rural family physician from Duluth, Minnesota who has written a weekly column for the Reader Weekly, Duluth’s alternative newsweekly magazine since his retirement in 2008. His column, titled Duty to Warn, is re-published around the world. 

He practiced holistic mental health care in Duluth for the last decade of his family practice career prior to his retirement in 2008, primarily helping psychiatric patients who had become addicted to their cocktails of psychiatric drugs to safely go through the complex withdrawal process. His Duty to Warn columns often deals with various unappreciated health issues, including those caused by Big Pharma’s over-drugging, Big Vaccine’s over-vaccinating, Big Medicine’s over-screening, over-diagnosing and over-treating agendas and Big Food’s malnourishing food industry. Those four entities can combine to even more adversely affect the physical, mental, spiritual and economic health of the recipients of the medical treatments and the eaters of the tasty and ubiquitous “FrankenFoods” – particularly when they are consumed in combinations, doses and potencies that have never been tested for safety or long-term effectiveness.

Dr Kohls’ Duty to Warn columns are archived at: 

http://duluthreader.com/search?search_term=Duty+to+Warn&p=2;

http://www.globalresearch.ca/author/gary-g-kohls;

http://freepress.org/geographic-scope/national; https://www.lewrockwell.com/author/gary-g-kohls/; and 

https://www.transcend.org/tms/search/?q=gary+kohls+articles

Featured image is from SHTFplan.com

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on The First Casualty of War Is Truth. And Propaganda is the First Weapon Used in Times of War
  • Tags:

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name.

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

First published on September 8, 2023

*** 

Bill Gates and other investors are betting Kodama Systems can reduce carbon dioxide in the air by chopping down and burying trees. The move will see 70 million acres of forests, mostly in the Western United States, cut down over the next decade.

After cutting down the trees, Kodama plans to bury them – to reduce global warming. However, “global warming” is a scam to enable the rich to become richer and the real reason for the destruction of forests is to reap saleable carbon offsets.

The Carbon Cycle

The following text in this section is extracted from National Geographic’s encyclopaedia intended for children aged 10 to 13.

Carbon is in a constant state of movement from place to place. It is stored in what are known as reservoirs, and it moves between these reservoirs through a variety of processes, including photosynthesis, burning fossil fuels, and simply releasing breath from the lungs. The movement of carbon from reservoir to reservoir is known as the carbon cycle.

Carbon can be stored in a variety of reservoirs, including plants and animals, which is why they are considered carbon life forms. Carbon is used by plants to build leaves and stems, which are then digested by animals and used for cellular growth.

In the atmosphere, carbon is stored in the form of gases, such as carbon dioxide. It is also stored in oceans, captured by many types of marine organisms. Some organisms, such as clams or coral, use the carbon to form shells and skeletons.

Most of the carbon on the planet is contained within rocks, minerals, and other sediment buried beneath the surface of the planet.

Because Earth is a closed system, the amount of carbon on the planet never changes.

The carbon cycle is vital to life on Earth. Nature tends to keep carbon levels balanced, meaning that the amount of carbon naturally released from reservoirs is equal to the amount that is naturally absorbed by reservoirs. Maintaining this carbon balance allows the planet to remain hospitable for life.

Read more: The Carbon Cycle for Grades 5-8, Encyclopaedic Entry, National Geographic

Anthropogenic Climate Change Is a Fraud

The National Geographic Encyclopaedic Entry above ends with the sentence:

“Scientists believe that humans have upset this [carbon] balance by burning fossil fuels, which has added more carbon to the atmosphere than usual and led to climate change and global warming.”

National Geographic must be referring to either corporately funded scientists or scientists employed by corporations.  As we will see in the next section, scientists who are truly concerned about the planet and the life it supports reveal the facts.

Anthropogenic or human-caused climate change is a fraud and has been known to be a fraud from the outset.  This was demonstrably revealed to the world in 2009 with the release of leaked emails dubbed Climategate.

As it leads into the next section, it’s also worth noting an eye-opening 2013 article published by Forbes that used quotes from climate alarmists to reveal the truth about the climate change agenda.  The article was aptly titled:  ‘In Their Own Words: Climate Alarmists Debunk Their ‘Science’.’

Bill Gates Plans to Cut Down Trees

At the end of July, Forbes was given the task of promoting Gates’ latest plan to destroy and capitalise on the natural world in the name of “climate change” in an article titled: ‘Chop Down Forests to Save the Planet? Maybe Not as Crazy as it Sounds’.  Yes, it is as crazy as it sounds.

At least Forbes was honest enough to highlight why the article was being published in its drop head: “Bill Gates and other investors are betting Kodama Systems can reduce carbon dioxide in the air by chopping down and burying trees. Now if only Uncle Sam would get on board with tax credits, too.”

The final sentence gives a clue to what this latest scam is all about – money.  Let’s see what the article has to say and how Forbesmanipulates and outright lies to try to sell the idea that Gates and other investors are doing this for the good of the planet.

It’s not long into the article that Forbes links carbon to trading of carbon credits and carbon offsets:

Yes, the conventional idea is to plant trees to soak up carbon dioxide from the air and to then sell credits to corporations, private jet owners and others who need or want to offset their emissions. But scientists say burying trees can reduce global warming as well – particularly if those trees would otherwise end up burning or decaying, spewing their stored carbon into the air.

Chop Down Forests to Save the Planet? Maybe Not as Crazy as it Sounds, Forbes, 28 July 2023

Trees are “spewing” carbon into the air. Really?  It’s shameless propaganda.

Forbes may benefit from reading National Geographic’s encyclopaedia for children.  And then, if the author feels he can cope with more grown-up content, perhaps he can listen to Patrick Moore explain that the idea of CO2 being a pollutant is dangerous propaganda.  Or perhaps he can examine satellite imagery that demonstrates how CO2 as nature’s fertilizer has steadily been enriching Earth’s atmosphere.

And, should Forbes feel it necessary to fall back on the default “human-caused climate crisis” narrative, a study conducted on data from 1750 to 2018 will clarify things for him.  The study estimated that the value of the atmospheric concentration of anthropogenic fossil-derived CO2 in 2018 was 46.84 ppm out of a total of 405.40 ppm.

Forbes then turned to wildfires to argue the case for Bill Gates and other investors:

California’s enormous 2020 wildfires drove home the risks to air, property and life posed by overgrown forests … To help address the problem, the U.S. Forest Service aims to thin out 70 million acres of western forests, mostly in California, over the next decade, extracting more than 1 billion tonnes of bone-dry biomass.

Chop Down Forests to Save the Planet? Maybe Not as Crazy as it Sounds, Forbes, 28 July 2023

According to Roger Pielke, a professor in the College of Arts and Sciences at the University of Colorado, Canada’s wildfire trends show no increase in recent decades, wildfires used to be much more extensive in past centuries and wildfires are a part of the natural ecosystem.

Wildfires across the world that corporately funded media have enthusiastically publicised have been the result of man’s intervention – but not the human-caused climate change that corporate media supports.

The fires in Greece, Spain, Italy and the Amazon rainforest are most likely due to arson.  And regarding the recent fires in Hawaii – there are so many questions without honest answers concerning the destruction of Lahaina in Maui, that even people who normally trust the government are starting to wonder what has really happened there.

Forbes then attempts to justify burying wood in man-made vaults, which should be a nice little earner.  In fact, Yale Carbon Containment Lab (“CC Lab”), Kodama’s partner, is hoping to make a business out of “earthen vaults” or “biomass vaults.”

It is customary, after such forest thinning, for logs of marketable size to go to sawmills, with most of the rest piled up and later burned under controlled conditions. Kodama wants to bury the leftovers instead – in earthen vaults designed to maintain dry and anoxic (oxygen-free) conditions and protect the wood from rotting or burning.

Chop Down Forests to Save the Planet? Maybe Not as Crazy as it Sounds, Forbes, 28 July 2023

CC Lab admits biomass vaults are not viable: “The greatest risk for this project is the high cost to transport wood from dispersed sources to a single storage site. Transporting wet wood is significantly more time and energy-intensive than leaving it in the forest. Logistics greatly impact project viability, even if the price of carbon is high.” And, “the carbon containment value of burying large volumes of wood may be offset partially or totally by the carbon released from the soils when excavating a storage pit.”

Despite this, as MIT Technology Review noted, Merritt Jenkins, Kodama’s co-founder and chief executive, says they plan to earn revenue from their forest thinning work, as well as by selling usable timber and carbon credits from its burial projects. 

Forbes summed up the potential benefits for Kodama and its investors:

Along with the [venture capital] seed money, Kodama has already received $1.1 million in grants from California’s forest fire agency and others, as well as purchase commitments for the carbon credits tied to the first 400 tonnes of trees it buries. On the open market, those credits should fetch $200 a tonne. Eventually, Kodama wants to cut down and bury more than 5,000 tonnes of trees a year.

If you want to cut down trees and pelletise them to burn in place of coal, there are tax credits for that too. But not, as of now, for burying them.

Chop Down Forests to Save the Planet? Maybe Not as Crazy as it Sounds, Forbes, 28 July 2023

So, we can conclude the idea is don’t use the wood, don’t recycle it and don’t allow it to enrich the environment, simply cut trees down and bury them.  Does it sound crazy to you?

We have a crisis but it’s not a climate crisis. Green policies are killing people, economies and, increasingly, the planet. The goal to reduce carbon emissions is a scam to enable the rich to become richer off the backs of the poor.

The Investors

Kodama Systems, based in the Sierra Nevada foothills town of Sonora, has been operating in stealth mode since it was founded in the summer of 2021, MIT Technology Review wrote. “Stealth mode”? Is that another way of saying Kodama has been illegally logging and then burying the evidence?  If so, the illegal loggers have since raised millions.

In December 2022, Kodama announced that it had raised $6.6 million in a Series Seed funding round co-led by leading climate-technology investors Breakthrough Energy Ventures and Congruent Ventures. Kodama has additionally received a business development grant from California’s forestry and fire protection services CAL FIRE to develop site connectivity and automation for forest thinning, and a carbon removal research and development grant from Frontier Climate for a biomass storage pilot project in partnership with the Yale Carbon Containment Lab.

Breakthrough Energy Ventures (“BEV”) was founded by Bill Gates and is backed by many of the world’s top business leaders, BEV has raised more than $2 billion in committed capital to support cutting-edge companies that are leading the world to net-zero emissions. BEV is a purpose-built investment firm that is seeking to invest, launch and scale global companies that will eliminate greenhouse gas emissions throughout the economy as soon as possible.

Congruent Ventures is a leading early-stage venture firm focused on partnering with entrepreneurs to build companies addressing climate and sustainability challenges. Congruent is one of the most active US investors in climate. Its portfolio represents companies that will “help to decarbonise” every sector of the economy – energy, fleet electrification, farming, new food products, sustainable aviation fuels, manufacturing, and more.  In April 2023, it had more than $700 million in assets under management.

Frontier Climate was founded by Stripe, Alphabet, Shopify, Meta, McKinsey and tens of thousands of businesses using Stripe Climate.  Frontier aims to act as the middleman between buyers and sellers of carbon removal.  What this means in simple terms is buyers decide how much they want to spend on carbon removal each year, Frontier aggregates the buyers’ budgets and then pays suppliers to remove the carbon.

MIT Technology Review reported that on 15 December Stripe revealed it would provide a $250,000 research grant to Kodama and Yale Carbon Containment Lab as part of a broader carbon removal announcement. That grant will support a pilot effort to bury waste biomass harvested from California forests in the Nevada desert and study “how well it prevents the release of greenhouse gases that drive climate change.”

Stripe also agreed to purchase about 415 tonnes of carbon dioxide eventually sequestered by Kodama for another $250,000, if that proof-of-concept project achieves certain benchmarks.

For the last several years, Stripe has pre-purchased tonnes of carbon dioxide that start-ups aim to eventually draw out of the air and permanently sequester, in an effort to help build up a carbon removal industry.

Let’s Keep the Trees and Get Rid of the Billionaires

Even scientists who have been bought off or indoctrinated with the “climate crisis” ideology have had enough of the billionaires’ antics.  Some have called for a shareholder-based carbon tax. The wealthiest 10 per cent in the USA are the source of 40 per cent of US national greenhouse gas emissions, they say. And, the wealthiest 1 per cent of households are responsible for between 15 per cent and 17 per cent of emissions.

And increasingly, climate activists are setting their sights on the 1 per cent.  Billionaires’ lifestyles are unsustainable, billionaires are bad for the planet they say.  We may agree for different reasons but we do agree that billionaires are bad for the planet.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image is from The Expose

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name.

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

First published on February 26 2023

***

In America, we have an oligarch problem, and it’s much bigger than the oligarch problem that Putin faced when he became president in 2000. The entire West is now in the grips of billionaire elites who have a stranglehold on the media, the political establishment and all of our important institutions. In recent years we have seen these oligarchs expand their influence from markets, finance and trade to politics, social issues and even public health. The impact this group has had on these other areas of interest, has been nothing short of breathtaking. Establishment elites and their media not only stood foursquare behind Russiagate, the Trump impeachment, the BLM riots and the January 6 fiasco, they also had a hand in the Covid hysteria and the host of repressive measures that were imposed in the name of public health. What we’d like to know is to what extent this group is actively involved in the shaping of other events that are aimed at transforming the American Republic into a more authoritarian system?

In other words, are the mandated injections, the forced lockdowns, the aggressive government-implemented censorship, the dubious presidential elections, the burning of food processing plants, the derailing of trains, the attacks on the power grid, the BLM-Antifa riots, the drag queen shows for schoolchildren, the maniacal focus on gender issues, and glitzy public show-trials merely random incidents occurring spontaneously during a period of great social change or are they, in fact, evidence of a stealthily orchestrated operation conducted by agents of the state acting on behalf of their elite benefactors? We already know that the FBI, the DOJ and the intel agencies were directly involved in Russiagate –which was a covert attack on the sitting president of the United States. So, the question is not “whether” these agencies are actively involved in other acts of treachery but, rather, to what extent these acts impact the lives or ordinary Americans, our politics and the country? But before we answer that question, take a look at this quote from from a recent interview by Colonel Douglas MacGregor:

I was reading a document that was authored by George Soros over 10 years ago in which he talks specifically about this all-out war that would ultimately come against Russia because he said this ‘was the last nationalist state that rests on a foundation of orthodox christian culture with Russian identity at its core. That has to be removed. So I think that the people who are in charge in the west and the people in charge in Washington think they have successfully destroyed the identities of the European and American peoples, that we have no sense of ourselves, our borders are undefended, we present no resistance to the incoming migrants from the developing world who essentially roll over us as though we owe them a living and that our laws do not count. Thus, far I would say that is an accurate evaluation of what we’ve been doing. And I think that’s a great victory for George Soros and the globalists, the anti-nationalists; those who want open borders what they call it an “Open Society” because you end up with nothing, an amorphous mass of people struggling to survive who are reduced to the lowest levels of subsistence … (Soros) even goes so far as to talk about how useful it would be if it was east Europeans whose lives were expended in this process and not west Europeans who simply won’t take the casualties. This is not a minor matter. This is the kind of thinking that is so destructive and so evil, in my judgement, that that’s what we’re really dealing with in our own countries and I think Putin recognizes that.” (Douglas Macgregor – A Huge Offensive”, You Tube;, 11:20 minute)

The reason I transcribed this comment from MacGregor was because it sums up the perceptions of a great many people who see things the same way. It expresses the hatred that globalist billionaires have toward Christians and patriots, both of which they see as obstacles to their goal of a borderless one-world government. MacGregor discusses this phenom in relation to Russia which Soros sees as “the last nationalist state that rests on a foundation of orthodox Christian culture with Russian identity at its core.” But the same rule could be applied to the January 6 protestors, could it not? Isn’t that the real reason the protestors were rounded up and thrown into the Washington gulag. After all, everyone knows there was no “insurrection” nor were there any “white supremacists”. The protestors were locked up because they’re nationalists (patriots) which are the natural enemy of the globalists. The MacGregor quote lays it out in black and white. Elites don’t believe that nationalists can be persuaded by propaganda,. They must be eradicated through incarceration or worse. Isn’t that the underlying message of January 6?

The other underlying message of January 6, is that ordinary people are no longer allowed to challenge the authority of the people in power. Again, political legitimacy in the US has always been determined by elections. What January 6 indicates, is that legitimacy no longer matters. What matters is power, and the person who can have you arrested for questioning his authority, has all the power he needs. Check out this excerpt from a post on Substack by political analyst Kurt Nimmo:

“Klaus Schwab, a student of the war criminal Henry Kissinger, is a mentor to power-hungry and narcissistic sociopaths. The WEF “Great Reset” is designed to turn the world into an impoverished social concentration camp, where destitute serfs “own nothing” and this, in true Orwellian fashion, will set them free…

I challenge people to investigate the WEF’s Global Redesign Initiative. According to the Transnational Institute in the Netherlands, this “initiative” proposes

a transition away from intergovernmental decision-making towards a system of multi-stakeholder governance. In other words, by stealth, they are marginalizing a recognized model where we vote in governments who then negotiate treaties which are then ratified by our elected representatives with a model where a self-selected group of ‘stakeholders’ make decisions on our behalf. (Emphasis added.)

In other words, large transnational corporate “stakeholders” will be deciding where you live, what you eat (insects and weeds), how you reproduce (or not reproduce; children produce carbon emissions), and what you can “rent” from them, or not be allowed to rent if you complain about an unelected globalist “economic” cartel driving humanity into serfdom, worldwide poverty, and depopulation.” (“WEF Calls for Destruction of America’s Middle Class“, Kurt Nimmo on Geopolitics)

What Nimmo is saying is that these billionaire elites are now so powerful, that they can openly say they’re going to “transition away from intergovernmental decision-making” (ie– representative government”) to a system of “multi-stakeholder governance.” If I’m not mistaken, that is a pretty unambiguous declaration of a new form of supra-national government, in which only the billionaire stakeholders have a vote in what policies are implemented. But isn’t that the way things work already? On any number of topics from ESG, to digital currencies, to vaccine passports, to AI, to gain-of-function research, to 15-minute cities, to transhumanism, to war with Russia; the decisions are all being made by a handful of people of whom we know every little and who were never voted into office.

And that brings us back to our original question: How many of these oddball events (in recent years) were conjured up and implemented by agents of the deep state to advance the elitist agenda?

This seem like an impossible question since it’s hard to find a link between these dramatically divers events. For example, what is the link between a Drag Queen Children’s Hour and, let’s say, firebombing a food processing plant in Oklahoma? Or the relentless political exploitation of gender issues and the January 6 public show trials? If there was a connection, we’d see it, right?

Not necessarily, because the link might not have anything to do with the incident itself, but instead, with its impact on the people who experience it. In other words, all of these events could be aimed at generating fear, uncertainty, anxiety, alienation and even terror. Have the intelligence agencies launched such destabilizing operations before?

Indeed, they have, many times. Here’s an excerpt from an article that will help you to see where I’m going with this. It’s from a piece at The Saker titled Operation Gladio: NATO’s Secret War for International Fascism.” See if you notice any similarities with the way things have been unfolding in America for the last few years:

Yves Guerin-Serac: the Black Ops Grandmaster behind Operation Gladio…. wrote the basic training and propaganda manuals which can be fairly described as the Gladio order of battle.”…

Guerin-Serac was a war hero, agent provocateur, assassin, bomber, intelligence agent, Messianic Catholic, and the intellectual grandmaster behind the ‘Strategy of Tension’ essential to the success of Operation Gladio. Guerin-Serac published via Aginter Press the Gladio manual, including Our Political Activity in what can aptly be described as Gladio’s First Commandment:

“Our belief is that the first phase of political activity ought to be to create the conditions favoring the installation of chaos in all of the regime’s structures…In our view the first move we should make is to destroy the structure of the democratic state under the cover of Communist and pro-Soviet activities…Moreover, we have people who have infiltrated these groups.”

Guerin-Serac continues:

“Two forms of terrorism can provoke such a situation [breakdown of the state]: blind terrorism (committing massacres indiscriminately which cause a large number of victims), and selective terrorism (eliminate chosen persons)…

This destruction of the state must be carried out under the cover of ‘communist activities.’ After that, we must intervene at the heart of the military, the juridical power and the church, in order to influence popular opinion, suggest a solution, and clearly demonstrate the weakness of the present legal apparatus. Popular opinion must be polarized in such a way, that we are being presented as the only instrument capable of saving the nation.”

Anarchic random violence was to be the solution to bring about such a state of instability thus allowing for a completely new system, a global authoritarian order. Yves Guerin-Serac, who was an open fascist, would not be the first to use false-flag tactics that were blamed on communists and used to justify more stringent police and military control from the state….” (“Operation Gladio: NATO’s Secret War for International Facism”, The Saker)

Repeat:

the first phase of political activity ought to be to create the conditions favoring the installation of chaos in all of the regime’s structures… This destruction of the state must be carried out under the cover of (communist) activities…. Popular opinion must be polarized in such a way, that we are being presented as the only instrument capable of saving the nation.”

In other words, the objective of the operation is to completely disrupt all social relations and interaction, cultivate feelings of uncertainty, polarization and terror, find a group that can be scapegoated for the wide societal collapse, and, then, present yourself (elites) as the best choice for restoring order.

Is this what’s going on?

It’s very possible. It could all be part of a Grand Strategy aimed at “wiping the slate clean” in order to “transition away from intergovernmental decision-making” to a system of “multi-stakeholder governance.”

That could explain why there has been such a vicious and sustained attack on our history, culture, traditions, religious beliefs, monuments, heroes, and founders. They want to replace our idealism with feelings of shame, humiliation and guilt. They want to erase our past, our collective values, our heritage, our commitment to personal freedom, and the very idea of America itself. They want to raze everything to the ground and start over. That is their basic Gameplan writ large.

The destruction of the state is being carried out behind the cover of seemingly random events that are spreading chaos, exacerbating political divisions, increasing the incidents of public mayhem, and clearing the way for a violent restructuring of the government.

They can’t build a new world order until the old one is destroyed.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published on The Unz Review.

Michael Whitney is a renowned geopolitical and social analyst based in Washington State. He initiated his career as an independent citizen-journalist in 2002 with a commitment to honest journalism, social justice and World peace.

He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG). 

All images in this article are from TUR

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on The Plan to Wreck America. “The Globalist Billionaires”
  • Tags:

No próximo mês, os cidadãos indonésios votarão para escolher o seu novo presidente. Considerando que a Indonésia é um estado chave no chamado “Sul Global”, sendo o maior país islâmico do mundo, e com expectativas de se tornar a sexta principal economia global nos próximos anos, as eleições serão sem dúvida importantes para o futuro do cenário geopolítico.

A corrida presidencial está focada em dois candidatos. Por um lado, Prabowo Subianto, que é o atual ministro da Defesa e defende uma política externa equilibrada, fazendo da Indonésia uma espécie de “ponte” entre o Ocidente e as potências multipolares. Por outro lado, Anies Baswedan, ex-governador de Jacarta, endossado pelos EUA, que promete o alinhamento do seu país com o Ocidente.

Subianto é um dos protagonistas da atual estratégia indonésia de procurar uma linha neutra no meio das tensões globais. Um exemplo desta vertente do país é o fato de a Indonésia ter participado recentemente em exercícios militares conjuntos com os EUA, ao mesmo tempo que aprofundou os laços económicos com a China, tendo assinado um importante acordo de cooperação no ano passado. Além disso, outra característica interessante da mentalidade geopolítica indonésia é a procura de protagonismo regional, o que pode ser visto no facto de o país ter liderado recentemente os primeiros exercícios militares da ASEAN.

Baswedan, no entanto, tem uma história pessoal de laços com os EUA e parece disposto a ajudar o país a tornar-se um aliado próximo do Ocidente. O candidato afirma que a sua intenção é implementar uma “política externa baseada em valores”, alinhando a Indonésia com o projeto liberal-globalista ocidental – o que certamente criará uma série de problemas a nível regional, principalmente com a China.

A Indonésia e a China têm rivalidades e disputas territoriais. No seu último mapa oficial, o governo chinês incluiu zonas marítimas reivindicadas pela Indonésia, como as Ilhas Natuna, que fazem parte do Mar da China Meridional. Apesar das diferenças, ambos os países estão envolvidos numa cooperação econômica benéfica, com Pequim a investir dezenas de milhares de milhões de dólares em empresas na Indonésia. Isto é um resultado direto das diretrizes soberanas e não alinhadas do atual governo – que Subianto promete preservar, enquanto Baswedan promete reverter.

Como é sabido, vive-se atualmente um momento de tensões crescentes em todo o mundo, com os EUA a perderem gradualmente a sua influência global num processo acelerado de multipolarização geopolítica. Neste cenário, Washington está interessado em conquistar o maior número possível de aliados para compensar as constantes perdas resultantes da decisão de vários países de abandonarem a esfera de influência americana. Particularmente no que diz respeito à região asiática, o interesse dos EUA em obter o apoio de mais países é ainda maior, uma vez que a China é vista como um inimigo, razão pela qual os EUA precisam de parceiros locais para enfrentar Pequim.

Baswedan pretende explorar as rivalidades do seu país com a China para justificar uma viragem pró-EUA na política externa e fazer da Indonésia um representante do Ocidente na Ásia. É muito provável que, se vencer, Baswedan aproxime o seu país das alianças militares anti-China lideradas pelos EUA na Ásia, como a QUAD e a AUKUS, fortalecendo as hostilidades anti-Pequim. Além disso, considerando o papel relevante da Indonésia na ASEAN e a sua grande influência económica regional, esta guinada pró-Ocidente também poderá significar uma tendência regional na Ásia, levando outros países do bloco a adotarem uma postura anti-chinesa.

Esta vontade de converter o seu país num representante dos interesses americanos é a razão pela qual Baswedan está atualmente a receber apoio maciço de Washington, especialmente no contexto da guerra de informação. A máquina de propaganda ocidental está a espalhar rumores sobre o candidato da oposição, usando questões do seu passado, como o seu envolvimento na ditadura de Suharto, como argumentos para dizer que a sua ascensão ao poder seria uma “ameaça à democracia indonésia”.

Estas narrativas estão a ser divulgadas pelos EUA porque a vitória de Subianto parece próxima. O candidato é claramente preferido pelo povo indonésio, sendo o favorito nas sondagens eleitorais, o que explica porque os EUA estão a intensificar a sua guerra de informação. O objectivo é convencer o maior número possível de cidadãos indonésios a votarem em Baswedan, tentando assim inverter os números atualmente indicados nas sondagens.

É pouco provável que haja uma vitória definitiva no dia 14 de fevereiro, e é possível que ambos os candidatos se enfrentem num segundo turno em junho. Até que os resultados sejam definidos, será necessária muita atenção à Indonésia, pois o país é extremamente importante para a Ásia e para o mundo islâmico.

Certamente, os esforços americanos para eleger Baswedan tornar-se-ão cada vez mais intensos nas próximas semanas. Considerando a elevada relevância geopolítica da questão, é até possível que a postura ocidental em relação à Indonésia se torne mais agressiva se o resultado esperado não for alcançado através dos canais eleitorais – com a possibilidade de tentativas de mudança de regime e revolução colorida em caso de vitória de Subianto.

Lucas Leiroz de Almeida

 

Foto : Ministro indonésio da Defesa Prabowo Subianto

Artigo em inglês :Elections in Indonesia will be a decisive moment for Asian geopolitics, InfoBrics, 22 de Janeiro de 2024.

Imagem : InfoBrics

*

Lucas Leiroz, jornalista, pesquisador do Center for Geostrategic Studies, consultor geopolítico.

Você pode seguir Lucas Leiroz em: https://t.me/lucasleiroz e https://twitter.com/leiroz_lucas

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name.

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

First published on May 10, 2023

*** 

“Limits to Growth”, written in 1972 by various authors of the Club of Rome, has been advocating mass genocide already for over 50 years ago. The Club of Rome was created in 1968 by David Rockefeller (1915 – 2017). He was a notorious eugenist. The Rockefeller and Gates families – the latter also eugenists – are related.

Since 2008, the Club of Rome is quietly settled in “tranquil” Winterthur, Switzerland, which coincidentally accommodates many of the world’s most infamous white collar delinquent institutions, such as the World Health Organization (WHO); GAVI the Vaccination Association and close ally of WHO, also called the pharma-industry’s “cash cow”; the World Economic Forum (WEF), the Bank for International Settlements (BIS), seated in Basle, close to the border with Germany, from where it was routing US Federal Reserve money during WWII to Germany’s Reichsbank to finance Hitler’s war against Russia. Today, the BIS goes as the Rothschild-controlled Central Bank of all central banks; and the dark below the surface Swiss Banking Conglomerate – and more.

Just a coincidence?

As a reminder to readers, WHO which registers as a specialized UN Agency, is not really a UN Agency. It was established at the behest of the Rockefellers in 1948, with the same purpose of most everything else the Rockefellers have undertaken, to control the world population – and their “health”.

Today WHO is extensively funded by private sources, mostly the Pharma industry, the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, and other private interests. The balance comes from member countries. Such an organization is not working for the interest of the people but of its financiers.

WHO is a major player in the implementation of the WEF’s Great Reset and the UN Agenda 2030 which is fully integrated in the Great Reset. Mr. Antonio Guterres, Director General of the UN, is also a Club of Rome member. He is also on the bandwagon of massive population reduction – and he is a close ally of WEF’s CEO, Klaus Schwab.

All of these agencies of questionable ethics, comfortably sheltered in Switzerland, have tax-free status, either as NGOs or so-called international or UN organizations, and most if not all are protected by full immunity against legal proceedings. All of them are linked in one way or another to the WEF.

Just a coincidence?

Mass Population Reduction 

As of this day, “Limits of Growth” is the blueprint for one of the WEF’s key objectives: Massive population reduction.

*

The Reset / Agenda 2030 are attacking the globe octopus-like on many fronts simultaneously – all thoroughly planned and adjusted with fallback positions, ready with last-minute alternatives, so as not to lose track of the final objectives – full spectrum dominance over the world, by a small elite, and its “rule-based” One World Hegemony.

The growing atrocities increasingly visible around the globe, such as unwarranted censorship without a legal basis, totally contradicting the US First Amendment, “Freedom of Speech”; the imposed “climate change” agenda which nobody dares to contradict for fear of being “sanctioned”, because a new “God-given” Green Agenda has been devised to protect the globe and humanity from overheating. Absurdities have no limits.

Another Reset / Agenda 2030 program item is “digitization of everything” – literally. This includes a new form of money, Central Bank Digital Currency, or CBDC, a programmable form of money, that can be made to expire, blocked, or be given limited access by the owner, depending on the individual’s behavior. Total control, a precursor to tyranny.

Even human brains of the survivors are to be chipped to transform humans to transhumans or cyborgs – robots of sorts, that will be electronically enslaved – and can also be electronically “extinguished”, if for some reason their behavior should escape the elite’s control.

Finally, to round it all off, full censorship, of written and spoken expression, as well as thought control. The “Woke” concept driven to its extreme. Ireland is attempting to introduce legislation which would forbid reading and circulating non-mainstream information, under the pretext that all non-mainstream is “misinformation” – and must be barred. People who do not obey, risk prison. See video below.

Amazingly, already more than 60 years ago President John F. Kennedy had warned humanity of the coming censorship and absolute control. In April 1961, JFK talked to the American Newspaper Publishers Association about the dangers the globalists pose to us all. Specifically, he said:

“It requires a change in outlook, a change in tactics, a change in missions–by the government, by the people, by every businessman or labor leader, and by every newspaper. For we are opposed around the world by a monolithic and ruthless conspiracy that relies primarily on covert means for expanding its sphere of influence–on infiltration instead of invasion, on subversion instead of elections, on intimidation instead of free choice, on guerrillas by night instead of armies by day.

“It is a system which has conscripted vast human and material resources into the building of a tightly knit, highly efficient machine that combines military, diplomatic, intelligence, economic, scientific, and political operations. 

“Its preparations are concealed, not published. Its mistakes are buried, not headlined. Its dissenters are silenced, not praised. No expenditure is questioned, no rumor is printed, no secret is revealed. It conducts the Cold War, in short, with a wartime discipline no democracy would ever hope or wish to match.”

See this.

JFK was assassinated on November 22nd, 1963, when passing in a motorcade through downtown Dallas, Texas.

His visionary clear-sight and his many actions or plans in favor of the American people and the globe’s population at large, were against the interests of the established elite, and made him a target for the CIA’s cold-blooded murder.

*

Today, there are indications that several countries, including Australia, New Zealand, the U.S. (See Rex 84: FEMA’s Blueprint for Martial Law in Americaare contemplating camps, to be ready for all those misbehaving citizens that must be put away – as a warning for others, but also as punishment for non-obedience.

The existence of FEMA’s Rex 84 was first revealed during the Iran-Contra Hearings in 1987, and subsequently  reported by the Miami Herald on July 5, 1987

” These camps are to be operated by FEMA should martial law need to be implemented in the United States and all it would take is a presidential signature on a proclamation and the attorney general’s signature on a warrant to which a list of names is attached.”

This all sounds scary. It was designed to project fear onto the population. A population under fear has little or no resistance – physical and health-wise – and can be easily manipulated.

They, the fatal cabal,  will not succeed. A “cult” is a parasite, living off people’s physical and mental properties. They will do so, as long as we allow it.

There is a dawning of awakening. The cult knows it, and in a last-ditch effort attempting to safe their One World Order (OWO) hegemony, they speed up the Reset / Agenda 2030 process, aiming at destroying and dominating as much as possible in the limited time, before the Light takes over.

They will not succeed. However, the longer it takes us, We, the People, to peacefully but forcefully organize against our governments and the Big Money Financial Elite controlling them through WHO and the WEF, the more devastating their impact, in terms of tyranny and genocide.

Be it the Irish ultra-censoring legislation, the US-EU-NATO-German consensus to destroy Europe’s economic lifeline, the Russia-Germany Nord Stream pipelines; as well as a continued genocidal and sterilizing mRNA vaxx-drive – all is destined to hurt, torment, scare and reduce the world’s population.

This is not to inspire fear. But humanity’s condition is serious, and no time is to be wasted.

For an organized, peaceful beginning – NO more mainstream news. Create our own, unalterable social platforms to communicate and inform.

And stay away from 5G, son to come 6G. These ultra-shortwaves are used for full digitization of everything, including to control and manipulate our brains.

We must be ready to start afresh – new civilization – based on ethics and love, driving towards a multi-polar world, with an international legal system serving the people, not the elite cult.

What is most important, and perhaps the biggest challenge – do not hate. No matter how much tyranny – no hatred towards our perpetrators, no matter their limitless hate-provoking atrocities.

Hate is what the cabal wants. It lowers our vibration to their low frequency of darkness, where light does not penetrate.

Love is what brings Light and Peace – and We, the People shall prevail in a new society, dynamically distancing ourselves from the horrors and tyranny of the cult state cabal.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Peter Koenig is a geopolitical analyst and a former Senior Economist at the World Bank and the World Health Organization (WHO), where he worked for over 30 years around the world. He lectures at universities in the US, Europe and South America. He writes regularly for online journals and is the author of Implosion – An Economic Thriller about War, Environmental Destruction and Corporate Greed; and co-author of Cynthia McKinney’s book “When China Sneezes: From the Coronavirus Lockdown to the Global Politico-Economic Crisis” (Clarity Press – November 1, 2020).

Peter is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG). He is also a non-resident Senior Fellow of the Chongyang Institute of Renmin University, Beijing.

Featured image is from The Libertarian Institute

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on Limits to Growth, Climate Change, Digitization of Everything and Worldwide Censorship — All Leading to WEF and the Behemoth Cult Commanding It
  • Tags: , ,

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

As soon as the Israel-Hamas war broke out on Oct 7, the mediascape was rife with speculations regarding the future of the Gaza Strip and the Red Sea maritime trade. 

Source: ajot.com

With big question marks still lingering over the genesis of this conflict, assorted pundits have regurgitated and permuted various scenarios over the fate of Gaza and the wider region.

Will Israel finally annex the Gaza Strip and, in cahoots with Egypt, expel its residents to the Sinai Peninsula?

If this happens, Israel will have unimpeded access to trillions of dollars worth of hydrocarbon deposits off the Levantine coastline. A portion of that revenue may be shared with Egypt for the “welfare” of relocated Gazans. 

An alternate speculation centred on the construction of a new sealane to bypass the problematic Suez Canal once and for all. The Ben Gurion Canal, as it is called, is a decades-old plan.

A 1963 memorandum from the Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory went as far as proposing the use of 520 two-megaton nuclear bombs to burrow the Negev Desert at an estimated cost of $575 million ($5 billion in 2021). It was a part of a larger scheme called Operation Plowshare. While the original plan sidestepped Gaza for obvious reasons, a new post-annexation canal would be straighter, cheaper, bigger and more expeditious for Israel and the global shipping industry. 

While these speculations are not without merit, they are also riddled with flaws. It would take years, possibly more than a decade, to build a canal through the Negev Desert. The project will attract all kinds of international sanctions and regional terror attacks. The success of the Israeli canal would also be contingent on a peaceful Bab el Mandeb, the other maritime bottleneck in the Red Sea.

In the meantime, China may recover from its current economic slump to complete its Belt and Road Initiative (BRI), thereby diminishing the centricity of a new Red Sea canal. With Eastern Ukraine and the Sea of Azov likely to be incorporated into Russia in the near-future, new kingmakers will appear on the geopolitical chessboard. 

Red Sea Stakes

At the time of writing, Tel Aviv’s military campaign in Gaza has caused between 24,000 and 30,000 Palestinian deaths while the Israeli army death toll number in the hundreds. In a region brimming with ethnoreligious faultlines, new flashpoints were bound to emerge, ostensibly in support of the beleaguered Gazans. 

Houthi rebels from eastern Yemen, which faces the Red Sea, were the first to create a new frontline by launching missiles, drones and fast attack boats against cargo vessels linked to the West and its allies.

Russian and Chinese vessels were eventually assured of safe passage.  Some ships have resorted to broadcasting their neutrality via the Automatic Identification System (AIS) used in the maritime industry. 

Houthi attacks are particularly focused on the Bab el Mandeb strait which is only 29 kms wide, presenting an ideal killzone for shipping vessels. To counter this threat, a number US-allied nations have dispatched naval vessels off the coast of Yemen. 

The combined forces of the United States and United Kingdom went a step further by launching decapitation airstrikes against Houthi-controlled hotspots from Jan 11 onwards. It was pointless. The Houthis do not have a centralised political and military hierarchy. These airstrikes may also embolden them to justify further attacks against ships from the Western orbit. Despatching US marines to rugged Houthi-controlled terrains would likely be as futile as the two decades-long military intervention in Afghanistan. 

The maritime stakes are undeniably high in the Red Sea, with 50-odd ships ferrying cargo worth $3-9 billion each day ($1 trillion each year). According to FT.com, up to “15% of global sea trade, including 8% of grain, 12% of seaborne oil and 8% of seaborne liquid natural gas” transit the narrow seaway each year. 

Disruption along the waterway, including accidental ones, can be costly.  When a large container ship ran aground in 2021, the combined cost to global trade was $9.6 billion per day for nearly a week. Just imagine what would happen if a large US or UK destroyer was sunk in the Red Sea? Various types of unexploded munitions on the seabed may render the entire passage off limits for a considerable period of time. 

With the Houthi menace slashing Red Sea traffic by 44%, the economies of Ethiopia, Eritrea and Sudan, which straddle the Western side of sealane, will be hit particularly hard. Egypt will lose a chunk of the $9 billion in annual transit fees through the Suez Canal. If the current crisis persist, desperate elements from these nations may either emulate or join forces with Somali pirates to extract whatever they can from ships plying the Red Sea. 

The regional bête noire, Israel, has not escaped unscathed from this imbroglio. Its Red Sea port of Eilat is reeling from a steep 85% drop in activity. This may dent Israel’s long-term ambitions of becoming a global LNG hub.

Bypass Solution

The Cape of Good Hope offers an excellent bypass solution for global shipping. In fact, many recent commentaries seemed ignorant of the eighth-year closure of the Suez Canal from 1967–1975 due to protracted Arab-Israeli conflicts. Ironically, the closure had halted shipments of oil from Iran to Israel. They were allies back then!

While the stakes are high, the fate of global trade does not hinge on the Red Sea. Not at the moment anyway. The southern African route nonetheless involves longer transits costing billions in extra dollars. Predicaments like these may eventually normalise buffer inventorying in place of the precarious Just-in-Time (JIT) system. Shipping insurance may go up, albeit without premiums associated with geopolitical and terror risks in the Red Sea.  Smaller shipping companies, with smaller profit margins and cash reserves, may fold up. This is in sync with a familiar trend which accelerated after the defining event of Sept 11, 2001. Every manufactured global crisis, including the ongoing coronapsychosis and climate change mania, has served to funnel wealth into the hands of the transnational capitalist class (TCC). 

The detour around Africa will add seven to 20 days in transit, involving an additional 3,000-3,500 nautical miles (6,000km). Freight rates for a standard container transported from China to Northern Europe has consequently risen from $1,500 in November to more than $4,000 at the time of writing. Freight rates from India stands at a median $3,000. The cumulative costs for national trade may be much higher as merchant vessels are now accompanied by an array of naval escorts.  Severe drought in the Panama Canal has also reduced transit slots for vessels. These developments will collectively aggravate inflationary trends worldwide. 

The ultimate winner in this quagmire would be Russia. Its Northern Sea Route will shorten Asia-Europe maritime transit by as much as 40%. However, relentless Western sanctions may prompt Moscow to restrict passage to ships from “friendly nations”. The primary beneficiaries will be China and India. 

Crystalline Sea, Murky Waters

The Red Sea was named after a red algae that is endemic to its waters. With no rivers disgorging freshwater into the passageway, the Red Sea is salty, pristine and rich in marine life —  making it a prized destination for scuba divers worldwide. The Israelis once took advantage of this tourist appeal by executing Operation Moses and Operation Joshua in 1984-1985. An abandoned Red Sea resort was transformed into a scuba diving hive by day and a Trojan Horse for the expatriation of Ethiopian Jewish refugees from Sudan by night. 

While the Red Sea waters are crystalline, the wider geopolitical undercurrents are outright murky.  This brings us back to Hamas, the main protagonist in the current drama. Just who does Hamas serve? 

It is an open secret that Hamas was created in 1987 by Israeli secret services in an attempt to deter the establishment of a future Palestinian state.  This long-term strategy was reiterated by various Israeli officials over the years. “Anyone who wants to thwart the establishment of a Palestinian state has to support bolstering Hamas and transferring money to Hamas,” Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu informed his Likud party’s Knesset members in March 2019. 

Netanyahu’s admission was made in 2019, after Hamas had launched tens of thousands of missiles towards Israel over two decades. Yet, we are repeatedly told that Hamas is a proxy of Iran. The lamestream media has failed to reconcile this apparent contradiction.

As far as Israel is concerned, regular Hamas attacks provide a “moral justification” for the usurpation of Palestinian lands. Iran portrays these appropriations as yet another symptom of the Sunni Islamic world’s collective impotence. Maybe, a day will come when the Middle East is carved up between Tel Aviv and Tehran? 

For the time being, maritime disruptions in the Red Sea should pose no long-term threats to global trade. Yet, there remains one particular geographic anomaly that has the potential to rattle global trade and finance overnight. There is hardly any mention of it in the open source realm.  It is a complete black hole.  My upcoming Substack analysis will unpack this hidden conundrum. Stay tuned. 

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Dr. Mathew Maavak, who researches systems science, global risks, geopolitics, strategic foresight, governance and Artificial Intelligence. He is a frequent contributor to Global Research.

Featured image source

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

A glance at federal records shows the series of Nebraska farms listed as foreign owned, though there’s no country attached and no hint that these farms with unassuming names might be related.

Willowdale Farms, Merrick County Farms, Dove Haven Ranch, Champion Valley Farm, Schroder Family Farms and many more are concentrated in northeast Nebraska but spread to the southeast corner and west nearly to Wyoming.

In Nebraska’s business records, they have one similarity: Each farm’s office address leads to a single-story brick building in the St. Louis suburbs, an office park housing a dentist, lawyers and, until recently, a farmland investment startup called AgCoA.

For years, AgCoA was owned by the Canada Pension Plan Investment Board, a government-owned group managing the retirement funds of 21 million Canadians. 

But in 2017, the Canadian board decided to offload a half-billion dollar chunk of its American farmland portfolio – including all 22,830 acres of its Nebraska land. 

The buyer of those unassuming-sounding Nebraska farms wasn’t publicly listed. Until now, the financial details of the transaction and the gargantuan loan he’s taken out against it have remained publicly unknown.

The buyer’s name: Bill Gates.

Tangled Web of Gates

The billionaire who co-founded Microsoft has, in the past six years, spent more than $113 million buying Nebraska farmland.

The Flatwater Free Press analyzed five years of land sales data, between 2018 and 2022, originally gathered by a University of Nebraska-Lincoln College of Journalism and Mass Communications data journalism class.

If that data would have included the year 2017 – when Mt. Edna Farms, the Gates-owned company that made that massive purchase from the Canadian pension board – then Gates would have been the top buyer of Nebraska ag land by money spent. Since 2017, he has spent more than double the second-place buyer. 

Gates’ farmland is held by more than 20 shell companies spread across the country. Some lead back to a P.O. Box in Kirkland, Washington, the city where Cascade Asset Management, which manages all Gates’ investments, is headquartered. Click screen below to view NBC video.

Others are linked to Lenexa, Kansas, and Monterey, Louisiana, population 371, where reporters have previously traced Gates’ operations.

These limited liability companies, buried under layers of business names, overlapping employees and addresses in at least three states, form a network more tangled and opaque than the one created by the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, which is buying a giant amount of Nebraska ranch land. 

Because it’s hidden, Nebraskans living and farming in communities where Gates is among the largest landowners are often unaware that one of the world’s richest men owns the cornfield down the road.   

Gates now owns around 20,000 acres of farmland across 19 counties in Nebraska after selling some land in recent years. He owns the largest chunk of land, about 8,500 acres, in Holt County.

Click here to view the interactive map

“I think if you ask on the street, who owns Mt. Edna Farms, nobody’d even know what it was,” said Bill Tielke, chair of the Holt County board. “So it’s not like people realize that he does own that much land in Holt County.”

Mt. Edna has a farm manager in Holt County, Tielke said, and local people work for the farm and rent the ground. Tielke has worked as a crop adjuster for local farmers who rented Mt. Edna’s land, and said that if they hadn’t told Tielke that Gates bought the land, he wouldn’t have known. 

“I don’t remember it throwing up any bells or whistles or anybody even saying anything about it,” Tielke said.

The Nebraska Farm Bureau, through spokesperson Cassie Hoebelheinrich, declined to comment on Gates’ farmland ownership. 

“This is an issue we really don’t follow and isn’t a priority for us,” Hoebelheinrich said in an email.

Gates’ land ownership has been the source of much rumor, and some concern, in Nebraska, partly because of his connections to the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, which runs programs addressing issues of global public health, sustainability and climate change.

If Gates’ land was given to a nonprofit – potentially making it exempt from property taxes –  it would “decimate” the counties involved, State Sen. Tom Brewer, a Republican whose district covers 11 rural counties in central and northern Nebraska, said in an email.

“It would force action from the Legislature to protect the counties,” Brewer wrote.

But the farmland is one of Bill Gates’ financial investments, said the company who manages those investments, not part of the Gates Foundation’s portfolio.  

“The investments that Cascade makes in Nebraska farmland are not connected with the agricultural or climate initiatives of the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation,” a Cascade spokesperson said in an email.

Cascade Asset Management declined to answer further questions about its Nebraska farmland purchases and the structure of the affiliated LLCs. 

Gates himself recently publicly reinforced the idea that his farmland purchases are investments. 

“The decision to buy this land was made by people who help manage my money so that we get a good return, so that the Foundation can buy more vaccines,” Gates said on a November episode of Trevor Noah’s podcast. “And they saw that if we could invest in land and (improve) the productivity of that land, that it would have a good return.”

Buy, Borrow, Die

Gates doesn’t simply receive rent checks from his Nebraska farmland. He’s also using it to borrow staggering sums of money. 

Three days before Christmas 2021, Mr. Edna Farms filed paperwork with Dawson County, clearing the path to use a part of Gates’ land as collateral. 

Gates’ LLC then took out two loans against his Nebraska farmland.

The total of those loans: $700 million.

The obvious question: Why is Gates, who Forbes deemed the world’s richest man 18 different times between 1995 and 2017, using Nebraska farmland to take out a $700 million loan?

Using IRS data, the news outlet ProPublica estimated Gates’ total average annual income between 2013 and 2018 was $2.85 billion, with an average federal income tax rate of 18.4%. That income primarily came from sales of Microsoft stock, which is taxable.

But extremely high net-worth individuals like Gates often use a strategy of borrowing against their assets – like land – if they want spendable money. Selling those same assets would generate taxable income, said Adam Thimmesch, a University of Nebraska College of Law professor specializing in business and tax law. 

“If you can hold those assets until you die, all of that taxable gain goes away, so the ideal tax planning technique, if you’re wealthy enough to be able to do it, is to invest in those appreciating assets,” Thimmesch said.

If certain conditions are met, tax law then allows someone to inherit the land and avoid paying taxes on the long-term appreciated value if they sell it, Thimmesch said. 

In the meantime, ultra-rich Americans can borrow against their assets to fund their lifestyles or make other investments. Banks are happy to lend money for something like farmland, the law professor said, because there’s security in the value.

“Then on your death, your heirs can sell the property if they need to, to pay back the debt, and there’s just no tax liability anymore,” Thimmesch said. “So you can eliminate that entire layer of tax, while still kind of enjoying the benefits of being wealthy while you’re alive.”

In order to use this so-called “buy-borrow-die” method, Gates would need to place his Nebraska farmland in his own name before he dies, or be the sole owner of Mt. Edna Farms LLC.

The corporate structure and official ownership of Gates’ various shell companies has never been publicly explained. It’s impossible to know now if his land would be eligible for the tax provision, Thimmesch said. 

Cascade Investment declined to answer questions about the loan, and the management of Gates’ investments beyond confirming that they are not connected to the activities of the Gates Foundation.

Below the Surface

Gates’ land ownership in Nebraska includes the valuable water beneath that land.

He has access through 191 existing wells, which add to the value of the land for farmers and investors alike by providing crop irrigation. 

A center pivot near Gates’ land in Antelope County, Nebraska. The billionaire owns land in 19 Nebraska counties. Photo by Jerry L Mennenga for the Flatwater Free Press

Gaining access to groundwater is often a priority for potential farmland buyers. If you own land in Nebraska, you have the possibility of accessing the underlying groundwater, but natural resource districts regulate how water is used.

“I’m sure that the NRD is well aware (of Gates), and that every one of those wells is no doubt permitted, and has associated certified acres and probably does some annual reporting to the NRD as well,” said Don Blankenau, a lawyer who provides water-related legal counsel to Nebraska NRDs.

Gates’ existing wells were transferred to Mt. Edna with the lump sum purchase of land in 2017, public records from the Nebraska Department of Natural Resources show.

“We don’t treat Bill Gates any different than Dean Edson or anybody else. They can have that land, but they don’t own the water,” said Dean Edson, director of the Nebraska Association of Resource Districts. “If they want to use the water, Bill Gates is gonna have to come get a permit.”

If you buy land in Nebraska without a well, there’s no guarantee your local NRD will grant a permit to dig one. But if the land already has a well, the NRD has likely already certified its use. The landowner, be it Bill Gates or Bill Jones, can continue to use that water so long as the use follows existing rules, Blankenau said.

“I’ve heard over the decades I’ve done this, people are always concerned that somebody’s gonna go out and buy a big tract of land in the Sandhills, and then transport that water away,” Blankenau said.

That’s nearly impossible, he said, because Nebraska has tight limitations on the transportation of groundwater, especially outside of state borders or as a commodity. An investor like Gates moving large quantities of groundwater via pipeline or trucking operation would attract the attention of neighbors and the local NRD.

“If you extract groundwater out of the ground, carbonate it and add sugar to it, you’ve got soda pop, and you can move that all over the place. Same thing with beer, one of my law partners started brewing, and I always tease him that he’s exporting groundwater in the form of beer,” Blankenau said.

In Holt County, Gates’ operation has gone mostly unnoticed by neighbors and county officials. And the actual farming of that land has barely changed. 

But Gates’ land buys still matter, said Tielke, chair of the Holt County board. The purchases of any large outside investor limit the opportunities of small farmers to break into the industry. 

“I think it’s going to cause a lot of problems for future generations to get young people started,” Tielke said. “It’s getting pretty hard to compete with these guys that are coming here buying this land now.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Destiny is a Roy W. Howard fellow through the Scripps Howard Foundation. She earned her master’s degree in journalism at the University of Maryland. While at UMD, she covered NASA and Congress for Capital News Service, reporting on everything from cheese served at state dinners to future missions to Mars. She worked on the Howard Center’s award-winning project, “Mega Billons,” an investigation of state lotteries, and was part of an ongoing Associated Press investigation into law enforcement practices. When she isn’t reporting, Destiny loves swing dancing and thrift shopping. 

Featured image: Illustration by Hanscom Park Studio

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

When US President Joe Biden was elected in 2020, he had first considered appointing William J. Burns as Secretary of State, but eventually chose Antony Blinken. Burns was later tapped to be the Director of the CIA. Sources close to Biden say that should Biden be re-elected in 2024, he may replace Blinken with Burns.

Burns left a diplomatic career in 2014 after 32 years, and took the position of president at Carnegie Endowment for International Peace before becoming the head of the CIA in 2021. Last month, Zaha Hassan wrote on their website, “For Palestinians, the “Day After” Starts with a Plan for Ending Israel’s Occupation”. 

The mission of Carnegie Endowment for International Peace is “reducing global conflict, and promoting active international engagement between the United States and countries around the world.” At the CIA, Burns does not make US policy, but at the State Department Blinken does. 

Blinken told Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu that his visit to Israel was “not just as secretary of state, but also a Jew.”

Blinken’s statement, as an American-born official representing the government of the United States as Secretary of State in a secular government and society, is repugnant, unacceptable and undiplomatic.

Blinken arrived in Israel on an US government plane, fuel by gasoline that the US tax-payers paid for. He did not go to Israel as a private citizen on vacation. 

Blinken does not represent the American people in the current Israeli war on Gaza.  He represents the interests of Israel.  He has been called an “Israeli agent” anonymously behind his back in diplomatic circles in Washington, DC and dozens of staffers have sent him letters of protest against his handling of the Gaza war.

A diplomat can only work representing one country at a time. Blinken is on the US government payroll, but also working for the benefit of Israel, making him a double-agent.

Biden won 2020 in part because he appealed to the younger voters. Now, the younger voters are disgusted with Biden’s handling of the genocide in Gaza. If Biden loses in November, it could be in part because of the Israeli attack on the people of Gaza, in an act of revenge for the horrific attack on the Israel by Hamas on October 7, in which 1,300 died, and 200 were taken as hostages to Gaza.

Israel receives its weapons, humanitarian supplies and cash benefits from the US, paid for by the American taxpayers. In good times, the taxpayers don’t seem to mind, but when they see images out of Gaza showing the wholesale destruction of homes, infrastructure, and the accompanying slaughter of over 23,000 people, most of which are women and children, they want it to stop immediately.

Americans are independent thinkers, value hard work and struggle, and have an entrenched sympathy for the under-dog. The US mainstream media has covered the plight of the Palestinian civilians suffering, but they also cover the domestic election, which prevents the American people from being over-whelmed by the news and videos coming out of Gaza. The closest any American media gets to the story is their journalists reporting from Tel Aviv, which means the audience will hear the Israeli spin on the story.

In the age of internet, where young people, and increasingly middle-aged people, are spending a great deal of time on their mobile phone, the viewers are see the images and reports coming out of Gaza directly. Americans have an innate hatred of injustice, and have a growing distrust in their own government.

If the current situation was made into a Hollywood movie, with an actor like George Clooney playing the US president, the actor would forcefully tell the Israeli Prime Minister to stop the wholesale bombing of civilians in Palestine, or face being cut off from US funds and weapons. The actor would make a speech to the American people, saying that a fundamental American value is human rights, the value of every life, and the hope of freedom for all peoples, everywhere, even in Palestine. But, we are not in Hollywood.

If freedom and human rights are an American value, then why doesn’t Biden call for a ceasefire in Gaza?  He can’t because it is an election year. AIPAC is the Israel lobby which exerts control on the US government and Congress.  Every politician knows that if you come out against Israel on any issue, you face being targeted by AIPAC.  The lobby will make your re-election impossible, and their attack can ruin careers, and even families.  

Reported by Medium recently, anonymous members of Biden’s campaign staff demanded in a letter that Biden call for a ceasefire, citing concerns for the election outcome.

Recently, AIPAC targeted Harvard, McGill and the University of Pennsylvania, accusing their presidents of allowing anti-Semitism to flourish on campus. American college students had held Palestinian flags, and protest signs calling for freedom in Palestine, which is not anti-Semitism. Supporting freedom for the Palestinian people, any other oppressed and occupied people on earth, is demonstrating an American value. Two of the presidents lost their jobs after the AIPAC orchestrated attack, and the one who identified herself as Jewish was allowed to remain.

A poll found that of people ages 18-29, 28% sympathized with Palestinians, while only 20% with Israelis. When younger people heard that Israel denied Gaza water, food and medicines, and prevented any travel in or out of Gaza, this caused them to sympathize with the Palestinians.

William Burns has spent years in the Middle East, and speaks Arabic. We can’t blame Blinken for Biden’s foreign policy which is blind acquiescence to every dictate from Israel, because Biden is the Commander in Chief. But, what if Burns was at the helm in the US-Israeli negotiations on the genocide in Gaza? If State Department staffers were to write letters of complaint to Burns about Gaza, would he simply dismiss them with double-talk like Blinken has, or would he take the matter to Biden and find a way to deal with Israel which keeps American values in tact?

President Richard Nixon stopped the Vietnam war, and admitted that he had no choice because the American public opinion was against the war, and protesters caused him to end the war. Biden has the chance to follow the American conscience, and possibly win re-election, or he can bow down to Netanyahu and lose. Israeli political analysts feel there is no political future possible for Netanyahu after this Gaza war.  It would appear, Biden is headed for the same retirement.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published on Mideast Discourse.

Steven Sahiounie is a two-time award-winning journalist. He is a regular contributor to Global Research.

Featured image is from MD

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Iran-backed groups have stepped up attempts to kill US forces in Iraq with an intense volley of ballistic missiles fired at Al Asad airbase in western Iraq.

The attack is the largest by Iran-backed militias against US forces yet.

“It is a huge escalation, involving perhaps 15-20 missiles,” said Joel Wing, a California-based expert who has been tracking violence in Iraq for 16 years. 

“It seems like things are spiralling. There’s no way they’re firing ballistic missiles and not expecting casualties.”

Mr Wing told The National the US will almost certainly be drawn into a lethal response, if only to deter further attacks. One option for the US could be trying to kill a militia commander in a targeted strike.

A range of militias backed by Tehran operate in Iraq, most under the umbrella of the Popular Mobilisation Forces. They have stepped up their attacks on US forces in the country since the outbreak of the Israel-Gaza war and the related rise in regional tensions between Iran and its proxy groups and the US and Israel.

While the joint Iraqi-US operated Al Asad airbase has been hit with ballistic missiles before – Iran fired around 12 at the base in early 2020 – this latest attack is the largest by Iran-backed militia groups within Iraq.

Militias launched smaller salvos of one or two ballistic missiles at US forces at the end of last year but have mostly used much smaller, inaccurate rockets and small but deadly drones.

The escalation is part of the militias’ campaign to pressure the US to leave Iraq. There are about 2,500 American military trainers in the country under the International Coalition against ISIS.

Iraqi Prime Minister Mohammed Shia Al Sudani, who relies on Iran-backed militias and parties for support, has criticised militias for attacking coalition troops on Iraqi territory, but has upped his calls for US forces to leave the country as the conflict escalates.

Mr Al Sudani has also fiercely condemned US counter strikes against the militias as a “violation of sovereignty”.

Unprecedented Missile Attack

The drones used by the militias, such as the Iran-made Shahed-136, carry up to 50kg of explosives, compared to ballistic missiles – used in Saturday’s attack – that can carry several hundred kilograms, potentially levelling entire buildings.

Centcom, the US headquarters in the Middle East, said some soldiers were “undergoing evaluation for traumatic brain injuries,” after Saturday’s attack, and that one Iraqi was seriously wounded.

After Iran’s 2020 missile attack on Al Asad, as many as 100 US soldiers sheltering in bunkers suffered concussive injuries from the missile strikes, each detonating up to 500kg of explosives and sending shock waves through concrete shelters.

The US said Patriot missile interceptors shot down a number of the missiles in Sunday’s attack, which also involved rockets flying at lower altitudes, possibly in an attempt to overwhelm air defences.

Iran has supplied the PMF militias with ballistic missiles smuggled from Iran, part of an effort to transfer the weapons to Syria.

Militias Equipped with New Missiles

In November, the Islamic Resistance in Iraq, which encompasses Kataib Hezbollah and a smaller group, Harakat Hezbollah Al Nujaba, released an image of what it claimed was a new ballistic missile, the Al Aqsa.

According to Fabian Hinz, an expert on Iranian weapons, the missile was likely based on existing Iranian designs with a range of up to 250km.

Iran is also thought to have transferred Fateh 110 missiles to the militias with a range of up to 500km.

Earlier this month, Kataib Hezbollah, seen by analysts as the most influential group in the PMF, said it had already carried out ballistic missile attacks on US forces and warned attacks would expand “under the banner of the Islamic Resistance in Iraq”.

The group previously ran the Missiles Directorate within the PMF, placing it in charge of missile technology.

In November, a US AC-130J gunship killed two members of Kataib Hezbollah near Baghdad, with the US saying the group was moving ballistic missiles launchers following a previous attack.

Iran has been transferring ballistic missiles to Iraq since around 2017, with many of the weapons believed to be stored in Jurf Al Sakhar, a rural town emptied of civilians during a brutal battle with ISIS in 2014. It has been taken over by Kataib Hezbollah since.

The US bombed Kataib Hezbollah positions again in December in Jurf Al Sakhar and Anbar, after another attack that wounded American soldiers in Erbil.

The rivalry between US forces and Kataib Hezbollah is bitter and goes back to the US occupation of Iraq, when the militia killed and wounded hundreds of US soldiers. The worst Kataib Hezbollah attacks came in 2011 when the group killed 14 American troops over several weeks that summer.

At the time, it was led by former Iraqi MP Jamal Jaafar Ibrahimi, better known as Abu Mahdi Al Muhandis, who was killed in a US drone strike, alongside Iranian Gen Qassem Suleimani, in early 2020.

That attack, which followed deadly rocket strikes on US forces the previous week, led to Iran’s missile bombardment at Al Asad – underlining how quickly the US-militia conflict can escalate.

Tensions continued and one of US President Joe Biden’s first acts in office was ordering air strikes against the group in Syria, after it attacked US troops there.

Escalation Likely

Experts warned the continuing Israel-Gaza war meant that escalation between the US and Iran in Iraq was likely.

“Gaza is just total hell and Israel is not going to stop,” Mr Wing said. “Plus the aftermath is probably a long military occupation of Gaza and more resistance. The pressure for Iran to ‘do something’ is incredible and they can’t seem to hold back.”

Mark Pyrus, a historian and Iran expert, agreed.

“Iran’s strategy is multitheatre, as a response to the current Israel-Gaza campaign that includes Israeli and American operational engagement,” he said. “Expectation is a forthcoming American counterstrike.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image: A US Air Force operation to support maritime security and stability in the Middle East. Photo: US Navy

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

I don’t think its an overstatement to observe that the future of the world is hanging in the balance as 15 World Court judges at the Hague deliberate over the contending legal submissions made by the governments of Israel and South Africa. At this preliminary stage the core contention comes down to the question of whether or not it is “plausible” that the Genocide Convention is being violated in the course of the Gaza Massacre.

A rhetorical question could be asked in response to this legal question. If the lethal, horrific and many-faceted atrocities being committed in Gaza do not embody genocide, then what does?

What are the implications if the Israeli government succeeds in persuading the judges that its ruthless, high-tech obliteration of people and their life support systems in the Gaza prison camp, is something other than genocide?

The result of such a ruling would have the effect of normalizing what is going on in Gaza.

The industrial-scale killing happening there, is a classic example of several synergistic forms of genocide being imposed simultaneously. This combination of techniques to achieve the indiscriminate mass murder of a mostly unarmed civilian population, almost half of whom are children, surely qualifies as the outer extremes of genocidal assault.

Any ruling that stops short of ordering a stop to the military machinery of genocide would further discredit the already-tenuous credibility of the International Court of Justice. (ICJ)

Since its inception in 1945 the ICJ “has yet to judge any country in the world to be responsible for genocide.” See this.

The government of Israel suddenly finds itself viewed in the world as the primary perpetrator of genocide rather than its primary victim. See this.

On a deeper level, however, it is the International Court of Justice (ICJ) and the whole apparatus of international law that is facing the jaded judgment from the most attentive and conscientious branches of the global community.

Craig Murray is a former British diplomat who played a behind-the-scenes role in the process that led the government of South Africa to take on the monumental responsibility of bringing this case forward. As Murray explains, the outcome of the Israeli Genocide Case will decide the guilt or innocence of more than a country. The whole system of international criminal law is also on trial.

How did the assumptions develop on the part of the predators that they would not face legal recriminations for pressing ahead with a multitude of lethal tactics aimed at exterminating an occupied people locked in captivity. How did the predators come to an understand that they could be both the occupier and the wronged party when faced with legitimate armed resistance to their illegal occupation?

What is the role of the international judges, including at the ICJ, in creating the conditions for the development of such imperious assumptions on the part of the protagonists of genocide. The outrageous circumstances, recorded with fidelity in the “airtight” legal case put forward to the ICJ by the South African government, has created a major indictment of a country so far granted repeated impunity from legal consequences for its crimes against the native Palestinians.

As Prof. Takahashi points out, the Israeli genocide in Gaza represents an extension of of an old and well-established processes in the West’s imperial appropriation of lands and natural resources on its colonial frontiers. He writes,

“From the get-go, international legal norms were intended to apply only to so-called “civilised” – read white – peoples. Savages did not count, and the powerful Western states could – and did – do to them what they pleased. Natives certainly did not “own” land or natural resources, and colonial powers were free to steal and exploit those as they wished. Zionism was also founded on such racist attitudes – attitudes that remain at the core of Israeli policies to this day.” See this.

The South African intervention clearly states the obvious but in great detail with eloquence and overwhelming proof for the compelling legal arguments. The Israeli defence at The Hague, one characterized by outbursts of self-righteous indignation, could be interpreted as a diversionary tactic.

This diversion is being carried out by agents of a polity whose top officers have been caught literally red handed, in the midst of a monumental implementation of genocide. Any fair and objective assessment of the evidence could not help but lead to the conclusion that Israel does not have even a single solid legal leg to stand on. But let’s not be naive.

What the Israelis do have going for them is the backing of a formidable worldwide network of Zionist authority. This Zionist network has access to unimaginable wealth with tentacles in strategic nerve centres of high-level corporate governance intertwined with organized crime. Hence the choice put before the 15 judges in this case is a stark one. They can embrace the rule of law or they can protect their own personal self-interest as well as the interest of the lobbies, countries and individuals to whom they are beholden.

A verdict that allows the government of Israel to get off the hook for its genocidal actions would, some say, expose the total bankruptcy of an international system that often puts small, hugely entitled constituencies above the law. Such a verdict would help bring to light the elaborate matrix of depravity and degradation from which the genocidal crimes of Israel have emerged.

Officials in the Israeli state as well as some in the Israeli business community, the military and in many branches of civil society have long derived the correct message that they represent an order of humanity that is above the law. They are basically left free to dispossess, oppress and kill certain groups and individuals without being held answerable to any form of legal authority.

The provision of licenses to kill and steal is, of course, not unique to Israel. But the governments of Israel and its US partner make especially ample use of this feature of the international system that creates a category of people basically exempted from accountability for even serial violations of very serious laws.

Now South Africa’s legal argument is shining a spotlight on this whole phenomenon by calling the question on the blatant transgressions of the highest order of legal prohibition by the officials of Israeli state.

A telling snapshot of the broader problem to be faced, is epitomized by the road to judicial power of Joan E. Donoghue. She is the heavily politicized President of the ICJ who is chairing the current hearings. Judge Donoghue came to the ICJ as the choice of the former US Secretary of State, Hillary Clinton. In congratulating Donoghue in 2010 for her judicial appointment to the ICJ at the Hague, Clinton indicated,

“Joan Donoghue has won the confidence of senior officials in both Democratic and Republican Administrations. And as the State Department’s Acting Legal Adviser in 2009 and now as the Principal Deputy Legal Adviser, Joan has provided me with the very best legal advice on the complex and challenging issues we confront on a daily basis.” See this.

Judge Donoghue, a former US State Department official and legal adviser to Hillary Clinton when she led that department, is in a very clear conflict of interest. It is possible or maybe even likely that she regularly reports back to the US State Department whose present Secretary is Antony Blinken.

As the source of weaponry, financing, and “diplomatic cover,” the US government is quite clearly the senior partner with the Israeli government in this campaign to violently de-Palestinianize Gaza and the West Bank. Any finding that Israel is guilty of genocide or, at this stage, plausible genocide, would make the US government complicit in the same crime.

As Michel Chossudovsky sees it,

“South Africa’s initiative —which has a direct bearing on the planning of US-NATO military operations in the Middle East– will no doubt be the object of carefully designed (behind the scenes) acts of sabotage.”

He predicts, therefore, that it is very unlikely the judges will make a decent ruling on the basis of an objective assessment of the evidence. Rather the politicized judges will probably respond based on a calculated consideration of their self-interest as well as of the agencies and individuals they may seek to serve and reward.

This pessimistic view is shared by many, including Paul Larudee. He writes,

“it’s quite possible that the game is rigged, the deck stacked, and that the ruling will go against South Africa.”

Jerome Irwin widens the focus on what he thinks of as a thoroughly rigged process involving elected officials as well as rich and powerful lobbies. He believes “the likes of all the Trudeaus, Bidens, Blinkens and rest of the AIPAC’s puppets will do exactly as they’re told.”

Consider that this trial, beginning on 11 January, 2024, is the first time the government of Israel has deigned to be actually present in court room proceedings dealing with its alleged and proven criminality in its interactions with Palestinians. Like the US government, the Israeli government has come to understand it will not be compelled to follow international law or obey judicial rulings that lack enforcement mechanisms. Now an apparent break in this pattern has occurred. For the first time in the concurrent history of the UN and Israel, on Jan. 11 and 12 an Israeli delegation sat in “the dock” for the criminally accused.

The founders of Israel looked to the UN to legitimize its initial existence with the passage in the General Assembly of Resolution 181. After that Resolution, one based on a unrealized partition plan to create new Jewish and Arab states, Israelis turned on the UN. For instance in 1948 a Jewish militia, sometimes defined as a terrorist group, assassinated a UN-appointed peace mediator, Count Folke Bernadotte.

This same contemptuous attitude toward the UN was reflected in 2023 when 136 UN workers, more than any other previous conflict, were killed in the course of the IDF’s assault on Gaza.

Now the government of Israel is at least paying attention to the accusations they face. According to the Jewish Telegraphic Agency,

“Israeli officials say the charge of genocide is too much for a state born in the ashes of the Holocaust to ignore.” The JTA added, “The State of Israel will appear before the International Court of Justice at The Hague to dispel South Africa’s absurd blood libel.”

Israel as a Polity Born in the Ashes of the Holocaust 

The core of the Genocide Convention offers very precise definitions of the content of the crime as well as of the human activities related to the crime that are “punishable.” The five definitions of genocide are short, precise statements that are easy to understand.

It is obvious that four of these definitions are met by many aspects of what is clearly observable even in the daily mass media coverage of the Israeli invasion of Gaza. What is obvious in the media becomes crystal clear in South Africa’s submission. A big part of the South African intervention involves proving the depth and breadth of the Israeli intent  “to destroy, in whole or in part” the Palestinians.

Article II In the present Convention, genocide means any of the following acts committed with intent to destroy, in whole or in part, a national, ethnical, racial or religious group, as such:

(a) Killing members of the group;

(b) Causing serious bodily or mental harm to members of the group;

(c) Deliberately inflicting on the group conditions of life calculated to bring about its physical destruction in whole or in part;

(d) Imposing measures intended to prevent births within the group;

(e) Forcibly transferring children of the group to another group.

Article III The following acts shall be punishable:

(a) Genocide;

(b) Conspiracy to commit genocide;

(c) Direct and public incitement to commit genocide;

(d) Attempt to commit genocide;

(e) Complicity in genocide

Raphael Lemkin was the principle technocratic at the new United Nations who worked with national delegations to come up with the initial draft of the Genocide Convention. Prior to his work at the UN, Lemkin also invented the term “genocide” and introduced it in a book he completed in 1944. Lemkin came up with the term in the process of studying the social engineering of the of the National Socialist government of Germany after it came to power in 1933.

Raphael Lemkin was a multi-faceted scholar. He was Pole, a Jew, an international lawyer, and an expert in the Ottoman assault on the Armenians. In studying the assault on Armenians, Lemkin observed that the world’s legal systems could readily handle the crime of murder but did not have even a name to describe actions that weaken, diminish or end the viability of national groups.

Lemkin developed the concept of genocide in the course of his observation of some of the legal and administrative changes as Germany grew in power and influence. This expanded influence was felt throughout Europe and especially in Eastern Europe. In the text Lemkin pays close attention to interventions that undermined the vitality and cultural viability of certain nations deemed less deserving of support than other nations.

Although he mentions from time to time the problematic treatment of Jews, the bulk of his attention as a Polish jurist was drawn to the dilemmas being faced especially by many Slavic nations in Eastern Europe. He devoted much attention to the implications of limiting or ending agencies like national museums, national archives, national theatres, schools and language institutes.

Lemkin heaped scorn on actions that result in the “vandalization” of art forms as expressed in media like traditional music, paintings, sculpture and literature. See this.

These media of artistic expression Lemkin considered essential in the process of renewing and revitalizing heritage and culture. Lemkin was especially attentive to the role of religion and churches in the spiritual and community life of healthy nations.

It was in the process of looking at this this kind of “vandalism” and “barbarism” that Lemkin came up with his concept of genocide which he discusses in his volume, Axis Rule in Occupied Europe: Laws of Occupation, Analysis of Government, Proposals for Redress.

Lemkin left Europe in 1941 and headed eastward. He crossed the Pacific Ocean towards New York City. In his work at the United Nations his ideas involving genocide were seized upon and attached to the top priorities of the winning side in World War II. Lemkin’s emphasis on what in today’s term would be called cultural genocide, was pushed to the side. In its place definitions were developed in the process of drafting the Genocide Convention to make it harmonious with the narrative of Israel as a state “born in the ashes of the Holocaust.”

Certainly this narrative of Israel as a polity born in the ashes of the Holocaust was integral to Tal Becker’s introduction of the case for Israel’s defence put on Jan. 12, 2024, before the judges of the World Court. Becker seemed to assert some kind of proprietary claim to the Genocide Convention based on an inheritance from the event that has come to be known as The Holocaust. In my view Becker’s brief reference to the role of Raphael Lemkin did not fairly represent the Polish jurist’s role in originating, modifying and adapting the idea of genocide that formed the basis of the UN’s Genocide Convention.

Becker’s Israeliocentric interpretation of the forces that led to his appearance before the ICJ showed no empathy at all for the forces that brought the Palestinians, the South African government and the multicultural South African legal team within the framework of the adversarial litigation currently underway.

According to Becker, the Israeli government and its Jewish citizens are once again blameless victims transgressed upon with this unjustified criminal charge brought forward by ill-willed anti-Semites in league with crazed Islamic terrorists.

“Gaza Will Become a Place Where No Human Being Can Exist.” General Giora Eiland, Former Head of the Israeli National Security Council

One of the most intense and detailed facets of South Africa’s legal submission was the section explaining how, all up and down the Israeli government, the Israeli Armed Forces, and Israeli civil society, there exists a broadly shared intention to exterminate as many Palestinians as possible. The aim goes far beyond the 24/7 bombarding of the entire population of Gaza from air, sea and land.

The aim is to destroy all housing, all infrastructure, all access to food, water, education, electricity, fuel, medical care, employment, mosques, churches and more, in order to eliminate all systems for supporting human life. The aim is to depopulate Gaza as much as possible and then force the survivors to run for their lives in a grotesque saga of forced deportation.

There is in the South African submission much testimony supporting the assertion that the primary agenda right now of the Israeli state and people is to push forward an agenda of genocide on steroids. Awareness of this agenda flows from the Israeli leadership into the rank and file of the Armed forces, into the media, into the education system and into the society at large. General Giora Eiland is a representative example of a high-ranking and influential military figure in Israel seeking to deploy all means possible to bring about the mass extermination and deportation of Palestinians.

Eiland’s titles include Israeli Army Reservist Major General, former Head of the Israeli National Security Council, and adviser to the Defence Minister. He is well known in Israel for his advocacy of plans to induce lethal plagues among the Palestinians to weed out their numbers. In Haaretz, Gideon Levy explains that Eiland thinks “epidemics in Gaza are good for Israel.” He cites Eiland as follows: “After all, severe epidemics in the southern Strip will bring victory closer and reduce fatalities among IDF soldiers.” 

The authors of the South African submission have assembled numerous public citations from the vocal and prolific military officer, political adviser, and national security official. These citations appear between pages 62 to 64 of South Africa’s submission to the ICJ. From this text I draw the following excerpt:

Giora Eiland has repeatedly been given a media platform to call for Gaza to be made uninhabitable, declaring “the State of Israel has no choice but to make Gaza a place that is temporarily, or permanently, impossible to live in.”473 In an interview on 6 November 2023, he suggested that, “if there is an intention for a military action at Shifa [Hospital], which I think is inescapable, I hope that the head of the CIA got an explanation of why this is necessary, and why the US must ultimately back even an operation like this, even if there are thousands of bodies of civilians in the streets afterward.”474 Further he proposed that “Israel needs to create a humanitarian crisis in Gaza, compelling tens of thousands or even hundreds of thousands to seek refuge in Egypt or the Gulf . . . Gaza will become a place where no human being can exist.”475

Echoing the words of President Herzog, he has repeatedly underscored that there should be no distinction between Hamas combatants and Palestinian civilians, saying:“Who are the ‘poor’ women of Gaza? They are all the mothers, sisters or wives of Hamas murderers. On the one hand, they are part of the infrastructure that supports the organization, and on the other hand, if they experience a humanitarian disaster, then it can be assumed that some of the Hamas fighters and the more junior commanders will begin to understand that the war is futile . . . The international community warns us of a humanitarian disaster in Gaza and of severe epidemics. We must not shy away from this, as difficult as that may be. After all, severe epidemics in the south of the Gaza Strip will bring victory closer . . . It is precisely its civil collapse that will bring the end of the war closer. When senior Israeli figures say in the media ‘It’s either us or them’ we should clarify the question of who is ‘them’. ‘They’ are not only Hamas fighters with weapons, but also all the ‘civilian’ officials, including hospital administrators and school administrators, and also the entire Gaza population who enthusiastically supported Hamas and cheered on its atrocities on October 7th.”476

The evidence is shocking in South Africa’s submission and in the evidence in the mass media of the lethal intentions of almost the entire Israeli population towards the Palestinian population. Witnessing even at a distance the startling animosity of a large part of the entire Jewish Israeli population, helps give me an idea of what it must have been like in the Deep South of the United States in the heyday of segregation or in South Africa in the heyday of apartheid.

As witnessed by Miko Peled, the son of a famous Israeli General, the deep and pervasive animosity towards Palestinians is cultivated in the Israeli system of public education, in the Armed Forces, and throughout the media.

The presentation to the ICJ by Irish lawyer, Blinne Ní Ghrálaigh, emphasized the severity, shamefulness, and urgency of the many-faceted humanitarian crisis in Gaza. Ní Ghrálaigh explained in no uncertain terms the widespread guilt and responsibility of those in authority who could have done something to preempt this genocidal nightmare.

The Gaza debacle ultimately should shame all of humanity.

Ní Ghrálaigh’s intention was to emphasize for the court the imperative of taking quick action by issuing an immediate order. The essence of such an order would state that the government of Israel must cease and desist pushing forward its many-faceted genocidal incursions.

Of course getting Israel to respect such an order forms a obstacle yet to be bridged. The difficulty in enforcing a court order, however, should not be allowed to provide the judges with an excuse not to do their part to meet this humanitarian and existential crisis that has gone way too far already.

The ruthlessness of this genocide is much more than plausible for those who choose to consider the available evidence and those equipped with hearts that can feel the necessity of stopping the perverse kill fest presently taking place, hour by hour, right before our eyes. See this.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published on the author’s Substack, Looking out at the World from Canada.

Dr. Anthony Hall is currently Professor of Globalization Studies at the University of Lethbridge in Alberta Canada. He has been a teacher in the Canadian university system since 1982. Dr. Hall, has recently finished a big two-volume publishing project at McGill-Queen’s University Press entitled “The Bowl with One Spoon”.

He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG). 

Featured image is from the author

The Fix Is In – Trump Goes to Prison

January 22nd, 2024 by Martin Armstrong

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Let me explain something very important. According to Business Insider, George Soros’s son has come out and said that Trump would not go away unless he is in prison. The FIX IS IN and Trump will be imprisoned in the Washington, DC case. That is the plan.

The objective in Colorado is to kick Trump off the ballot.

This is a war for the very soul of the United States. I have had to look at these forecasts projected by the computer, and it is certainly not my aspiration in life. People keep telling me it is my destiny to bring independent forecasting upfront. Perhaps so. But I do not relish laying out these forecasts, for I wish I could prevent the outcome, but I cannot. No protest can be mustered to prevent this. We have to crash and burn. Only then will the blind finally see, and those who have understood these forecasts will get to perhaps spread the word.

Atty General calls for Speedy Trial

They have done everything they possibly can to stop Trump, for they KNOW he will do his best to prevent their agenda.

Yet, unfortunately, the computer has warned that neither side will accept the 2024 election.

They are outright pushing to put Trump in prison.

The Attorney General has now come out pushing for a speedy trial in DC because they think throwing Trump in prison will be the only thing that will stop him.

 

My deep concern is that we are approaching the 19th cycle of 8.6 from the American Civil War. This only adds to the rising tensions, which will escalate into 2026. These people are so desperate to impose their totalitarian state that they refuse to back off. If they cannot imprison Trump, they will assassinate him. We are approaching the last 8.6 years in this 51.6-year cycle, and they will be the darkest days of our lives.

My concern is if the Supreme Court yields to this conspiracy to imprison Trump, it could be like the Dread Scott decision, where they tried to reduce the tension by claiming blacks could not be citizens of the United States and that they were, in fact, property.

They thought they were cutting the baby in half to prevent a civil war. But that decision led the people to vote for Abraham Lincoln, who, by the way, was also taken off the ballot in several states. If they buy this argument that Trump was acting as a candidate and NOT as President, then they probably will think that putting him in prison will lower the tensions. That will not end well for them or the nation.

World War III is already in motion.

There will be no state of peace, and Zelensky was put in that position to facilitate this war. I warned when he took office that this would be the guy who started World War III. Zelensky is nothing like what you think. In the EU, another crisis is brewing. The EU has extended permission for Ukrainian refugees to live in the EU. The Council agreed to extend the temporary protection for people fleeing Russia’s war of aggression against Ukraine from March 4th, 2024, to March 4th, 2025.

However, Zelensky’s general mobilization and a state of war has been in effect in Ukraine since Feb. 24th, 2022, with all men aged 18 to 60 considered eligible for military service and subject to conscription. Men are prohibited from leaving Ukraine, and now the EU is recording the refugees, thereby documenting those who are avoiding Zelensky’s draft. It has been said that documents exist showing Zelensky himself refused to show up for the draft before he was president several times.

During a state of war, travel abroad for men in Ukraine is restricted. All military-eligible individuals are forbidden to leave Ukraine, except in cases specified by Cabinet Resolution No. 57. Some military-eligible individuals, lacking the right to leave, have illegally crossed borders and sought asylum in the EU, the United States, or Asian countries. Ukraine lacks a system for holding such individuals to account, but that is rumored to be in the works. Zelensky wants all men returned to die on the battlefield. At this time, Russian soldiers outnumber Ukrainians 4 to 1.

Trump would indeed end the war in 24 hrs.

Cut off all funds for the Ukrainian government employees whom Biden is paying their salaries and pensions.

Insist that Zelensky honors the Minsk Agreement and the war is over.

Those in power right now want war, and they have no intention of ending anything.

2024 Presidential Election by Popular Vote

Here are the computer projections for the 2024 election. Trump should win, as you can see on 4 out of 6 models. But Models #3 and #4 are shocking. These show such a landslide with 61% to 35% and 59% to 37% projections that this scares the hell out of the globalists.

The prospect that the next presidential election in 2028 will NOT EVEN TAKE PLACE is a very high probability, according to our computer.

I am NOT putting this out here as some Trump supporter.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image is from Gage Skidmore via Flickr

Psoriasis After COVID-19 mRNA Vaccination

January 22nd, 2024 by Dr. William Makis

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Weight Loss Influencer Mila De Jesus Dead at 35 – The Brazilian mom of 4 rose to fame online after undergoing bariatric surgery in October 2017.

  • De Jesus’ cause of death has “not yet been revealed”. The content creator leaves behind four children and her husband George Kowszik, whom she married in September 2023.
  • De Jesus — who was born in Brazil and lived in Boston, Massachusetts — rose to fame online after undergoing bariatric surgery in October 2017 and sharing her weight loss journey with her 59,000 Instagram followers. 
  • Her last health update came in November 2023, posting a before and after photo of her progress.
  • “13 years between one picture… 6 years since a decision that changed my life in so many ways,” she wrote at the time. “On one side Mila age 22 and on the other Mila age 35. How much we change huh, how we grow and how we learn. Pride girl pride 😌💜 #beforeandafter
  • De Jesus was also known for her popular makeup tutorials for her 103,000 YouTube subscribers. 

Weight loss influencer Mila De Jesus dies at 35

New York Post:

  • The Instagram star, who was born in Brazil but lived in Boston, passed away Friday, four months after tying the knot with her husband, George Kowszik, Jam Press reported.
  • She leaves behind four children from a previous marriage.
  • Just months prior, the content creator announced that she’d been suffering from psoriasis — a skin disease that causes a rash with itchy, scaly patches — since July.
  • “It’s been three months dealing with this situation, 80% of my body is affected,” De Jesus wrote in an October Instagram post to her nearly 60,000 followers.“Juggling doctors, medications, ointments, and taking a deep breath.”
  • The influencer’s followers, friends and family members were devastated over her loss.

De Jesus.

*

Psoriasis After COVID-19 mRNA Vaccination – Cases Published in Peer-reviewed Journals 

2022 Oct (Tachibana et al) – Japan – Pfizer Two cases of generalized pustular psoriasis after Pfizer COVID-19 mRNA Vaccine. (a-d) Case 1: 60 year old woman 8 days after 2nd mRNA; (e-h) Case 2: 18 year old woman 7 days after 1st mRNA.

Image

2022 Apr – (Frioui et al) – A case of new‐onset acute generalized pustular psoriasis following Pfizer‐BioNTech COVID‐19 vaccine.

  • A 20‐year‐old man presented to the emergency department with a 3‐week history of an acute, rapidly progressive erythematous rash associated with fever, and poor general condition. The patient had a history of mild plaque psoriasis adequately controlled with topical betamethasone.
  • The first dose of mRNA‐CV was given 4 days before the onset of the rash

2022 Mar – (Rouai et al) – Pustular rash triggered by Pfizer-BioNTech COVID-19 vaccination: A case report

 

 

2022 Mar – (Tran et al) – Generalized erythrodermic psoriasis triggered by vaccination against severe acute respiratory syndrome Coronavirus 2.

  • Two people had 1st dose Moderna and 2nd dose Pfizer, then developed “Generalized eruthrodermic psoriasis” – a rare and potentially life threatening variant of psoriasis.

 

Image

 

2022 Feb – (Nia et al) – Erythrodermic psoriasis eruption associated with SARS-CoV-2 vaccination.

  • 58-year-old male presented to the hospital for 6 days of generalized rash covering his body with partial sparing of the medial thighs and feet.
  • It started a day after he received the Pfizer COVID-19 mRNA vaccine

 

2021 Dec (Huang et al) – Exacerbation of Psoriasis Following COVID-19 Vaccination: Report From a Single Center.

  • 68 yo man had psoriasis exacerbation 14 days after Moderna mRNA vaccine.

 

 

2021 Aug (Bostan et al) – Exacerbation of plaque psoriasis after inactivated and BNT162b2 mRNA COVID‐19 vaccines: A report of two cases.

  • Case 1: 51 yo man diagnosed with psoriasis 1 year ago, had 1st Pfizer mRNA jab and his lesions started to enlarge and then accelerated 2 weeks after 2nd dose.
  • Case 2: 52 yo man had Coronavac (inactivated SARS-CoV-2 vaccine, China), 1 month after 2nd dose presented with skin rash on buttocks.

 

 

2021 Aug (Sotiriou et al) – Psoriasis exacerbation after COVID‐19 vaccination: a report of 14 cases from a single centre

  • 14 Greek patients presented to a single ER from Jan.1, 2021 to May 10, 2021 after taking COVID-19 vaccines and were diagnosed with Psoriasis.
  • 5 had Pfizer, 7 had AstraZeneca, 1 had Moderna

 

 

2022 Sep (Wu et al) – New Onset and Exacerbations of Psoriasis Following COVID-19 Vaccines: A Systematic Review.

A systematic literature search was conducted

7 studies reporting new-onset psoriasis, 32 studies reporting psoriasis flares, and 4 studies reporting both

mRNA vaccines, produced by Moderna and BioNTech/Pfizer, were frequently associated with psoriasis episodes.

First, second, and third vaccine doses were associated with psoriasis incidents, with the second dose most frequently associated with psoriasis flares.

Delayed onset was observed, ranging from 2 to 21 days in the new-onset group and from 1 to 90 days in the flare group

My Take…

COVID-19 mRNA Vaccines can cause a wide variety of autoimmune diseases and the sudden development of any autoimmune disease in an mRNA Vaccinated person should implicate the vaccine.

The tragic case of Brazilian Influencer Mila De Jesus is important because it shows that a sudden onset of an autoimmune disease in a COVID-19 Vaccinated person is a very bad sign – it signals other kinds of internal damage as well.

In her case, she had a sudden cardiac arrest, most likely from cardiac damage in addition to her new onset psoriasis which she was diagnosed with a few months prior to her death, and went on to involve 80% of her body.

UPDATE: WHO VigiAccess database shows 4955 reports of Psoriasis after COVID-19 vaccination as of Jan. 22, 2024.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Dr. William Makis is a Canadian physician with expertise in Radiology, Oncology and Immunology. Governor General’s Medal, University of Toronto Scholar. Author of 100+ peer-reviewed medical publications.


The Worldwide Corona Crisis, Global Coup d’Etat Against Humanity

by Michel Chossudovsky

Michel Chossudovsky reviews in detail how this insidious project “destroys people’s lives”. He provides a comprehensive analysis of everything you need to know about the “pandemic” — from the medical dimensions to the economic and social repercussions, political underpinnings, and mental and psychological impacts.

“My objective as an author is to inform people worldwide and refute the official narrative which has been used as a justification to destabilize the economic and social fabric of entire countries, followed by the imposition of the “deadly” COVID-19 “vaccine”. This crisis affects humanity in its entirety: almost 8 billion people. We stand in solidarity with our fellow human beings and our children worldwide. Truth is a powerful instrument.”

Reviews

This is an in-depth resource of great interest if it is the wider perspective you are motivated to understand a little better, the author is very knowledgeable about geopolitics and this comes out in the way Covid is contextualized. —Dr. Mike Yeadon

In this war against humanity in which we find ourselves, in this singular, irregular and massive assault against liberty and the goodness of people, Chossudovsky’s book is a rock upon which to sustain our fight. –Dr. Emanuel Garcia

In fifteen concise science-based chapters, Michel traces the false covid pandemic, explaining how a PCR test, producing up to 97% proven false positives, combined with a relentless 24/7 fear campaign, was able to create a worldwide panic-laden “plandemic”; that this plandemic would never have been possible without the infamous DNA-modifying Polymerase Chain Reaction test – which to this day is being pushed on a majority of innocent people who have no clue. His conclusions are evidenced by renown scientists. —Peter Koenig 

Professor Chossudovsky exposes the truth that “there is no causal relationship between the virus and economic variables.” In other words, it was not COVID-19 but, rather, the deliberate implementation of the illogical, scientifically baseless lockdowns that caused the shutdown of the global economy. –David Skripac

A reading of  Chossudovsky’s book provides a comprehensive lesson in how there is a global coup d’état under way called “The Great Reset” that if not resisted and defeated by freedom loving people everywhere will result in a dystopian future not yet imagined. Pass on this free gift from Professor Chossudovsky before it’s too late.  You will not find so much valuable information and analysis in one place. –Edward Curtin

ISBN: 978-0-9879389-3-0,  Year: 2022,  PDF Ebook,  Pages: 164, 15 Chapters

Price: $11.50 FREE COPY! Click here (docsend) and download.

We encourage you to support the eBook project by making a donation through Global Research’s DonorBox “Worldwide Corona Crisis” Campaign Page

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

World Health Organization (WHO) Director-General and Big Pharma Shill Tedros Ghebreyesus has called on countries to sign on to WHO’s pandemic treaty so the world can prepare for “Disease X.” 

Ghebreyesus, speaking in front of an audience at the World Economic Forum in Davos last Wednesday, said that he hoped countries would reach a pandemic agreement by May to address this “common enemy.”

Scientists on Big Pharma and WHO’s payroll say the unknown and hypothetical virus “could be 20 times deadlier than COVID-19.” See this. 

WHO is a political and propaganda organization, not a health organization.  

Notice that WHO is predicting in advance of its appearance a new 20 times more deadly virus. So WHO is claiming a crystal ball that reveals the future. Why does it only reveal future viruses?

Notice that WHO knows in advance that the unknown and hypothetical virus is very deadly.

Notice that none of these things can possibly be known before they happen.

There is an effort long underway to take all control over health decisions out of the hands of doctors and patients.  The WHO “treaty” is likely designed by Bill Gates, Fauci, and Big Pharma.  It is an instrument of tyranny.  It will be used to prevent effective treatment against whatever pathogen is next released.

Notice that WHO’s prediction is an indication that another released virus will soon be on its way to us.

Notice that these predictions are coming from the Bill Gates/WEF crowd that is intent on reducing the world population by 7.5 billion lives, effectively a genocide of the human race.

Notice that the politicians and media are doing nothing to alert the public and that the organized attempt to destroy your control over your health is meeting faint resistance.

WHO knows that the Covid “pandemic” was an orchestration in which covid tests known to produce false results were intentionally used to create the image of pandemic.

WHO knows that most deaths were not from Covid but from the withholding of effective treatment and the imposition of a treatment protocol known to maximize the death rate.

WHO knows that the “vaccine” has killed and maimed far more people than the virus itself.

Notice that this means that WHO knows it is again deceiving and lying to the public.

Notice that “our representatives” in Congress are doing nothing to protect us.

Notice that the corrupt medical establishment goes along with it even though most of them will also be victims.

Notice that censorship is tightening and that it will be harder the next time to get correct information to the public.

Notice that Bill Gates and Tedros Ghebreyesus are still treated as honorable men.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Paul Craig Roberts is a renowned author and academic, chairman of The Institute for Political Economy where this article was originally published. Dr. Roberts was previously associate editor and columnist for The Wall Street Journal. He was Assistant Secretary of the Treasury for Economic Policy during the Reagan Administration. He is a regular contributor to Global Research.

Se Acerca Siempre Más La Derrota de Vladimir Zelenski

January 22nd, 2024 by Alessandro Pagani

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

My aunty, forced to leave her home under Israeli orders two months ago, sits on a thin mattress, on the sand, in a blue tent, cradling her youngest grandchild in her arms.

Like thousands of children in Gaza, he’s not well. It must be the contaminated water they drink. I think of her journey from her beautiful home in Tuffah neighbourhood to this tent that houses 16 of her family members.

For months, she escaped the bombs, running from shelter to shelter, praying not to lose anyone she loves, but losing many just the same.

Did anyone tell her that her 10-year-old grandchild’s corpse was left to decompose for five days after an Israeli tank fired into her daughter’s home? Did she know her daughter sat with a gushing wound on her head, holding the corpse of her dead son while her two other children and husband were left bleeding, inhaling the stench of death, for five days while Israel blocked any ambulance from reaching them?

These are the stories that haunt us.

Many will say this is the second Palestinian Nakba, and it is for the majority of Palestinians in Gaza who were driven from their homes and lands in 1948.

But for my family, and for nearly 30 percent of Gaza’s population, this is our first experience of Nakba. This is the first time our connection to the city that has held our lives, our stories, and our history, for thousands of years, has been disrupted.

The house my aunty was driven out of belongs to my great-grandfather and was first built during the Ottoman empire, more than 100 years ago. Our neighbourhood, Tuffah, and its adjacent Mohatta Street, where the old railway station used to be, are much older than Israel and all its wars.

Happy Memories

I push away these thoughts. I search for a happy memory. Gaza in July of 2023.

Noise. Heat. Colours. Flashing lights. Cars. Music. Smoke. Food. Laughter. My husband and I climbing the stairs of the Lighthouse restaurant, along Gaza beach. Our son, Nahed, eager to introduce us to his UNRWA colleagues, Hani a Palestinian-American colleague from UNRWA USA, content creators Motaz and Amjad, and Joe, a young Gaza tour guide and influencer.

Motaz asks if he can come over to our apartment to shoot the sunset. “What kind of photos do you take?” “Only beautiful ones,” he smiles. “I want the world to see Gaza’s beauty.”

Joe agrees. The young man tells us that he too only posts beautiful videos of Gaza.

“It is one of the most beautiful cities in the world!” he boasts, with young, unbridled enthusiasm.

I strike a deal with both young men. Motaz can take as many photos from our apartment as he likes if he shares with us his beautiful collection. He promises he’ll take special photos just for us to keep.

Joe offers to take us on a tour of the old city.

My husband and my son discuss with Hani plans for a seaside concert. As well as his work for UNRWA USA, Nahed is also a composer, and he has enlisted the Gaza branch of the Edward Said National Conservatory of Music, and Gaza’s popular SolBand, to participate in a live music concert and fundraiser.

Amjad and I sip on our cold mint lemonade and drift into a conversation about life in Gaza, especially for progressive women.

“Yes there are challenges,” she says. “But despite the wars and the siege, this is our home. I don’t think I would ever want to leave.”

Nahed’s “Gaza to the World” concert runs smoothly. We are so impressed by the musical talent and training of Gaza musicians, which rivals that of any other city in the world.

‘My generation needs hope’

Joe takes us on his special tour of the old city. We visit the Church of Saint Porphyrius, the Great Mosque of Gaza, eat in the old bazaar, browse the antique shops in the old al-Zawya market, visit the ancient Samara baths, and end with cardamon coffee and namoura dessert in a restored heritage home, where we learn how our ancestors stored their food and kept their homes cool in the summer and warm in the winter.

Joe tells us that he gets a lot of support online, but that sometimes people scold him for only showing Gaza’s beautiful side.

“They say ‘there is hunger in Gaza. There is poverty, siege, and frustration. We are prisoners here, and yet you take videos that show none of that. Only beautiful sunsets?’” Joe tells me.

He defends himself. “Enough people are shining the spotlight on the ugly. I choose to show the beautiful,” he says. “My generation needs hope. We need hope for a life that is worth living for.”

It all passed like a dream.

Our families have lost their homes. All the cafes were destroyed. Gaza City, the old and the new parts, is scorched earth. Many in our families were massacred. UNWRA is reeling; 142 UN workers have been killed, no one is spared.

Doctors, journalists, medics, entire families… the bombs don’t discriminate.

Hani’s father, brother and two nephews, one of them only 13 years old, appeared in photos online. Hani’s brother was among the men stripped to their underwear, hands tied behind their backs, detained by the Israeli army.

They had been taken from the UN school where they were sheltering, and portrayed in Israeli media as Hamas terrorists, before being released for having no connection at all to Hamas.

‘There is nothing left here’

There is so much talk about defeating Hamas and deradicalising Palestinians. Yet every war Israel undertakes bolsters Hamas. Because in every war, it is the people who suffer, their history, their culture, their art, their music, and their heritage.

Wiping out Gaza only makes Palestinians hate Israel more. The easier and more effective way to weaken Hamas would have been to give Palestinians hope in a future free of occupation and tyranny.

Motaz, Amjad and Joe were forced with their families into the far south, as spaces, and hope, continue to shrink beneath their feet. Amjad is looking for a way to leave Gaza. So is Joe, who sent me a heartbreaking message.

“There is nothing left here,” he said. “There can be no life here. They destroyed everything.”

Motaz, who has become one of the most important voices from Gaza, with more than 18 million followers on Instagram, only manages to send a few love hearts as a response to my inquiries about his wellbeing.

“This camera will only capture things that can inspire beauty and love,” he had said to me in our apartment in Gaza City on that July day in 2023. Now I wonder how many dead babies and bloated corpses his camera has captured.

My phone pings. I receive a new video of my aunt walking through the tents in Rafah muttering prayers. Her son’s voice asks: “Who are you praying for?”

She points at the tents: “These poor people who live in these tents. I don’t know how they do it. May God give them strength.”

Her son asks: “Did you forget? You are one of these people now.”

She gives a wholehearted laugh. Her face, darkened by the sun, and coated with a layer of dust, momentarily flashes features of a time long passed.

“Oh yeah,” she giggles. “I forgot. I am one of them.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Dr Samah Sabawi is an award-winning playwright, author and poet. 

Featured image: Palestinian rescue services remove the bodies of members of the Shaaban family, all six of whom were killed in an Israeli airstrike on the Sheikh Radwan neighborhood, western Gaza, October 9, 2023. (Mohammed Zaanoun)

War on Yemen? Don’t Expect a Cakewalk

January 22nd, 2024 by Mike Whitney

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

On Wednesday, the Biden administration labeled the Houthis a “Specially Designated Global Terrorist group,” opening the door to the imposition of sweeping sanctions.

Aid groups immediately responded with warnings that the designation threatens to greatly intensify Yemen’s humanitarian crisis. As a result of the almost decade-long war the Saudi regime has waged on Yemen with US arms and logistical support, more than half of the country’s population—over 18 million people—need food and other assistance…— US Imperialism Setting Middle East Ablaze, World Socialist Web Site

The Biden administration is in the process of reimposing the 7 year-long embargo on Yemen that cut off food, water and essential medical supplies to the civilian population. This is how Washington weaponizes the “terrorist” designation in order to use famine as an instrument of foreign policy. The clear intention is to starve the population into submission so the US can advance its geopolitical agenda in the region. In this case, Washington’s strategic objectives remain largely concealed from the general public, so we will list them here:

The United States has three main goals in Yemen:

  1. To eliminate an ally of Iran. (The Houthis)
  2. To control critical shipping lanes in the Red Sea.
  3. To construct an oil pipeline across Yemen in the event that the US launches a war on Iran and shipping in the Strait of Hormuz is disrupted. Now that Israel is moving ahead with its ethnic cleansing operation, we can add a forth objective to the list:
  4. To militarily engage any army or militia in the region that tries to derail Tel Aviv’s territorial ambitions.

Keep in mind, the current war is not merely an expansion of Israeli territory, but an attempt to establish Israel as the regional hegemon. Israel aspires to be the dominant power in the Middle East unopposed by its current set of rivals. The Biden administration is assisting in that project mainly because US interests coincide with Israel’s long-term plans. Check out this excerpt from an article at the World Socialist Web Site:

The genocide in Gaza is an integral part of US imperialism’s strategy of global war in pursuit of world hegemony. It is one front in an emerging world war, along with Washington’s proxy war against Russia in Ukraine, its escalating war throughout the Middle East, whose central target is Iran, and its war preparations against China. Bernie Sanders backs US attack on Yemen, World Socialist Web Site

In short, US global ambitions segue perfectly with Israel’s regional strategy. Neither country believes it can achieve its broader aims through peaceful means due in part to the lack of critical resources and flagging economic output. So military aggression is the only path forward. The primary targets in the impending conflict are Iran, Russia and China. Here’s more from the World Socialist Web Site:

These actions are preparatory to a head-on clash with Iran that could come at any time. Not only has the Pentagon planned for such war for decades, but, from the standpoint of US imperialism, its strategic aims have never been more vital than today, when the US is in a de facto war with Russia and plotting for war with China. Its goal in targeting Iran is to secure unbridled dominance over the world’s principal oil-exporting region, a region uniquely positioned to project geopolitical power across Eurasia, Africa and the entire Indian Ocean region…

The reality is that these are different arenas in a rapidly developing global conflict, as US imperialism desperately seeks to offset the decline in its relative economic power and establish global hegemony though war, plunder and the revival of colonial subjugation.

…the dynamic across the Middle East is one of rapid escalation toward a regional conflagration led by Washington, its imperialist allies and their principal regional client, Israel. US imperialism setting Middle East ablaze, World Socialist Web Site

Yemen is a small but crucial part of the overall strategy. The billionaire elites who use political agents to implement policy, are determined to eradicate the threat to commercial shipping in the Red Sea posed by the Houthis. This is the underlying motive behind Washington’s drive to war. Not surprisingly, it was also the proximate cause for the Saudi-led intervention although the media diverted attention to the less-consequential political power struggle.

The truth is, Washington’s current war on Yemen is merely a continuation of the Saudi-Houthi conflict. In 2015, the Saudis spearheaded a coalition of 9 Arab countries (backed by the United States) that conducted massive airstrikes on the country while imposing a naval blockade that resulted in the deaths of hundreds of thousands of Yemenis. The ostensible goal of the intervention, was to prop up Washington’s preferred political leader, Abdrabbuh Mansur Hadi. Had the Saudis prevailed in the conflict, the US would have achieved its main strategic objectives without having to involve itself in the actual fighting. But the Saudis did not win which is why there has been a lull in the action while US foreign policy elites concocted another plan for eliminating the Houthis and delivering the strategically located Yemen into the trusted hands of a US-backed puppet. (Sound familiar?) The recent outbreak of hostilities between the US and the Houthis over the Houthis blockade of commercial ships linked to Israel, has provided the US with an opportunity to lock-horns with the Arab militia and use its firepower advantage to rout the enemy and achieve what Washington’s proxies (The Saudis) could not achieve.

While the present war between the US and Yemen is still in its early stages, (Note: The US has conducted 5 major airstrikes on Houthis positions on the mainland while the Houthis have attacked 4 commercial ships in the last 5 days.) US chances of winning are not that encouraging. The Houthis are a well-organized, highly-motivated, battle-hardened killing machine that’s familiar with the terrain and has good grasp of how the US likes to conduct its wars. If the United States couldn’t beat the Taliban, they shouldn’t count on beating the Houthis.

Then, of course, there is the question of ‘how well-equipped’ the Houthis are. Take a look:

Over just a few years, Houthi rebels in Yemen have amassed a remarkably diverse array of anti-ship weaponry, incorporating both cruise and ballistic missiles, which they have recently used to threaten shipping in the Red Sea…

In parades in 2022 and 2023, the Houthis unveiled additional ASCMs, including what appeared to be two anti-ship versions of the Iranian Quds/351 LACM. One version is allegedly equipped with a radar-homing seeker (Sayyad), and the other has an electro-optical/infrared seeker (Quds Z-0).
..
…they possess other ISR assets, including UAVs, (drones) nominally civilian vessels used for scouting, open-source information on maritime traffic and data gathered by the Behshad, an Iranian cargo vessel anchored in the Red Sea reported to serve as an Islamic Revolutionary Guards Corps forward-operating and reconnaissance base. It also seems likely that Iran has equipped the group with coastal radar systems.

The extensive Houthi arsenal raises questions about Iran’s broader strategy in the region. … That suggests a strong, long-term Iranian focus on strengthening Houthi anti-ship capabilities and a potential attempt to export Iran’s model of naval coercion from the Persian Gulf and the Strait of Hormuz to the geopolitically important Red Sea and Bab el-Mandeb Strait. Houthi anti-ship missile systems: getting better all the time, IISS

What does this excerpt tell us?

It tells us that the Houthis are a well-armed military force that has equipped itself with the particular weapons it needs for warfare on the Red Sea. It tells us that the Houthis knew there would eventually be a war with the United States for which they would have to be well prepared. It tells us that the US is probably going to suffer significant losses in the conflict ahead and that the fighting will drag on for a number of years disrupting transit on the Red Sea, inflicting massive damage to global supply-lines, and further strengthening anti-American coalitions. All of this could have avoided had the Biden administration chosen to pressure Israel into ending its siege of Gaza and allowing humanitarian aid to reach the Palestinian people. But they chose not to do so.

It’s worth mentioning, that Houthi spokesmen have repeatedly stated that they will only attack US, UK and Israel-linked ships on the Red Sea. All other ships will be permitted to sail the waterway freely without any threat to their safety. The media has tried to mislead the public on this matter by insisting that the attacks are random and indiscriminate, but that is not the case. Here’s a recap from Iran’s Press TV:

Yemen’s Ansarullah resistance movement has promised a “safe passage” for international ships sailing in the Red Sea as the country’s armed forces ramp up their retaliatory attacks on Israeli-owned and -bound vessels in support of Palestinians in the besieged Gaza Strip.

Mohammad al-Bakhiti, a member of Ansarullah’s politburo, made the statement in an interview published by the Russian daily Izvestia on Friday and said the Red Sea was safe so long as ships transiting the strategic waterway were not linked to Israel.

“As far as ships from all other countries, including Russia and China, are concerned, their navigation in the region is not under any threat whatsoever… Moreover, we are ready to ensure the safe passage of their ships in the Red Sea, because free navigation plays a significant role for our country,” he added.

Stressing that attacks on vessels “in any way connected with Israel” will continue, Bakhiti said, “Ansarullah does not pursue the goal of capturing or sinking this or that sea vessel. Our goal is to raise the economic costs” for the Israeli regime “in order to stop the carnage in Gaza.” (Press TV)

It’s a sad day when Iranian state media can be trusted more than any of the hundreds of western news agencies, but that is the state of western media today.

By the way, over 50 humanitarian organizations have joined together (virtually overnight) to voice their opposition to Biden’s labeling of the Houthis as a Specially Designated Global Terrorist (SDGT). Here’s a brief excerpt from their statement:

While the Houthis share much blame, alongside the Saudi/UAE-led coalition, for horrific human rights violations in Yemen, the designations do nothing to address these concerns. They will, however, prevent the delivery of critical humanitarian assistance to millions of innocent people, greatly hurt the prospects for a negotiated settlement to the conflict, and further undermine U.S. national security interests in the region. Our coalition joins a chorus of growing opposition to the designation, including a bipartisan group of members of Congress, multiple humanitarian organizations operating on the ground in Yemen, and former career diplomats who have served both Republican and Democratic presidents.

Rather than being a catalyst for peace, these designations are a recipe for more conflict and famine, while unnecessarily further undermining U.S. diplomatic credibility.”50 Group Coalition Calls on Biden to Reverse Houthi Terrorist Designation, FCNL

The reason we’ve reprinted the statement here, is because the administration and media have been insisting that the “terrorist” moniker will not lead to mass starvation when, in fact, that’s precisely what it’s designed to do. Biden’s policy is intended to starve Yemen into submission. We need to be clear about how the policy works. The administration plans to kill people in the most agonizing way imaginable to assert control over a scrap of land that is 8,000 miles away from the United States.

We should also be clear as to why the Saudis finally lifted the eight-year-old restrictions on imports headed for Yemen in April 2023. It wasn’t because the Saudis were suddenly struck by pangs of remorse. No. It was because the resourceful Houthis started bombing oil fields and critical infrastructure in Saudi Arabia. That’s what forced the reprobate Saudis back to the bargaining table. Here’s the story from Aljazeera:

Yemen’s Houthis rebels have acknowledged a series of attacks on Saudi Arabia after state media in the kingdom reported rocket and drone strikes targeting an oil depot in Jeddah and other facilities in Riyadh.

A huge plume of black smoke was seen rising from the plant in Jeddah, as the city prepared to host a Formula One race on Sunday. Houthi military spokesperson Yahya Sarea said the group attacked Aramco’s facilities with missiles and the Ras Tanura and Rabigh refineries with drones. Sarea added that the attack also targeted vital facilities in the Saudi capital Riyadh.

The attacks targeted “Aramco facilities in Jeddah and vital facilities in the capital of the Saudi enemy, Riyadh”… Facilities of oil giant Aramco were also attacked in Jizan, Najran, Ras Tanura and Rabigh with “a large number of drones”, he added. (Aljazeera)

These attacks took place in March 2022. It wasn’t long after that the Saudis came to their senses and began to seek a negotiated settlement. (Funny how that works.) We fully expect that the current conflagration will produce the same result. As Washington’s war on Yemen gains pace, the Houthis will undoubtedly target Saudi Arabia’s state-run oil facilities sending global shares tumbling while oil prices go through the roof. We think this scenario could prompt emergency diplomacy that could end the hostilities before matters really get out of hand. (That is our hope, at least.) Unfortunately, we have no crystal ball so we’ll have to see how things play out. Check out this brief clip from Trita Parsi of the Quincy Institute who mulls-over an entirely different scenario that no one in the administration has even considered. Here’s what he said:

There is a simple reason why U.S. and U.K. military strikes against Yemen’s Houthis will not achieve their objective of re-opening the crucial Red Sea lanes for international shipping: The Houthis don’t have to succeed in striking additional commercial vessels, or even successfully retaliate against U.S. military ships. All they need to do is to try. That is enough to sustain a de facto shipping blockade of the Red Sea, through which a staggering 12% of global trade flows. Many Western commercial vessels will simply not risk moving their ships through those waters, not in spite of President Joe Biden’s military strikes, but now because of them. How Biden Can Stop Houthi Missile Attacks—Without Risking War, Time

Bingo. The Houthis don’t have to defeat the US in order to win the war. They just have to outlast the US by continuing to threaten commercial transport on the Red Sea. That’s all they need to do. And, with their prodigious stockpile of ballistic missiles and attack drones, they should be able to sustain that effort for years to come, perhaps, forever. Has anyone on the Biden team even thought about that?

We’re convinced that the Biden administration is barking up the wrong tree. There is no military solution to the Houthis blockade on the Red Sea. The US has already launched 5 massive aerial strikes on Yemen blasting more than 70 sites, without any indication that the Houthis offensive capability has been even slightly degraded. For all practical purposes, the current strategy is a complete bust, no material benefit whatsoever.

At the same time, the Houthis have launched their own missile attacks on passing commercial ships 4 out of the last 5 days. The success of these attacks cannot be measured in terms of how many ships were sunk (which is not the goal) but in terms of how many carriers are presently avoiding the world’s most important transit corridor. That number continues to grow by the day which means that –by any concievable metric– the US is losing the war. Which means that Biden is going to up the ante.

But how will escalation change the eventual outcome? Will the deploying of US Special Forces or ground troops to the Arabian peninsula ensure an American victory or should we expect another 20-year Afghanistan-type quagmire? And is the administration really prepared for the inevitable economic slump and stock market turmoil when the sh** hits the fan and the Saudi oil fields are consumed by flames while the shelling of US bases in Iraq and Syria intensifies to a thundering crescendo? Shouldn’t they at least give that a passing thought? Here’s one last excerpt from the World Socialist Web Site:

The launching of military strikes against Yemen marks a new stage in the deepening imperialist military offensive throughout the Middle East and beyond. The US and its imperialist allies are waging a de facto war against Iran, working to eliminate Iran’s military allies throughout the Middle East. The strikes against Yemen are directed at encircling Iran and provoking it into retaliation against US forces, which could be used to justify a full-scale war against Tehran….

Overriding all of this, the United States is involved in a struggle to fend off the challenge posed by China to its global hegemony, which threatens to trigger a shooting war in the Pacific. In the US media and political circles, there is growing talk of a new “axis of evil” involving Iran, China and Russia.

Each one of these conflicts cannot be understood in isolation. The bombing of Yemen is part of a global counter-revolution, in which the imperialist powers are seeking to reestablish direct control over their former colonies…

Every war launched by the US and its imperialist allies has ended in one bloody debacle after the other, with millions of people killed. But each disaster only reinforces the determination of US imperialism to use war as a means to secure its global hegemony.

The US/UK attack on Yemen and the global eruption of imperialist war, World Socialist Web Site

The table is set for a major conflagration in Yemen that will quickly escalate and spread across the entire Middle East. I see no indication that Biden is planning to slow the rush to war or pull back from the brink. This is shaping up to be a real catastrophe.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published on The Unz Review.

 

Michael Whitney is a renowned geopolitical and social analyst based in Washington State. He initiated his career as an independent citizen-journalist in 2002 with a commitment to honest journalism, social justice and World peace.

He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG). 

Featured image is from Twitter/X

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The author of the brilliant article in Spanish, “Platicando en Davos” (Talking in Davos), Dr. Victor Andrés Belaunde Gutiérrez, is a Peruvian lawyer and international analyst. He has cast a final rather devastating blow – a Latin American View – at the WEF, Davos 24. Is it representative for all Latin America?

Probably not. But for a large segment of alert people, including many Latin American top corporate executives and even for some country leaders, Mr. Belaunde’s words may be speaking from their heart. Take Javier Milei, the newly elected President of Argentina, who was invited to Davos and gave a brilliant speech that probably Klaus Schwab and many of the WEF Clan did not expect.

Maybe President Milei’s and Victor Belaunde’s words are part of the final straw breaking the WEF’s neck. 

The WEF circus has been going on for too long – 54 years. The WEF’s naval-glancing organizers and participants are distancing themselves ever-more from reality, while they have one objective and one objective only – massively reducing world population, so that Mother Earth’s remaining natural resources will serve a small elite “forever”, instead of being swallowed by “useless eaters”, who can rapidly be replaced by robots, transhumans (chipped human survivors), and Artificial Intelligence (AI). 

Once there is only a fraction of the 8 billion world inhabitants left – and, yes, that is the goal already spelled out by the Club of Rome’s (a Rockefeller invention), 1972 Report “Limit to Growth”and then stated in Henry Kissinger’s 1974 Report on “National Security Study Memorandum (NSSM) 200”. Kissinger was then President Nixon’s Secretary of State.  (both reports can be downloaded, pdf)

The One Objective 

This one objective comes disguised under many different documents and statements, from the covid crime, to a potential virus “X” – which does not yet exist, but for which already bio-weapon “vaccines” are being produced; to energy shortages; and to the climate farce. All extreme fear-mongering, reducing the populations auto-immunity (even without being “vaxxed”).

Such a limited world population would lend itself best for a One World Order (OWO) with a One World Government, (OWG), and a One Health World (OHW), the latter dictated and tyrannized by the World Health Organization (WHO). 

The WHO tyranny – a dream of the WEF and its cult cabal – may only happen if the infamous Pandemic Treaty and the amply modified International Health Regulations (IHR), are being approved (coerced) at the World Health Assembly (WHA) in May 2024. 

To avoid this fraud, people around the world MUST now call upon their governments – in whatever strongest ways they can – to EXIT WHO. NOW. Period.

*

Below are some excerpts from Dr. Belaunde’s views About WEF, Davos 24. Translation by Deepl.com.

For the full report (in Spanish), see this.

Interestingly, Victor Belaunde quoted the pertinent and much telling beginning of President Milei’s address:

“Good afternoon,

Thank you very much. Today I am here to tell you that the West is in danger, because those who are supposed to defend the values of the West, find themselves co-opted by a worldview that – inexorably leads to socialism, consequently, to poverty. 

Unfortunately, in recent decades, motivated by some well-thought-out desires to help others, and others by the desire to belong to a privileged caste, the main world leaders of the Western world have abandoned the model of freedom for different versions of what we call collectivism. (…)” 

*

The Peruvian lawyer briefly comments that Mr. Milei is right: Those who must defend democratic capitalism are those who are burying it, in most cases, out of sheer frivolity: 

“I only quote his [President Milei’s] opening words because they sum up what the talks, the conversations at Davos, are all about. The people who have climbed to the highest ranks in status and wealth thanks to liberal and democratic capitalism, are promoting ideas that, as they are implemented, will destroy it.

“In addition, the demonstrations of frivolity and intellectual mediocrity that the famous forum emits are increasingly scandalous. For example, the impression that the prostitute traffickers make during these meetings – why not some orgies while we save the world with 2100 euro-a-night ladies?

“Perhaps this is not the best example as it is the oldest profession in the world.

“But the pitiful spectacle of a supposed witch, sorceress, or God knows what, emitting sounds and spitting on the faces of some panelists, is decidedly pathetic [PK note: a cult ritual].

“I cannot conceive how a person who has any notion of self-respect, would tolerate being a part of [cult] pranks of that caliber.

“Can people who willingly participate and applaud such farces be recognized as serious?

Have they no shame? Is it that their need to belong to the cool people of the planet is so powerful? – Is it that the cool, sophisticated is now inevitably ridiculous and shameful?” 

*

The Peruvian lawyer and international analyst, Victor Belaunde, introduced his conclusion of the WEF’s declining and ever-more devastating role for the world economy, with the following words:

“Every year in Davos, Switzerland, the luminaries of our planet, the members of a supposed world elite, gather at the so-called World Economic Forum (WEF) in Davos, Switzerland.

“The WEF is the brainchild of German executive Klaus Schwab, who, with immense skill, devised a relatively small cohort of corporate and political elitists, who were and are becoming immensely wealthy along the way.

“Mr. Schwab is the proponent of a particular economic and business philosophy, whose consistency with liberal and democratic capitalism is highly debatable. The vast majority of attendees do not pause to reflect on this point, being interested only in the opportunity to improve their personal public relations and rub elbows at the highest level.

“If you make it to Davos, you’ve made it!”

“What is this philosophy that is incompatible with liberal and democratic capitalism?

“It is the so-called Stakeholder Capitalism, a term popularized in all languages and interpreted as meaning of “interested parties”.

“But who are these “stakeholders” and what do they mean by “stakeholders”? – Stakeholders are all those individuals and entities that have an “interest” in the activities of a company or in the development of a project. So far, it all sounds very nice, modern, inclusive, and democratic, but it is not.

“Capitalism is based on respect for private property. However, this stakeholder system relegates the shareholders of companies, i.e. their owners, to a position indistinguishable from that of any other stakeholders.

Mr. Belaunde uses the example of a “community” or an NGO, both of which are “stakeholders’, according to the WEF concept. But following their laws and statutes, must defend consumers in the area. This “philosophy” according to Belaunde, is destroying the possibility of developing private enterprises. 

Why then, Belaunde asks, do so many executives gladly attend to these conclaves that promote ideas, incompatible with economic freedom? The answer is simple. Economic power gradually shifts from the owners of the enterprise to the employees, who slowly become self-perpetuating castes that capture the entities for which they work.

“It seems like a subtle form of Marxism”, Mr. Belaunde intimidates, believing that this is precisely countering the idea of the WEF. 

*

The bottom line is a devastating Report about WEF Davos24, in particular, and about the WEF and its nefarious goals in general.

This should be one more inspiration for us, We, the People, in Latin America and around the world, to stand up and stop this emerging civilization destroying genocide, launched again and again by the World Economic Forum and its handlers and followers.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Peter Koenig is a geopolitical analyst and a former Senior Economist at the World Bank and is the author of Implosion – An Economic Thriller about War, Environmental Destruction and Corporate Greed; and  co-author of Cynthia McKinney’s book “When China Sneezes: From the Coronavirus Lockdown to the Global Politico-Economic Crisis” (Clarity Press – November 1, 2020).

Peter is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG). He is also a non-resident Senior Fellow of the Chongyang Institute of Renmin University, Beijing.

Featured image source

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Billionaires Melinda French Gates and MacKenzie Scott this month invested a total of $23 million in the School-Based Health Alliance (SBHA), the leading Washington, D.C.-based, national nonprofit that promotes the expansion of school-based health centers (SBHCs).

Gates’ contribution ($16 million), made through her Pivotal Ventures company, will launch SBHC “care coordination initiatives” in Houston, Atlanta, Chicago and Miami. Scott’s funding ($7 million) will support general operations for the alliance.

The funding substantially increases the alliance’s revenue, which was less than $4 million in 2022, the most recent year for which data is available. Before the new $23 million investment, most of the nonprofit’s funding came from federal grants.

SBHA tweeted the grant announcement:

The organization’s mission is to increase the number of SBHCs nationally among schools that receive federal funding through policy advocacy, technical support to existing centers and support securing funding for new and existing centers. There are approximately 3,900 SBHCs in the U.S.

SBHCs are intended to provide healthcare to kids by offering “primary care, mental healthcare, and other health services in schools,” particularly in underserved communities.

This includes services “to prevent disease, disability, and other health conditions or their progression” such as “immunizations” and “well-child care,” typically with a focus on advancing equity.

Promoting equity is also a key platform for Pivotal Ventures, which Gates founded in 2015 to “accelerate social progress in the United States by removing barriers that hold people back.” It is a venture capital fund that primarily makes return-seeking investments rather than providing philanthropic donations, but it also has grantees like the alliance.

SBHCs ‘Completely Unregulated’

Justine Tanguay, an attorney and director of Children’s Health Defense’s (CHD) Reform Pharma initiative, told The Defender there is a long history of private equity firms investing in healthcare in pursuit of their own interests.

“Many philanthropists and donors claim that funding SBHCs provides underserved and low-income families with equity and access to affordable healthcare,” Tanguay said. “But it’s not about improving children’s health, it’s about making money.”

The Pivotal Ventures-backed care coordination initiatives will fund staff positions for SBHC “care coordinators” in schools serving low-income families. Coordinators will set up information-sharing “among all those concerned with a student’s health needs and care,” including students, parents or guardians, school staff and/or healthcare professionals.

They will also address issues such as housing, food security and transportation as part of student care.

Workgroups comprised of staff from SBHCs and “community members” in each city will select the coordinators. The initiative also will lobby for policies to take over payment for the care coordinators through Medicaid.

Tanguay said these kinds of models for SBHCs have the potential to circumvent parents’ rights to make healthcare decisions for their children by allowing care providers direct access to minors, potentially without parental consent.

“Here, the opportunity to circumvent both parental rights and informed consent is ripe for abuse since SBHCs are completely unregulated and therefore, have no oversight,” she said.

Georgia attorney Nicole Johnson, co-director of Georgia Coalition for Vaccine Choice and a consultant to the CHD legal team, also told The Defender the $23 million investment raised concerns about who was making decisions and what kind of regulations might be in place to protect children and families.

“The large federal grants combined with this Gates/Scott funding seem to be putting SBHCs on a fast track across the nation,” Johnson said.

“As beneficial as some of these services may be, shouldn’t we slow down and consider who is leading the charge for these SBHCs and what their motives may be? Shouldn’t we make sure there are proper regulatory frameworks in place to protect children and parents?” she asked.

Scott’s award is the largest “unrestricted” gift in the alliance’s 28-year history, meaning that it is not earmarked for any particular project and will be used to support general organizational costs for the nonprofit, to use as its leadership sees fit.

“I believe that SBHCs could be of benefit and service to many families, of any income,” Johnson said. “But as they are being rolled out, there are few guardrails in place to safeguard children’s medical data/privacy, ensure continuity of care and protect parental rights,” she added.

Philanthropic Funding Key to SBHC Expansion for Decades

SBHCs are typically full-service health clinics physically situated within school buildings, although a small percentage of them are mobile units or, increasingly, telehealth clinics.

The Association of American Pediatrics (AAP) began to establish the first SBHCs in the 1960s in Massachusetts, Texas and Minnesota. Since their inception, they have focused on providing services to low-income children who lack access to regular healthcare.

Until the late 1980s, there were just a handful of SBHCs, primarily located in “urban communities” across the country. Their work focused on family planning, along with general youth health and well-being.

Early controversies over SBHCs focused on issues of reproductive healthcare and parental rights, but efforts to establish new SBHCs expanded rapidly in the 1990s.

The Center for Population Options, which was dedicated to reducing unintended teenage pregnancy, was the first organization to offer technical support and conduct periodic qualitative studies of existing SBHCs and their services. By 1998, the School-Based Health Alliance took over those roles.

SBHCs numbered 1,135 in 45 states by 1998-99, with the expansion largely funded through more than $40 million from the Robert Wood Johnson Foundation and allocations by state governments.

Medicaid expansion in the 1990s also helped to shore up funding for SBHCs through coverage to low-income patients, along with congressional funding earmarked for SBHCs beginning in 1995 through the Healthy Schools, Healthy Communities program, which ended by 2005.

After that, funding for SBHCs was available from the Health Resources and Services Administration, as long as the grantees were federally qualified health centers. SBHCs also receive funding from third-party insurers and patient fees.

Through the Affordable Care Act in 2010, Congress appropriated $200 million over four years toward construction, renovation and equipment for SBHCs. The U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) distributed that money in 520 awards across the country.

By 2017, there were at least 2,317 SBHCs.

The Biden administration’s HHS in 2021 awarded $5 million in grants to expand school-based healthcare in the U.S. It continued this grant program the next year in May 2022, awarding $25 million in grants to 125 SBHCs. In 2023, HHS awarded another $25 million to 77 health centers for school-based service expansion.

Congress and President Joe Biden in June 2022 also passed the Bipartisan Safer Communities Act, which allowed HHS to award $50 million in grants to states “for the purpose of implementing, enhancing, or expanding the provision” of healthcare assistance through SBHCs using Medicaid or the Children’s Health Insurance Program.

The legislation charged the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services with expanding access to Medicaid healthcare services — including behavioral health services — in schools, and reducing the administrative burden for states and schools.

Since 2008, the number of telehealth SBHCs has also grown substantially, increasing from 7% of SBHCs to 19% from 2016-17.

Concerns over parental rights remain central to the debate over SBHCs today. Tanguay said that SBHCs can provide adolescents with confidential health services without parental consent, based on the assumption that some services, like family planning, could have negative consequences for the child if the parents were involved.

This often means that parents are denied access to their children’s health information due to confidentiality rules, but that information can be shared with providers including school nurses and other interested parties on the care team.

“It’s a very slippery slope that appears to eliminate barriers to sharing a student’s private health information, rather than protecting them,” she said.

While the early focus of SBHCs was on family planning and reproductive health, today the literature focuses more on their potential “to address lagging immunization rates” and to provide mental health services to children and teens facing a reported mental health crisis.

Groups like the AAP, a strong supporter of SBHCs, have used the mental health crisis to call on the Biden administration to fund expanded access to screening, diagnosing and treatment for children, arguing access to “school-based mental health care” should be a priority.

The administration responded with new policy measures, including the Bipartisan Safer Communities Act — which made $1 billion available for mental health services — and the American Rescue Plan Act. Both offer funding explicitly for school-based mental health services for students, KFF Health News reported.

Many of these resources have funded the expansion of SBHCs.

Pivotal Ventures Senior Manager of the Adolescent Mental Health strategy Sara Bathum indicated the corporation’s interest in mental health was a key motivation for its funding to the alliance.

“School-Based Health Alliance’s unique approach embeds mental health resources for youth and families within existing centers of care, making it easier to access trusted, culturally responsive support. We are proud to partner with them in this important effort in these communities and look forward to seeing their impact,” she said.

“Mental health is clearly a significant focus of these centers,” Johnson said. “But Parents should be very concerned about how these centers treat mental health issues.”

Johnson gave the example of a case in Maine where a federally funded school-based health center reportedly gave prescription anti-depressant pills in a plastic baggie to a 17-year-old girl without her parents’ knowledge or consent.

Pharma vs. Parents in the SBHC Rollout

The School-Based Health Alliance calls itself the “national voice for school-based healthcare.” It consults for organizations seeking to start SBHCs — helping them secure funding, providing technical support and even providing direct funding. It also tracks and lobbies for SBHC-friendly policies on the local, state and federal levels.

In addition to Gates and Scott, SBHA funders include Merck, maker of the Gardasil human papillomavirus (HPV) vaccine. Merck funded SBHA’s “vaccine toolkit” along with a 2023 SBHA program to increase vaccinations through child wellness visits.

Military think tank Rand Corporation also is a funder. Previous funders include Gilead and insurance giants Kaiser Permanente and Aetna.

Tanguay said the alliance’s ties to Big Pharma are concerning, given that SBHCs are such a“ windfall” for Pharma, particularly if they provide a way around parental consent.

She said:

“Big Pharma is a trojan horse that if given the opportunity, will have direct access to our children at school without the need for parental involvement.

“It’s no surprise that Big Pharma is supporting SBHCs because the goal is to diagnose and medicate as many students as possible for the sake of ‘improving’ the health of the child. Big Pharma’s business model anticipates that the more prescriptions written the more money they will make.”

The alliance’s board members also have ties to major healthcare conglomerates, and their resumes often highlight their success in vaccinating low-income people of color against COVID-19.

Board member Mark Masselli is CEO of the Moses Weitzman Health System, formerly Community Health Center, in Connecticut, which boasts of having administered over 500,000 COVID-19 vaccines and winning “national acclaim for its educational messages addressing vaccine hesitancy among people of color.”

Board member Alexandra Quinn, former Kellogg Foundation fellow, co-founded the Vaccine Equity Cooperative during the COVID-19 pandemic, to vaccinate people of color, largely by training “trusted messengers” to promote the idea that the vaccines are “safe and effective” — a strategy advocated and funded by federal public health institutions.

Another board member, Dr. Gillian Barclay, is the vice president of Global Public Health & Scientific Affairs at Big Pharma’s Colgate Palmolive, and previously worked at the Kellogg Foundation and World Health Organization.

Board member Cecilia Oregón works at healthcare giant Kaiser Permanente, where she is an advocate for universal internet access (digital equity) to get people telehealth access.

Robert Boyd, the alliance’s president and CEO, has been instrumental in getting federal appropriations for new and expanded SBHCs. In the meantime, Johnson said, the onus is on parents to advocate for state laws that ensure that SBHC expansion happens in a way that is regulated and offers protection for parents and children.

“In New Hampshire, for instance, a proposed bill regarding the establishment of SBHCs includes a provision that would require parents to be present when services are provided,” she said.

“I believe that requiring a parent’s presence is a win-win — the parent can share information about the child’s health history and any current treatments/medications and can also participate in and consent to any additional treatments.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Brenda Baletti Ph.D. is a reporter for The Defender. She wrote and taught about capitalism and politics for 10 years in the writing program at Duke University. She holds a Ph.D. in human geography from the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill and a master’s from the University of Texas at Austin.

Featured image is from CHD

To End the War in Ukraine, Expose Its Core Lie

January 22nd, 2024 by Ted Snider

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The essential argument used to avoid negotiation and continue support for the war in Ukraine is based on a falsehood. That falsehood, repeated by President Joe Biden, is that when Vladimir Putin decided to invade, he intended to conquer all of Ukraine and “annihilate” it.

Its falsity has been exposed multiple times by military experts, who have pointed out, both before and after the invasion, that Russia could not have intended to conquer all of Ukraine because it did not invade with sufficient forces to do so. Indeed, this was a key reason why senior Ukrainian officials, and even President Volodymyr Zelensky himself, argued just days before the invasion that it would not occur.

The mistake that most analysts at the time made (these authors included), was to assume that since the troops mobilized by Russia did not suffice for a full scale occupation of Ukraine, no military operation, not even a limited one, was in the offing. It was only later that Western political leaders turned this mistake to their propaganda advantage by insisting that Russia had always intended to first take Kiev, then all of Ukraine, and ultimately even attack NATO.

But if basic military logic is taken into account, the fact that Putin committed only 120,000190,000 men to his campaign and did not mobilize more resources until months later, after Kiev rejected the Istanbul peace deal, indicates that his objectives in Ukraine were limited and revolved around guaranteeing the security of the populations of Donbass and Crimea from Ukrainian assaults and Russia from NATO expansion. Given that Ukraine had cut off Crimea’s water and electricity years before, this required a land bridge to the region; hence, the illegal annexations of the Kherson and Zaporozhye regions.

We also have indirect confirmation that territory was not his objective from an unimpeachable source: NATO General Secretary Jens Stoltenberg, who stated that Putin invaded Ukraine to prevent NATO’s expansion. This would explain why, as soon as these goals were within reach when Ukrainian officials initialed the draft of the Istanbul Agreement in March 2022, Putin halted his assault and withdrew Russian forces from Kiev, rather than move further into Ukraine.   

This background is important, because the argument for increasing Western military support for Ukraine relies so heavily on the claim that Russia always intended to expand further, attack NATOand reestablish the Russian empire.

But, as noted scholar John Mearsheimer has pointed out,

“there is no evidence in the public record that Putin was contemplating, much less intending to put an end to Ukraine as an independent state and make it part of greater Russia when he sent his troops into Ukraine on February 24th.”

It was never one of Putin’s stated goals, nor was it ever taken seriously by the Ukrainian leadership. David Arakhamia, the head of Ukraine’s negotiating team in Belarus and Istanbul, recently revealed that the “key point” for Russia was Ukraine not joining NATO, and “everything else was simply rhetoric and political ‘seasoning.’”

Putin himself has consistently said that “this conflict is not about territory…[it] is about the principles underlying the new international order.” We should not take him at his word, but it is still worth asking: had Putin’s ambitions been territorial, would he have waited until 2014 to annex Crimea? Would the upper house of Russia’s parliament have rescinded Putin’s temporary authority to use troops in Ukraine in June 2015? Would he have opposed the 2014 independence referendums in Donetsk and Lugansk?

Looking back even further, if Putin had truly wanted to incorporate parts of the former Soviet Union, he had an ideal opportunity to do so in August 2008, when Russian troops were but an hour’s drive from the Georgian capitol of Tbilisi. He could have simply recognized the independence of Abkhazia and South Ossetia, and then annexed them to Russia, but he did not. Reviewing Putin’s current behavior, therefore, former U.S. Deputy Undersecretary of Defense Stephen Bryen concludes that

“Russia has no intention of expanding outside of the Ukraine conflict area.”

The false narrative about Russian intentions has served its essential purpose of rallying Western countries behind Ukraine. Continuing to insist on it now, however, risks involving NATO directly in the conflict, and threatens Ukraine’s very survival.

If the challenge the West faces in this conflict is defined as “existential,” then what choice does NATO have but to send its own military forces in to prevent Ukraine’s defeat? President Biden implied as much when he said,

“If Putin takes Ukraine, he won’t stop there. It’s important to see the long run here. He’s going to keep going…Then we’ll have something that we don’t seek and that we don’t have today: American troops fighting Russian troops.”

At some point, a decision will have to be made to either greatly expand the West’s commitment, or abandon Ukraine to its fate. Alas, President Biden’s request for $61 billion in additional funding for 2024 does neither, since Ukraine needs at least five time that amount to win, according to its top military commander. With the Ukrainian counteroffensive already running out of steam due to a lack funding, lack of weaponry, and unsustainable losses, Ukraine will likely soon be facing a Russian counteroffensive.

Before such an assault, however, Russia might offer Ukraine new peace terms, albeit far less advantageous than the ones it offered in March 2022. If Ukraine balks, Russia will press its overwhelming advantage and take more territory, which it does not really want (for a good discussion of why, see former Ukrainian diplomat Rostislav Ishchenko), in order to force Ukraine to the negotiating table.

At that point, the West will be faced with a fateful choice: either accept Ukraine’s surrender or send in NATO troops. Either scenario is likely to lead to sharp divisions in the NATO alliance, since Hungary, Slovakia, and Turkey have all indicated that they want a peaceful resolution to the conflict, not escalation.

The one thing that escalation cannot guarantee, however, is Russia’s defeat. That is because, by confirming Putin’s narrative that NATO is intent on destroying Russia, his support both within Russia and around the world would likely skyrocket. A more divided West would thus be facing a more united Russia, this time supported openly by the BRICS countries, as well as many other major international actors currently on the sidelines. This would effectively turn the tables on America’s strategy of using Ukraine to contain China’s global ambitions. Instead, it would now be Russia and its allies using Ukraine to contain the global ambitions of the United States.

It was, in no small part, the West’s original false narrative about Russia’s goals in Ukraine that has led us to this dismal outcome; European security weakened, the specter of nuclear war, Ukraine destroyed, and America’s global standing undermined. It has already been used once before to scuttle the Istanbul Agreement, which could have ended the war before hundreds of thousands died. For peace negotiations to become an acceptable alternative to mutual annihilation, this falsehood must be exposed and discarded.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Ted Snider is a regular columnist on U.S. foreign policy and history at Antiwar.com and the Libertarian Institute, and is a frequent contributor to Responsible Statecraft, The American Conservative, and other outlets. He can be contacted at [email protected]

Nicolai N. Petro is Professor of Political Science at the University of Rhode Island, and the author of The Tragedy of Ukraine: What Classical Greek Tragedy Can Teach Us About Conflict Resolution (Berlin and Boston: De Gruyter, 2023).

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Introduction

This essay will explore the arbitrary merger of state and corporate power that has been brought about by the World Economic Forum (WEF).

We will first briefly examine the history of the WEF and its original emphasis on stakeholder capitalism.

We will then look briefly at its founder, composition, funding, legal status, mission statement, and original code of ethics.

Then, by viewing selected content from its May, 2022 annual meeting, we will expose the WEF’s gradual appropriation of the treaty-based roles[1] of intergovernmental agencies such as the United Nations and the World Health Organization. 

Of particular concern are the geo-political topics of war, future pandemics, and climate change. 

The WEF acts on the belief that whereas these global issues require global solutions, only a centralized private-public entity[2] with “corporate agility” is capable of responding in effective and timely ways.  

From this belief, it tackles global problems through the aggressive, ongoing Young Global Leaders program attended by many sovereign heads of state.

Highly concerning is a published list of 1400 all-country graduates of the WEF young global leaders’ program from 1993-2022.[3]

In thus influencing the decisions of elected leaders, the WEF interferes with the democratic processes within nation-states.  

Correspondingly, it interferes with the historic relationships between nations and their treaty-founded intergovernmental agencies. 

The World Economic Forum also shapes economic policies over such rapidly emerging issues as central bank digital currencies (CBDC’s), which are briefly examined in light of their inherent danger to the independence of nation-states.

1971: The WEF Origins in “Stakeholder Capitalism”

The term “stakeholder capitalism” was coined by WEF founder Klaus Schwab in 1971 and was originally the primary raison d’être of the World Economic Forum. 

To quote Prof. Schwab,

“stakeholder capitalism is a form of capitalism in which companies seek long-term value creation by taking into account the needs of all their stakeholders, and society at large.”[4]

What is a stakeholder?

“A stakeholder is a party that has an interest in a company and can either affect or be affected by the business. The primary stakeholders in a typical corporation are its investors, employees, customers, and suppliers.

However, with the increasing attention on corporate social responsibility, the concept has been extended to include communities, governments, and trade associations.

A common problem that arises for companies with numerous stakeholders is that the various stakeholder interests may not align… The most efficient companies successfully manage the interests and expectations of all their stakeholders.”[5]

Unfortunately, the World Economic Forum did not stop there.

Founder, Composition, Funding, and Legal Status of the WEF

1. Who is Klaus Schwab?  In 1971, German engineer and economist Klaus Schwab founded the World Economic Forum, a non-profit Swiss-based NGO.  Schwab draws an annual salary of about one million Swiss francs from the WEF, which does not pay taxes.[6]

Before starting the WEF, Schwab was on the managing board of engineering monolith, Sulzer Escher Wyss AG, Zurich, from 1967-1970.[7]

The World Economic Forum was not simply Schwab’s brainchild, but was actually born out of a CIA-funded Harvard program headed by Henry Kissinger and pushed to fruition by John Kenneth Galbraith and Herman Kahn, who together recruited the young Schwab.

In one document[8], Schwab mentor and nuclear warrior Herman Kahn “suggests subverting democracy by training only a certain group in society as potential leaders, with those pre-selected few who are groomed for power being able to define what our shared values as a society should be. Maybe Herman Kahn would agree with the World Economic Forum’s Young Global Leader scheme, which is the exact manifestation of his original suggestion.”[9]

From new research published in February, 2021:

When Klaus Schwab joined Sulzer Escher-Wyss in 1967 and started the reorganisation of the company to be a technology corporation, the involvement of Sulzer Escher-Wyss in the darker aspects of the global nuclear arms race became immediately more pronounced…With the arrival of the eager Mr. Schwab also came the company’s participation in the illegal proliferation of nuclear weapons technology…

It was eventually revealed, thanks to a review and report carried out by the Swiss authorities and a man named Peter Hug, that Sulzer Escher-Wyss began secretly procuring and building key parts for nuclear weapons during the 1960s. The company, while Schwab was on the board, also began playing a critical key role in the development of South Africa’s illegal nuclear weapons programme during the darkest years of the apartheid regime. Klaus Schwab was a leading figure in the founding of a company culture which helped Pretoria build six nuclear weapons and partially assemble a seventh.[10]

2. Composition: WEF meetings are attended by invitation only, most notably by 100 corporate “Strategic Partners”, which include massive oil, automotive, pharmaceutical, media, big tech and aerospace companies, and banks.[11] Also invited are government leaders (who do not pay to attend), civic society leaders, and mass media.

3. Funding: Although the WEF does not disclose its individual funding sources, its 2021-2022 Annual Report reveals that 2.6% comes from memberships, 7.5% from “participation”, 14.8% from “other”, 12.1% from direct funding (public institutions and foundations), and 62.7% from its corporate partnerships (which include the Pfizer and Moderna pharmaceutical companies).[12]

4. Legal Status: “From the point of view of international law, international NGOs have no existence as such.”[13]

However, this does not preclude the WEF from consolidating power by indoctrinating politicians worldwide.

The Mission Statement of the WEF

The WEF lists no specific goals on its website, but under Our Mission is the rhetoric of a grandiose ideology:

Screenshot from WEF

The World Economic Forum is the International Organization for Public-Private Cooperation.

The Forum engages the foremost political, business, cultural and other leaders of society to shape global, regional and industry agendas.

It is independent, impartial and not tied to any special interests. The Forum strives in all its efforts to demonstrate entrepreneurship in the global public interest while upholding the highest standards of governance. Moral and intellectual integrity is at the heart of everything it does.

Our activities are shaped by a unique institutional culture founded on the stakeholder theory, which asserts that an organization is accountable to all parts of society. The institution carefully blends and balances the best of many kinds of organizations, from both the public and private sectors, international organizations and academic institutions.

We believe that progress happens by bringing together people from all walks of life who have the drive and the influence to make positive change.[14]

Under its letterhead appear the words, “Committed to Improving the State of the World.”

The WEF Code of Ethics, 1973-2020

The original 1973 WEF code of ethics defined corporate stakeholder responsibilities, which included the statement, “The management has to serve society. It must assume the role of a trustee of the material universe for future generations.”[15]

In 2006, the United Nations produced “Principles for Responsible Investment,” a report to prioritize environmental stewardship.[16]  In this report, the ESG (Environmental, Social, and Governance) concept of non-financial corporate management standards first appeared.

ESG standards were embraced by the WEF, which in 2019 published The Davos Manifesto 2020, highlighting core sustainable reporting ESG metrics “structured to align with the UN’s 2030 Agenda for sustainable development.”[17]

So far, so good.  But much more was in the works.

WEF Mission Creep 

In 2022, the WEF prioritized four geo-political areas to reorder the planet:  Climate Change, War and Peace, Pandemic Preparedness, and Digital Agency.

The scope of these four areas was revealed through the agenda titles for the World Economic Forum annual meeting in Davos, May 23-26, 2022.[18]

Three of the priority topics that were heavily weighted with corporate input – Climate, War, and Pandemics – were competing on a parallel track with intergovernmental agencies that have treaty responsibility for them. 

Who within WEF planned this?  

It is not clear who creates the annual agendas for the approximate 2500 delegates – whether Klaus Schwab himself, the WEF board of trustees, the managing board, or the executive committee.[19]

Whatever the case, the May 23-26, 2022 session titles below wrapped the WEF discussions in rhetoric that did little to advance truly effective action. 

Regarding corporate action, the WEF-adopted ESG principles, while high-sounding, have not constrained Big Oil’s CO2 emissions that the world must stop producing.  Nor have they constrained the vast, emissions-heavy production of armaments that feed the permanent war economy.  

Neither have ESG principles been applied to reduce the disastrous pharmaceutical funding that corrupts public health regulatory agencies such as the World Health Organization,[20] and the US-based FDA[21] and CDC[22].

In short, today’s most serious global problems exist precisely because of increasing corporate dominance over the elected world order.

***

The Critiques under the four topics below illustrate the weak and irresolute actions planned at Davos in May, 2022.

The Democratic Alternatives offer possible actions for the intergovernmental agencies that were created by collective humanity to address global issues.  These agencies were originally funded only by tax dollars and therefore operated without conflict-of-interest interference.

(Note that the *starred* sessions were compulsory.)

1. WEF Climate Change Topics, Davos, May 23-26, 2022

  • Unlocking Carbon Markets
  • What Role for Carbon Dioxide Removal Technologies?
  • Embracing Climate Adaptation Action
  • Unlocking Digital Innovation for Net Zero
  • Climate Transition in Emerging Economies
  • *Press Conference:  Speeding up the Road to Net Zero*
  • Accelerating Corporate Investment in Nature
  • Unlocking the Potential of Blue Carbon
  • Financing Net Zero:  Moving from Commitment to Action
  • Climate Action Starts at Home
  • The Path to Decarbonizing Aviation
  • Investing in Climate Adaptation in Fragile Contexts

A Nuclear Option?

  • Putting Health at the Heart of Climate Action
  • Staying on Course for Climate Action

Critique  

By late 2021, the climate change consensus among published climate scientists in peer-reviewed science journals had reached 99%.[23]

This consensus had been growing for a long time.  If the 1980’s climate model projections of global warming are compared to post-projection observations, the two sets of figures closely match over time.[24]

We are bankrupting the Earth by not acting.  It is imperative that besides individual pledges – to plant trees and adopt ESG – specific, agreed, and published declarations of essential climate actions must emerge from WEF’s annual meetings.

However, a month before the May, 2022 meeting in Davos, the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change reported that status quo interests had prevented urgent action on climate change.[25]

Do the WEF session topics impart a sense of urgency?

Sadly, the climate topics list looks like a university course prospectus.  There is not a single proposal to the world’s national and corporate leaders that would urgently and orderly phase out the fossil fuels that cause 65% of greenhouse gases.[26]

However, as a token action, the WEF inspired their “young global leaders” in the Netherlands (Prime Minister Mark Lutte, formerly of Unilever), in Canada (Prime Minister Justin Trudeau, a former high school drama teacher), and in Sri Lanka and the United States, to spark riots in July 2022 by regulating farmers’ use of agricultural fertilizer – based on the paltry 6% of greenhouse gas emissions caused by nitrous oxide.[27]

This unelected intrusion into national affairs, while signaling nobility of purpose, severely hampered farmer productivity.  Only one WEF strategic partner was negatively impacted – the fertilizer company Yara International[28] – while Big Oil, spewing 65% of greenhouse gases, stayed on the sidelines unscathed.

At best this token measure was a delaying tactic. 

Corporate delaying tactics also haunt the world agency responsible for advancing scientific knowledge about climate change, the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) of the United Nations, with its 195-member states.  

Most notably, IPCC annual conference summits have failed to transition the $5.9 trillion in annual global fossil fuel subsidies to renewable energy (IMF figure for 2020[29]).  

Because the fossil fuel industry could not survive without its yearly tax-based $5.9 trillion infusion – roughly $11 billion a day – it is known as the “zombie” industry, or the walking dead.[30]

Fossil-fuel subsidies are one of the biggest financial barriers hampering the global shift to renewable energy.  They are inefficient and inequitable.  In developing countries, the subsidies benefit the richest 20 percent. Transferring them to renewables would cut emissions and contribute to job creation, economic growth, health care and equality[31] – and yet they failed to make the cut at Davos 2022. 

Democratic Alternative:  Schedule a redirection of the $5.9 trillion in global subsidies away from the fossil fuel industry towards renewable energy 

A global transition to responsible energy financing suggests an environmental law approach such as the ancient Public Trust Doctrine (PTD), which requires government stewardship of “the common wealth” – the natural resources upon which society depends for the benefit of existing and future generations.

This doctrine has been traced to the ancient societies of Europe, Asia, Africa, and Muslim countries – and to Native America, where stewardship of nature has been central to indigenous governance from time immemorial.

A trust’s assets (its res) are owned by two parties:  the beneficiaries, who have beneficial ownership of the assets, and the trustees, who are the legal owners.

The essence of a trust is a fiduciary relationship that imposes on trustees a duty to act for the benefit of beneficiaries.  In the Public Trust Doctrine, government acts as a trustee, with its management responsibility and accountability similar to oversight of an estate or investment account.   

In her book “Nature’s Trust,” Professor Mary Christina Wood of the University of Oregon wrote: 

“The res of Nature’s Trust consists of ecological assets, natural wealth that must sustain all foreseeable future generations of humanity. It amounts to humanity’s survival account – the only one it has. Government trustees must protect trust resources for the benefit of present and future generations.”[32]

The Atmospheric Trust Litigation (ATL) attempts to do this.  It “‘simply applies the public trust doctrine to the atmosphere,’ says Wood. This doctrine concerns ‘resources that the public relies on for its very survival,’ and ‘the atmosphere certainly qualifies.’”[33]

The international PTD movement is counting on domestic judiciaries to play their role. Prof. Wood explains further:

“As a legal doctrine, the public trust compels protection of those ecological assets necessary for public survival and community welfare. The judicial role is to compel the political branches to meet their fiduciary obligation through whatever measures and policies they choose, as long as such measures sufficiently reduce carbon emissions within the required time frame.”[34] 

The ideas above describe the function of the PDT within the nation. The intention is that judiciaries around the world will do this in their own countries as a support to the international treaty system – especially with regard to Atmospheric Trust Litigation.”

Indeed, a recent article in transnational legal theory concludes “that global PTDs are emerging from recent legislation, litigation and treaties.”[35]

A high priority of transnational public trusts would be to undertake a global transition of fossil fuel subsidies to renewables at 7-8%/year for 10 years until the transition is complete.

Sovereign governments working together through intergovernmental organizations could achieve this transition, perhaps after developing a national legislation template for mandating a scheduled transfer of fossil fuel subsidies to solar, wind, nuclear, geothermal, and tidal energy projects. 

But the first thing would be to identify (or create) a global intergovernmental organization to devise a framework for the Public Trust Doctrine and the Atmospheric Trust Doctrine, promoting the two ancient doctrines as the philosophical and legal bases for earth management – tax-supported and constitutionally immune from status quo interests such as the World Economic Forum.

2.  War and Peace Topics, Davos, May 23-26, 2022

  • Economic Weaponry:  Uses and Effectiveness of Sanctions
  • Responding to the Humanitarian Crisis in Ukraine
  • *Special Address by Volodymyr Zelensky, President of Ukraine*
  • *Spirit of Resilience: Ukrainian Voices*
  • A Discussion with the Klitschkos (Ukrainian boxer brothers)
  • Russia:  What Next?
  • Cold War 2.0
  • *Special Address by Jens Stoltenberg, Secretary-General, NATO*
  • NATO in the Nordics
  • Return to War
  • A Conversation with Dmytro Kuleba, Minister of Foreign Affairs of Ukraine
  • Press Conference: Minister Dmytro Kuleba
  • Kyiv after the Onslaught
  • Ukraine: Reporting from the Frontlines

Critique 

It is a striking irony that the World Economic Forum, a globalization entity paying lip service to peace and cooperation, devoted 14 sessions to supporting one side of a costly war that throughout 2022 the West had declined to negotiate.

The entire Davos audience was required to attend three of these pro-Western sessions about the Ukraine conflict:

  • *Special Address by Jens Stoltenberg, Secretary-General, NATO*
  • *Special Address by Volodymyr Zelensky, President of Ukraine*
  • *Spirit of Resilience: Ukrainian Voices*
  • Who benefits from sustaining such a war with Russia?

The WEF has not campaigned against the arms industry.  Indeed, it partners with massive arms producers such as US-based Honeywell and Boeing.[36]

Relevant to this conflict is U.S. control within NATO: “NATO’s military operations are directed by the Chairman of the NATO Military Committee and split into two Strategic Commands, both long commanded by U.S. officers, assisted by a staff drawn from across NATO.”[37]

Further relevant is that a week after Davos 2022, at the June 2-5, 2022 Bilderberg meeting in Washington – which The Guardian referred to as “a high-level council of war” – both the Secretary-General of the NATO military alliance, Jens Stoltenberg, and Klaus Schwab were in attendance.[38]

How is peace to be pursued when it is clear that the World Economic Forum is solidly aligned with the US-NATO position against Russia? 

The responsibility for world peace is cited as the first Purpose of the 1945 United Nations Charter: 

To maintain international peace and security, and to that end: to take effective collective measures for the prevention and removal of threats to the peace, and for the suppression of acts of aggression or other breaches of the peace, and to bring about by peaceful means, and in conformity with the principles of justice and international law, adjustment or settlement of international disputes or situations which might lead to a breach of the peace.[39]

The key sense of this statement being:  to take measures for “the suppression of acts of aggression…to bring about adjustment or settlement of international disputes or situations which might lead to a breach of the peace.”

This means that before President Putin invaded Ukraine, his longstanding dispute against efforts to bring the Ukraine into NATO could have been addressed and possibly settled through the UN.

International relations scholar Prof. John Mearsheimer wrote in The Economist that “NATO’s reckless expansion provoked Russia,” and that “many prominent American foreign-policy experts have warned against NATO expansion since the late 1990s.”[40] 

It is clear that the WEF, by supporting the NATO military alliance in its drive to incorporate Ukraine (both at Davos and immediately after at Bilderberg), is what is meant by “public-private partnership” – which is not a partnership at all, but a group of wealthy corporations interfering with the apparatus of states, shielded by the rhetoric of 14 anti-Russian propaganda sessions, and by the silent presence of major U.S.  munitions manufacturers.

Throughout the conflict, the captured Western media has spurred popular support for the US-backed proxy war with Russia[41], and the provision of ever more armaments to “rescue” war-torn Ukraine.

Within such a vested-interest dynamic, the WEF-NATO alignment can never undertake a peace-keeping role and will only escalate conflicts, while defense contracts bloom on.

Democratic Alternative 

By international law the United Nations remains the one democratically created transnational agency to mediate international conflicts and to keep the world peace – although it does need reform to better enable this role.  

An example of where the UN could do better:  On December 14, 2022, a UN Assembly vote adopted the resolution, “Towards a New International Economic Order,” which concerns a well-known 1979 book published by UNESCO proposing “the establishment of a peaceful world order” based on international law.[42] 

Voting in favour were 123 non-NATO countries of the world, while 50 countries, including all 30 NATO countries except Turkey (which abstained), voted against the resolution. This was not reported in the Western media.[43]

UN General Assembly resolutions are regarded as recommendations, and are not binding, but they do reflect a consensus of national values, which one authority believes the UN is capable of negotiating.

Dr. Alfred de Zayas, former UN independent expert on the promotion of a democratic and equitable international order, tweeted on June 16, 2022:

Essentially the Ukraine war constitutes a civil war among US and European powers, while China, India and most African and Latin American states observe.  Here the United Nations should play a role in integrating the values of all States in an evolving new world order.[44]

Columbia University economist and policy analyst, Dr. Jeffrey Sachs, has also reviewed the Ukraine situation:

The main point for mediation is that all parties have legitimate interests and legitimate grievances…

Peace will come when the US backs away from further NATO enlargement towards Russia’s borders; Russia withdraws its military forces from Ukraine and backs away from the unilateral annexation of Ukrainian territory; Ukraine backs away from its attempts to retake Crimea and from its repudiation of the Minsk II framework; and all parties agree to secure the sovereign borders of Ukraine under the UN Charter and backed by the guarantees of the UN Security Council and other nations.[45]

Thus, it appears that increased popular support for an enhanced UN value-integration role – throughout legacy media and social media – would help to reduce conflict in our world. 

We end by pointing to readings on United Nations procedural reform, and legacy media ethical reform.[46]

3. Pandemic Preparedness Topics, Davos, May 23-26, 2022

  • *Press Conference: Pfizer and Partners Announce Accord for a Healthier World* (featuring Bill Gates and Pfizer CEO Albert Bourla, along with some African national leaders)  
  • Equitable Responses to Ending the Pandemic
  • Growing up in the Pandemic
  • Preparing for the Next Pandemic
  • A Conversation with Albert Bourla, CEO of Pfizer

Critique  

The self-appointed World Economic Forum and its Big Pharma interests have been intruding on the role and responsibility of the UN-founded intergovernmental organization, the World Health Organization, created in 1948.

  1. In prioritizing pandemic preparedness, the WEF sessions did not mention Covid-19’s very high infection survival rate (as shown in the Bulletin of the World Health Organization[47]), which would not have qualified as a “pandemic” under the classical definition.[48]

Nor did the sessions mention the highly significant difference in immunity between the young and the old, which should have led to focused elderly protection rather than universal lockdowns.

  1. A 2011 article entitled “Health is more than influenza,” referred to repeated H5NI avian health scares, where “the pandemic policy was never informed by evidence, but by fear of worst-case scenarios,” leading to “the stocking of largely useless antivirals.” The author observes:

“The pharmaceutical industry and the media only reacted to this welcome boon. We therefore need fewer, not more “pandemic preparedness” plans or definitions. Vertical influenza planning in the face of speculative catastrophes is a recipe for repeated waste of resources and health scares, induced by influenza experts with vested interests in exaggeration.”[49]

  1. The WEF emphasis on pandemics and vaccines is bizarrely disproportional to the overall context of health, as defined by the World Health Organization Constitution:

“Health is a state of complete physical, mental and social well-being and not merely the absence of disease or infirmity.”[50]

The Constitution emphasizes informed public opinion, nutrition, and environmental factors.[51]

  1. Although risk factors such as obesity and Vitamin D deficiency were present in at least 78% of US hospitalizations[52][53],  the relevance of the whole field of WHO and nationally sponsored health, nutrition, and fitness education simply did not exist for the WEF corporate assembly.

Instead, the sessions were aimed only at the global prevention of infectious diseases, using only vaccinations. 

  1. A complicating factor is that Big Pharma has been financing not only the WEF itself, but also major public health regulatory agencies: WHO[54], FDA[55], and CDC[56].
  1. Throughout the pandemic, the overwhelming evidence supporting cheap repurposed drugs[57] in the early treatment of Covid-19 has been entirely overlooked by the WEF – but not by the U.S. military: 

Canadian physician Dr. Chris Shoemaker reported in December 2022 that after 15 years of study following SARS Cov-1 (2002-2004) the US military research agency, DARPA 

“specifically knew and specifically recommended, and passed on the information to the CDC, that Ivermectin in particular was the absolute number one product to be used in the event of a coronavirus pandemic. It was fully known that Ivermectin, and certainly Hydroxychloroquine as well, were highly antiviral and immunomodulatory – and those two things were the key:  to modulate the immune response, plus to be antiviral as well. Those elements were both totally proven in vitro and in vivo with animals. And, of course, we knew it was completely safe for humans because these medications had been used for 35-40 years in humans.”[58]

Tragically, in the case of Covid-19 policy, there was to be no competition with vaccines.  

How could this be?

Seldom if ever mentioned in the media is that the FDA cannot legally grant an Emergency Use Authorization for an experimental drug or vaccine if an “adequate, approved, and available alternative” already exists.[59]

It is upon this hidden reality that a vast underground media-and-FBI-censored “science war” over Covid policy played out – which has fatefully come to light through Elon Musk’s Twitter Files.[60]

Democratic Alternative

As witnessed by the compulsory WEF press conference with Bill Gates and Pfizer CEO Albert Bourla, corporate control of the Covid-19 pandemic is moving towards corporate control of future pandemics. 

What is to be done about this profit-driven seizure of global health leadership and policy? 

Author and trend forecaster Dr. Chris Martenson has suggested the following remedial actions:

  1. No more revolving doors. Working in any decision-making capacity at any health agency means zero money or employment from any related industry for a period of 10 years post exiting your position.
  2. No more funding the FDA through pharma “fees.” 
  3. Eliminate the so-called randomized control trial standard. Observational data is equally good if done right and ten times better than a scammed RCT.
  4. Create a parallel body to the FDA which is equally funded and charged with using any combination of therapies or repurposed drugs to address any particular disease. Drug companies would no longer be tasked with “beating placebo” – they’d have to better the cost/safety/efficacy profile of an existing approach, e.g., statins would be up against diet, exercise, meditation and red wine. Vaccines would have to go head-to-head against ivermectin, hydroxychloroquine, zinc, and Vitamin D.[61]

In other words, get Big Money out of public health agencies and let the people’s taxes support a progressive health system rather than a vaccine industry. 

4. Digital Agency Topics, Davos, May 23-26, 2022

  • Ushering in a Safer Digital Future
  • *Press Conference:  Launching Digital Foreign Direct Investment Initiative*
  • Remittances for Recovery:  A New Era of Digital Money
  • *Press Conference:  Pioneering Ways to Strengthen Digital Trust with a Label*
  • Central Bank Digital Currencies
  • Strategic Outlook on the Digital Economy
  • Unlocking Capital at Scale for Digital Inclusion
  • Advancing Digital Cooperation
  • Serving up Digital Services

A Central Bank Digital Currency (CBDC) is essentially electronic cash in the form of a “digital banknote”. Like traditional fiat currencies, it gives holders a direct claim on the central bank and allows businesses and individuals to make electronic payments and transfers.

The pandemic has been the single largest catalyst in the move away from cash, causing a surge in digital payment volume. This move towards digital currencies has also been aided by consumer convenience, and by the development of user profiles on digital vaccine certificates.

However, CBDC’s have the potential for population control through their capacity for electronic surveillance and their programmability for financial inclusion/exclusion. 

One analyst has summarized this downside, which citizens and national governments should understand:

“Given the ubiquity of credit and debit cards, payment apps and other online payment systems, digital money has been bound to happen for some time. The risk isn’t the electronic part, that’s inevitable – it’s the fact that a central bank will oversee the digital currency.

From my vantage point, it’s impossible to overstate the risk presented by CBDC. Whether it’s a utopian vision based on good intentions or a sinister plot to crush our sovereignty, the result may be the same: control. A Central Bank Digital Currency has all the downsides of fiat money, plus the added layers of surveillance and programmability overseen by the state.”[62]

The movement towards digital currencies does not stop with individual central banks. In October, 2022, following an 18-month experiment on technologies and currencies, the financial messaging system SWIFT laid out a blueprint for a global central bank digital currency network.[63]  This information should be known by citizens of all countries, within the context of surveillance and programmability, and the decision should be a democratic one, through parliaments or referenda.

Conclusion

More than 20 years ago, while discussing who was eligible for Davos, Klaus Schwab told Forbes: “Forget it if you’re retired. Even if your former job was running France or General Electric, you must be in power. ‘No oldies.’”[64]

Twenty years later, the spectre of unelected power threatens peoples of the world with centralized control on a global scale.

What this power has done to the status of democracy is astutely summarized by Nick Buxton of the Transnational Institute:

Less well known is the fact that WEF since 2009 has been working on an ambitious project called the Global Redesign Initiative, (GRI), which effectively proposes a transition away from intergovernmental decision-making towards a system of multi-stakeholder governance. In other words, by stealth, they are marginalising a recognised model where we vote in governments who then negotiate treaties which are then ratified by our elected representatives, with a model where a self-selected group of ‘stakeholders’ make decisions on our behalf.

Advocates of multi-stakeholder governance argue that governments and intergovernmental forums, such as the UN, are no longer efficient places for tackling increasingly complex global crises. The founder of WEF, Klaus Schwab, says “the sovereign state has become obsolete”. WEF has created 40 Global Agenda Councils and industry-sector bodies, with the belief these are the best groups of people to develop proposals and ultimately decisions related to a whole gamut of global issues from climate change to cybersecurity.

Corporations are put at the heart of this model, because they provide in the view of Klaus Schwab and corporate elites, the possibilities of “agile” governance, drawing on the private sector’s experience of “adapting to a new, fast-changing environment”. Governments are encouraged to tackle every issue by allying with private sector in public-private partnerships. And a few carefully selected civil society representatives are invited in to legitimise the process. Questions of how issues are framed, who is chosen, from what sectors, for whose benefit, and accountable to whom are brushed under the carpet.[65]

The Transnational Institute, unlike the WEF, has a wise and specific mission statement much more likely to meet the UN’s Sustainable Development Goals:

The Transnational Institute (TNI) is an international research and advocacy institute committed to building a just, democratic and sustainable world. For nearly 50 years, TNI has served as a unique nexus between social movements, engaged scholars and policy makers.

TNI’s mission is to strengthen international social movements with rigorous research, reliable information, sound analysis and constructive proposals that advance progressive, democratic policy change and common solutions to global problems. In so doing, TNI acts as a unique nexus between social movements, engaged scholars and policy makers.[66]

The World Economic Forum, by contrast, is about power and money, not wisdom.  

Wisdom is the lived experience of the people.

Fortunately, there are signs that public awareness is beginning to triumph over the stealth of the self-appointed World Economic Forum.

In June 2022, the WEF quietly removed the publicly-despised words, “You will own nothing and be happy,” from its website.[67]

It is not too late.  Humanity still has a choice between two fundamental approaches to governance: The corporate power approach versus the slow and careful human consensus approach through intergovernmental agencies.  

Imperfect as it may be, democratic consensus will give us – in the words of Charles Eisenstein – “the more beautiful world our hearts know is possible.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Elizabeth Woodworth is highly engaged in climate change science and activism. She has published 42 articles on Global Research, is co-author of “Unprecedented Climate Mobilization”, “Unprecedented Crime: Climate Science Denial and Game Changers for Survival,” and co-producer of the COP21 video “A Climate Revolution For All.” She is author of the popular handbook on nuclear weapons activism, “What Can I Do?” and the novel, “The November Deep”. For 25 years, she served as head medical librarian for the BC Government. She holds a BA from Queen’s and a Library Sciences Degree from UBC.

She is a regular contributor to Global Research.

Notes

[1] The United Nations Charter is considered a treaty (https://www.un.org/en/about-us/un-charter). The preamble and Article 69 of the WHO Constitution provide that WHO be a specialized agency of the UN (https://www.who.int/about/history/). 

[2] The WEF finances their meetings and sets their agendas, thereby making the partnerships “private-public.”

[3] Malone Institute (https://maloneinstitute.org/wef).

[4] World Economic Forum, “What is stakeholder capitalism?” 22 January 2021(https://www.weforum.org/agenda/2021/01/klaus-schwab-on-what-is-stakeholder-capitalism-history-relevance/).

[5] Jason Fernando, “What Are Stakeholders: Definition, Types, and Examples,” Investopedia, 29 June 2022 (https://www.investopedia.com/terms/s/stakeholder.asp).

[6] https://www.srf.ch/news/schweiz/geld-fuer-sicherheit-am-wef-knurrende-zustimmung-vom-staenderat-zu-wef-geldern

[7] https://www.weforum.org/about/klaus-schwab

[8] Hudson Institute, “Ancillary Pilot Study for the Educational Policy Research Center Program. Final Report,” 28 June 1968 (https://archive.org/details/ERIC_ED024124/page/n20/mode/1up?q=europe; https://ia801308.us.archive.org/6/items/ERIC_ED024124/ERIC_ED024124.pdf).

[9] Johnny Vedmore, “Dr. Klaus Schwab or: How the CFR Taught Me to Stop Worrying and Love the Bomb,” Unlimited Hangout, 10 March 2022 (https://unlimitedhangout.com/2022/03/investigative-reports/dr-klaus-schwab-or-how-the-cfr-taught-me-to-stop-worrying-and-love-the-bomb/.)

[10] Johnny Vedmore, “Nazi Industrialism, Technocracy, Social Engineering: A History of Klaus Schwab’s Family Values,” SOTT: Signs of the Times, 28 February 2021 (https://www.sott.net/article/449477-Nazi-Industrialism-Technocracy-Social-Engineering-A-History-of-Klaus-Schwabs-Family-Values).

[11] WEF Strategic Partners (https://www.weforum.org/communities/strategic-partnership-b5337725-fac7-4f8a-9a4f-c89072b96a0d#P). 

[12] WEF Annual Report, 2021-2022, Revenue and Costs, p. 88 (https://www3.weforum.org/docs/WEF_Annual_Report_2021_22.pdf.)

[13] Union of International Associations, ed., “Legal status of international NGOs: overview and options,” 1988, 1996 (https://www.laetusinpraesens.org/docs/statapp1.php).

[14] https://www.weforum.org/about/world-economic-forum

[15] World Economic Forum, “Davos Manifesto 1973: A Code of Ethics for Business Leaders,” 2 December 2019  (https://www.weforum.org/agenda/2019/12/davos-manifesto-1973-a-code-of-ethics-for-business-leaders/).

[16] SECRETARY-GENERAL LAUNCHES ‘PRINCIPLES FOR RESPONSIBLE INVESTMENT’ BACKED BY WORLD’S LARGEST INVESTORS, 27 April 2006 (https://press.un.org/en/2006/sg2111.doc.htm).

[17] World Economic Forum, Davis Manifesto 2020: The Universal Purpose of a Company in the Fourth Industrial Revolution,” 2 December 2019 (https://www.weforum.org/agenda/2019/12/davos-manifesto-2020-the-universal-purpose-of-a-company-in-the-fourth-industrial-revolution/); Betsy Atkins, “Demystifying ESG: Its History & Current Status,” Forbes, 8 June 2020 (https://www.forbes.com/sites/betsyatkins/2020/06/08/demystifying-esgits-history–current-status/?sh=402b97612cdd.)

[18] https://www.weforum.org/events/world-economic-forum-annual-meeting-2022/programme

[19] The WEF governance structure is at https://www.weforum.org/about/leadership-and-governance.

[20] Julia Crawford, “Does Bill Gates have too much influence in the WHO?” SWI:Swissinfo.ch, 10 May 2021 (https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/politics/does-bill-gates-have-too-much-influence-in-the-who-/46570526.) The Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation, and agencies it funds such as the GAVI Alliance, together fund WHO 15-20%. 

[21] John LaMattina, “The Biopharmaceutical Industry Provides 75% of The FDA’s Drug Review Budget. Is this a problem?” Forbes, 28 June 2018 (https://www.forbes.com/sites/johnlamattina/2018/06/28/the-biopharmaceutical-industry-provides-75-of-the-fdas-drug-review-budget-is-this-a-problem/?sh=26c06a6649ec).

[22] Judith Garber, “CDC ‘disclaimers’ hide financial conflicts of interest,” Lown Institute, 6 November 2019 (https://lowninstitute.org/cdc-disclaimers-hide-financial-conflicts-of-interest/.)

[23] Mark Lynas, et al, “Greater than 99% consensus on human caused climate change in the peer-reviewed scientific literature,” Environ. Res. Lett., 19 October 2021 (https://iopscience.iop.org/article/10.1088/1748-9326/ac2966).

[24] IPCC Report, AR6, Working Group 1, Ch. 1, Figure 1.9, p. 185 (https://www.ipcc.ch/report/ar6/wg1/downloads/report/IPCC_AR6_WGI_Chapter01.pdf). See also:  https://www.realclimate.org/index.php/climate-model-projections-compared-to-observations/ and  https://www.bloomberg.com/opinion/articles/2020-01-30/1988-global-warming-forecast-by-james-hansen-proved-mostly-true?leadSource=uverify%20wall  

[25] Eamon Barrett, “’Status quo’ interests have prevented urgent action on climate change,” Fortune, 6 April 2022 (https://fortune.com/2022/04/06/ipcc-report-2022-climate-change-mitigation/).

[26] United States EPA, Global Greenhouse Gas Emissions Data, 25 February 2022  (https://www.epa.gov/ghgemissions/global-greenhouse-gas-emissions-data).

[27] Ibid.

[28] IMARC, “Top 9 Largest Fertilizer Companies in World 2022-2027,” 15 November 2021 (https://www.imarcgroup.com/fertilizer-companies). 

[29] “Globally, fossil fuel subsidies were $5.9 trillion or 6.8 percent of GDP in 2020 and are expected to increase to 7.4 percent of GDP in 2025.”  IMF, “Fossil Fuel Subsidies,” (https://www.imf.org/en/Topics/climate-change/energy-subsidies).

[30] International Institute for Sustainable Development, “Zombie Energy:  Climate benefits of ending subsidies to fossil fuel production,” IISD, February 2017, iv (http://www.iisd.org/sites/default/files/publications/zombie-energy-climate-benefits-ending-subsidies-fossil-fuel-production.pdf). 

[31] United Nations, “Five ways to jump-start the renewable energy transition now,” [2022] (https://www.un.org/en/climatechange/raising-ambition/renewable-energy-transition). 

[32] Mary Christina Wood, “Nature’s Trust: Environmental Law for a New Ecological Age,” Cambridge University Press, 2014, p. 143.

[33] Fen Montaigne, “A Legal Call to Arms to Remedy Environment and Climate Ills,” Yale Environment 260, 3 January 2014 (https://www.countercurrents.org/montaigne030114.htm.) 

[34] Mary Christina Wood, “Atmospheric Trust Litigation Across the World,” In: Charles Sampford, et al., Fiduciary Duty and the Atmospheric Trust, Routledge, 2012, 112.

[35] Joseph Orangias, “Towards global public trust doctrines: an analysis of the transnationalisation of state stewardship duties,” Transnational Legal Theory, 01 December 2021 (https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/20414005.2021.2006030).

[36] https://www.weforum.org/organizations/boeing-company,  https://www.weforum.org/organizations/honeywell

[37] “Who Controls NATO?” 10 September 2022 (https://governmentfaq.com/who-controls-nato).

[38] “Bilderberg reconvenes in person after two-year pandemic gap,” The Guardian, 4 June 2022 (https://www.theguardian.com/world/2022/jun/04/bilderberg-reconvenes-in-person-after-two-year-pandemic-gap).

[39] United Nations Charter (full text), effective 24 October 1945  (https://www.un.org/en/about-us/un-charter/full-text). 

[40] John Mearsheimer, “Why the West is principally responsible for the Ukrainian crisis,” The Economist, 19 March 2022 (https://www.economist.com/by-invitation/2022/03/11/john-mearsheimer-on-why-the-west-is-principally-responsible-for-the-ukrainian-crisis).

[41] Monica Duffy Toft, “Ukraine:  A Classic Proxy War,” CounterPunch, 21 October 2022 (https://www.counterpunch.org/2022/10/21/ukraine-a-classic-proxy-war/). 

[42] https://unesdoc.unesco.org/ark:/48223/pf0000035806 

[43] United Nations, “General Assembly Takes Up Second Committee Reports, Adopting 38 Resolutions, 2 Decisions,” 14 December 2022 (https://press.un.org/en/2022/ga12482.doc.htm).

[44] https://twitter.com/Alfreddezayas/status/1537419260129120256?s=20&t=EY2y3l8oUnMjlC3xnbjBSw Website: http://bit.ly/11Q2e6j 

[45] Jeffrey Sachs, “A Mediator’s Guide to Peace in Ukraine,” 5 December 2022 (https://www.commondreams.org/views/2022/12/05/mediators-guide-peace-ukraine).

[46] Google Scholar search results, for United Nations Security Council international law reform, https://scholar.google.com/scholar?hl=en&as_sdt=0%2C5&q=United+Nations+Security+Council+international+law+reform&btnG= , and Legacy Media ethical reform, https://scholar.google.com/scholar?hl=en&as_sdt=0%2C5&q=Legacy+media+ethical+reform&btnG=

[47] Ioannidis J. “The infection fatality rate of COVID-19 inferred from seroprevalence data,” Bull World Health Organ., Epub Oct. 14, 2020 (https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/33716331/). The British Medical Journal, citing this article, reported: “Clearly, mortality is age-stratified from covid-19. The corrected median estimates of IFP [Infection Fatality Rate] for people aged lower than 70 years is currently 0.05%, [2] which, for the population less vulnerable to deaths, is similar to influenza. However overall estimates for covid-19 are higher [i.e., 0.23%], due to the higher fatality rate in elderly people.” BMJ October 6, 2020 (https://www.bmj.com/content/371/bmj.m3883/rr).

[48] Christina Sathyamala, “COVID-19: A Biopolitical Odyssey,” The Institute of Social Studies, Erasmus University, Rotterdam, “Working Paper No. 667, p. 10, December 2020 (https://pure.eur.nl/en/publications/covid-19-a-biopolitical-odyssey ).

[49] Luc Bonneuxb and Wim Van Dammec, “Health is more than influenza,” Bull World Health Organ. 2011 Jul 1; 89(7): 539–540 (https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC3127278/).  

[50] https://www.who.int/about/governance/constitution

[51] https://apps.who.int/gb/bd/PDF/bd47/EN/constitution-en.pdf?ua=1

[52] Berkeley Lovelace Jr. “CDC study finds about 78% of people hospitalized for Covid were overweight or obese,” CNBC, 8 March 2021 (https://www.cnbc.com/2021/03/08/covid-cdc-study-finds-roughly-78percent-of-people-hospitalized-were-overweight-or-obese.html).

[53] Dieter De Smet, et al., “Serum 25(OH)D Level on Hospital Admission Associated With COVID-19 Stage and Mortality,” Am J Clin Pathol., 2021 Feb 11;155(3):381-388 (https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/33236114/).

[54] Julia Crawford, “Does Bill Gates have too much influence in the WHO?” SWI:Swissinfo.ch, 10 May 2021.

[55] John LaMattina, “The Biopharmaceutical Industry Provides 75% of The FDA’s Drug Review Budget. Is this a problem?” Forbes, 28 June 2018. 

[56] Judith Garber, “CDC ‘disclaimers’ hide financial conflicts of interest,” Lown Institute, 6 November 2019.

[57] This home page shows over 2000 early Covid treatment studies: (https://c19early.org/).

[58] Dr. Chris Shoemaker, Interview, circa December 12, 2022, 0:29 at https://twitter.com/ZN2_______/status/1602417793609396224?s=20&t=inNOCD9vLInCurZ6gigIag; also https://media.gab.com/system/media_attachments/files/122/948/504/playable/99f2ba7cbe095648.mp4.

[59] US FDA. “Emergency Use Authorization of Medical Products and Related Authorities: Guidance for Industry and Other Stakeholders,” January 2017 (https://www.fda.gov/regulatory-information/search-fda-guidance-documents/emergency-use-authorization-medical-products-and-related-authorities).

[60] https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Twitter_Files 

[61] Dr. Chris Martenson, CEO of the Peak Prosperity website; private communication to author, 7 December, 2022.

[62] Josh Stylman, “From Covid to CBDC: The Path to Full Control” Brownstone Institute, 21 November 2022 (https://brownstone.org/articles/covid-to-cbdc-to-full-control/). 

[63] Marc Jones, “SWIFT sets out blueprint for central bank digital currency network,” Reuters, 5 October 2022 (https://www.reuters.com/technology/swift-sets-out-blueprint-central-bank-digital-currency-network-2022-10-05/).

[64] Forbes, “Power Broker,” 15 November 1999 (https://www.forbes.com/global/1999/1115/0223108a.html?sh=282a91147e11.)

[65] Nick Buxton, “Davos and its Danger to Democracy,” Transnational Institute, 18 January 2016 (https://www.tni.org/en/article/davos-and-its-danger-to-democracy). 

[66] https://www.tni.org/en

[67] Baxter Dmitry, “WEF Caught Scrubbing ‘You Will Own Nothing and Be Happy’ Post From Internet,” NewsPunch, 9 June 2022 (https://newspunch.com/wef-caught-scrubbing-you-will-own-nothing-and-be-happy-post-from-internet/).

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

When one hears and sees Israel’s Prime Minister Netanyahu, declaring the absolute supremacy of his Zionist tribe and its goals of ‘taking back’ the State of Israel – via the slaughter of any and all Palestinian ‘animals’ whose home land is the Gaza Strip – one is confronting face to face, a clinically insane individual whose medical condition, if it were to be officially assessed, would be described as ‘psychopath’.

In a properly functioning society such a person would be hospitalised and made to undergo special psychological and medical treatment, or would be sent to an asylum where he would not be a threat to the outside world.

However, we are not living in a properly functioning society. We are living in a time where those in charge of all the main arteries of global decision making are either sub human, clinically insane, or both.

This is not a situation anyone would choose as their preferred form of governance. But on the other hand, it has been permitted to come about due to a widespread abdication of the responsibility we all share, to deal with lies, deceptions and basic thuggery taking place much closer to home. And which, due to our failure to deal with them    now form an integral part of the globalist agenda shaping every aspect of our lives.

Failing to confront injustice in one’s own backyard is the same as failing to treat the early signs of a sickness in one’s body. The end result, in both cases, is to suffer far worse consequences down the road.

But now, like it or not, we are further down that very road and staring us in the face is a monster we have no way of hiding from. 

A monster, I contend, that is at least 50% our own making. The outward expression of a fear of confronting inner demons – and an unwillingness to stand courageously in defence of fundamental moral values which constitute the implacable foundation stones of a sane society.

The other 50% of that which stands behind the existence of this monster, comes from something extra terrestrial hatched by outside forces beyond our immediate control. And outside the capacity of the majority of mankind to recognise or identify – and therefore fail to recognise as a real threat to their futures.

But two events of unparalleled significance have started to change this: Covid and Gaza. 

Suddenly, right in the foreground, we witness figureheads holding high levels of office, mercilessly condemning hundreds of thousands of human beings to a life of highly visible depravation, agony and death. And this, with utter impunity and not a trace of guilt; but with an air of someone quite alien and possessed.

This is a state of deep psychosis. Someone suffering it can justly be described as ‘clinically insane’.

When the World Economic Summit and the Bilderberg club convene each year, the venue is filled with insane megalomaniacs discussing how to impose their rampant megalomania on the rest of us. 

Their insanity comes dressed up in various guises of which the current favourites are

  • Artificial Intelligence replacing human intelligence by 2035
  • Artificial lab food replacing real food grown in soil by circa 2030
  • ‘Net Zero’ carbon replacing oxygen by 2050
  • The confiscation of our personal assets – so as to make us ‘happy’ – by 2030
  • The removal of any degree of privacy, freedom of speech and human rights, also by around 2030
  • A Central Bank Digital Currency to replace physical bank notes, by circa 2026
  • War machines programmed to self select ‘enemy collateral’ at the push of a button, 2025?

After which time the ‘Transhuman’ AI computer cyborg entity is supposed to become ascendant  – and real men and women pretty much obsolete. Except those useful as slaves and play things for the psychos. 

This is only an abbreviated summary of some key points that, as most of us know already, the monster has in store for us unless knocked off course. I have outlined them in order to illustrate how the psychopath agenda has no basis in rational thinking, human empathy or any form of justice.

It is cold, metallic and schematic. It thrives on chaos, the blood of innocents and sacrificial offerings to Masonic and Luciferian extra terrestrial overlords.

Now, having digested this essentially indigestible Hieronymus Bosh portrait of the dire state of our planet, we need to consider what options we warm hearted humans have to get through this global ‘Dark Night of the Soul’ and emerge victorious.

Facing us very directly in the Spring of 2024, is a major plank in the deep state totalitarian agenda – but also a unique opportunity for ‘we the resistance’: The WHO ‘Pandemic Preparedness Plan.’ We need to specifically put our best energies into ensuring the defeat of this planned fascist take over of human health.

Success here will constitute a huge set back for the architects of human suffering – and give us new momentum for further victories to come.

The WHO plan is ready to roll out should there be majority acceptance of its proposal to enshrine itself as the central controlling agent of all planetary health decisions.

However, in ‘we the people’s’ favour is the fact that we got a huge eye opening ‘initiation kick’ via the great 2021/22 Covid deception; all be it a tragic and ongoing one. 

The rate of uptake of booster shots has declined dramatically in the last six months in almost all countries. There is a marked level of distrust and cynicism concerning official proclamations about what one ‘must do to be safe’. Cynicism is an essential part of breaking ranks with a captured status quo. We must now build on it – bravely and fast.

In store for us in plans being hatched by the combined pharmaceutical and military industrial industrial project – to be enforced by the WHO –  is a threefold more drastic ‘lock down’ program than we suffered in 2021/22. 

According to courageous activist Dr Bret Weinstein, closing the gate on 2021/22 errors of judgement by big pharma, will involve the redefinition of ‘a public health emergency’ and the re-mandating of the mRNA vaccine as the most effective weapon for dealing with the next human culling operation.

Additional remedies, reports Weinstein, will require citizens to endure ‘gene therapy technology’; a ban on the use of other medicines; highly restricted travel – and much more.  All within the context of a general overriding of the constitution of individual nation states. 

The psychos and their corporate henchmen are going all out to cut off a growing level of bottom-up suspicion concerning the motives of those in high office.

If the momentum of growing awareness can move up a notch and be turned into a significant scale rejection, our chances of an enhanced level of people’s resistance will be greatly increased and significantly strengthened. 

The greatest danger to the realisation of such positive progress is what Weinstein identifies as “People’s willingness to expect to loose their rights when a health emergency is called.”

‘People’s willingness to expect to loose their rights’. 

For the psychos, maintaining such a level of mass indoctrination is the key to moving their sick agenda forward and locking into place a global totalitarian regime which places mankind under permanent house arrest.

This year, 2024, could prove decisive in the battle ‘humans-v-psychos’. 

Our task is clear: rip away the already decaying veil behind which hide our sickly tormentors, laying bare those who only know to deceive mankind into slavish submission to their demented prison camp.

Be bold, good people, we know we are gifted with the powers necessary to fight for that day when the light finally penetrates the darkness and we who honour and treasure our unique inheritance – burst through, declaring a glorious victory for freedom, truth, love and justice!

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Julian Rose is an organic farmer, writer, broadcaster and international activist. He is author of four books of which the latest ‘Overcoming the Robotic Mind’ is a clarion call to resist the despotic New World Order takeover of our lives. Do visit his website for further information www.julianrose.info

He is a regular contributor to Global Research.

Featured image source

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The threat of a new pandemic and so-called “misinformation.” The future of democracy. The future impact of artificial intelligence (AI) in society. The “green agenda.”

These were just some of the topics on the agenda at the annual meeting of the World Economic Forum (WEF) in Davos, Switzerland, which concluded today.

Some of the highlights of this year’s meeting included warnings of how a yet-unknown “Disease X” may cause the next pandemic, discussions on how AI could lead to the rapid development of new vaccines, and talk about how AI could either fall victim to — or filter out — so-called “misinformation” and “disinformation.”

‘We don’t want to wait a year before we get the vaccine’

Warnings were accompanied by more optimistic — from the perspective of the meeting’s participants — outlooks about the role AI could play in tackling future pandemics, such as through the rapid development of new vaccines.

Jeremy Hunt, the U.K.’s chancellor of the Exchequer, said during a Thursday panel discussion — in which Pfizer CEO Albert Bourla participated — that “when we have the next pandemic, we don’t want to have to wait a year before we get the vaccine.”

“If AI can shrink the time it takes to get that vaccine to a month, then that is a massive step forward for humanity,” Hunt said.

Digital ID ‘Very Necessary’ for Tracking the Unvaccinated

During another Thursday panel discussion, Queen Máxima of the Netherlands said that digital ID is “very necessary” for the provision of a range of public services — and suggested that it can be used to track the unvaccinated.

Digital ID “is very necessary for financial services, but not only. It is also good for school enrollment, it is also good for health — who actually got a vaccination or not,” she said.

Bourla elaborated on the possibilities he sees for AI in the realm of healthcare.

Answering a question from CNN journalist Fareed Zakaria, Bourla said,

“Our job is to make breakthroughs that change patients’ lives. With AI, I can do it faster and I can do it better.”

One example identified by Bourla was the role AI played in developing Paxlovid, a prescription oral medication marketed as a treatment for COVID-19.

“It was developed in four months,” Bourla said, whereas development of such a drug “usually takes four years.” He said AI helped significantly reduce the amount of time needed for the “drug discovery” process, where “You really synthesize millions of molecules and then you try to discover within them, which one works.”

He credited this breakthrough with saving “millions of lives.”

“I truly believe that we are about to enter a scientific renaissance in life sciences because of this coexistence of advancements in technology and biology,” Bourla said. “AI is a very powerful tool. In the hands of bad people [it] can do bad things for the world, but in the hands of good people [it] can do great things for the world.”

World Health Organization Director-General Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus warned on Wednesday during the “Preparing for Disease X” panel discussion that the world must prepare for a future pandemic, which may be caused by a yet-unknown “Disease X.”

Panelists warned that “Disease X” — which is included in the WHO’s list of “priority diseases” — could “result in 20 times more fatalities than the coronavirus pandemic.”

Aside from “Disease X,” Tedros and other participants on the panel also discussed the need for a “pandemic agreement” and the urgency of having it approved at this year’s World Health Assembly, to be held between May 27 and June 1 in Geneva.

‘We’re going to have digital doctors, digital people’

During the “Technology in a Turbulent World” panel, panelists offered predictions as to other ways in which AI is likely to become integrated into people’s lives.

Marc Benioff, chair and CEO of Salesforce, said that while “AI is really not at a point where we’re replacing human beings, it’s really at a point where we’re augmenting them.”

He cited, as hypothetical examples, the possibility that WEF participants could ask an AI application such as ChatGPT “what’s some good questions I could ask” during their panel, or that radiologists could use AI “to help read my CT scan into my MRI.”

“We’re just about to get to that breakthrough where we’re going to go, ‘Wow, it’s almost like it’s a digital person,” Benioff said. However, reflecting the theme of this year’s WEF meeting — “Rebuilding Trust” — he added, “When we get to that point, we’re going to ask ourselves, ‘Do we trust it?’”

“We’re going to have digital doctors, digital people, these digital people are going to merge and there’s going to have to be a level of trust,” Benioff said.

Similarly, Sam Altman, CEO of OpenAI — which maintains a partnership with Microsoft — said that AI will help “everyone’s job … operate at a little bit higher of a level of abstraction.”

“We will all have access to a lot more capability and we’ll still make decisions. They may trend more towards curation over time, but we’ll make decisions about what should happen in the world,” he said.

Julie Sweet, chair and CEO of Accenture, also expressed optimism over AI’s future role, saying that AI is “massively going to improve social services.”

To build “trust,” Benioff called for more regulation, alluding to the social media ecosystem and “misinformation” on such platforms.

“We have to also turn to those regulators and say, ‘Hey, if you look at social media over the last decade, it’s been kind of a f***ing s**t show.’ It’s pretty bad. We don’t want that in our AI industry. We want to have a good healthy partnership with these moderators and with these regulators.”

Altman suggested that one way to develop such “partnerships” is to train AI to locate and identify information from certain preferred sources.

He said:

“What we want to do with the content owners, like The New York Times and deals that we have done with many other publishers, and we’ll do more over time, is when a user says, ‘Hey, ChatGPT, what happened at Davos today?,’ we would like to display content, link out, show brands of places like The New York Times or the Wall Street Journal or any other great publication and say, ‘Here’s what happened today. Here’s this real-time information.’”

Bourla also called for more regulation of AI, saying that while he was “certain right now that the benefits clearly outweigh the risks,” he feels “we need regulation right now.”

Hunt, however, said that minimal regulation is the best approach at this time.

“I think we need to be light touch because … it’s such an emerging stage. You can kill the golden goose before it has a chance to grow,” he said.

AI Could be Used to Educate Students About ‘Misinformation’

WEF leaders also addressed the future role of AI in education, in particular during the WEF’s “Education Meets AI” panel on Thursday.

According to Forbes, panelists, including government officials from Slovenia and the United Arab Emirates, suggested that AI will provide “novel opportunities for deeply personalized learning and tutoring.”

Ahmad bin Abdullah Humaid Belhoul Al Falasi, minister of education of the United Arab Emirates, called this “democratic tutoring,” suggesting that AI would provide “scalable” tutoring “available to all” outside the classroom, which will supplement classroom teaching and which “leaves the hardest part — the soft skills — to teachers.”

Nzinga Qunta, an anchor with the South African Broadcasting Corporation, suggested that such tutoring would not be restricted in terms of age or physical space.

Panelists also provided reassurances that AI would not lead to the elimination of human jobs — but suggested that people won’t lose their jobs due to AI “but by people who know how to use AI,” Forbes reported.

The “risk of mis- and disinformation” was also highlighted during the discussion, with panelists suggesting that “critical thinking” can enable students to identify the “hazardous” risks of “misinformation” and “disinformation.”

‘Misinformation’ Can Lead to ‘Civil Unrest’

Misinformation” was indeed highly prominent on the agenda of this year’s WEF meeting. The WEF’s Global Risks Report, released Jan. 10, named “misinformation” and “disinformation” derived from AI as the top risk facing the world over the next two years, and the fifth-highest risk over the next decade.

According to the report, “Foreign and domestic actors alike will leverage misinformation and disinformation to widen societal and political divides” in the next two years, posing a risk to elections in countries such as the U.S., U.K. and India and a risk of “civil unrest” across the world.

“What’s more, false information and societal polarization are inherently intertwined, with potential to amplify each other,” according to Saadia Zahidi, the WEF’s managing director, for which “innovation and trustworthy decision-making” are required. However, she said this “is only possible in a world with alignment on the facts.”

‘There is a risk the wrong leaders are elected’

The WEF’s warnings about the “threat” of “misinformation” and “disinformation” is closely aligned with fears expressed by WEF meeting participants regarding how AI could impact democracy and the electoral process.

In recent days, a video went viral on social media showing WEF co-founder and chairman Klaus Schwab in a discussion with Sergey Brin, co-founder and former president of Google. Schwab suggested a hypothetical scenario where “you do not even have to have elections anymore” because AI “can already predict the winner” — a scenario Brin did not explicitly dismiss.

Even though that video was frequently presented in social media posts as originating from this year’s WEF meeting, it is actually from a discussion at the WEF’s annual meeting in 2017. Yet, other statements at this year’s meeting also referenced elections and governance.

During a panel discussion today on “Global Risks: What’s in the Mail?Haslinda Amin, Bloomberg News’ chief international correspondent for Southeast Asia, suggested “there is a risk the wrong leaders are elected” in this year’s elections in key countries.

Responding to Amin, Douglas L. Peterson, president and CEO of S&P Global, said this “is one of the top risks for this year” and added, “We also need to make sure we stay engaged through global institutions, like the UN, like NATO.”

And during his special address at the WEF meeting, António Guterres, the United Nation’s secretary-general, called for “effective mechanisms of global governance” as part of “a new multipolar global order.”

Building ‘International Economic Order’ Required to Tackle ‘Climate Crisis’

Numerous WEF meeting participants also warned about the risks posed by climate change — and used the opportunity to call for more money and investments for “green” initiatives.

Speaking earlier this week at the WEF meeting, John Kerry, U.S. special presidential envoy for climate, said 2023 “was literally the most disruptive, climate-disrupted, most climate consequential, negative year in human history,” and that as a result, there is no more “space for debate or, frankly, procrastination any longer.”

To respond to this, WEF meeting participants said more money is needed. For instance, Tharman Shanmugaratnam, president of Singapore, said “governments are going to have to invest significantly more than they’ve invested before.”

And according to Chrystia Freeland, deputy prime minister of Canada, government intervention is needed as part of the transition away from carbon — a process which she said will create “more jobs, more growth, more manufacturing.”

The price tag for such interventions, according to Christine Lagarde, president of the European Central Bank, is “no less than 620 billion per year to actually move the green transition further.”

When confronted on the streets of Davos Thursday by True North Media journalist Andrew Lawton, Lagarde dodged questions about whether central bank digital currencies, such as the digital euro introduced by Lagarde, could be used to control people.

“I’m not speaking because I’m in a quiet period,” was Lagarde’s response.

In another confrontation on Davos’ streets, Rebel News reporters targeted Philipp Hildebrand, vice chairman of BlackRock, one of the world’s largest investment firms, asking him a series of questions about BlackRock’s support for “ESG” — environmental, social and corporate governance.

Hildebrand did not respond to any of the reporters’ questions.

And Jake Sullivan, national security adviser of the U.S., tied several threads together, suggesting on Tuesday during a special address that “the international economic order” could be built or updated “in ways that … address the climate crisis.”

More than 60 heads of state and 1,600 business leaders were among this year’s 2,800 participants from 120 countries.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Michael Nevradakis, Ph.D., based in Athens, Greece, is a senior reporter for The Defender and part of the rotation of hosts for CHD.TV’s “Good Morning CHD.”

Featured image is from CHD

capitalism

The Transnational Capitalist Class. The Billionaires, The Trillionaires. “Stakeholder Capitalism” and the New World Order

By Rick Thomas, January 21, 2024

In 2011, the Great British Class Survey was conducted, in collaboration with academics from the University of Manchester, the London School of Economics, and the University of York. The British have always been obsessed with class, so it is not surprising that British academics would attempt something of this nature.

Reflections on Racism, “Coloniality of Power”, Mal-Development and Contemporary Capitalism

By Tina Renier, January 21, 2024

Several Caribbean countries including Jamaica and Belize have expressed an active interest in decolonising their constitutions and transition from a parliamentary democracy to a republic. While these efforts and proposals aimed at national self-determination are commendable, the racialization and colonial infrastructure of social institutions remain highly visible to social activists in Jamaica.

The World Economic Forum (WEF) –United Nations Partnership Constitutes “A Global Corporate Takeover”

By Jacob Nordangard, January 21, 2024

A reader of my latest Substack article, G20, BRICS, WEF and the “building of a just world and a sustainable planet”, notified me of an open letter, from September 2019, where over 400 civil society organisations and 40 international networks condemned the 2019 groundbreaking partnership between World Economic Forum and United Nations (which I became aware of in 2020 and have been trying to alert the world to in my books, articles, interviews, and lectures).

Thousands of Babies Being Born Into ‘Hell’ in Gaza, Says UNICEF

By Julia Conley, January 21, 2024

With the Israel Defense Forces continuing to block supplies from reaching shelters, refugee camps, and hospitals in Gaza, humanitarian workers are warning that there is “no end in sight” for the horrors facing an estimated 55,000 pregnant women as well as postpartum parents and newborns.

Attacks on the Houthis by the US and UK Have Escalated the Situation in the Red Sea Shipping Lane. Interview with Suat Delgen

By Suat Delgen and Steven Sahiounie, January 21, 2024

The Houthis in Yemen have been attacking ships in the Red Sea which are associated with Israel or the US in response to the ongoing genocide in Gaza being carried out by Israel, who is supported by the US with all weapons and funding. US President Joe Biden continues to refuse all international calls for a ceasefire in Gaza.

The Two Wars of the West: America Targets Europe as Well as the Middle East. Manlio Dinucci

By Manlio Dinucci, January 21, 2024

We are embroiled in two wars, in Europe and the Middle East, which have increasingly serious consequences for our living conditions and security.  

It’s All About Me: Netanyahu Rejects Palestinian Statehood

By Dr. Binoy Kampmark, January 21, 2024

The latest remarks from Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu on January 18 suggest that the license also extends to ensuring that Palestinians will never be permitted a sovereign homeland, that they will be, in a perverse biblical echo, kept in a form of bondage, downtrodden, oppressed and, given what happened on October 7 last year, suppressed. 

Technocratic Victory for China? Cold War 2.0 in the Year of the Red Dragon

By Michael Welch, Patrick Wood, and Pepe Escobar, January 21, 2024

According to the U.S. Department of Defense 2022 National Defense Strategy, the People’s Republic of China “remains our most consequential strategic competitor for the coming decades” and quoting President Biden’s National Security Strategy, the PRC is “the most consequential strategic competitor for the coming decades.”

Former NATO Commander Calls to Bomb Crimea

By Lucas Leiroz de Almeida, January 21, 2024

In a recent statement, American retired General Philip Breedlove, former NATO Supreme Allied Commander Europe, stated that the West should send heavy weapons to Kiev to enable intense attacks on the Crimea region. According to Breedlove, only by attacking Russian positions in the Black Sea will Ukraine be able to make Moscow “rethink its posture”.

Evisceration of the United Nations Security Council. A Historical Analysis. The Gulf War

By Carla Stea, January 20, 2024

Calls for a ceasefire from around the world are ignored, and, most shamefully of all,  the United Nations Security Council, whose mandate requires it to uphold global peace and security, has, to date, remained impotent, failing to draft any resolution which would demand a cessation of the bombing; and despite the fact that United Nations workers themselves have also been killed as a consequence of the assault on Gaza, the Security Council has completely failed, as of this writing, to produce any resolutions which would halt this collective punishment of the Palestinians, which is now described as genocide.

Gaza: A Textbook Case of Genocide

January 22nd, 2024 by Raz Segal

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

[First published on GR in October 2023]

On Friday, Israel ordered the besieged population in the northern half of the Gaza Strip to evacuate to the south, warning that it would soon intensify its attack on the Strip’s upper half. The order has left more than a million people, half of whom are children, frantically attempting to flee amid continuing airstrikes, in a walled enclave where no destination is safe.

As Palestinian journalist Ruwaida Kamal Amer wrote today from Gaza, “refugees from the north are already arriving in Khan Younis, where the missiles never stop and we’re running out of food, water, and power.” The UN has warned that the flight of people from the northern part of Gaza to the south will create “devastating humanitarian consequences” and will “transform what is already a tragedy into a calamitous situation.”

Over the last week, Israel’s violence against Gaza has killed more than 1,800 Palestinians, injured thousands, and displaced more than 400,000 within the strip. And yet Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu promised today that what we have seen is “only the beginning.”

Israel’s campaign to displace Gazans—and potentially expel them altogether into Egypt—is yet another chapter in the Nakba, in which an estimated 750,000 Palestinians were driven from their homes during the 1948 war that led to the creation of the State of Israel. But the assault on Gaza can also be understood in other terms: as a textbook case of genocide unfolding in front of our eyes. I say this as a scholar of genocide, who has spent many years writing about Israeli mass violence against Palestinians. I have written about settler colonialism and Jewish supremacy in Israel, the distortion of the Holocaust to boost the Israeli arms industry, the weaponization of antisemitism accusations to justify Israeli violence against Palestinians, and the racist regime of Israeli apartheid. Now, following Hamas’s attack on Saturday and the mass murder of more than 1,000 Israeli civilians, the worst of the worst is happening.

Under international law, the crime of genocide is defined by “the intent to destroy, in whole or in part, a national, ethnical, racial or religious group, as such,” as noted in the December 1948 UN Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide. In its murderous attack on Gaza, Israel has loudly proclaimed this intent. Israeli Minister of Defense Yoav Gallant declared it in no uncertain terms on October 9th:

“We are imposing a complete siege on Gaza. No electricity, no food, no water, no fuel. Everything is closed. We are fighting human animals, and we will act accordingly.”

Leaders in the West reinforced this racist rhetoric by describing Hamas’s mass murder of Israeli civilians—a war crime under international law that rightly provoked horror and shock in Israel and around the world—as “an act of sheer evil,” in the words of US President Joe Biden, or as a move that reflected an “ancient evil,” in the terminology of President of the European Commission Ursula von der Leyen. This dehumanizing language is clearly calculated to justify the wide scale destruction of Palestinian lives; the assertion of “evil,” in its absolutism, elides distinctions between Hamas militants and Gazan civilians, and occludes the broader context of colonization and occupation.

The UN Genocide Convention lists five acts that fall under its definition. Israel is currently perpetrating three of these in Gaza:

“1. Killing members of the group.

2. Causing serious bodily or mental harm to members of the group.

3. Deliberately inflicting on the group conditions of life calculated to bring about its physical destruction in whole or in part.”

The Israeli Air Force, by its own account, has so far dropped more than 6,000 bombs on Gaza, which is one of the most densely populated areas in the world—almost as many bombs as the US dropped on all of Afghanistan during record-breaking years of its war there. Human Rights Watch has confirmed that the weapons used included phosphorous bombs, which set fire to bodies and buildings, creating flames that aren’t extinguished on contact with water. This demonstrates clearly what Gallant means by “act accordingly”: not targeting individual Hamas militants, as Israel claims, but unleashing deadly violence against Palestinians in Gaza “as such,” in the language of the UN Genocide Convention. Israel has also intensified its 16-year siege of Gaza—the longest in modern history, in clear violation of international humanitarian law—to a “complete siege,” in Gallant’s words. This turn of phrase that explicitly indexes a plan to bring the siege to its final destination of systematic destruction of Palestinians and Palestinian society in Gaza, by killing them, starving them, cutting off their water supplies, and bombing their hospitals.

It’s not only Israel’s leaders who are using such language. An interviewee on the pro-Netanyahu Channel 14 called for Israel to “turn Gaza to Dresden.” Channel 12, Israel’s most-watched news station, published a report about left-leaning Israelis calling to “dance on what used to be Gaza.” Meanwhile, genocidal verbs—calls to “erase” and “flatten” Gaza—have become omnipresent on Israeli social media. In Tel Aviv, a banner reading “Zero Gazans” was seen hanging from a bridge.

Indeed, Israel’s genocidal assault on Gaza is quite explicit, open, and unashamed. Perpetrators of genocide usually do not express their intentions so clearly, though there are exceptions. In the early 20th century, for example, German colonial occupiers perpetrated a genocide in response to an uprising by the Indigenous Herero and Nama populations in southwest Africa. In 1904, General Lothar von Trotha, the German military commander, issued an “extermination order,” justified by the rationale of a “race war.” By 1908, the German authorities had murdered 10,000 Nama, and had achieved their stated goal of “destroying the Herero,” killing 65,000 Herero, 80% of the population. Gallant’s orders on October 9th were no less explicit. Israel’s goal is to destroy the Palestinians of Gaza. And those of us watching around the world are derelict in our responsibility to prevent them from doing so.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Palestinians in Gaza’s smallest refugee camp have once again found themselves digging the bodies of their relatives out from under rubble, hours after Israeli forces announced their withdrawal from the area.

Witnesses in the Maghazi refugee camp say many of the residents were shot at close range by Israeli soldiers “in cold blood”.

Piles of broken concrete and scenes of widespread destruction are evidence that homes were not spared in Israeli attacks, which included missile strikes and heavy artillery shelling.

Israeli soldiers have been conducting ground operations in northern, central, and parts of southern Gaza, for more than three months.

Maghazi camp has come under Israeli attack several times over the last few weeks.

In one of the deadliest attacks last month, more than 100 people were killed, mostly displaced women and children.

Dozens more have been reported killed in the camp in the past several days.

Ambulances have been unable to navigate destroyed roads and infrastructure in order to recover the bodies.

The camp normally houses about 30,000 people, according to the United Nations Relief and Works Agency for Palestinians in the Near East (UNRWA).

But the population of the camp rose to at least 100,000 as thousands more frightened Palestinians came there seeking shelter from Israel’s relentless bombardment in other parts of the besieged enclave.

Click here to read the full article on Al Jazeera.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles. 

Featured image: The UN says nearly 1.9 million people have now been displaced in Gaza. [AbdelHakim Abu Riash/Al Jazeera]

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.

First published on August 25, 2021

***

As a tsunami of crocodile tears engulfs Western politicians, history is suppressed. More than a generation ago, Afghanistan won its freedom, which the United States, Britain and their “allies” destroyed.

In 1978, a liberation movement led by the People’s Democratic Party of Afghanistan (PDPA) overthrew the dictatorship of Mohammad Dawd, the cousin of King Zahir Shar. It was an immensely popular revolution that took the British and Americans by surprise.

Foreign journalists in Kabul, reported the New York Times, were surprised to find that “nearly every Afghan they interviewed said [they were] delighted with the coup”. The Wall Street Journal reported that “150,000 persons … marched to honour the new flag …the participants appeared genuinely enthusiastic.”

The Washington Post reported that “Afghan loyalty to the government can scarcely be questioned”. Secular, modernist and, to a considerable degree, socialist, the government declared a programme of visionary reforms that included equal rights for women and minorities. Political prisoners were freed and police files publicly burned.

Under the monarchy, life expectancy was thirty-five; one in three children died in infancy. Ninety per cent of the population was illiterate. The new government introduced free medical care. A mass literacy campaign was launched.

For women, the gains had no precedent; by the late 1980s, half the university students were women, and women made up 40 per cent of Afghanistan’s doctors, 70 per cent of its teachers and 30 per cent of its civil servants.

So radical were the changes that they remain vivid in the memories of those who benefited. Saira Noorani, a female surgeon who fled Afghanistan in 2001, recalled:

“Every girl could go to high school and university. We could go where we wanted and wear what we liked … We used to go to cafes and the cinema to see the latest Indian films on a Friday … it all started to go wrong when the mujahedin started winning … these were the people the West supported.”

For the United States, the problem with the PDPA government was that it was supported by the Soviet Union. Yet it was never the “puppet” derided in the West, neither was the coup against the monarchy “Soviet backed”, as the American and British press claimed at the time.

President Jimmy Carter’s Secretary of State, Cyrus Vance, later wrote in his memoirs: “We had no evidence of any Soviet complicity in the coup.”

In the same administration was Zbigniew Brzezinski, Carter’s National Security Adviser, a Polish émigré and fanatical anti-communist and moral extremist whose enduring influence on American presidents expired only with his death in 2017.

On 3 July 1979, unknown to the American people and Congress, Carter authorised a $500 million “covert action” programme to overthrow Afghanistan’s first secular, progressive government.  This was code-named by the CIA Operation Cyclone.

The $500 million bought, bribed and armed a group of tribal and religious zealots known as the mujahedin. In his semi-official history,Washington Post reporter Bob Woodward wrote that the CIA spent $70 million on bribes alone. He describes a meeting between a CIA agent known as “Gary” and a warlord called Amniat-Melli:

“Gary placed a bundle of cash on the table: $500,000 in one-foot stacks of $100 bills. He believed it would be more impressive than the usual $200,000, the best way to say we’re here, we’re serious, here’s money, we know you need it … Gary would soon ask CIA headquarters for and receive $10 million in cash.”

Recruited from all over the Muslim world, America’s secret army was trained in camps in Pakistan run by Pakistani intelligence, the CIA and Britain’s MI6. Others were recruited at an Islamic College in Brooklyn, New York – within sight of the doomed Twin Towers. One of the recruits was a Saudi engineer called Osama bin Laden.

The aim was to spread Islamic fundamentalism in Central Asia and destabilise and eventually destroy the Soviet Union.  

In August, 1979, the US Embassy in Kabul reported that “the United States’ larger interests … would be served by the demise of the PDPA government, despite whatever setbacks this might mean for future social and economic reforms in Afghanistan.”

Read again the words above I have italicised. It is not often that such cynical intent is spelt out as clearly.  The US was saying that a genuinely progressive Afghan government and the rights of Afghan women could go to hell.

Six months later, the Soviets made their fatal move into Afghanistan in response to the American-created jihadist threat on their doorstep. Armed with CIA-supplied Stinger missiles and celebrated as “freedom fighters” by Margaret Thatcher, the mujahedin eventually drove the Red Army out of Afghanistan.

Calling themselves the Northern Alliance, the mujahedin were dominated by war lords who controlled the heroin trade and terrorised rural women. The Taliban were an ultra-puritanical faction, whose mullahs wore black and punished banditry, rape and murder but banished women from public life.

In the 1980s, I made contact with the Revolutionary Association of the Women of Afghanistan, known as RAWA, which had tried to alert the world to the suffering of Afghan women. During the Taliban time they concealed cameras beneath their burqas to film evidence of atrocities, and did the same to expose the brutality of the Western-backed mujahedin. “Marina” of RAWA told me, “We took the videotape to all the main media groups, but they didn’t want to know ….”

In 1996, the enlightened PDPA government was overrun. The President, Mohammad Najibullah, had gone to the United Nations to appeal to for help. On his return, he was hanged from a street light.

“I confess that [countries] are pieces on a chessboard,” said Lord Curzon in 1898, “upon which is being played out a great game for the domination of the world.”

Image on the right: “Photo Op”. Credit: Imperial War Museum/Peter Kennard & Cat Philips (2005)

The Viceroy of India was referring in particular to Afghanistan. A century later, Prime Minister Tony Blair used slightly different words.

“This is a moment to seize,” he said following 9/11. “The Kaleidoscope has been shaken. The pieces are in flux. Soon they will settle again. Before they do, let us re-order this world around us.”

On Afghanistan, he added this:

“We will not walk away [but ensure] some way out of the poverty that is your miserable existence.”

Blair echoed his mentor, President George W. Bush, who spoke to the victims of his bombs from the Oval Office:

“The oppressed people of Afghanistan will know the generosity of America. As we strike military targets, we will also drop food, medicine and supplies to the starving and suffering … “

Almost every word was false. Their declarations of concern were cruel illusions for an imperial savagery “we” in the West rarely recognise as such.

In 2001, Afghanistan was stricken and depended on emergency relief convoys from Pakistan. As the journalist Jonathan Steele reported, the invasion indirectly caused the deaths of some 20,000 people as supplies to drought victims stopped and people fled their homes.

Eighteen months later, I found unexploded American cluster bombs in the rubble of Kabul which were often mistaken for yellow relief packages dropped from the air. They blew the limbs off foraging, hungry children.

In the village of Bibi Maru, I watched a woman called Orifa kneel at the graves of her husband, Gul Ahmed, a carpet weaver, and seven other members of her family, including six children, and two children who were killed next door.

An American F-16 aircraft had come out of a clear blue sky and dropped a Mk82 500-pound bomb on Orifa’s mud, stone and straw house. Orifa was away at the time. When she returned, she gathered the body parts.

Months later, a group of Americans came from Kabul and gave her an envelope with fifteen notes: a total of 15 dollars. “Two dollars for each of my family killed,” she said.

The invasion of Afghanistan was a fraud. In the wake of 9/11, the Taliban sought to distance themselves from Osama bin Laden. They were, in many respects, an American client with which the administration of Bill Clinton had done a series of secret deals to allow the building of a $3 billion natural gas pipeline by a US oil company consortium.

In high secrecy, Taliban leaders had been invited to the US and entertained by the CEO of the Unocal company in his Texas mansion and by the CIA at its headquarters in Virginia. One of the deal-makers was Dick Cheney, later George W. Bush’s Vice-President.

In 2010, I was in Washington and arranged to interview the mastermind of Afghanistan’s modern era of suffering, Zbigniew Brzezinski. I quoted to him his autobiography in which he admitted that his grand scheme for drawing the Soviets into Afghanistan had created “a few stirred up Muslims”.

“Do you have any regrets?” I asked.

“Regrets! Regrets! What regrets?”

When we watch the current scenes of panic at Kabul airport, and listen to journalists and generals in distant TV studios bewailing the withdrawal of “our protection”, isn’t it time to heed the truth of the past so that all this suffering never happens again?

*

Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

John Pilger’s 2003 film, Breaking the Silence, is available to view at http://johnpilger.com/videos/breaking-the-silence-truth-and-lies-in-the-war-on-terror.

Featured image: George W. Bush visits Hamid Karzai, who participated in the Mujahideen in the past and led the puppet government that replaced the Taliban.


waronterrorism.jpgby Michel Chossudovsky
ISBN Number: 9780973714715
List Price: $24.95
click here to order

Special Price: $18.00

In this new and expanded edition of Michel Chossudovsky’s 2002 best seller, the author blows away the smokescreen put up by the mainstream media, that 9/11 was an attack on America by “Islamic terrorists”.  Through meticulous research, the author uncovers a military-intelligence ploy behind the September 11 attacks, and the cover-up and complicity of key members of the Bush Administration.

The expanded edition, which includes twelve new chapters focuses on the use of 9/11 as a pretext for the invasion and illegal occupation of Iraq, the militarisation of justice and law enforcement and the repeal of democracy.

According to Chossudovsky, the  “war on terrorism” is a complete fabrication based on the illusion that one man, Osama bin Laden, outwitted the $40 billion-a-year American intelligence apparatus. The “war on terrorism” is a war of conquest. Globalisation is the final march to the “New World Order”, dominated by Wall Street and the U.S. military-industrial complex.

September 11, 2001 provides a justification for waging a war without borders. Washington’s agenda consists in extending the frontiers of the American Empire to facilitate complete U.S. corporate control, while installing within America the institutions of the Homeland Security State.

Coalizão para Inovações em Preparação para Epidemias (CEPI) está fazendo parceria com a Jurata Thin Film Inc. para desenvolver um filme de mRNA semelhante a um ‘wafer’ que pode ser armazenado em temperatura ambiente e colocado sob a língua para administração de vacina sem agulha.

A parceria começará com um investimento de US$ 1,2 milhão para ajudar a Jurata a desenvolver sua plataforma proprietária de vacinas, que, segundo a empresa, estabiliza tecnologias de vacinas de nanopartículas lipídicas contendo mRNA em uma película fina.

Jurata afirma que a película foi projetada para ser “termoestável”, produzida e armazenada em temperatura ambiente e permanecer estável por três anos, eliminando a necessidade de armazenamento refrigerado com uso intensivo de energia exigido pelas atuais vacinas de mRNA.

A película pode ser colocada dentro da bochecha ou sob a língua para administrar a vacina. Também pode ser reidratado com solução aquosa e administrado por via nasal ou por outros meios que não necessitem de passagem pelo trato digestivo.

Jurata e a CEPI consideram a tecnologia fundamental para levar vacinas às pessoas pobres em todo o mundo. “Se for bem sucedida”, disse a CEPI no seu comunicado de imprensa , a tecnologia “ajudará a expandir o acesso a vacinas de mRNA em regiões mal servidas e a avançar a resposta global a futuros surtos de doenças infecciosas emergentes”.

No entanto, os cientistas que falaram com o The Defender disseram que o “sucesso” parecia improvável tão cedo. Eles também disseram que a tecnologia pode causar problemas além dos sérios riscos conhecidos da tecnologia existente de transfecção de mRNA.

Brian Hooker, Ph.D., diretor sênior de ciência e pesquisa da Children’s Health Defense (CHD), disse:

“As vacinas requerem armazenamento refrigerado (principalmente refrigeração) e as vacinas de mRNA são especialmente suscetíveis a danos causados ​​pelo calor durante o transporte e armazenamento. Uma plataforma termoestável eliminaria completamente a necessidade de refrigeração e seria um enorme avanço na eliminação dos “requisitos da cadeia de frio” no fornecimento de vacinas ao mundo em desenvolvimento e também constituiria uma grande poupança de custos na implantação global.”

“Mas, fora os outros problemas óbvios com as vacinas de mRNA, eu ficaria preocupado que o mRNA não fosse tão termoestável como se supõe e isso induziria mutações na sequência e outros danos ao código genético”.

Jurata é uma pequena empresa de biotecnologia que desenvolve películas para administração de vacinas e outras terapêuticas. Seus fundadores também fundaram a Bamboo Therapeutics, uma empresa de biotecnologia de terapia genética adquirida em 2016 pela Pfizer em um negócio avaliado em US$ 827 milhões.

Vacinas termoestáveis ​​e sem agulha são uma “pista falsa” 

Jurata é o quinto parceiro anunciado como parte da chamada de propostas da CEPI de janeiro de 2022 para inovações na fabricação de vacinas termoestáveis. A empresa disse que mais anúncios estão no horizonte.

Recentemente, organizações como a Organização Mundial da Saúde (OMS), a Gavi, a Vaccine Alliance e a Fundação Bill & Melinda Gates, entre outras, elogiaram os benefícios potenciais das tecnologias de administração de vacinas sem agulha, incluindo adesivos de microarranjos, canetas e agora micropelículas (microfilmes) como “inovador”, “que muda o jogo” e “o futuro da vacinação”.

Eles afirmam que estas tecnologias têm o potencial de tornar as vacinas acessíveis a áreas remotas, particularmente no Sul Global, onde falta infraestrutura para o armazenamento refrigerado necessário para as vacinas, especialmente para vacinas de mRNA que requerem temperaturas ultrafrias de -20 graus Celsius para – 80 C.

Eles também afirmam que estas tecnologias podem “ajudar a promover a aceitação da vacina em áreas de hesitação vacinal” e reduzir a necessidade de fornecedores, permitindo que as pessoas autoadministrem vacinas.

Nos termos do acordo com a CEPI, Jurata comprometeu-se a garantir o fornecimento de vacinas para o Sul Global, produzindo um volume de vacinas “necessário para atender às necessidades de saúde pública”, estabelecendo preços acessíveis para os países do Sul Global e potencialmente transferindo a tecnologia para os fabricantes do Sul Global. 

As tecnologias termoestáveis ​​sem agulhas estão a ser amplamente promovidas, embora poucos ensaios clínicos sobre qualquer uma destas tecnologias tenham sido concluídos e nenhuma vacina deste tipo tenha ainda sido aprovada pelos reguladores.

Cientista da equipe do CHD J. Jay Couey, Ph.D., disse ao The Defender que acha que o hype em torno de tais tecnologias é uma “pista falsa” destinada a fazer o público pensar que quaisquer problemas com essas vacinas são questões técnicas de armazenamento ou método de entrega – em vez da ameaça muito mais séria representada pelas próprias tecnologias de transfecção de mRNA.

Apesar de todo o incentivo em torno de novos métodos de administração de vacinas , o primeiro ensaio clínico de adesivos de vacina em crianças para a vacina contra sarampo e rubéola testado na Gâmbia só foi partilhado em Maio pela Micron Biomedical durante a conferência Microneedles 2023 em Seattle.

O ensaio de Fase 1/2 apresentou resultados “promissores”, embora até à data os resultados do ensaio não tenham sido publicados numa publicação revista por pares.

Apesar da investigação limitada, a Fundação Gates concedeu em Novembro à Micron Biomedical 23,6 milhões de dólares para financiar a primeira produção em massa de tecnologia de vacina sem agulha. Os Centros de Controle e Prevenção de Doenças também fizeram parceria com a Micron.

A CEPI afirma que espera utilizar o seu financiamento para impulsionar o desenvolvimento de tais vacinas.

“Estamos realmente procurando ver uma mudança radical na forma como algumas dessas vacinas podem ser armazenadas e entregues”, disse Ingrid Kromann, diretora interina de Fabricação e Cadeia de Fornecimento de Vacinas da CEPI, em um comunicado à imprensa sobre a oportunidade de financiamento .

Dos US$ 17,5 milhões que a CEPI está dedicando ao desenvolvimento de vacinas termoestáveis, ela já concedeu US$ 2 milhões à Tiba Biotech para sua plataforma de entrega de nanopartículas de RNA e US$ 4,3 milhões à Vaxxas para ensaios pré-clínicos em um adesivo de microarray, US$ 3,6 milhões à Gennova Biopharmaceuticals para auto-amplificação da plataforma de mRNA e US$ 1,6 milhão para AvaxziPen — uma plataforma sem agulha para fornecer formulações de vacinas em doses sólidas por meio de um aplicador de caneta.

No caso do microfilme de Jurata, o financiamento do CEPI apoiará ensaios pré-clínicos.

Dado que a tecnologia de mRNA se tornou “uma das ‘estrelas brilhantes’ tecnológicas durante a pandemia de COVID-19”, disse Kromman, vacinas termoestáveis ​​com entrega fácil como a de Jurata serão fundamentais para “avançar no plano de preparação para pandemias da CEPI para acelerar a velocidade e a escala de nossa resposta a futuras epidemias e pandemias e aumentar o acesso a doses de vacinas.”

‘Mais uma iniciativa apoiada pelo controligarca’

A CEPI descreve-se como “uma parceria global inovadora entre organizações públicas, privadas, filantrópicas e da sociedade civil” lançada no Fórum Econômico Mundial (WEF) em Davos em 2017, “para encurtar o tempo de resposta às epidemias através da criação de vacinas que possam ser libertadas rapidamente assim que ocorrer um surto.”

Fundação Gates cofundou a CEPI com um investimento de US$ 460 milhões. O Wellcome Trust e o WEF também são financiadores. O CEO da CEPI, Dr. Richard J. Hatchett, foi anteriormente diretor interino da Autoridade de Pesquisa e Desenvolvimento Biomédico Avançado dos EUA.

Explicando porque fundou a CEPI, Bill Gates disse:

“Infelizmente, embora haja um risco substancial de epidemias, não existe um mercado natural para vacinas. É preciso que os governos criem a estrutura de incentivos adequada. Se você puder prever quais serão os patógenos e conseguir armazenar vacinas, então isso seria uma resposta muito boa.”

Os funcionários da Fundação Gates ocupam cargos com e sem direito a voto no conselho da CEPI, assim como os funcionários da OMS.

“A CEPI é mais uma iniciativa apoiada pelo ‘Controligarca’ que procura minar a soberania nacional e a autonomia individual sob o pretexto de filantropia e de salvar vidas”, Seamus Bruner , autor de “Controligarcas: expondo a classe bilionária, seus acordos secretos e o conspirar globalista para dominar sua vida”, disse ao The Defender.

“Eles fazem isso aproveitando crises – reais e fabricadas – para transferir a tomada de decisões dos representantes eleitos para os chamados especialistas e organizações supranacionais como a Organização Mundial da Saúde, que são financiadas e controladas por uma elite não eleita – e, portanto, irresponsável –”, Bruner disse.

O financiamento atual faz parte do plano de preparação para pandemias de 3,5 mil milhões de dólares da CEPI , lançado em Março de 2021 para desenvolver tecnologias que aumentem a velocidade e a escala do desenvolvimento de vacinas para pandemias emergentes, de modo a que os tempos de desenvolvimento de vacinas possam ser reduzidos para 100 dias.

Historicamente, as vacinas levaram de 10 a 15 anos para serem desenvolvidas . As vacinas mRNA COVID-19 foram desenvolvidas no âmbito da Operação Warp Speed ​​em menos de um ano.

O número de eventos adversos relatados no Sistema de Notificação de Eventos Adversos de Vacinas (VAERS) apenas com as vacinas contra a COVID-19 não tem precedentes na história da vacina, com 1.872.034 eventos relatados até 24 de novembro.

Investigadores da Correlation Research in the Public Interest estimam que as vacinas estão causalmente ligadas a aproximadamente 17 milhões de mortes em todo o mundo.

A missão da CEPI no âmbito do seu plano de preparação é financiar o desenvolvimento de “plataformas de resposta rápida para desenvolver vacinas contra a ‘Doença X‘” – o nome substituto da OMS para uma doença que é atualmente desconhecida ou não existe, mas que tem o potencial de ser devastadora para a humanidade.

O espectro da Doença X fez parte da justificativa para a Assembleia Mundial da Saúde aumentar o orçamento da OMS em 20% em Junho.

A CEPI argumenta que “quanto mais rápido uma vacina eficaz for desenvolvida e implementada, mais rapidamente uma potencial ameaça pandémica poderá ser contida e controlada se for utilizada”.

“O regime interminável de medicamentos e terapias genéticas em que o CEPI está a trabalhar – administrados através de injeções e outros mecanismos – pode acabar por ser voluntário. Mas se Controligarcas como o principal benfeitor individual da CEPI, Bill Gates, conseguirem o que querem, eles serão obrigatórios”, disse Bruner.

Brenda Baletti, Ph.D.

Ex-comandante da OTAN defende bombardeamento da Crimeia.

January 21st, 2024 by Lucas Leiroz de Almeida

Recentemente, o apoio ocidental à Ucrânia tem diminuído, deixando os responsáveis ​​do regime preocupados com o futuro das capacidades de combate de Kiev. No entanto, apesar desta tendência, ainda existem figuras públicas no Ocidente que apelam a uma nova escalada e ao envio de mais armas pesadas para a Ucrânia.

Numa declaração recente, o general americano reformado Philip Breedlove, antigo comandante da OTAN na Europa, afirmou que o Ocidente deveria enviar armas pesadas para Kiev para permitir ataques intensos à região da Crimeia. Segundo Breedlove, só atacando as posições russas no Mar Negro é que a Ucrânia conseguirá fazer com que Moscou “repense a sua postura”.

Breedlove classificou a Crimeia como o “centro de gravidade” e “o terreno decisivo da guerra”. Para ele, a chave para “derrotar” a Rússia é atingir a Crimeia tanto quanto possível. Ele acredita que quanto mais ataques na região, mais a Rússia será afetada e forçada a recuar em toda a zona de conflito. Assim, face ao iminente esgotamento das capacidades militares da Ucrânia, o general aconselha que a OTAN volte a enviar armas a um nível massivo, principalmente mísseis de longo alcance que permitam ataques profundos à Crimeia.

“Se permitirmos que a Ucrânia seja capaz de atacar a Crimeia – de forma generalizada, persistente e precisa – a Rússia será forçada a repensar a sua postura naquele país. Ataque-os a todos, ataque-os repetidamente e destrua-os”, disse ele.

A opinião de Breedlove há muito é compartilhada por outros oficiais. Neutralizar as posições russas na Crimeia tem sido uma ambição ucraniana desde 2022, tendo ocorrido vários ataques mal sucedidos na região. Um dos principais objetivos é destruir a ponte Kerch, considerada a chave logística da Crimeia. Não por acaso, Kiev lançou ataques terroristas na ponte, matando civis, mas não causando grandes danos à infra-estrutura.

Não só isso, mas o próprio General Breedlove já se tornou conhecido pela sua posição radical em relação à Crimeia. Em Outubro do ano passado, publicou um artigo num meio de comunicação ocidental afirmando que bombardear a Crimeia era necessário para alcançar a “vitória ucraniana”. Ele apelou abertamente à destruição da ponte Kerch, rotulando-a de “alvo legítimo”. Na altura, também criticou todos os argumentos dos analistas sobre a necessidade de tomar precauções com estes ataques para evitar uma escalada do conflito. Breedlove parece não se importar com a possibilidade de um aumento das hostilidades, afirmando que é necessário infligir danos à Crimeia, independentemente dos efeitos secundários.

“Várias pessoas com quem falei disseram que ‘derrubar’ [destruir] a ponte de Kerch seria um grande golpe para a Rússia. A ponte Kerch é um alvo legítimo (…) Sou engenheiro civil formado e conheço construção de pontes. Todas as pontes têm os seus pontos fracos e, se forem direcionadas para o local certo, podem tornar a ponte de Kerch inutilizável durante um período de tempo. Mas se quisessem derrubar a ponte, isso exigiria uma operação de bombardeamento mais dedicada (…) Ouço muitas pessoas a perguntarem se é correto a Ucrânia tomar medidas tão agressivas e se o Ocidente apoiaria isso, mas eu não consigo entender esse argumento”, disse na época.

Também é necessário esclarecer que o cálculo estratégico por trás deste tipo de opinião está absolutamente errado. Acredita-se que, ao aumentar a pressão sobre a Crimeia, os ucranianos obrigarão os russos a concentrar esforços na região, negligenciando as linhas de defesa no campo de batalha e facilitando o avanço territorial de Kiev. Com isso, seria supostamente possível que as tropas ucranianas chegassem ao Mar Negro avançando no terreno, revertendo o atual cenário militar.

No entanto, esta mentalidade parece ingênua. A reação russa a possíveis ataques recorrentes à Crimeia não seria através de qualquer mudança abrupta na situação nas linhas da frente, mas sim através de um aumento exponencial de bombardeamentos contra alvos estratégicos em toda a Ucrânia. A doutrina militar de Moscou estabelece a artilharia como o principal fator num cenário de combate. A cada tentativa ucraniana de intensificar os combates, os russos reagem com artilharia pesada, neutralizando instalações militares, infraestruturas críticas e centros de decisão inimigos.

Na prática, a Ucrânia está num impasse, pois sofre cada vez mais perdas cada vez que tenta reverter a situação. O país não consegue mudar o cenário, tendo como alternativa apenas as negociações de paz nos termos russos – o que a OTAN obviamente não permite que Kiev faça. Além disso, é improvável que a aliança atlantista retome o envio de armas de longo alcance em grandes quantidades num futuro próximo, uma vez que os EUA estão profundamente envolvidos no conflito do Médio Oriente, diminuindo o seu interesse na frente ucraniana.

: Lucas Leiroz de Almeida

 

Artigo em inglês :

Former NATO Commander Calls to Bomb Crimea, 19 de Janeiro de 2023

InfoBrics.

Imagem : InfoBrics

*

Lucas Leiroz, jornalista, pesquisador do Center for Geostrategic Studies, consultor geopolítico.

Você pode seguir Lucas Leiroz em: https://t.me/lucasleiroz e https://twitter.com/leiroz_lucas

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

There is a concept which is called ubiquitous. This word is used in  relation to the following concepts:

  • existing everywhere at the same time,
  • always everywhere,
  • prevalent,
  • sprouts without planting,
  • immanent.

Historically, the Telecommunications world was familiar with this concept because people were able to communicate regardless of distance by means of various telecommunications technologies.

Today the “ubiquitous” concept has become extensive with the advent of Artificial Intelligence.

Thereafter artificial intelligence exists everywhere, we run across it at any moment maybe without realizing. 

Artificial intelligence has become widespread in the last several years. But the idea underlying this technology is not new. English mathematician Alan Turing was the first person who put forward the artificial intelligence idea. Turing wrote an article titled “Computing Machinery and Intelligence” in the 1950 October issue of the Mind Magazine. In this article Turing opened a philosophical discussion on the “Can machines think?” question and rejected the oppositions to the argument of “machines thinking”.

In our country, worldwide known Turkish mathematician and scientist Cahit Arf was dealing with the same subject in his conference presentation titled “Can machine think and how can it think?” given within the scope of Public Conferences organized by Erzurum Atatürk University in the year 1959.

In his conference presentation, Cahit Arf was comparing the human brain with machines and saying that it is possible to design a machine which can develop itself. But he ended his conference presentation by emphasizing his concerns about the machine’s inability to make decisions taking into account the aesthetics qualifications.

“The notion which characterizes these qualifications is that all of them contains an uncertainty element and there is no certain rule that they strictly obey. There are natural events external to humans, with uncertain characteristics. These are events taking place inside atoms. As such, if the events taking place in a relatively small amount of atoms, can be made effective in the operation of machines, we can hope that the machines can resemble human brain in terms of aesthetics. … But I believe that it is impossible to do this, not even after many centuries.”

The concerns of Cahit Arf is still valid today, even though the technology is evolving at an exponential pace. 

Artificial Intelligence (AI) was officially born in 1956, the year of a highly notable summer conference held at Dartmouth College in New Hampshire, USA.

A group of mathematicians and computer scientists dreamed about a new research area during their meetings which lasted 8 weeks.

John McCarthy, then a young professor at Dartmouth, had coined the term “artificial intelligence” when he wrote his proposal for the workshop, which he said would explore the hypothesis that “every aspect of learning or any other feature of intelligence can in principle be so precisely described that a machine can be made to simulate it.”

“There have been three important events in the past.

The first is the formation of the universe.

The second is the formation of the beginning of life.

And the third, with the same degree of importance, is the emergence of artificial intelligence.”

Those are the words of Edward Fredkin, Computer Scientist at MIT who died at the age of 88 last year, in a BBC interview.

This evaluation made by Fredkin about the importance of artificial intelligence, is not an exaggerated, unsupported argument only valid in the computer scientists’ world. The artificial intelligence concept, after being first used in 1956, has been a subject on which many researchers from different disciplines have been working on intensively. The point arrived, destination and the prospects about the future is quite contentious because of the different opinions and discrete approaches to the subject.

Stephen Hawking, one of Britain’s pre-eminent scientists, who was well aware of the importance of research about the artificial intelligence and in fact was in need of a primitive form of artificial intelligence in his communication with the world, has been skeptical about the development of artificial intelligence, saying that the primitive forms of artificial intelligence developed so far have already proved very useful, but he fears the consequences of creating something that can match or surpass humans. He told the BBC:

“The development of full artificial intelligence could spell the end of the human race.”

According to Hawking, it would take off on its own, and re-design itself at an ever increasing rate, but humans, who are limited by slow biological evolution, couldn’t compete, and would be superseded.

The probability of developing very robust autonomous weapons or new ways of oppressive methods in authoritarian regimes by using artificial intelligence were the threats which Hawking emphasized. 

In the September 30, 2021 dated issue of the IEEE Spectrum Magazine, which is published by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers), the world’s largest technical professional organization dedicated to advancing technology for the benefit of humanity, there was an article titled

The Turbulent Past and Uncertain Future of Artificial Intelligence” putting forward the question “Is there a way out of AI’s boom and bust cycle?”

In this article, we see that the studies in the artificial intelligence area was developing like waves, sometimes stopping and drawing back, and sometimes doing sprints.

Artificial intelligence became a wide interdisciplinary science only after 1980’s and artificial intelligence applications in industry started increasing.

The artificial intelligence development which again entered into a pause period towards the end of 1980’s, have gained a momentum during the second half of 1990’s with Internet becoming widespread.  During the pandemics, artificial intelligence with its diverse applications, has been a rescue in many areas. Such that, while world economies are shrinking, there was no decline in the investment made in artificial intelligence area.  

With the internet, many programs based on artificial intelligence has proliferated all around the globe.

When the efficiency provided by artificial intelligence applications has been proven, use of artificial intelligence in industry has increased.

On the other hand, while the return of investment made on artificial intelligence areas increased and the stock market values went fly high, global capital investments started to flow into the field of AI. 

This flow of global capital in the billions of dollars level –coupled with the enthusiasm of companies and people working in this area which makes the technology jump–, indicated that a point of no return had been reached.

To give an example to the flow of capital to the artificial intelligence area, Open AI company, who started the ChatGPT service, which has been trained to provide a comprehensive answer following the instructions given with a prompt, towards the end of 2022, has reached to a value of nearly 100 billion dollars, before it completed its first ten years. 

Among the scientific disciplines underlining artificial intelligence are logic, statistics, cognitive psychology, decision theory, neurology, linguistics, cybernetics and computer engineering.

If we try to list the fields effected by artificial intelligence, from security to defense, from industry to trade, from agriculture to transportation, from health to education, from domestic affairs to foreign affairs, from entertainment to shopping, from work life to daily life, comprises every field of life that you can think of.

During the US Senate Foreign Relations Committee Hearing, titled “US Leadership on Artificial Intelligence in an Era of Strategic Competition” dated November 15, 2023, Nathaniel Fick, who was one of the witnesses, stated that responsible technological innovation is increasingly a foundational source of geopolitical power.

In this hearing the Senate discussed the steps to be taken for US leadership on artificial intelligence in an era of geopolitical competition and how to get the best of artificial intelligence in foreign relations. In fact the artificial intelligence is changing the world. In the coming years we can assume that every technology we use is somehow related to artificial intelligence. Well then, are we ready to this revolutionary change that affects our life style, the way we do business, the way we communicate with other people and the world which we live in?

We are talking about a system which learns from data, it is such a system that it stores huge amount of data in its memory and learns with a huge speed, develops non-stop, makes comments about the future, apart from the technologies humans invented so far, makes decisions by itself and it is the first technology which creates new ideas, learning from the old data, speculates about the future and do all this with a specific accuracy.

It is reported that artificial intelligence is somehow creating logic by solving the algorithms within the data.

It is capable of understanding emotions by means of multi-modality but it does not have emotional capability.

Think of a machine or a creature, very rational, which learns quickly and understands but has no feelings, wouldn’t it be very scary?

On the other hand, there is the possibility of making mistakes.

We invented this technology and we are developing it, but for now we don’t know how it gives us those answers.

During its process, we don’t know the criterion and algorithms it uses to come to a solution. Humans can only affect a part of artificial intelligence machine learning process, they don’t make up the algorithm, the machine decides by itself and this is a character that doesn’t exist in the technologies invented up to now. We are encountering a technology developing by itself the first time in history. 

Can we rely on the mechanisms of the market to manage the opportunities and challenges of artificial intelligence, of course it is not possible to give an affirmative answer to this question.

Alongside its potential opportunities, artificial intelligence bears risks and even lethal threats, therefore it is essential to organize this area by regulations and beyond that it needs state leadership in each country and above all international governance.

The ITU  (International Telecommunication Union) which was established in the year 1865 to formulate the regulations in the telecommunications sector and today has become the specialized organization of the United Nations in information and communication technologies, has started working on artificial intelligence regulations since 2017.

The Secretary General of United Nations António Guterres has announced the establishment of AI Advisory Board for supporting the artificial intelligence governance efforts of the international community, towards the end of last year.

The Board hold its first meeting on October 27, 2023 and published its first interim report in December, 2023. In the AI Advisory Board consisting of two co-chairs and 37 members, unfortunately there is no representative from our country. In Europe, national, regional or international, every institution have organized to work on artificial intelligence. European Union is well ahead in artificial intelligence regulations.

On the other hand, The House and Senate in USA have accelerated their artificial intelligence governance efforts. In order to keep its leadership position in the world, USA is in pursuit of leadership in artificial intelligence and recognizes China and Russia as its competitors in this field. Well, what is the situation of our country in artificial intelligence, this topic will be examined in the next article. 

While these regulation studies are going ahead, the artificial intelligence technology is developing exponentially.

The question of alignment of world and humanity to this exponential development of artificial intelligence is occupying minds.

In order to slow down the development of artificial intelligence, many organizations including the United Nations and hundreds of business world leaders have made calls for moratorium.

But it is clear that it is impossible to stop a technology which has become the center of gravity for finance capital and has become pervasive on the one hand and started to play a dominant role in the geopolitical struggle of world powers on the other hand.

Furthermore, if we consider the failure of the United States in preventing the disasters and genocide created by natural intelligence at the present time, UN’s urgent call for moratorium in 2021, related to artificial intelligence sales and use until sufficient security measures are taken, has no meaning. 

It is impossible to examine all the aspects of artificial intelligence in one article because the subject is so extensive. It is necessary to follow the developments in this field constantly, remaining up to date and be ready for the race and it is a very fast speed race. It is in the national interest of our country to follow carefully the development of this unprecedented technology, which is still in its infant period. Let’s end this article with the words of famous historian Yuval Harari about artificial intelligence.

“Artificial intelligence is still just a tiny baby, we haven’t seen anything yet. Artificial intelligence has been deployed in the real world since about 10 years. If you think about biological evolution, the evolution of life on earth took something like 4 billion years, 4 billion to reach to these plants and to reach us, the human beings. AI is in the stage of amoebas, it’s like 4 billion years ago and the first living organisms are scrolling out of the organic soup. And ChatGPT and all the others, they are the amoebas of the AI world. What would T-Rex look like? And how long will it take for the AI amoebas to evolve into the T-Rex. And it won’t take billions of years, maybe just take a few decades or few years. Because the evolution of it is at a completely different time scale than the evolution of organic beings. Because AI itself works on a different time scale, AI is always on, the computers in general are always on, humans and other organisms, they live, they develop by cycles, they need to rest some time, AI never needs to rest.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published on ATASAM.

Featured image is from ATASAM

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Dear Dr. Benita Bunjun,

I have grown to appreciate our educator-student, mentor-mentee and mother-daughter relations over the years. Our relations have blossomed beautifully in a world plagued by multiple, ongoing crises. You have left an indelible mark on post-graduate studies, living and working experiences while being in Canada and upon my return transition to Jamaica, my homeland for healing and recovery.

Like many racialized international students and post graduate workers, my original perceptions about Canada were shaped primarily by prominent discourses (“hear-say”) of Canada being a beacon of international humanitarian standards and an active promotor of equity, diversity and inclusion (EDI) in movements and social spaces.

However, our friendly meetings, our rigorous, scholarly dialogue, my lived experiences and observations have unsettled and de-mystified the grounds of this national fallacy. You have exposed me to the contributions of critical race, intersectional feminist thinkers such as Professor Sherene Razack, Sara Ahmed, Robyn Maynard and Professor Sunera Thobani.

As an African-Caribbean woman, I have always felt as a “body out of place” in academia and other institutions within Canada which is a white settler colonial society. I never knew why until you personally challenged to expand my social analysis beyond the statement: “racialized, international students/post graduate workers are exploited or discriminated against” and instead, we (I) should shift the focus of my analysis to the mechanics or techniques of power associated with “white supremacist”, patriarchal politics in the configuration of institutions including the Canadian state. After all, it is Deborah Brock et. al (2019:5) who have also validated the importance of unpacking the centre by emphasizing,

“to exclusively focus on the marginalized without interrogating the centre is to risk reproducing a pattern that defines the margins as the location of the problem”.

Brock’s et. al (2019) assertion therefore means that instead of examining silencing, erasure, social marginalization, precariousness, invisibility/hyper-visibility and the absent-present phenomenon among vulnerable groups in isolation, we should examine how power relations is organized around systems of domination that perpetuate these problems. It is not sufficient to look at the symptoms of the problems in isolation from the “centre” which shapes the systemic, institutional, epistemological- political, discursive, socio-economic, cultural and psycho-affective structures embedded in dialectical relations of domination and subjugation.

We see whiteness and “coloniality of power” imbricated in the organisation of the global political economy where capitalism is the most predominant system of economic relations, which is inextricably connected to racism, the derogation of women’s rights  and the exploitation of labour to generate profits.

A 2024 Oxfam International report has illustrated that world’s five richest men (all white) have more than doubled their fortunes to $869 billion while the world’s poorest 60%- almost five billion people have lost money and billionaires’ wealth have grown three times (3x) faster than global inflation.

Screenshot of the Oxfam article

On the other hand, across 52 countries, the average real wages of nearly 800 million workers have fallen. Oxfam notes that it will take 230 years to end poverty! (Neate, 2024; Riddel et. al, 2024). Oxfam International’s recent report does not only reinforce the alternative, popular notions that trickle-down economics does not work but it also underscores the androcentric dimensions of whiteness that is intricately involved in life-taking or life-sucking activities rooted in visceral, colonial and neo-liberal, capitalist violence. The life taking capacities of this dominant version of development have caused alternatives to development thinkers and eco-feminist, Vandana Shiva (2010; 2016) and Eduardo Gudynas (2011) to label development as mal- development and dominant economic practices and policies in favour of the world’s elite as “zombie capitalism” because there have been numerous attempts to repair and revive exploitative, extractive and unsustainable modes of development.

The life-taking/blood-sucking capacities of power systems are not only limited to macro-economics of development but also the micro coordination of public spaces in our everyday interactions that are frequently taken for granted as “normal”. As you have pointed in your powerful edited collection, ‘Academic Well Being of Racialized Students’, Canadian classrooms and universities continue to be troubling sites of racial exclusion, white entitlement and a glaring absence and underrepresentation of critical race scholarship and scholars (Bunjun, 2021, p.3).

Your original, scholarly contribution is an extension of Professor Sherene Razack’s (2002) three-dimensional framework on spatial theory and Sara Ahmed’s (2000; 2012) conceptual framework on spatial determinism. Professor Sherene Razack (2002:8) defines spaces as material, symbolic and representational. Material space refers to spaces that are constituted as a result of unequal economic relations produced by capitalism while symbolic spaces refer to lived experiences and differences in social meanings associated with spaces and representations of spaces refers to names, images and symbols associated with spaces (Razack, 2002, p.8).

From a materialist perspective, Canadian universities and classrooms are products of unequal economic relations in which neo-liberal capitalist economy prioritizes commodification of knowledge for profit generation and the utilization of diversity and inclusion as not only a containment zone for insurgency but also a way of maintaining marketability and academic imperialism.

From a symbolic perspective, many racialized, international students and post graduate workers express feelings and lived experiences of painful alienation and trauma in Canadian classrooms and universities both due to passive and active forms of violence. Additionally, Canadian classrooms and universities persist in the deliberate marginalization and omission of brutal histories predicated on the Atlantic Slave Trade, chattel slavery of Peoples of African descent, a system of indentureship and servitude among South Asian peoples, mass displacement, theft, genocide and land dispossession of indigenous peoples. The brutality of these histories that prevail in the contemporary construction of Canadian universities and classroom spaces are evident in the names of former slave traders and masters such as James McGill, McGill University and Lord Dalhousie, Dalhousie University.

The 2019 Dalhousie report which was written by Professor Afua Cooper and other well renowned academics have illustrated that Canadian classrooms are marked with racist and sexist graffiti on walls long before students enter these spaces. The Dalhousie report goes beyond the material aspects of coloniality which assess the economic imperative of white supremacist politics by looking at other important dimensions such as the ideological and semiotic modes of whiteness and coloniality. Consequently, this is where Sara Ahmed’s conceptual framework on spatial determinism becomes increasingly relevant to this discussion. Ahmed (2000; 2012) argues that spatial determinism refers to the fact spaces are not empty or unoccupied but are shaped by social relations and histories and these histories and social relations determine our interactions, encounters and lived experiences within these spaces prior to our entry in them. Ahmed (2012) also explains that one of the reasons racialized identities continue to be socially constructed as and treated as “bodies out of place” is because of conditional hospitality of the “multi-cultural”, settler-colonial nation who welcomes international students or migrants, generally on the condition that they give something back to the nation- loyalty to or proximity to the ideology of state formation and national identity.

Conditional hospitality also extends to border imperialist, immigration policies that operate under the shroud of humanitarianism and good will when in fact these immigration policies set the precedence for the precarious labour-citizenship nexus of racialized, international students and post-graduate workers whereby the fate of the future rests solely on their temporary legal status which makes them susceptible to dehumanising treatment by institutions.

We see a deeply troubling concern with respect to border imperialism and conditional hospitality in other parts of the world such as the United Kingdom under the Rishi Sunak’s conservative government administration. Last year, Rishi Sunak had proposed an illegal migration bill to ban refugees and is best known by the slogan “stop the boats” and this year, the Sunak-led government in the UK has passed a policy that will prevent international students from migrating with their families to the UK. The anti-black/Asian/indigenous/racialized racisms and long held xenophobic sentiments are not only compatible with conservative/right wing political ideologies but they also illustrate that borders are not only geographic or physical walls that are constructed to exclude, police, surveil and punish those who are considered as “Others” but borders are also existential, social walls to demarcate differences.

On the contrary, the centre right Prime Minister Andrew Holness-led government in Jamaica deported many of our Haitian brothers and sisters last year on the grounds of illegal entry and while there have been several outcries from reparations activists, social advocates, movements, unorthodox academic thinkers about the mass deportation of Haitians, the government of Jamaica remains unphased and unconcerned.

The life-taking/blood-sucking capacities of whiteness, coloniality, mal-development and zombie capitalism operates in different ways, transnationally from Canada to Jamaica.

In Jamaica, a former colony of Britain where neo-colonial and neo-liberal capitalist relations persists, the mechanics of “whiteness:” is manifested through what Barbara Heron (2007:44) coins as “planetary consciousness”.

Planetary consciousness is defined as the global obligation that white men and women feel in relation to saving or civilizing those who they regard as the Other from countries of the Global South and it also refers to the assumption that they are experts on every global issue (Heron, 2007).

In the Jamaican context, we see whiteness and coloniality manifested in the faces of power of international development or non-profit organizations, the preference of Northern expertise on development challenges that plague the Global South, the deployment of language that positions people from the Global South as deficits and the use of foreign aid or official development assistance (ODA) to permeate ongoing imperial encounters.

This is evident in a 2022 (Economic and Social Survey of Jamaica) report which explains that official development assistance (ODA) far exceeds loan repayments and budgetary allocations towards public, social services such as health and education.

We see whiteness and coloniality embedded in the national and transnational movement and advocacy for reparative justice for Peoples of African descent where representatives of global empires issue half-baked, empty statements of apologies atoning for their active participation in the enslavement of African peoples but no serious acknowledgement to the social, economic and political development issues outlined in CARICOM’s 10-point plan for reparations and no momentum towards attention towards evidence-based, international human rights law intersecting with other disciplines making a plausible case for reparations.

Several Caribbean countries including Jamaica and Belize have expressed an active interest in decolonising their constitutions and transition from a parliamentary democracy to a republic.

While these efforts and proposals aimed at national self-determination are commendable, the racialization and colonial infrastructure of social institutions remain highly visible to social activists in Jamaica.

We (I) notice the lack of transparency and accountability of the newly formed, Constitutional Reform Committee (CRC) whose primary role is to inform and engage with the public on its three-year strategic plan to reform Jamaica’s constitution and help in the transition to a republic.

We (I) also notice the declining public trust in democracy and political leadership despite celebrating 61 years of independence or dependence, I should say.

Declining public trust in democracy and political leadership can be attributed to social and economic development woes ranging from a high cost of living crises, low consecutive records of growth, social marginalization from public service delivery, exorbitant crime and violence rates and high actual and perceived corruption. In fact, the 2023 World Justice Project report conducted in 14 Caribbean countries illustrate that 81% of citizens regionally believe that recruitment in the public sector is based on friends and family ties rather than merit and nationally in Jamaica, this percentage of corruption perception in the public sector stands at 78%. Moreover, 66% of Jamaicans believe that politicians are the most corrupt social group in society.

Mal-development and zombie capitalism continue to be pertinent features of Jamaican development strategies where there is the revival of failed policies that have not and never been favourable for the majority of our population who are disenfranchised and disenchanted with governance. Our government administration boasts about economic growth and record low employment under the shroud of prosperity but fails to tell the nation why our Human Development Index points out that we have large disparities in life expectancy, income and access to social and economic opportunities. Our government administration boasts that it is working for our people when in fact, it has increased the salaries of the political directorate by over 200% while inflation outpaces salary increases of the island’s disgruntled public sector workers who have gone on several strikes and protests for a living wage, not a minimum wage.

Our government administration boasts at COP 28 Climate Summit that Jamaica is not a mere by-stander in the fight against climate change when in reality, its economic development strategy is based on privatisation and deregulation of industries that contribute to pollution and environmental degradation.

Our government administration boasts about its strong foreign policy coordination and decision-making when in fact, a country like Jamaica that was once vocal on anti-apartheid struggles in South Africa and championing the cause of autonomous paths to development for countries of the Global South have now abstained or voted neutral on the escalation of the Israel-Palestinian conflict. Like Canada, Jamaica is also silent and silence is a metaphor of complicity or support for war crimes and humanitarian catastrophe. My mentor, friend and mother, continue to walk well on this journey. I salute you as I end my lengthy agitation on the varied injustices that fracture our world today as I speak from my unique social and geo political locations.

With love and power,
Tina Renier

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Tina Renier is an independent researcher based in Jamaica. She is a regular contributor to Global Research. Her areas of research interests are international development, with special emphasis on labour and development, education and development and women, gender and development.

Sources

Ahmed, S. (2000). Strange Encounters: Embodied Others in Post-Coloniality. London and NY: Routledge.

Ahmed, S. (2012). On Being Included: Racism and Diversity in Institutional Life. USA: Duke University Press.

Brock, D. et. al. (2019). Power and Everyday Practices. Toronto: Toronto University Press. p. 5.

Bunjun, B. (2021). Academic Well-Being of Racialized Students. Halifax and Winnipeg: Fernwood Publishing. p.3.

Gudynas, E. (2011). Burn Vivir, Today’s Tomorrow. Development, 54(4), pp. 441-447.

Heron, B. (2007). Desire for Development: Whiteness, Gender and the Helping Imperative. Waterloo, Ontario: Wilfred Laurier University Press.p.44.

Neate, R. (15 January 2024). World’s five richest men double their money as the poorest get poorer. The Guardian. Retrieved.

Razack, S. (2002). Race, Space and the Law: Unmapping a White Settler Society. Toronto, Ontario: National Library of Canada.

Riddel, R. (15 January 2024). Inequality Inc: How Corporate Power divides our world and the need for a New Era of Public Action. Oxford, UK: Oxfam International.

Shiva, V. (2010; 2016). Staying Alive: Women, Ecology and Development. California: North Atlantic Books.

Featured image is from PIxabay

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

In 2011, the Great British Class Survey was conducted, in collaboration with academics from the University of Manchester, the London School of Economics, and the University of York. The British have always been obsessed with class, so it is not surprising that British academics would attempt something of this nature.

The survey polled 161,400 people, and in a fit of obviousness, they concluded,

“We demonstrate the existence of an ‘elite’, whose wealth separates them from an established middle class.”

They also concluded that class distinctions had broadened into a multitude of seven classes. This is an expansion of the Marxist model of class division of capitalists and workers that has dominated academic circles for at least a hundred years.

According to Karl Marx:

  1. Capitalist bourgeoisie — If you control the means of production this is you.
  2. Worker — Oppressed and exploited proletariat with no control of the means of production. Sells his or her labor for profit.

The survey included “unusually detailed questions based on social, cultural and economic capital.”

For the economic capital section, the survey asks how much money you make and how much money you have in the bank, plus the value of your house.

Secondly, to determine your cultural capital, it asks what kind of cultural activities you participate in. This is based on high brow culture—preference for interests such as classical music, historic architecture, museums, art galleries, jazz, theatre and French restaurants. And the other, for emergent culture—appreciation and participation in such activities as video games, social networking, sports, hanging out with friends, working out at the gym, and rap or rock concerts.

Thirdly, social capital was measured using the position generator originated by Nan Lin, an American sociologist, in 2001, which measures the range of social connections. People were asked if they knew anyone in several dozen occupations.

Seven Classes

The study found there are seven distinct classes:

  1. a wealthy elite
  2. a prosperous salaried middle class consisting of professionals and managers
  3. a class of technical experts
  4. a class of new affluent workers
  5. an aging traditional working class
  6. a precariat characterized by very low levels of capital and ongoing precarious economic insecurity
  7. a group of emergent service workers

This is an incomplete list in my humble opinion, because it fails to mention the homeless who are a separate class of non-persons, comparable to the Dalit caste in India. Homeless people have virtually no rights and squeeze out a fragile existence as urban nomads.

The most interesting group #7, the precariat, are the working poor who often fall into homelessness, when things go sideways in the economy or in their personal lives. The word precariat is a neologism of the words precarious and proletariat, coined by economist, Guy Standing, in his book, The Precariat: The New Dangerous Class.

The survey claims that the Elite class has a “mean household income of £89k (152K CDN), almost double that of the next highest class, and the average house price is £325k (556k CDN), considerably higher than any other class.” However, this elite class is only the upper middle class. The real elites make far more money than a meagre £89k per year. Many of them make that much in a day.

Other sociologists have gone further to sub-divide the wealthy into several categories:

Millionaires or High-Net-Worth Individual (HNWI) – those with $1 million or greater in investible assets. There are approximately 15 million HNWIs in the world according to the World’s Wealthiest Cities Report 2023 by Henley & Partners.

Multimillionaires or Ultra-High-Net-Worth-Individuals (UHNWI) – those with $30 million or greater net worth. There are 211,275 UHNW individuals in the world, with a total combined net worth of US$29.7 trillion.

Billionaires – According to Forbes, there are 2,640 billionaires in the world who are collectively worth about $12 trillion. The number of billionaires has been doubling every 10 years. In 2013, there were 1426 billionaires, worth $5.5 trillion. In 2003, there were 476 billionaires worth just $1.4 trillion.

Trillionaires – This class does not even exist in the media or academic circles. Above the billionaire class are the invisible trillionaires, who are never mentioned by Forbes, or any other list of the wealthy. Nobody really knows how much they are worth. Generally speaking, it is assumed by the alternative community, that people like the Rothschilds and the Rockefellers are at the top of this list, and the best guess is that there are about 300 trillionaire families at the top of the heap. These families are mostly American, British and European aristocracy, with a handful of Russian oligarchs and Hong Kong Chinese thrown in for good measure. They include the DuPont, Astor, Cabot, Oppenheimer, Schiff, Warburg, Russell, Onassis, Morgan, Kennedy, Bush, Clinton, Vanderbilt, and virtually, the entire European monarchy.

“The Vacuum Cleaner Class”

This elite class of families are “a vacuum that cleaner class” who have crawled over the whole planet, vacuuming up enormous wealth in the last couple of decades. The economic crisis of 2008 and the pandemic of 2019 created opportunities for the uber wealthy to buy up more property, banks, real estate and stocks.

Another study conducted in 2011 by the University of Zürich applied mathematical models to the top 43,060 transnational corporations. The study concluded that a “super-entity” of 147 corporations control 40% of the world’s wealth. These corporations exhibit very high levels of interconnectedness—directors sit on multiple boards and each of these corporations have heavily invested $403 billion in each other. Out of these 147, the top 17 have $41.1 trillion in assets and operate in virtually every nation on Earth.

The majority of these corporations are American, and most are financial institutions.

 

The Transnational Capitalist Class

Referring to the upcoming WEF in 2024, Tracy Francis, a senior partner at management consulting firm, McKinsey & Co, claims the value of the Davos meeting is in

“the human interaction of a multitude of different types of entities—start-ups, nonprofits, governmental organizations, business. There’s a lot of talk about a new world order, but I do think that just being together in person and exchanging ideas increases connectivity.”

Davos is the yearly conclave for the Transnational Capitalist Class (TCC), a term coined by Leslie Sklair, in his book of the same title. The strength of the TCC lies not only in their phenomenal wealth, but in their ability to interconnect and create think tanks and policy-making networks. The Transnational Institute describes the main purpose of the World Economic Forum is

“to function as a socializing institution for the emerging global elite, globalization’s “Mafiocracy” of bankers, industrialists, oligarchs, technocrats and politicians. They promote common ideas, and serve common interests: their own.”

The WEF has forged an agreement with the United Nations to “accelerate the implementation of the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development” by deepening institutional coordination and collaboration between the UN and the WEF.

Much more disturbing is that the agreement grants transnational corporations preferential and deferential access to the UN System at the expense of States and public interest actors.

This “preferential access,” gives corporations special oversight privileges, making them, in conjunction with the WEF, a higher executive authority. “This agreement between the UN and WEF formalizes a disturbing corporate capture of the UN. It moves the world dangerously towards a privatized and undemocratic global governance,” said Gonzalo Berrón of the Transnational Institute.

Stakeholder Capitalism

Contrary to the epic rants of many in the alternative community, who swear on their grandmothers’ graves, that we are experiencing a global communist takeover—what is actually happening is the creation of a transnational capitalist techno-state.

Klaus Schwab, the author and finisher of Stakeholder Capitalism (not Stakeholder Communism) has been advocating his peculiar brand of capitalism for five decades. Communism is when the workers control the means of production. Capitalism is when the capitalists control the means of production.

Schwab and the World Economic Forum portray Stakeholder Capitalism in warm and fuzzy tones:

“The stakeholder model Schwab suggests, is one where government, business, and individuals collaborate.”

“Various stakeholders of an economy don’t only look after their own interests, but that of society as whole, leading to a system of stakeholder capitalism”.

Stakeholder Capitalism is essentially the attempt to bring all the stakeholders to the bargaining table. The World Economic Forum is the bargaining table. The stakeholders are any individual, corporation, nation, city, NGO or entity with wealth, power and global influence. Some of the main institutions that sit at the table are the UN, World Bank, BIS, IMF, G20, WHO and NATO.

This week, January 15-19, the WEF syndicated crime extravaganza will go down in Davos, Switzerland. Approximately 3000 stakeholders will fly in private jets to attend the annual conclave. According to the WEF website, members will include:

  • 60 heads of state (national crime bosses)
  • all major international organizations (private control grid)
  • the Forum’s 1000 partners-in-crime
  • as well as civil society leaders (gangsters-in-training)
  • foremost experts (paid liars)
  • young changemakers (useful idiots)
  • social entrepreneurs (propaganda artists)
  • and the (always compliant) media

This transnational oligopoly of crime bosses will sit with Godfather Klaus Schwab.

They will schmooze, plot and scheme, and finally, come to agreements on a multitude of global policy issues that will impact the future of our planet.

None of these policy decisions will have any consultation with the public. In fact, most of these decisions will be made in back-door meetings. The public will not even be informed of the existence of these policies, until after these agreements are signed and ratified by orgs like the United Nations, WHO, and the G20.

The Transnational Capitalist Class Question

The most pressing question of our time is how do we reign in the Transnational Capitalist Class, who answer to no one, are unelected, and have so much wealth and power that they are virtually omnipotent globally? Combined with this is the difficulty of access to them and their institutions, which have increasingly become deaf to the world around them. They are insulated by their wealth—they fly around in private jets, live in gated communities and sail in private yachts. They live above the law, accountable to no one except themselves.

The foremost goal of many conservatives is to preserve the nation-state system at all costs. Most conservatives view national sovereignty as a sacred cow, along with the free market. Many believe we need a Libertarian utopia where no one pays taxes, the market is unregulated, government is local, decentralized, and ideally as minimal as possible.

This is most likely never going to happen. The world is interconnected with trade, transportation, media and communication at an unprecedented level, never before witnessed in world history. It cannot be unconnected. The reason the TCC has been able to achieve their goals is because of this global interconnectedness.

Evolution Versus Revolution

A quick review of about twelve thousand years of human history reveals a gradual evolution from tribal clans to farming villages to market towns to city-states to feudal kingdoms to parliamentary monarchy to the nation-state system that began in 1648 with the signing of the Westphalian Treaties.

There are many forces outside of the control of the TCC, such as gravity, mortality and evolution. The transition to a global system of government is the next stage in the political evolution of our planet.

Evolution is not just biological—it occurs on all levels. Human beings have experienced the evolution of our political, economic, cultural and social systems over thousands of years. The unprecedented explosion of science and technology that occurred through the Scientific Revolution was also outside the control of the TCC, despite their obvious success at exploiting and profiting from this revolution.

The nation-state system is deteriorating, and being replaced by a multipolar system, not because the TCC are the causal agents of this transition, albeit they are actively embracing this change in order to further their goals and agendas. Those who are clinging for dear life to the lifeboat of national sovereignty are destined to be cast adrift on the oceans of change.

It does not matter what system of government is put in place, whether it is a municipal, provincial, federal or even a global government. What matters is if the freedom and rights of the citizens are protected and enforced. Without freedom of speech, assembly, press, worship and transit, We the People have nothing. Even democracy can be totalitarian if the elections are only a choice between various tyrants.

What is needed is some serious judo, using the full weight of the TCC against them, or more accurately with them. An interconnected network of citizens needs to be created on an unprecedented level—a movement of unparalleled solidarity, unity and commitment. This means breaking down the traditional ideological barriers between the left and right, conservative and liberal, Republican and Democrat. It also means speaking with One Voice, and directly challenging the Transnational Capitalist Class.

A New Social Contract

A new Social Contract needs to be signed and ratified, between We the People and the TCC. So far, there is no social contract with the TCC, and they have no desire to have one. They want a stakeholders’ contract only, that ensures their rights, but none for the rest of the planet. Their ultimate goal is to eradicate all rights and freedoms on Earth.

It is virtually impossible to unseat them from their Halls of Power. A violent revolution on a global scale against the armies of NATO, along with the vast security apparatus of the TCC would be a formidable challenge, and unlikely to be met with any success, unless the revolutionaries directly confront the members of the aristocratic global family with appropriate force.

Force is not violence.

The employment of unified, constant and unrelenting social force upon the architects of the new world order is an achievable goal. The battle needs to be taken to their private residences and their private offices. The TCC must be forced through social pressure to hand over the keys of the kingdom to the people.

Almost all previous social movements were national in character, such as the black civil rights movement in the United States. The women’s suffrage movement had more of an international flavour, but the right to vote was a national challenge, that each nation undertook in order to enshrine women’s rights in national charters. We have a global challenge to force the TCC to obey the rights of citizens across the entire global spectrum.

Clauses and agreements need to be inserted in all the policies of the WEF, UN, WHO, G20 and the rest of the TCC network. The rights and freedoms of all citizens of the Earth need to be protected, not only by the rule of law, but also enforced by the people. Any government, whether it is local or a world government, must guarantee the safety and security of its people. If the TCC wants legitimacy as a global government, it must guarantee peace and prosperity. There can be no peace and prosperity without the guarantee of civil rights.

Organizations like the WEF need to be pressured to allow representatives from across the spectrum of classes, who are not currently represented. The WEF needs to be forced to become a more democratic institution, where attendees from the other various classes are permitted.

Sound far-fetched? Maybe it is, but so far, the efforts to oppose the WEF have not been successful. Ordinary citizens are not allowed entrance to the meetings. The fee for attendance is over $70,000, which makes attendance exclusive only to the Transnational Capitalist Class.

How are we going to negotiate with them, if we are not even allowed in the door? We need to get our foot in the door, even if it means kicking the door down. Schwab and his mafia bosses must not be permitted to continue with their plans for enslaving the entire planet. Unless we crash the Davos party, it will be caviar, steak and lobster on the menu for them, and insects for us.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Rick Thomas is a musician, activist and the author of How to Defeat the New World Order. For social activism: VictoryCanada.today and for all articles: Substack. He is a regular contributor to Global Research.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

A reader of my latest Substack article, G20, BRICS, WEF and the “building of a just world and a sustainable planet”, notified me of an open letter, from September 2019, where over 400 civil society organisations and 40 international networks condemned the 2019 groundbreaking partnership between World Economic Forum and United Nations (which I became aware of in 2020 and have been trying to alert the world to in my books, articles, interviews, and lectures).

The letter described this as a global corporate takeover. In the words of one of the key organisers Gonzalo Berrón from the Transnational Institute:

This agreement between the UN and WEF formalises a disturbing corporate capture of the UN. It moves the world dangerously towards a privatised and undemocratic global governance.

Only six months later this partnership would rear its ugly head. Transnational Institute wrote in their strategic plan for 2021-25 that:

The Covid-19 global pandemic has been used as a pretext for the implementation and normalisation of digital identification systems and tracker applications and to further entrench the notion that we pose a threat to each other.

It was very sound criticism that can only be applauded. But TI hasn’t understood the whole picture. The Institute’s mission is to “strengthen international social movements with rigorous research, reliable information, sound analysis and constructive proposals that advance progressive, democratic policy change and common solutions to global problems.”[1]

This means, among other things, that they are totally committed to the catastrophic climate change narrative.

Decades of greenhouse gas emissions and destructive environmental practices have driven ecosystems to a breaking point, and threaten to trigger catastrophic global heating. The pace of this is alarming, making climate the top threat for young people everywhere.[2]

I would also add that “common solutions to global problems” is often problematic since we live in a very diverse world. It is not easy to apply the same one-size-fits-all solutions on all nations.

As I uncovered in book Rockefeller: Controlling the game; Climate Change is a problem that has been defined and promoted since the fifties by the same forces that gave us the digital identification systems, as well as WEF. These players are also firm believers in global solutions to global problems, and they know how to rig the game.

As exemplified by Rockefeller Brothers Funds Sustainable Development Review 2005-2010:

The RBF has supported “allied voices for climate action” that include businesses, investors, evangelicals, farmers, sportsmen, labor, military leaders, national security hawks, veterans, youth, and governors and mayors. Each of these constituencies has an important role to play.[3]

And how independent is the Transnational Institute? In their Annual Report for 2020 it is stated that they receive 50% of their income from the Dutch Government, 19% from other governments, and 14% from the European Union. They also receive funding from philanthropic foundations like Asia Foundation, European Cultural Foundation, the George Soros founded Foundation for the Promotion of Open Societies and drumroll, The Rockefeller Foundation and Rockefeller Brothers Fund.

Grants from RBF to Transnational Institute

This gives the impression of a controlled opposition that speaks up against the rise of a global corporatocracy but doesn’t really challenge their power. You can’t win if you believe the fairy tales your enemy has created, while receiving money out of their pockets.

WEF will, in the meantime, do everything to further a transition of the UN-system that suits their purpose. As WEFs President Börge Brende said to UN Secretary General António Guterres in Davos this week:

We are also very much looking forward to your Summit of the Future in September and you can count on us, also for our full support.

They don’t care about open letters that questions their authority.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Notes

[1] www.tni.org/en/mission

[2] www.tni.org/files/2024-01/TNI%20strategic%20plan-2021-2025.pdf

[3]  www.rbf.org/sites/default/files/sustainabledevelopmentprogramreview.pdf

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

With the Israel Defense Forces continuing to block supplies from reaching shelters, refugee camps, and hospitals in Gaza, humanitarian workers are warning that there is “no end in sight” for the horrors facing an estimated 55,000 pregnant women as well as postpartum parents and newborns.

Tess Ingram, a communications specialist for the United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF), told reporters Friday that nearly 20,000 babies have been born in the three months since Israel began its bombardment of Gaza—an assault that has ostensibly been in response to Hamas’ October 7 attack on southern Israel but has disproportionately targeted civilians in the enclave, with women and children making up 70% of the 24,762 people killed so far.

“Becoming a mother should be a time for celebration,” Ingram said. “In Gaza, it’s another child delivered into hell… Seeing newborn babies suffer, while some mothers bleed to death, should keep us all awake at night.”

Only nine of Gaza’s 35 hospitals are operational, and Agence France Presse reported that Emirati Hospital in Rafah is now providing care for “the vast majority of pregnant women in Gaza” as more than one million people have been displaced to the southern city since the war began.

Doctors and nurses at the hospital, who normally treat 30-40 pregnant patients daily, are caring for as many as 400 pregnant people, postpartum mothers, and newborns every day, the humanitarian group CARE told HuffPost. Emirati’s only operating room, where two to three C-sections are normally performed each day, is now being used for nearly 20 C-sections per day.

Overcrowding has forced hospital staff to discharge new mothers within three hours of having a Caesarean section—many of which are being performed without anesthesia or properly sanitized medical equipment, leading to a heightened risk of infection.

“‘Will I survive childbirth? Will my child survive? What will happen to my other children?’ These are very real dangers pregnant women and young mothers in Gaza have faced for the past 100 days, with no end in sight,” Hiba Tibi, acting deputy regional director for the Middle East and North Africa for CARE, said last week.

After childbirth, mothers and their vulnerable newborns are returning to “inhumane” conditions in makeshift shelters or overcrowded camps, where a lack of food and safe drinking water is placing “approximately 135,000 children under two at risk of severe malnutrition,” Ingram told reporters.

A woman named Fedaa Issa told the Middle East Eye this week about her experience returning to a makeshift tent in Khan Younis immediately after giving birth to her daughter on December 2.

“In the camp, she lacked the sanitation facilities to help her through the first few days and weeks of Aya’s life, and there was no proper sense of privacy,” MEE reported. “Issa said that she and other women had no access to sanitary towels and instead risked infection by rewashing pieces of cloth in dirty water.”

Without proper nutrients in her diet, Issa was unable to breastfeed and had to rely on formula to feed her newborn—which her family is struggling to afford.

“Humanity cannot allow this warped version of normal to persist any longer,” said Ingram. “Mothers and newborns need a humanitarian cease-fire.”

Ingram relayed to reporters the story of a woman she met in Gaza, Mashael, who was pregnant when her home was hit by an airstrike last month.

With her husband trapped under rubble for several days, Mashael realized after the bombing that her baby had stopped moving.

“She says she is sure now, about a month later, that the baby is dead,” Ingram said, but Mashael has not been able to see a doctor to confirm the miscarriage or get treatment. “The situation of pregnant women and newborns in the Gaza Strip is beyond belief, and it demands intensified and immediate actions.”

According to CARE, healthcare workers have seen a 300% increase in miscarriages since Israel’s assault began.

Humanitarian groups say conditions have worsened in the last month, despite the passage of a U.N. Security Council resolution demanding increased aid for Gaza.

“Whatever marginal improvement there has been,” Refugees International president Jeremy Konyndyk told HuffPost, “it’s nowhere near the scale that’s required at this point. Where there are improvements, they’re modest and fragile—they could be undone by Israeli military actions or Israeli political decisions.”

The Biden administration, which is helping to fund and arm the IDF and has vehemently defended its assault on Gaza as “self-defense,” has said it is “pressing” Israel to allow humanitarian aid into Gaza, where an average of just 100 aid trucks have been allowed in per day since October. About 500 trucks carried goods and supplies into the enclave daily before the current Israeli assault.

Despite the United States’ insistence that it is pushing Israeli officials, a State Department document this week said the IDF is still denying requests to move food and medicine into northern Gaza, where 300,000 people are still living.

Konyndyk, who previously worked in the Obama and Biden administrations, told HuffPost that as long as Israel’s bombardment continues, Gaza residents and those struggling to care for them “need the humanitarian equivalent of shock and awe.”

“When the U.S. government is defending their record on this, their basic argument is they’re making some incremental improvements,” said Konyndyk. “That’s like saying, ‘We got three more buckets to fight the forest fire.’ Whatever improvement that reflects, the pace of it is far, far outmatched by the rate of deterioration in the humanitarian situation.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Julia Conley is a staff writer for Common Dreams.

Featured image source

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The Houthis in Yemen have been attacking ships in the Red Sea which are associated with Israel or the US in response to the ongoing genocide in Gaza being carried out by Israel, who is supported by the US with all weapons and funding. US President Joe Biden continues to refuse all international calls for a ceasefire in Gaza.

Biden has formed a military coalition to attack Yemen, the poorest country on earth, with famine and disease rampant. In an effort to understand the situation, Steven Sahiounie of MidEastDiscourse interviewed Suat Delgen.

Suat Delgen, a Defense Industry and Foreign Policy analyst, served for 16 years in the Naval Forces as a Staff Officer, undertaking project officer duties in various NATO and National Headquarters, as well as serving as a principal warfare officer and commanding officer on fast attack craft. 

Steven Sahiounie (SS):  The Houthis say they will continue attacking Israeli-associated ships until there is a ceasefire declared in Gaza. Can the US-led coalition against the Houthis succeed in stopping the attacks?

Suat Delgen (SD):  The United States, as a global maritime power, plays a crucial role in ensuring the security of global trade routes. In light of the Houthis’ attacks on Israeli-flagged ships and ships bound for Israel in the Red Sea and the Bab Al Mandeb Strait, these actions pose a significant challenge not only to regional stability but also to international maritime security, which the U.S. is keen to uphold.

The initiation of the multinational Operation Prosperity Guardian on December 19, 2023, marks an important step in addressing this challenge. However, the operation’s efficacy is constrained by its defensive nature and the limited rules of engagement, which do not extend to pre-emptive strikes against strategic Houthi targets. This limitation, in my opinion, contributed to the operation’s inability to fully deter Houthi attacks.

The situation took a significant turn with the UN Security Council’s adoption of Resolution 2722, which, while not authorizing direct military action against the Houthis, underscored the international community’s demand for a cessation of Houthi aggressions. Nevertheless, the subsequent direct military responses by the US and UK, bypassing the resolution’s framework, seem to have only escalated the situation. This response, in my analysis, has not only failed to deter the Houthis but also appeared to garner them increased public sympathy, as evident from the large-scale demonstrations in Sanaa.

From a military standpoint, the resource-intensive nature of countering Houthi attacks, particularly their use of cost-effective drones and missiles against expensive defense systems, presents a logistical and economic challenge. In my view, this imbalance could potentially lead to a strategic stalemate, where the reduction in the number of attacks might be achievable, but completely stopping them seems unlikely under the current strategy.

In conclusion, while the joint US-UK military operations might curtail the frequency of Houthi attacks to some extent, the prospect of completely halting these attacks appears slim. It is my belief that the resolution of this conflict will require not just military might but also diplomatic efforts that address the underlying political complexities. The US’s stance, especially considering its previous decision to delist the Houthis as a terrorist organization, suggests a potential preference for a non-escalatory approach. However, as with any conflict of this nature, the situation remains fluid and the outcomes uncertain.” 

SS:  Some experts fear the situation in the Red Sea might escalate into a large-scale conflict.  In your opinion,  do you think Iran might face off against USA?

SD:  In my opinion, the likelihood of the situation in the Red Sea escalating into a major conflict directly involving Iran and the USA is low. The strategic interests of the US in the Middle East, particularly with regard to its alliances with Gulf countries, play a crucial role in its decision-making process. A direct conflict, especially one that could be perceived as initiated by the US, risks jeopardizing these relationships and the broader stability of the region.

Moreover, the US has significant investments in regional integration projects, such as the IMEC corridor, which aims to enhance trade and transport links between India, the UAE, and Saudi Arabia. The success of such initiatives often hinges on regional stability and the support of key players like Saudi Arabia. As Saudi Arabia’s participation in the Abraham Accords for normalization with Israel is a critical aspect of this regional integration, the US is likely to avoid actions that could hinder this process. Therefore, in my opinion, while the US is committed to countering Iran’s influence in the region, it is more likely to pursue indirect measures rather than direct military confrontation. The aim would be to limit Iran’s regional sway without triggering a large-scale conflict, aligning with the US’s broader strategic objectives of maintaining stability and fostering diplomatic relations in the Middle East.

SS: Saudi Arabia declined the US invitation to join the collection against the Houthis. The Chinese-brokered deal between Saudi Arabia and Iran seems to be a success. In your view, will this act protect the Saudi oil industry?

SD:  The recent developments in Saudi-Iranian relations, particularly the normalization effort under Chinese mediation, represent a significant shift in the regional geopolitical landscape. In 2021, following the US decision to remove the Houthis from its terrorist list and to scale back support for the Saudi-led coalition, Saudi Arabia was compelled to explore alternative strategies to safeguard its national security and interests. This shift, in my opinion, has been instrumental in prompting Saudi Arabia to engage in normalization talks with Iran.

The cessation of Houthi attacks on Saudi oil facilities, a consequence of the Saudi-Iranian rapprochement, has evidently contributed to a more secure environment for the Saudi oil industry. This stability is crucial for uninterrupted oil production and exports, which are central to the Saudi economy. Additionally, the improved relations between Saudi Arabia and Iran potentially enhance the security of key maritime routes like the Persian Gulf and the Strait of Hormuz, which are vital for the global oil supply, including Saudi oil shipments.

However, it is important to note that the situation remains fluid. The long-term success of this normalization and its impact on the security of the Saudi oil industry will depend on the sustained commitment of both parties to this détente and the influence of other regional and global actors. While the current scenario presents a positive outlook for the security of Saudi oil production, the dynamics of regional politics necessitate a cautious approach in predicting future outcomes. 

SS: Reports say Israel’s economy has been affected by the Houthi attack. In your opinion, how much does this damage the Israeli economy?

SD:  The reported Houthi attacks on merchant ships in the Bab al-Mandeb Strait and their implications for container traffic in the Red Sea have undoubtedly affected Israel’s economy, particularly the operations at the port of Eilat. As one of Israel’s key ports, Eilat plays a vital role in trade, especially with the Far East, India, and Australia. The port’s significance in exporting minerals and importing goods like cattle and automobiles underscores its economic importance.

The reported figures, such as a 40% reduction in container traffic in Bab el Mandeb and an 85% drop in revenues at Eilat, highlight a substantial impact. However, it’s important to contextualize these numbers within the broader framework of Israel’s maritime trade. The shift of container traffic to other major ports like Ashdod and Haifa may mitigate some of the immediate economic impacts. These ports’ continued operation is critical in ensuring that Israel does not face significant supply problems.

Nonetheless, the situation at the port of Eilat represents a specific economic loss for Israel. The reduction in activity there, especially in automobile imports (EVC) and mineral exports, has immediate and tangible economic consequences. While the overall resilience of the Israeli economy may help in weathering these challenges, the situation underscores the broader economic vulnerabilities that arise from regional conflicts.

In conclusion, while the ports of Ashdod and Haifa continue to operate, mitigating some of the broader supply concerns, the impact on Eilat and the specific sectors it serves represents a notable economic setback for Israel. As in any conflict situation, the dynamics are fluid, and the long-term economic implications will depend on the duration and intensity of these disruptions.

SS: The Houthis are threatening the UAE and other countries that had a role in the coalition attack  on Yemen. In your opinion,  will  the situation in the  Red Sea escalate?

SD:  The adoption of UNSC Resolution 2722 has indeed heightened international pressure on the Houthis, which could influence their strategic calculations. Considering their ambition to consolidate power in Yemen and establish themselves as a regional actor, the Houthis might be cautious about escalating conflicts to a point where they confront the entire international community. However, their targeting of Israeli and US ships has been a tactic to increase their popularity and political support within Arab societies and Yemen. This aspect can’t be overlooked, as it plays into their regional political strategy. In the near term, adhering to UNSC Resolution 2722, such as releasing the Galaxy Leader ship, could be a strategic move to reduce immediate international pressure while maintaining their stance. Despite these maneuvers, I believe it is unlikely that the current tensions will escalate into a broader regional conflict involving major players like Iran and the UAE. Both Saudi Arabia and the UAE have demonstrated a cautious approach towards the Houthis, likely aiming to avoid further destabilization of the region.

In conclusion, while the Houthis may continue to pose a threat through sporadic targeting of US and Israeli ships, the overall situation in the Red Sea is more likely to be characterized by a cautious balance rather than outright escalation. This balance is precarious, however, and the actions of the Houthis, as well as the responses of regional and international actors, will be crucial in determining the future dynamics in the region.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published on Mideast Discourse.

Steven Sahiounie is a two-time award-winning journalist. He is a regular contributor to Global Research.

Featured image is from MD

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name.

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

First published on November 19, 2023

***

We are embroiled in two wars, in Europe and the Middle East, which have increasingly serious consequences for our living conditions and security.  

On the European front, what the Wall Street Journal calls “one of the largest acts of sabotage in Europe since World War II” was carried out in September 2022: the United States, assisted by Norway and Poland, blew up the Nord Stream, the main gas pipeline carrying cheap Russian gas to Germany and from there to other European countries.  The dynamics of this wartime action were reconstructed, based on precise evidence, by U.S. journalist Seymour Hersh and a German investigation. 

U.S. Secretary of State Blinken called the Nord Stream blockade “a huge strategic opportunity for years to come” and pointed out that “the U.S. has become the main supplier of liquefied natural gas to Europe,” gas that we European citizens pay much more for than what we used to import from Russia. 

At the same time, the U.S. is passing on to Europe the enormous cost of the NATO war in Ukraine against Russia. The European Commission is paving the way for Ukraine’s next entry into the EU, with the consequence that we European citizens will be the ones paying for the huge Ukrainian deficit.

On the Middle East front, the European Union supports the war by which Israel, with the United States and NATO behind it, attacks Palestine and fuels a regional conflict targeting Iran in particular.  Italy, which has been linked to Israel by a military pact since 2004, has provided the fighter jets on which Israeli pilots are trained, which bomb Gaza massacring civilians, and supports the Israeli military in various ways. In return, PM Netanyahu has promised PM Meloni that Italy will become an energy hub for shunting to Europe the gas Israel will send through the EastMed pipeline. 

The section of the offshore gas field, which Israel claims sole ownership of, is located largely in the territorial waters of the Palestinian Territory of Gaza and that of the West Bank.

Through the EastMed pipeline Israel will thus export to Italy and the EU the Palestinian natural gas it has seized by military force.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published in Italian on Il Manifesto.

Manlio Dinucci, award winning author, geopolitical analyst and geographer, Pisa, Italy. He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Martin Griffiths, Undersecretary General of the United Nations for Humanitarian Affairs and Emergency Relief Coordinator, presented a documented report to the Security Council. Here are some excerpts:

“In Gaza, 134 United Nations Relief and Works Agency facilities for Palestinian Refugees were hit, and 148 UN staff were killed. Humanitarian relief centres were hit, even though they were identified and notified to the Israeli Forces. As ground operations move south, aerial bombardment has intensified in areas where civilians had been advised to relocate for their safety. More and more people are crammed into an increasingly smaller portion of the territory, only to find even more violence and deprivation, inadequate shelter, and the near absence of the most basic services. Rafah, where before the crisis the population was 280 thousand inhabitants, today hosts one million displaced people. And more people arrive every day.

Our efforts to send humanitarian convoys to the North have met with denials and the imposition of impossible conditions. Colleagues who managed to reach the North describe scenes of absolute horror: corpses abandoned on the roads, starving people blocking trucks in search of anything they can find to survive. And even if they manage to return home, they no longer have a home to live in.

Pressure is growing for the mass displacement of Palestinians to neighbouring countries. I want to emphasize that all people displaced from Gaza must be allowed to return as required by International Law. We are deeply alarmed by recent statements by Israeli ministers on plans to encourage the mass transfer of Palestinian civilians from Gaza to third countries, termed “voluntary transfer.”

These statements raise serious concerns regarding the possible mass forced transfer or deportation of the Palestinian population from the Gaza Strip, which would be strictly prohibited under International Law.

What we have seen since October 7th is a stain on our conscience. It will become an indelible mark on our humanity if we don’t act. I remain extremely concerned about the risk of further regional spread of this conflict. We cannot allow this situation to spread further: the consequences of a larger conflagration would be unimaginable”.

To Read the Complete statement by Martin Griffiths click Here 

Our thanks to Manlio Dinucci for having brought the above selection to our attention. 

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image source

It’s All About Me: Netanyahu Rejects Palestinian Statehood

January 21st, 2024 by Dr. Binoy Kampmark

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Israel has been given enormous license to control the security narrative in the Middle East for decades. This is not to say it is always in control of it – the attacks of October 7 by Hamas show that such control is rickety and bound, at stages, to come undone. What matters for Israeli security is that certain neighbours always understand that they are never to do certain things, lest they risk existential oblivion.

For instance, no Middle Eastern state will be permitted to acquire nuclear weapons on the Jewish State’s watch. Nuclear reactors and facilities will be struck, infected, or pulverised altogether (Osirak at Tuwaitha, Iraq; the Natanz site in Iran), with, or without knowledge, approval or participation of the United States.

This is a signature mark of Israeli foreign and defence policy: the nuclear option remains the greatest, single affirmation of sovereignty in international relations. To possess it, precisely because of its destructive and shielding potential, is to proclaim to the community of nation states that you have lethal insurance against invasion and regime change.  Best, then, to make sure others do not possess it.

Israel, on the other hand, will be permitted to develop its own cataclysmic inventory of weapons, platforms, and doomsday options, all the while claiming strategic ambiguity about the whole matter. In that strangulating way, Israeli policy resembles the thornily disingenuous former US President Bill Clinton’s approach to taking drugs and oral sex: he did not inhale, and oral pleasuring by one by another is simply not sex.

The latest remarks from Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu on January 18 suggest that the license also extends to ensuring that Palestinians will never be permitted a sovereign homeland, that they will be, in a perverse biblical echo, kept in a form of bondage, downtrodden, oppressed and, given what happened on October 7 last year, suppressed.  This is to ensure that, whatever the grievance, that they never err, never threaten, and never cause grief to the Israeli State. To that end, it is axiomatic that their political authorities are kept incipient, inchoate, corrupt and permanently on life support, the tolerated beggars and charity seekers of the Middle East.

At the press conference in question, held at the Kirya military base in Tel Aviv, Netanyahu claimed that,

“Whoever is talking about the ‘day after Netanyahu’ is essentially talking about the establishment of the Palestinian state with the Palestinian Authority.”

(How very like the Israeli PM to make it all about him.) The Israel-Palestinian conflict, he wanted to clarify, was “not about the absence of a state, a Palestinian state, but rather about the existence of a state, a Jewish state.”

With monumental gall, he complained that “All territory we evacuate, we get terror, terrible terror against us”. His examples, enumerated much like sins at a confessional, were instances where Israel, as an occupying force, had left or reduced their presence: Gaza, southern Lebanon, parts of Judea and Samaria (the West Bank). It followed that “any future arrangement, or in the absence of any future arrangement,” Israel would continue to maintain “security control” of all lands west of the Jordan River.  “That is a vital condition.”

As such lands comprise Israeli territory, Gaza and the West Bank, Palestinian sovereignty can be assuredly ignored as a tenable outcome in Netanyahu’s policed paradise. He even went so far as to acknowledge that this “contradicts the idea of sovereignty” as far as the Palestinians are concerned. “What can you do? I tell this truth to our American friends.”

As to sceptical mutterings in the Israeli press about the country’s prospects of defeating Hamas decisively, Netanyahu was all foamy with indignation. “We will continue to fight at full strength until we achieve our goals: the return of all our hostages – and I say again, only military pressure will lead to their release; the elimination of Hamas; the certainty that Gaza will never again represent a threat to Israel. There won’t be any party that educates for terror, funds terror, sends terrorists against us.”

This hairbrained policy of ethno-religious lunacy masquerading as sane military strategy ensures that permanent war nourished by the poison of blood-rich hatred and revenge will continue unabated. In keeping such a powder keg stocked, there is always the risk that other powers and antagonists willing to have a say through bombs, rockets and drones will light it. Should this or that state be permitted to exist or come into being? The answer is bound to be convulsively violent.

It is of minor interest that officials in the United States found Netanyahu’s comments a touch off-putting. US Secretary of State Antony Blinken had, it is reported, dangled a proposal before the Israeli PM that would see Saudi Arabia normalise relations with Israel in exchange for an agreement to facilitate the pathway to Palestinian statehood. Netanyahu did not bite, insisting that he would not be a party to any agreement that would see the creation of a Palestinian state.

Blinken, if one is to rely on the veracity of the account, suggested that the removal of Hamas could never be achieved in purely military terms; a failure on the part of Israel’s leadership to recognise that fact would lead to a continuation of violence and history repeating itself.

In Washington, State Department spokesperson Matthew Miller stated in the daily press briefing that “Israel faces some very difficult choices in the months ahead.” The conflict in Gaza would eventually end; reconstruction would follow; agreement from various countries in the region to aid in that effort had been secured – all on the proviso that a “tangible path to the establishment of a Palestinian state” could be agreed upon.

For decades, administrations in Washington have fantasised about castles in the skies, the outlandish notion that Palestinians and Israelis might exist in cosy accord upon lands stolen and manured by brutal death. Washington, playing the Hegemonic Father, could then perch above the fray, gaze paternally upon the scrapping disputants, and suggest what was best for both. But the two-state solution was always encumbered and heavily conditioned to take place on Israeli terms, leaving all mediation and interventions by outsiders flitting gestures lacking substance.

Now, no one can claim otherwise that Palestinian statehood is anything other than spectral, fantastic, and doomed – at least under the current warring regime. Netanyahu’s own political survival, profanely linked to Israel’s own existence, depends on not just stifling pregnancies in Gaza but preventing the birth of a nationally recognised Palestinian state.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Dr. Binoy Kampmark was a Commonwealth Scholar at Selwyn College, Cambridge. He currently lectures at RMIT University. He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG). Email: [email protected]

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Horrendous implications. It would generate a final, total, unimaginable regional detonation, even dwarfing, exacerbating current nightmares all round.

Felicity Arbuthnot, Global Research, January 21, 2024

*

When Iraqi Prime Minister Mohammed al-Sudani arrived in New York City in September for the UN General Assembly, a delicate truce was in balance between the two foreign powers that loom over Baghdad.

Iraqi paramilitaries, backed by Iran, had frozen their attacks on US troops in the country. Iraq’s new leader arrived in New York City amid the lull. He was feted on a circuit of swanky receptions with western businessmen and diplomats on the sidelines of the General Assembly, as he pitched Iraq’s oil-rich but corruption-riddled economy as an investment destination.

Four months later, the Iraqi leader is condemning Iran and the US for launching deadly strikes in his country and his investment pitch to the global elite at Davos Switzerland is overshadowed by his call for the US military and its coalition partners to leave Iraq.

Since the Hamas-led attacks on 7 October and the war in Gaza, Iranian-backed militias have launched at least 70 attacks on US forces in Iraq.

In early January, the US hit back with its most powerful response yet, launching a drone strike in Baghdad that killed Mushtaq Taleb al-Saidi, also known as Abu Taqwa, a senior commander in the Popular Mobilisation Units, an umbrella organisation of Iraqi state-funded and Iran-aligned, Shia militias.

Baghdad hit out at the strike as “a violation of Iraq’s sovereignty”. But no sooner was Iraq chastising the US for the strike, when Iran launched a barrage of ballistic missiles into the Iraqi city of Erbil, killing four people, including a prominent Kurdish real estate developer and his one-year-old daughter.

Baghdad slammed Tehran’s allegation that the house struck in Erbil was an Israeli Mossad “spy centre”. At Davos, Sudani called the strike “a clear act of aggression”. Iraq has recalled its ambassador to Tehran and says it will file a complaint at the UN Security Council.

The dual rebukes of Iran and the US underscore the tightrope Baghdad is walking as the war in Gaza seeps out beyond the besieged Mediterranean enclave’s borders.

Across the region, Tehran and Washington are flexing their muscles, vying to outflank each other in a deadly proxy war. The shadowy conflict has taken on different flavours that reflect local and geopolitical realities.

In Lebanon, the US is trying to de-escalate fighting between Israel and Hezbollah, with both sides wary of being dragged into a wider conflict. Meanwhile, Iran-backed Houthi fighters in Yemen have made themselves targets of US air strikes as a response to their attacks on commercial shipping.

But the conflict is perhaps at its most intense, and complex, in Iraq.

“The Iraqi government is weak, divided and fundamentally can’t control conflict on its borders from foreign powers,” Renad Mansour, director of the Iraq Initiative at the Chatham House think-tank, told Middle East Eye.

“It emerged as the playground of choice, where the US and Iran can fight it out. The risk of escalation here is lower for both. And they can show force and compete for influence.”

Syria, Through Iraq 

For Iran and its Iraqi allies who dominate Baghdad’s government, the war in Gaza has presented an opportunity to drive home their goal of expelling the US from Iraq.

A former senior US official and an Iraqi official told MEE that there has been increased coordination between Iranian-backed paramilitaries in Iraq and Lebanese Hezbollah with that aim. According to media reports, a top Hezbollah official, Mohammad Hussein al-Kawtharani, arrived in Baghdad earlier this month to oversee the operations.

“Instead of attacking Israel, what we are seeing in Iraq are more attacks on US forces,” Andrew Tabler, a former Middle East director at the White House’s National Security Council, told MEE.

The pressure building in Baghdad to expel US troops has been underlined by Sudani’s public calls for an exit since the assassination of Abu Taqwa. If he follows through, experts say it would present a strategic victory for Iran.

Roughly 2,500 US troops are in Iraq to advise and train local forces as part of a coalition to defeat the Islamic State militant group.

They are mainly based in Baghdad and northern Iraq’s autonomous Kurdish region. The latter is especially important for providing logistical support to 900 US troops in northeastern Syria.

The US’s legal justification for being in Syria is also based on its agreement with Baghdad.

“Erbil is crucial for supporting Syria,” Tabler said, referring to the capital of Iraq’s autonomous Kurdistan region. “The US needs to have the ability to move troops and supplies on the overland route between the Iraqi frontier and Syria.”

Speaking in Davos on Thursday, Sudani said that

“ISIS is no longer a threat to the Iraqi people,” and that “the end of the international coalition mission is a necessity for the security and stability of Iraq”.

The Biden administration and Baghdad were already negotiating the future of the US-led coalition in Iraq before the war in Gaza erupted, a former senior US official told MEE, but the war changed Washington’s approach to the talks.

“It doesn’t look good to be discussing a drawdown when the Iranians are attacking US soldiers with missiles and drones. So there is a sense from the administration that we need to pause these talks.”

While the US continues to conduct small-scale raids against IS cells in the region, Washington views its military footprint in northeast Syria as a key counterweight to Iran and Russia, which back the Bashar al-Assad government in Syria.

“The US mission in northeast Syria depends on Iraq,” Joel Rayburn, a former US special envoy for Syria, told MEE.

‘Same Foxhole’

The US military presence in Iraq has ebbed and flowed since the invasion 20 years ago. In 2011, the US pulled all of its forces from Iraq, only for them to return in 2014 at the invitation of Baghdad to fight IS.

But in that period, Shia paramilitaries backed by Iran emerged as the most powerful armed groups in Iraq. Trained and funded by Iran, the Popular Mobilisation Units also fought IS.

Some groups, like Kata’ib Hezbollah, have been at the forefront of attacks on the US in Iraq. The group’s founder, Abu Mahdi al-Mohandes, was killed in the same US strike that assassinated the Iranian commander, Qassem Soleimani.

Today, the PMUs boast more than 150,000 fighters. They maintain vast patronage networks and many are incorporated into Iraq’s official state security apparatus, with the Iraqi government paying their salaries. They have been accused of kidnappings, assassinations and suppressing peaceful protests.

The inability of successive Iraqi governments to rein in the sweeping powers of the PMUs has sown discord between Baghdad and Washington. Not only have US forces come under attack from the paramilitary groups, but Washington funds Iraq’s security system. In 2022, Iraq received $250m in military aid from the US.

Despite sporadic outbursts of fighting between the paramilitaries and Iraq’s security services, “the cost of going against the militias for the Iraqi government is far higher than the cost of keeping them,” Abbas Kadhim, head of the Iraq Initiative at the Atlantic Council, told MEE.

“For Washington, it’s an urgency because they are under attack, but it’s not a crisis for the Iraqi state. The militias are fighting in the same foxhole as the Iraqi government.”

Pay Raise for Iranian Militias

Sudani is supported by the Coordination Framework, a coalition of Tehran-backed Shia political parties that are tied to many of Iraq’s paramilitaries. While Sudani negotiated a six-month truce that saw attacks on US forces in Iraq stop, the PMUs have gained more influence under his rule, experts say.

“Iran-backed militias have a more visible presence on Baghdad’s streets during Sudani’s tenure,” setting up new checkpoints, Michael Knights, a fellow at the Washington Institute for Near East Policy, wrote, adding that they have also deepened their business activities.

This year, Sudani’s government passed a three-year budget that allocated $700m more dollars to the PMUs, which will allow them to add almost 100,000 new fighters to their ranks, according to analysts.

But current and former US and Iraqi officials say Baghdad wants to maintain good relations with Washington.

Sudani has framed his call for quick exit of US-led coalition troops as necessary to preserve “constructive bilateral relations” with the US, which he told Reuters could include training and advising Iraqi security forces.

His comments are a reflection of the unique ties Baghdad maintains to both Washington and Tehran.

The Dollar Trap

Iran and Iraq share a thousand-mile border.  The two Shia-majority countries have an estimated ten million border crossings annually, with many Iranian pilgrims visiting shrines in Karbala and Najaf. Iraq is the second most important destination for Iranian exports and is dependent on Iran for about 35 to 40 percent of its power needs.

Iran has never shied away from flexing its economic weight over its neighbour. But Iraq’s finances are also intricately tied to the US.

The second largest producer in the Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries, Iraq depends on its oil revenue to fund its government – including to pay the salaries of Iranian-backed paramilitaries. The proceeds from Iraq’s oil sales are deposited in the US Federal Reserve Bank of New York.

A recent US crackdown on money laundering in Iraq has helped fuel a currency crisis in Iraq, showcasing the immense sway Washington has over Iraq’s finances because of its dependence on the dollar. The US has also backed Sudani’s appeal for international investments in Iraq.

When Baghdad threatened to expel US-led coalition forces from Iraq after the 2020 assassination of Soleimani, the Trump administration threatened to cut Iraq’s access to its dollar reserves and stop issuing sanctions waivers for Iraq to buy Iranian energy, former US officials familiar with the talks told MEE.

The same officials say that cudgel is an option the Biden administration retains if demands for a US exit grow, but some question whether the administration would use it, after trying to reset relations with Baghdad after the tumultuous Trump years.

“The US can’t be expelled from Iraq if it doesn’t want to be,” Rayburn, the former US special envoy for Syria, told MEE.

“If the US doesn’t have a military presence in Iraq, then the US need not do other things on behalf of the Iraqi government. Like facilitating dollar supply from the Federal Reserve, protecting against lawsuits, and issuing sanctions waivers,” he said.

While Iranian-backed militias want to expel the US from Iraq, experts say even the most hardline groups like Kata’ib Hezbollah benefit from Iraq’s economic links to the West.

“Even the most anti-American leaders in Iraq realise they need some kind of relationship with the US,” Mansour told MEE. “Iraq is a lifeline for Iran. Its access to US dollars and financial markets is key.”

Kadhim, at the Atlantic Council, believes the focus among policymakers in Washington to merely protect US troop presence in Iraq is shortsighted.

“Of course, Iran’s ideal goal is to get the US out of Iraq completely, but their practical goal is to make the US presence a liability,” which he says, the Iranians have already achieved.

“Basically, you have a small number of US troops in Iraq sequestered to their barracks. They can’t even go to town,”   he said.

“In the long run, someone is going to ask why are we here.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Britain’s chief rabbi, Ephraim Mirvis, spoke at a public event at a synagogue last Sunday to extol the “outstanding” performance of the Israeli military in Gaza. He did so days before South Africa argues its case before the International Court of Justice in The Hague – starting today – that Israel is committing genocide in the enclave.

Whether Israel is eventually found to be perpetrating genocide may prove more a political decision than a legal verdict, given the pressures on the 15 judges from their respective national leaderships.

But it is indisputable that Israel has committed war crimes and crimes against humanity in Gaza. It is known to have killed more than 23,000 Palestinians, most of them women and children, and seriously wounded tens of thousands more. It has driven from their homes the overwhelming majority of the enclave’s population of 2.3 million – that is, Israel has ethnically cleansed them.

Israel has repeatedly bombed the “safe zones” to which it has ordered civilians to flee, as well as critical infrastructure such as hospitals, schools, mosques, churches and bakeries. It has imposed a “complete siege” that is denying food, aid and medicine, leading to mass starvation and the spread of lethal disease.

Video footage has shown Israeli soldiers in Gaza gleefully smashing up shops; stripping Palestinian men and boys to their underwear; and shooting civilians, including women, in the street as they carrying white flags. Soldiers even executed three of Israel’s hostages trying to escape captivity and surrender with an SOS sign.

Yet Britain’s chief rabbi, the face of Judaism in the UK, has raised his voice to call all of this “the most outstanding possible thing”. He has gone further: he has described the troops committing these crimes “our heroic soldiers” and revealed that his own son, Danny, is assisting with the attack on Gaza in the Israeli military. He has said he is “immensely proud” of him.

Click here to watch the video

Mirvis could have chosen a form of weaselly words of the kind Israel’s apologists more typically deploy. He could have argued that the Israeli military was carrying out its task in Gaza as best as it could in near-impossible circumstances. That the Palestinians killed in Gaza were unfortunate collateral damage as the Israeli military sought to eradicate Hamas.

But he didn’t. He called the undoubted war crimes being carried out over the past three months “the most outstanding thing”.

There are several points to note about his remarks:

1. For any public figure, Jewish or otherwise, to call atrocities committed by the foreign power of Israel “outstanding” reflects a worldview that utterly dehumanises Palestinians and is ready to incite war crimes against them. Even were the Hague court not to rule that genocide is taking place, Mirvis has clearly incited to crimes against humanity.

2. As the effective head of British Judaism, Mirvis is giving religious sanction to the carrying out of war crimes. Many of the soldiers in Gaza – a significant proportion of them religious – will now have reason to believe that the crimes they and their army have been committing over the past three months are blessed, that their mission is divinely ordained. In short, Mirvis has implied that killing Palestinians is God’s work.

3. In referring to “our heroic soldiers”, Mirvis has conflated the Jewish people with Israel. Those soldiers are not British soldiers. They are not Jewish soldiers. They are Israeli soldiers. Were you or I to do this – to suggest Jews are behind the atrocities being committed in Gaza, not a foreign national army – we would rightly be called antisemites. And for good reason. Because when you confuse the identifiers “Jewish” and “Israeli”, you tar all Jews everywhere, including in the UK, with the crimes being committed by Israel against Palestinians. You make all Jews responsible for atrocities. And you thereby make them the target of antisemitic hate crimes by those who fall for this malicious conflation. So in other words, Mirvis now has not only Palestinian blood on his hands but potentially Jewish blood too. His words may inspire attacks on Jews.

4. There is something deeply ugly – maybe sinister would be a better word – that Mirvis’ religious incitement to crimes against humanity (and very likely genocide) is viewed as entirely unremarkable by our establishment media and politicians. And yet a slogan calling for equality between Palestinians and Israelis is systematically misrepresented by these same actors to suggest it is somehow genocidal. “From the river to the sea, Palestinians will be free” is a demand to end Israel’s unified system of apartheid across both Israel and the occupied Palestinian territories, a system that assigns Israeli Jews and Palestinians entirely different rights. Reversing that can be viewed as genocidal only if you imagine that Israelis will fight to the death to stop Palestinians gaining equal rights. It reveals far more about the mindset of those who believe the slogan is genocidal than any evil intent of those chanting what is a call for liberation. That mindset is on full display in the atrocities Israel is committing in Gaza, cheered on by Jewish leaders like Mirvis.

5. Britain has a Prevent strategy whose official aim is “to reduce the threat to the UK from terrorism by stopping people becoming terrorists or supporting terrorism”. In practice, the strategy is the British state’s attempt to stigmatise the Muslim community as a pool of potential terrorism recruits, surveill their community organisations, and weaken legal protections against arrest and conviction. The stated concern is that Muslims are being “radicalised” by extremist imams in their mosques – rather than by the extreme events they see, such as genocide unfolding in Gaza.

Mirvis has shown beyond doubt that extremist preachers are to be found not just in mosques but in synagogues too. If the government is really using Prevent to end support for terrorism, it needs to apply the strategy even-handedly. Killing and seriously wounding some 100,000 Palestinians – roughly one in every 20th person in Gaza – and making almost of all the population homeless, destitute and starving surely ranks as state-organised terrorism, whether or not the court eventually rules it amounts to genocide.

The context is that for many years Mirvis chose to study and live in Israel’s illegal West Bank settlements, where Jewish extremists regularly terrorise Palestinian communities to drive them off their land. He raised at least one of his children to choose to serve in an army terrorising and ethnically cleansing Palestinians in Gaza. Mirvis considers the soldiers committing war crimes to be “our heroes”.

In 2017 Mirvis endorsed the fanatical Jewish settlers – Israel’s equivalent of white supremacists – on their annual march through the occupied Old City of Jerusalem. Every year on that march, most of the participants are recorded waving masses of Israeli flags at Palestinians who live there and chanting “Death to the Arabs”. One Israeli newspaper columnist describes the Jerusalem Day march as a “religious carnival of hatred”. But Mirvis celebrates it.

A further point. Despite the fact that, judged by any reasonable standard, Mirvis is an extremist and holds views that should be repellent to any decent person, he is held in high esteem by the British establishment, including its media.

One can understand why. In late 2019, days before the UK general election, Mirvis publicly accused the leader of the opposition, Jeremy Corbyn, of being unfit for high office because he supposedly indulged and promoted antisemism in the Labour party. The British establishment had spent years cultivating this evidence-free smear.

Mirvis argued that “the very soul of our nation is at stake” in Britain’s election. He thereby effectively called on British Jews and the British public to vote for the government.

It was an unprecedented act of electoral interference that was reported reverentially by the British media. Both the fact that Mirvis sought to influence the vote with a deception and that the establishment media colluded with him in doing so should have been shocking, even at the time. But Mirvis’ latest remarks provide additional context. Because it is Rabbi Mirvis – not the antisemites – who is quite happy to flaunt his dual loyality. Those soldiers are apparently “ours”.

So the question is this: which nation was Mirvis actually referring to when he warned shortly before the 2019 election that “the very soul of our nation is at stake”? The British nation whose religious Jews he supposedly represents, or the Israeli nation that is currently ethnically cleansing and murdering Palestinian men, women and children?

Mirvis, it seems, just gave us his answer.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image is from the author

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The UK military refuses to tell Declassified what intelligence it is sharing with Israel as we reveal the extraordinary number of surveillance flights Britain is undertaking over Gaza from its base on Cyprus.

The UK military has flown 50 surveillance missions over Gaza since December, it can be revealed.

The flights have taken off from Britain’s controversial air base on Cyprus, RAF Akrotiri, and averaged around one a day since the beginning of December.

When asked the UK government refused to provide the number of spy flights, but Declassified has analysed flight tracking records.

The British plane used is the Shadow R1, which is known as an intelligence, surveillance, target acquisition and reconnaissance (ISTAR) aircraft.

The Shadow R1 is operated by the UK military’s No.14 Squadron, which is based at RAF Waddington in Lincolnshire, east England.

The UK military recently awarded a £110m contract to the plane’s manfacturer, US weapons company Raytheon, to update the aircraft and increase the British fleet from six to eight.

The British flights began on 3 December when two R1s flew over Gaza. The flights have continued nearly daily up until now, with around half the days featuring two flights. On 3 January, the British sent an R1 over Gaza three times.

The flights appear to last around six hours.

Intelligence

The UK Ministry of Defence announced on 2 December that it would begin surveillance flights over Gaza “in support of the ongoing hostage rescue activity”. 

“The safety of British nationals is our utmost priority,” the department said. “Surveillance aircraft will be unarmed, do not have a combat role, and will be tasked solely to locate hostages”. 

It added:

“Only information relating to hostage rescue will be passed to the relevant authorities responsible for hostage rescue.”

But the extraordinary number of flights, and the fact that they started nearly two months after the hostages were taken, raises suspicions that the UK is not collecting intelligence solely for this purpose. 

Foreign secretary David Cameron confirmed last week that Hamas holds just two British hostages. 

Israeli forces are also on the ground in Gaza, and notoriously have wide-ranging surveillance capabilities in the territory. It is unclear what Britain’s R1s can add to the hostage rescue mission. 

A British R1 Shadow surveillance aircraft, which is collecting intelligence over Gaza, at RAF Waddington in Lincolnshire. (Photo: Creative Commons)

Change in Role

The British government previously said its surveillance assets had a more wide-ranging role for Israel. 

On 7 November, defence minister James Heappey told parliament that British “flights have provided surveillance support to Israel, including preventing the transfer of weapons to terrorist groups, and to wider regional security.”

Heappey also said the surveillance flights were to “improve our situational awareness in the region and provide assurance to our partners”, assumed to mean Israel. 

Heappey refused, however, to disclose the number of flights Britain had made over Gaza.

“For operational security reasons, I cannot comment on the specifics of this activity,” he said. 

A week after the 7 October attack, the UK government announced military units would be deployed to the eastern Mediterranean “to support Israel, reinforce regional stability and prevent escalation”. The military package included P8 surveillance aircraft alongside other reconnaissance assets.

Declassified has previously revealed the US spy force, 1st Expeditionary Reconnaissance Squadron, is permanently deployed at the British base on Cyprus alongside 129 American airmen. 

Declassified also reported on a leaked US cable in which a UK official said American spy flights from Britain’s Cyprus base “have become routine” and the “intelligence product” is often “passed to third party governments”, which is likely to include Israel.

The UK Ministry of Defence and US Department of Defense both refused to comment to Declassified on what intelligence they are sharing with the Israelis.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Matt Kennard is chief investigator at Declassified UK. He was a fellow and then director at the Centre for Investigative Journalism in London. Follow him on Twitter @kennardmatt

Featured image: Flight path of a British spy flight on its way to Gaza on Monday. (Screengrab: RadarBox)

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name.

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

***

LISTEN TO THE SHOW


Click to download the audio (MP3 format)

“Most analysts and historians fail to understand that starting in the early 1980s, China had become a full fledged capitalist country. There are powerful US business interests including Big Pharma, major hi-tech companies, banking institutions which are firmly entrenched inside China.” [1]

China has now become a dynamic global financial superpower. Since 2010, it is second economically only to the United States. [2]

Nowadays, according to the United States Statistics Division, “China makes up 28.4% of total world manufacturing output accounting for over $4 trillion to the world economy! The United States makes up 16.6% of Global output worth $1.8 trillion. The third largest exporter does not even make it into the double digits.”[3]

The graph that follows demonstrates quite starkly the rise in the countries’ GDP from 1960 to 2022. [4]

Indeed, the nation has taken a leadership role in building a new generation of Silk Roads across Eurasia. And BRICS, the group comprising Brazil, Russia, India, China and South Africa has now added five new members: Iran, the United Arab Emirates, Saudi Arabia, Egypt and Ethiopia. The partnership is now larger than the G7![5]

But the Red Dragon is more than a competitor. It is a threat! At least that’s the thinking of the Pentagon. [6]

According to the U.S. Department of Defense 2022 National Defense Strategy, the People’s Republic of China “remains our most consequential strategic competitor for the coming decades” and quoting President Biden’s National Security Strategy, the PRC is “the most consequential strategic competitor for the coming decades.” [7]

Strangely though, the course taken by China for the last fifty years, got significant help from Henry Kissinger and the Trilateral Commission which was born in 1973 from two American minds: Zbigniew Brzezinski and David Rockefeller. The Organization is supposedly devoted to bringing together leaders in policy, business and media in an attempt to solve “some of the world’s toughest problems.” [8][9]

Now that an election in the island of Taiwan recently chose a leader, Vice President Lai Ching-te, who is propping up commitments to opposing unification with China, commentators in the U.S. media are speculating on the likelihood of China doing something, like upping its military presence in the country. Something these “Authoritarian Regimes” are expected to do. [10]

This episode of the Global Research News Hour takes a special look at China, its background, and the threats, real and imaginary that are in evidence at this crucial time after the Taiwan election and historically generally.

In our first half hour, we invite back writer and author Patrick Wood to guide us through Technocracy, the true politics of China post 1980. He will share the role of Kissinger and the Trilats in moulding this system to their liking and ultimately taking over countries around the world.

In our second half hour, we are treated once again to the reflections and assessments of Pepe Escobar. He will put forward his views about the Taiwan election, China’s advancement, and the advance of the Russia-China Axis of resistance into the future.

Patrick Wood is a leading and critical expert on Sustainable Development, Green Economy, Agenda 21, 2030 Agenda and historic Technocracy. He is the author of Technocracy Rising: The Trojan Horse of Global Transformation (2015) and co-author of Trilaterals Over Washington, Volumes I and II (1978-1980) with the late Antony C. Sutton. He is also a leading expert on the elitist Trilateral Commission. He is a frequent speaker and guest on radio shows across the U.S.

Pepe Escobar, born in Brazil, is a correspondent and editor-at-large at Asia Times and columnist for Consortium News, The Cradle and Strategic Culture. Since the mid-1980s he’s lived and worked as a foreign correspondent in London, Paris, Milan, Los Angeles, Singapore, Bangkok. He has extensively covered Pakistan, Afghanistan and Central Asia to China, Iran, Iraq and the wider Middle East. Pepe is the author of Globalistan – How the Globalized World is Dissolving into Liquid War; Red Zone Blues: A Snapshot of Baghdad during the Surge. He was contributing editor to The Empire and The Crescent and Tutto in Vendita in Italy. His last two books are Empire of Chaos and 2030. Pepe is also associated with the Paris-based European Academy of Geopolitics. When not on the road he lives between Paris and Bangkok.

(Global Research News Hour Episode 417)

LISTEN TO THE SHOW


Click to download the audio (MP3 format)

Transcript of Patrick Wood, January 15, 2024

Global Research: China is a technocracy, that is, with a new governing system that is neither communist nor capitalist nor democratic. This is the point of view argued by my first guest, Patrick Wood. He is a leading and critical expert on sustainable development, green economy of Agenda 21, 2030 Agenda and historic technocracy. Also, a frequent speaker and guest on radio shows across the United States. Global Research News Hour got hold of him and started our conversation by getting him to help define technocracy.

Patrick Wood: Technocracy as it was invented in 1932, was defined as a “Replacement economic system for free market economics and capitalism.” There is no other way to explain it. It was a resource-based economic system, not predicated on supply and demand. Money was going to be exchanged for energy and in particular, energy script, that would serve as a currency sort of – so to speak, to regulate the economic activity.

It’s also interesting that they were very interested in social engineering, as well. There was a problem that they had that they couldn’t make things, factories and so on, you couldn’t get people to do what you wanted them to do. So, they created this elaborate system of social engineering – and they call it a science, science of social engineering – we see this today almost everywhere we look.

GR: So, I guess —

PW: People are messing with our minds. There’s just no end of it, right?

GR: When it first occurred to people, I guess the technology wasn’t quite ready, 50 or 60 or 70 years later the technology caught up and now —

PW: Mm-hmm.

GR: — they’re moving ahead, right?

PW: That’s exactly right. This whole concept was adopted by the Trilateral Commission as I argue in my books. That was created by David Rockefeller and Zbigniew Brzezinski in 1979 – excuse me, 1973. And the Trilateral Commission stated that it wanted to create a new international economic order. It was all over their literature at the time. And I see, now, that they were talking about technocracy as a new economic system. They didn’t really specify back then, but I see it now very clearly that that’s what they were talking about back then.

GR: You wrote that the Trilateral Commission and Henry Kissinger in particular played roles in taking China as a communist state and turning it into a technocracy. Explain, you know, what went on and how it has gone from being a communist country to no longer a – to being more of a technocracy.

PW: Well, Brzezinski in 1976 brought Deng Xiaoping to the United States. Wined him – that was the Chairman of the Communist Party at that point. They wined him, they dined him, and you know, brought him onto the world stage. At that point, China looked a lot like North Korea does today. They basically had no economic system at all, they were mired in poverty as a nation and as a people. And when Brzezinski got ahold of him, Chairman Deng, he taught him about technocracy. Not about capitalism, not about free market economics. He taught him about technocracy.

Now let me back up here and say, “Why?” The thing that endeared Brzezinski to Rockefeller was Brzezinski’s book circa 1970 called, “Between Two Ages: America’s Role in the Technetronic Era.” That was the exact title of his book. In that book, he described a vision of how technology was going to be used to basically conquer the world. He foresaw a future age where this technetronic era – it really should have been “technocratic,” but that’s the term he uses. So, this is what China started out with, with this vision of the technetronic era.

We’ve seen this – I’ve seen this, others haven’t, obviously – but I see this as a continuing trap against the free world where they are marching to a different drummer and it’s not capitalism, it’s not communism.

But scholars have pointed out that technocracy has become the de-facto system that China is operating under right now. And that’s not just me saying that. You know, people study China – political science people and so on – they see it. But nobody else wants to really hear what we have to say about it.

GR: Wow. So, China was really the first test case, as it were, —

PW: Yeah.

GR: — where there were these principles being applied. I mean, what exactly is the whole roster of reasons why they made China the test case?

PW: It was a blank slate. There was nothing blocking them. The huge – China had a huge population, number one. But it was an absolute empty chalkboard. You could put anything on it you want to. That’s what they did. There was no other nation on Earth of the size of China that could be plied by these people, that is, the elitists of the Trilateral Commission. And when their contractors, their companies that belong to the Trilateral Commission, when they moved in on China, it staged all the infrastructure that they needed, that they would need, to conquer the West with all the industries that subsequently moved to China. Took away jobs from us, took away economic activity from us. And this was their mission. They wanted to build this nation quickly into a technocratic model that would export itself all over the world, including back to us again.

GR: So, there are other nations that are also becoming, you know, taking on technocracy. Is this all like – you planted the seed in China and it spread from there? There’s like Singapore, South Korea, and you know, other places. Or did – was there the United States’ involvement in helping to spread it around the – beyond China?

PW: Well, there’s two parts to that story. One is: China is proud that they have taken their influence to nations around the world who would receive it to export their technocracy to those nations. On the other hand, you look at the United States now which is then a willing participant with China to this same end.

This follows a very long history of finance by Wall Street interests, for instance. Again, and also, a global multi-national corporations. These people – let’s look too at the World Economic Forum, too, with all the companies that are invested in them. All of these forces have seemingly joined up with China to export technocracy all over the world. The United Nations has had a place in this as well with sustainable development. It’s the same, you know, warmed-over technocracy from the last century. But the United Nations has pushed this sustainable development agenda all over the world. And China is big with the United Nations, as you know as well. But they’ve been doing this by stealth, mostly, for the last 50 years, and here we are now.

GR: What are some of the specific concerns you have about technocracy that have begun to manifest in countries like the United States or France or Canada, and you know, countries of that high grade?

PW: It’s going to result in a scientific dictatorship at some point. It’s on its way right now. A lot of people can see it, especially like China with their social credit scoring system where they can control people almost to minutiae. But the concept of a scientific dictatorship is that the science, the algorithm, the AI, et cetera, will manage the human population as a dictator. Not as a person, it will – like a human might be, maybe a Hitler or a Nero or whatever from history. But a scientific dictatorship will have absolutely no compassion, no capacity for mercy or human values that we would like to be part of. And the result of it is: all personal freedom will be gone. Absolutely smashed.

GR:  I know that you started to write about artificial intelligence, you just mentioned it, the AI. And I mean, I’ve heard recently that someone said that now that employers are – they’re not evaluating people who apply for jobs. You let AI do it and then they’ll screen out people on all kinds of weird principles, you know? Like even the adjustment of their name or other things that maybe something we didn’t intend, but the AIs are doing it. Not exactly the direction I saw it going, but you know – do you think that the existence of this AI – and it’s still kind of we’re not quite sure where it’s going, but will it act as an accelerator of sorts to technocracy and these distinctions that you’ve expressed?

PW: Absolutely. And I want to say that AI and most of the progressive technologies that we see today, these are all – they’ve all been sponsored by technocrats along the way who do not care about ethical values or moral values in what they do. They invent because they can, not because anybody asked them to. As a group, they are morally bankrupt, in my opinion.

But when somebody like a Sam Altman, for instance, talks about OpenAI, you’ll see him talking about, ‘Well, it’s going to be a big threat to humanity. It can destroy us all in the end.’ Other AI people are saying that too, by the way. But then, they go back to their own turf, to their own drawing board, get out the whip and slam their programmers into high gear, ‘Get with it guys, we got to be’ – you know, ‘we’re going to beat the competition out there.’ There’s no checks and balances in this.

We see this with other things as well: big pharma is a big one right now. These people are totally unplugged from reality, in my opinion. And they also exhibit a technocratic mindset that’s so dangerous. They’re coming up with stuff that they should not even be doing experiments with.

GR: Mm-hmm.

PW: But, you know —

GR:  Yeah, it seems like we’re not – that it’s starting off as AI being servants to human kind, but now pretty soon it’s going to be the other way around, right?

PW: Well, it is. This is what is intended in the first place.

GR: Mm-hmm.

PW: It may have started off, you know, more innocuous. But now that these technocrat minds have got ahold of it, they see this as the end game of social engineering. This was in the their plan, this was in their credo way back in the 1930s. They wanted to use the science of social engineering to control everything in society. They can do that now. At least they’re on the verge of it right now.

We see this AI is just sweeping the world and it’s showing up in all the places that is displacing workers. I saw this article yesterday it was, I think, that Wal-Mart now is firing all of the people who checks the receipts when you leave the store. You know, the checkers? I don’t know —

GR: Yeah.

PW: — what they call them, but you know, they sit there and they look at your basket and then give you a check mark and there you go. You leave the store with whatever you bought. They’re using AI now to check these baskets completely. No humans now are going to do this. And they said they’re going to fire every checker in the country and they’re going to replace it with an AI scanner who can see exactly what you’ve got in your cart. They don’t say that they’re going to record your conversation or they take a picture of you for, you know, facial recognition scans. But I wouldn’t be surprised if it does. But you know, we see this everywhere now. You keep – once your eyes are open to it, you’ll see it being applied in all unexpected places.

GR: Mm-hmm. Yeah, well we’re just about out of time now. But would you like to add any remaining thoughts you have about the technocratic course China has been on and how other countries are either —

PW: Yeah.

GR: — embracing and how they can resist China’s —

PW: Yes.

GR: — technocratic example.

PW: Yes. Let me just – let me say that the Rockefeller crowd has always been fond of China going back to the 1920s at least. They’ve had a love affair with China and that probably added to their desire to, you know, bring China back on the world stage. We see people like Brzezinski achieving this. We see this with people like the late Henry Kissinger who was the forerunner of Brzezinski to bring China out of the Dark Ages.

Kissinger was a Rockefeller man since his college days. He served as an agent of Rockefeller personally and as a stooge of – with the Trilateral Commission, as well. But you might remember that Kissinger recently bragged that he had been to China on over 100 trips in his lifetime. You have to think what that means. There were some years that he went once. Other years, he went four times perhaps, but he was in love with China all those years. And when he died, Chairman Xi said about Henry Kissinger, that he was, “Our most valuable and trusted friend over the decades.” This just tells you something about what’s going on here.

GR: And just in the minute we’ve got left, I mean, just maybe remind us about how we could go about resisting this technocratic example that’s —

PW: You bet. People can go to technocracy.news, that’s the first place that I would go to get in the swim of the news here. I would also encourage people to go to citizensforfreespeech.org to see where – or at least the role that free speech is going to play this year especially in 2024.

Transcript of Pepe Escobar, January 16, 2024

(Escobar here is commenting on the result of the January 13 election in Taiwan.)

Global Research: This election result was actually a weaker result in the sense that it only commands a minority of the seats in the legislative body. Does that mean the US concern about increasing chances of China possibly marching militarily into Taiwan to fend off any threats to the One China principle, does that have any merit?

Pepe Escobar: Oh, God. Look, I’ve been listening to this movement for —

GR: Yeah.

PE: — so long, I really lost track, you know? When I used to live in Asia, in Southeast Asia in Hong Kong, I used to go to China a lot during the War on Terror years, et cetera. There’s not going to be a Chinese invasion of China. This is a figment of Straussian neocon psycho’s imagination. These people obviously never read Deng Xiaoping. And it’s very easy. Why don’t you get Deng Xiaoping’s complete works? It’s all there.

There is no rush. The reunification of Taiwan will happen when the conditions are right and the, let’s say, informal deadline which Deng was always reiterating, is 2049.

GR: Hmm.

PE: What is happening, what has been happening has happened and will continue to happen is endless American provocations because they want to force Beijing’s hand. And obviously, they use their fifth-columnists all over Taipei they use to manipulate the American embassy in Hong Kong for that manner. They have their colour revolution specialists working in reverse in Taipei, you name it.

GR: Mm-hmm, yes.

PE: The result of these elections is very straightforward, I will cut to the chase totally: Lai got basically 40 percent of the vote. So, he is, for all practical purposes, a lame duck president. The opposition unfortunately, because they are split, they got roughly 60 percent of the vote. So, Lai got 40.5 percent compared to Tsai, the last time when she got 57 percent. So, it’s a minority government. They lost their parliamentary majority. They have most of the country in effect against them. Let’s say almost – easily almost two thirds of the country against them.

And what the Taiwanese – and this is something that from Hong Kong and from Shanghai, from other parts of the Chinese diaspora, we get inside information from Taipei. And what the Taiwanese basically say directly or between the lines is, ‘We prefer the status quo.’ So, this means nothing is going to change for a long, long time.

GR: Mm-hmm.

PE: They know that Beijing is not going to do anything rash. They know that it would be absolutely foolish and suicidal for a minority president, for instance, to declare – or push independence or declare independence. So, the status quo is the default position of the overwhelming majority of Taiwanese. Obviously, none of that will preclude more American operations, destabilizing American operations, all sorts of hybrid war you can imagine or even later on, depending on how things evolve in the next two or three years. A false flag or a series of false flags.

GR: Mm-hmm.

PE: But if we take into consideration what Beijing wants, what Xi Jinping wants, and what the Taiwanese population want, there will be nothing violent on the horizon for the next years and we can even say decades. When we start approaching 2049 it’s another matter, because then – it’s already happening now. The interconnection of geo-economic especially between Taiwan and the mainland is huge. Not to mention, of course, this is all facilitated by the fact that most of them study in the same schools and they speak the same language.

So, it’s basically already integrated. What the Chinese may come up with in I would say the mid-term is a sort of one country, three systems. One country, three systems applies to Hong Kong. One country, three systems would apply to Taiwan, like Taiwan with an enormous margin of autonomy, but part of the mainland as well. This is something that could evolve, I’m sure. The people around Xi could come up with a very seductive framework that would be accepted by the majority of the Taiwanese population, as well. Everything apart from that is American wishful thinking, wet dreams, speculation, and frankly impotence. Because they know that to provoke a war, a proxy-war against China via Taiwan could probably be their Ukraine. Or Ukraine 2.0. And we all know what is happening to Ukraine right now, so I end my case here.

GR: Yeah. Well, in your recent article, “Year of the Dragon: Silk Roads, BRICS Roads, Sino-Roads,” you know, I mean we see about how China and its allies have been building bridges, building the high-speed rail all across Eurasia basically. And you know, this is a counterpart to the United States going and you know, starting wars here and there on, you know, engaged in two wars right now. They had a whole bunch of wars. They must be getting a little bit leery about entering into any new conflicts. Certainly, you know, a military conflict in China is simply off the table, although, you know, I don’t know about the colour revolution and so on. Anyway, I’m wondering about these plans there. It seems to be, you know, kind of critical for its – for China’s rise and success and… When exactly did it have its origin? I mean, it’s part of a long-term strategy. Did it start way back in the 1970s when it started its economic rise? Or did it follow its rise in might?

PE: Well, this is the story of my professional life this past 30 years. I’ve been writing about this practically on a weekly basis since the mid-90s. I moved to Asia 30 years ago, in fact. I moved to Asia from the West in 1994, because I wanted to know Asia from the inside and especially what I had seen in China when I travelled in China in the early ‘90s which was – it happened to coincide with Deng Xiaoping’s visit, the famous visit to the South. When Deng Xiaoping went to Shenzhen, Dongguan, Guangzhou and he gave the major impetus for the modernization drive of China based on these special economic zones in the South and then also in Shanghai. So, when you see that in front of you happening, I was so floored and I said, ‘Well, I have to come here and try to understand this from the inside.’

Then, when you start living in Asia and when you start going to China on a frequent basis. And in my case, when you live in Hong Kong where you have access to everything, all sorts of information coming from China, the transit through Hong Kong, then you understand the big picture and you understand the long-term big picture. Which came not only from Deng when Deng came to power in ‘78. It came during the Mao industrialization era.

And that’s why in this column that you mentioned, I reference one of the very, very good books about it explaining how everything that Deng, in fact, could use later on in this industrialization drive in the ‘80s and in the ‘90s. The basis were put by – the very complicated process of industrialization of China initiated during Mao.

So, when you understand – so, this did not come out of the blue. And China is a big power, it’s not something that started when they entered the WTO in 2001, you know, 20 years ago. It started 50 years ago, at least, not more. And that’s what extraordinary they are – there is a consistency to it. There are degrees, very complex degrees of planning in terms of succeeding a five-year plans that they multiply into three, five-year plans in one, for instance.

You know, two or three years ago, they were already planning all the way to 2035. This is something that is absolutely impossible in the West, where the US cannot plan for next week. Can you image doing three, five-year plans and discussing it? And discussing out of a grassroots basis, which is something that many people in the West don’t understand.

Lots of decisions that arrive at the Politburo and then at Xi’s desk for instance, they start at the grassroots level, they are presented in grassroots meetings, they go to regional governments, and then they start climbing the pyramid. And then, one day they reach the pyramid and there is a decision based on something that started in a little prefecture in the middle of a province in Sichuan, for instance.

It’s fascinating. It’s a form of a direct democracy that is not – it’s not fully appreciating the West – it’s not even understood how it works. So, and that’s what makes it so special in terms of – the Chinese system for everything that we can criticize about it, there’s no question about that. It’s essentially a meritocratic system. And this is what Xi has been very, very careful to emphasize since he came to power and since he started the overarching international Chinese framework of development, connectivity, which is the Belt and Road Initiative started a little over 10 years ago.

They’ve learned from their mistakes. They are always applying Deng Xiaoping, you know, crossing the river while filling the stones. So you know, you may slip in one of the stones and fall into the river and then you’ll go back and you’ll learn from your mistake. And this is what they’re doing all the time.

In terms of the Belt and Road, for instance, they made a lot of mistakes in the beginning in terms of loans that went to projects that would go nowhere. Or you know, instead of relying on a local workforce, bringing loads of Chinese workers. And they’re learning, they are reorganizing all that. They are learning from the Russians, as well, in terms of Russia – Russia is a multinational society, minorities living in Russia. The Chinese are learning to be more supple vis-a-vis their minorities the way the Russians are.

And this all has to do with high levels of education and a meritocracy. Which seems to be the exact opposite of what’s happening with the West right now. Low levels of education, lower and lower, and no meritocracy at all.

GR: Yeah, interesting. Could you talk about the artificial intelligence just for a minute, the AI. Because, you know, the US chips for AI, they are manufactured largely in Taiwan, you know, the Nvidia.

PE: Yeah.

GR: The Chinese chips that are faster now are being developed in China and —

PE: Of course.

GR: Yeah. But they could lead to China – like, the US is in the lead right now, but China could overtake them by 2030 or so. Could you talk about the development of that technology? Also, its role in the Taiwan situation and where this could lead in the Cold War, the Cold War 2.0 as it were, possibly thawing even between the United States and China.

PE: Yeah, but that’s – it proves once again that sanctions are some of the most stupid methods of coercion in modern history. It didn’t work with Iran, it didn’t work with Cuba. It didn’t work with Venezuela, it didn’t work with Russia. And it’s not working with China. It’s very simple.

The Chinese – so, we cannot buy what we need from CSMC, Taiwan, or Nvidia, no problem. We’re going to make it ourselves. And the capital was already there, and the main power, and the extremely well-educated tech workforce was already there. It was a matter of time.

During the Trump era, some of us were thinking, ‘Oh, shit, it’s going to take them at least until 2037, 2038 to have breakthroughs.’ No, they had a breakthrough in 2023. And even when they launched the new Huawei Mate 60 Pro with their own operating systems with AI, top of the line AI and all that, everybody in the West goes, ‘How did they do that?’ It’s very simple: if you visit Huawei’s headquarters in Shenzhen and their research centre, something that I did a few years ago, they are already thinking what’s going to happen – what they were going to be using in 2030, 2035. So, it’s very, very simple.

It’s education, tech education, and planning. And of course, unlimited capital. Because this is directly linked to the official tech strategy which was elaborated even before Trump came to power. And when Trump came to power and looked at it and he freaked out, that’s why he started all those sanctions. Which is something that the Chinese were calling at the time, ‘Made in China 2025.’

Basically by 2025 next year, they wanted to be top or near the top in 10 tech departments, including artificial intelligence, quantum physics, you name it. They’re getting there. After the sanctions, they abandoned the model ‘Made in China 2025’ which was freaking out the Americans big, big time. They stopped talking about it, but they continued to do the same thing. And they even allocated more capital to high end research. And also, research that they do, I wouldn’t say under the table, but in close collaboration, covert and overt with Samsung, for instance, and with CSMC in Taiwan, as well.

So, this is all interconnected. And in the high tech world, everything is interconnected and information flows. Information could flow, for instance, from a WeChat message from one engineer in Rotterdam to one engineer in Shanghai, for instance. And then you have a breakthrough. This is how it works. There is no censorship among – this politicization of science, this is something completely stupid, it doesn’t exist. Scientists talk to each other. So obviously, this was bound to happen. Of course, it happened much faster than anyone could ever imagine.

And now, China, they can have all the chips that they need: 7 nm, 5 nm, 3 nm, whatever, by 2035, which happens to be what they wanted to do in the first place when they came up with this concept of Made in China 2025.

GR: Mm-hmm. I only have like maybe a couple of minutes left, but I just wanted to know what your thoughts are about when China has essentially really pushed ahead of the United States. I mean, there was – I’m thinking maybe the China-Russia alliance has been – there’s been so much interaction there financially. I think it was probably around the time of the Russian’s – well, the Russia-Ukraine engagement and then there was all sorts of – that may have been a key moment, because that’s when we saw a shift, you know, financially and so on. But I don’t know, maybe it’s even more recent or it’s just accelerating, you know, since then. But what would you say is the moment or moments —

PE: Well, Michael – Michael, this is what I rant about every week. Literally, this is what I write about every week, this is what I think and discuss every week wherever I am, here in Europe, or in Russia, or when I go to Southeast Asia or to Central Asia. And it has to do with the Russia-China strategic partnership which is something that very, very few people in the West even understand what it is and understand what it means and understand how it works. Very few people know that. And this is reflected in the personal encounters between Xi and Putin year after year. In the discussion at the highest level with the Minister of Foreign Affairs, Minister of Defence, and their tech environment as well. The Union of BRICS which was basically a Russia-China driven process. The two major powers on BRICS are Russia-China and they coordinate how BRICS are organizing, going to spend, especially this year where the Russian presidency of the BRICS will coordinate the next level of expansion. It’s going to be BRICS 12, 15, 17, 18 probably in Kazan at the summit later this year, in October this year. Their interactions, Shanghai Cooperation Organization, the fact that the Belt and Road Initiative, 10 years old, is – and the Eurasian Economic Union from 2015, they are getting closer and closer together. And you’re going to have projects that include countries that are members of the Eurasian Economic Union and the Belt and Road, and expanding two countries with which the Eurasian Economic Union has free trade agreements. For instance, they have it with Vietnam, they just clinched one with Iran. So, everything is interlocked. And the Russia-China strategic partnership is a sort of master coordinator of this whole process. And it includes military cooperation, which obviously none of us know the intimate details. But it is virtually sure that, for instance, the Chinese now have access to Russian hypersonic technology.

GR: Wow.

PE: Because this has been discussed at the highest level by their Ministries of Defence. And the fact that their strategy in terms of trying to – I would say muzzle the hegemon, it’s not fight the hegemon. It’s to try to muzzle a hegemon that is absolutely out of control now. It implies that they have to discuss – all major decisions have to be taken at the highest level and they have to be coordinated. And this includes the way they are supporting, by not supporting, or even feigning their supporting Gaza which is an extremely complex dossier where they act Alas Su Su or they act in a very Chinese way: in total silence. And we know that when they are not resolutely against something it’s because they are supporting it —

GR: Hmm.

PE: — in the background. Same thing about the whole Axis of Resistance. And this applies to Hezbollah, the militias in Iraq, Iran obviously as a whole. The fact that Iran, Russia military relationship now is 100% on both sides. This is something that I had in Moscow a few months ago where the Iranians said, ‘Basically, we told the Russians, “Anything you need, you can get it.”’ So, it’s at this this level nowadays. And the same thing between Russia, China, and Iran, between the three of them. These are the three poles of Eurasian integration.

GR: Okay.

PE: So obviously, the Americans don’t even understand how it works. So, how they can counter at a concerted drive in very well-regarded – nice strategy by these three major poles of Eurasia integration that applies to everything: high tech, artificial intelligence, geopolitically, geoeconomically. And of course, doing everything they can to prevent a frontal clash with the Americans. There is no interest by Beijing or by the Kremlin to have a direct, frontal clash with the Americans because they know how irresponsible and how unprepared the people running American foreign policy at the moment are.

So, they are basically trying to contain and muzzle this out of control, very dangerous animal. So, if you don’t understand these processes which these people in the Beltway, for instance, don’t. Or the people at NATO don’t, or the people at the European Commission don’t, you don’t understand what is happening all across Eurasia. And how, what is happening in Eurasia, is basically looked at by the whole Global South as, ‘Okay, this is the next game in town.’ And it’s now the only game in town, because we simply cannot trust anything that the Americans say or do. They are, as the Russians define them, ‘Non-agreement capable empire.’ And what the Eurasian integration process is offering to the whole Global South, to the Latin Americans, Southeast Asians, to Africans, et cetera, is mutual respect, connectivity corridors, trade – make trade, not war. Rejecting of forever wars. Multi-polarity and basically a fair, equitable system of international relations which is something that they would like to implement at the UN, but not at the UN as we know it today, the way the UN works today which is completely dysfunctional.

So, this is the macro-picture of why, for instance, what happens if Russia had some difficulty in one field, or Iran in another or China in another. They can talk among themselves and try to find solutions among themselves and talk to their partners as well in this big, let’s say greater Eurasia partnership which is a wonderful way that the Russians found to describe this process of integration.


The Global Research News Hour airs every Friday at 1pm CT on CKUW 95.9FM out of the University of Winnipeg. The programme is also podcast at globalresearch.ca .

Other stations airing the show:

CIXX 106.9 FM, broadcasting from Fanshawe College in London, Ontario. It airs Sundays at 6am.

WZBC 90.3 FM in Newton Massachusetts is Boston College Radio and broadcasts to the greater Boston area. The Global Research News Hour airs during Truth and Justice Radio which starts Sunday at 6am.

Campus and community radio CFMH 107.3fm in  Saint John, N.B. airs the Global Research News Hour Fridays at 7pm.

CJMP 90.1 FM, Powell River Community Radio, airs the Global Research News Hour every Saturday at 8am. 

Caper Radio CJBU 107.3FM in Sydney, Cape Breton, Nova Scotia airs the Global Research News Hour starting Wednesday afternoon from 3-4pm.

Cowichan Valley Community Radio CICV 98.7 FM serving the Cowichan Lake area of Vancouver Island, BC airs the program Thursdays at 9am pacific time.

Notes: 

  1. Michel Chossudovsky, Global Reseaerch, 2022 
  2. https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.MKTP.KD
  3. https://worldpopulationreview.com/country-rankings/manufacturing-by-country
  4.  World Bank, OECD; https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.MKTP.KD
  5.  Javaid Mirza (January 2, 2024), ‘BRICS+ welcomes five new members in 2023’, Custom News; https://customnews.pk/2024/01/02/brics-welcomes-five-new-members-in-2023/
  6.   Tara Copp and Lolita C. Baldor (October 22, 2022)‘Pentagon: Despite Russia’s war, China still top threat to US’, Associated Press; https://apnews.com/article/europe-middle-east-china-united-states-beijing-4521a349b4171b4e9792a5ed96f6f44f
  7.  https://media.defense.gov/2022/Oct/27/2003103845/-1/-1/1/2022-NATIONAL-DEFENSE-STRATEGY-NPR-MDR.PDF
  8.  https://www.technocracy.news/day-7-china-is-a-technocracy/
  9.  https://www.trilateral.org/about/
  10.  Michael Martina and David Brunnstrom (January 5, 2024) ‘Analysis-Taiwan Election Poses Early 2024 Test of U.S. Aim to Steady China Ties’, Reuters; https://www.usnews.com/news/world/articles/2024-01-05/analysis-taiwan-election-poses-early-2024-test-of-u-s-aim-to-steady-china-ties

Former NATO Commander Calls to Bomb Crimea

January 21st, 2024 by Lucas Leiroz de Almeida

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Recently, Western support for Ukraine has been declining, leaving the regime’s officials concerned about the future of Kiev’s fighting capabilities. However, despite this tendency, there are still public figures in the West calling for a new escalation and the sending of more heavy weapons to Ukraine.

In a recent statement, American retired General Philip Breedlove, former NATO Supreme Allied Commander Europe, stated that the West should send heavy weapons to Kiev to enable intense attacks on the Crimea region. According to Breedlove, only by attacking Russian positions in the Black Sea will Ukraine be able to make Moscow “rethink its posture”.

Breedlove classified Crimea as the “center of gravity” and “the decisive terrain of the war.” For him, the key to “defeat” Russia is to hit Crimea as much as possible. He believes that the more attacks in the region, the more Russia will be affected and forced to retreat throughout the entire conflict zone. So, faced with the imminent depletion of Ukraine’s military capabilities, the general advises that NATO return to sending weapons at a massive level, mainly long-range missiles that allow deep attacks on Crimea.

“If we enable Ukraine to be able to strike Crimea — pervasively, persistently and precisely —Russia will be forced to rethink its posture there. Strike them all, strike them repeatedly, and destroy them in detail,” he said.

Breedlove’s opinion has long been shared by other officers. Neutralizing Russian positions in Crimea has been a Ukrainian ambition since 2022, with several unsuccessful attacks having taken place in the region. One of the main objectives is to destroy the Kerch Bridge, which is considered the logistical key of Crimea. Not by chance, Kiev launched terrorist attacks on the Bridge, killing civilians but failing to cause major damage to the infrastructure.

Not only that, but General Breedlove himself has already become well known for his radical stance regarding Crimea. In October last year, he published an article in Western media outlet stating that bombing Crimea was necessary in order to achieve the “Ukrainian victory”. He openly called for the destruction of the Kerch Bridge, labeling it a “legitimate target”. At the time, he also criticized all analysts’ arguments about the need to take precautions with these attacks to avoid an escalation in the conflict. Breedlove appears not to care about the possibility of an increase in the violence of hostilities, stating that it is necessary to inflict damage on Crimea regardless of the side effects.

“Several people I have spoken to say ‘dropping’ [destroying] Kerch bridge would be a huge blow to Russia. Kerch bridge is a legitimate target (…) I am a trained civil engineer and I know about bridge construction. All bridges have their weak points and if targeted in the right spot it could render Kerch bridge unserviceable for a period of time. But if they wanted to drop the bridge, that would require a more dedicated bombing operation (…) I hear a lot of people asking whether it is right for Ukraine to take such aggressive action and whether the West would support it, but I cannot understand that argument”, he said at the time.

It is also necessary to clarify that the strategic calculation behind this type of opinion is absolutely wrong. It is believed that by increasing pressure on Crimea, the Ukrainians will force the Russians to concentrate efforts in the region, neglecting the defense lines on the battlefield and facilitating Kiev’s territorial advance. With this, it would allegedly be possible for Ukrainian troops to reach the Black Sea by advancing on the ground, reversing the current military scenario.

However, this mentality seems naive. The Russian reaction to possible recurrent attacks on Crimea would not be through any abrupt change in the situation on the front lines, but rather through an exponential increase in bombings against strategic targets throughout Ukraine. Moscow’s military doctrine establishes artillery as the main factor in a combat scenario. To each Ukrainian attempt to escalate the fighting, the Russians react with heavy artillery, neutralizing military facilities, critical infrastructure and enemy decision-making centers.

In practice, Ukraine is at an impasse as it suffers more and more losses every time it tries to reverse the situation. The country is unable to change the scenario, having as an alternative only the peace negotiations under Russian terms – which NATO obviously does not allow Kiev to do. Furthermore, it is unlikely that the Atlantic alliance will resume sending long-range weapons in large quantities in the near future, as the US is deeply involved in the Middle Eastern conflict, diminishing its interest in the Ukrainian front.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published on InfoBrics.

Lucas Leiroz is a journalist, researcher at the Center for Geostrategic Studies, geopolitical consultant. You can follow Lucas on X (former Twitter) and Telegram.

Featured image: General Philip Breedlove, then Supreme Allied Commander Europe, in 2014. (NATO)

Netanyahu’s Comments Show That Israel Is Not a Partner for Peace

January 21st, 2024 by Canadians for Justice and Peace in the Middle East

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Canadians for Justice and Peace in the Middle East (CJPME) is raising the alarm about yesterday’s comments by Israeli Prime Minister Netanyahu, who reiterated his firm opposition to a Palestinian state in any post-war scenario and asserted that Israel will maintain permanent control over all territory “West of the Jordan [river].” CJPME emphasizes that this position is not new, but has been expressed throughout Netanyahu’s career and is explicitly laid out in the Likud charter. Nonetheless, these comments serve as an important reminder that the Israeli political establishment is committed to the permanent oppression of the Palestinian people, and Canadian policy must be adjusted to reflect this reality.

First, Canada must recognize that the Israeli government is not acting in good faith and is not a partner for peace. This is a problem that extends beyond the Prime Minister. While senior ministers in Netanyahu’s far-right coalition openly push for the ethnic cleansing of Gaza, Netanyahu’s more ‘moderate’ rivals are promoting plans for Israel to maintain military control over Gaza while giving Palestinians greater autonomy, resembling the Bantustan system under apartheid South Africa. No Israeli leader has ever supported a truly independent Palestinian state, and decades of impunity have emboldened Israel to consolidate its illegitimate control over the occupied Palestinian territories (OPT). If Canada wants this situation to change, it must acknowledge the problem and change its approach. Only meaningful political and diplomatic pressure, including sanctions, can compel Israel to relinquish its control over the OPT.

Second, Canada must commit itself to the cause of Palestinian self-determination. This will require more than empty lip service about a “two-state solution.” Most people believe that after decades of deliberate policy, Israel has effectively killed the possibility of an independent Palestinian state. This means that Canada must be open to the possibility of a future in which Palestinians and Israelis share equal rights within a single democratic state. Regardless, this is a question that is up to the Palestinians themselves to decide. Canada does not get to dictate the form that the future political reality will take, how Palestinians will govern themselves, or who is allowed to sit at the table.

To affirm Palestinian self-determination, CJPME argues that Canada’s approach to a ‘post-war’ scenario must be based on the minimum following principles:

  • Canada must focus on achieving an immediate ceasefire before it turns its attention to the ‘day after,’ as such discussions can distract from the damage that Israel is inflicting on the civilian population every day. Given the scale and nature of Israel’s attacks, there may be no Gaza left at the end of this war. Halting Israel’s destruction of Gaza must be Canada’s highest priority.
  • Canada can accept nothing less than a full Israeli withdrawal from Gaza and the rest of the OPT. This requires more than a withdrawal of ground forces, but the termination of all forms of effective control, including over the movement of people and goods in and out of the territory. Israel must relinquish all power over the Palestinian people and dismantle its structures of oppression and apartheid.
  • Canada must insist that Palestinian refugees and internally displaced people have every opportunity to exercise their right to return to their homes. This is an issue that goes beyond the 1.9 million people who are currently displaced within Gaza. Two-thirds of the Gaza population were already refugees, originally displaced during the 1948 Nakba and the creation of Israel, and they have an inalienable right under international law to return. Their dispossession remains at the heart of the current conflict.
  • Canada must insist that Israel pay reparations to fund the rebuilding of Gaza. Israel is deliberately destroying all forms of physical and social infrastructure in the territory, and the international community must not be left financially responsible for addressing this catastrophe. Israel must know that it will pay for every building it turns to rubble.
  • Canada must acknowledge that it does not have the right to dictate who represents the Palestinian people, or how they govern themselves. Canada’s position that there is “no role for Hamas in the future governance of Gaza” directly contradicts this basic principle of self-determination and erodes the possibility of a negotiated end to the war.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Articolo e trasmissione a cura di Manlio Dinucci.

Martin Griffiths – Sottosegretario Generale delle Nazioni Unite per gli Affari Umanitari e Coordinatore degli Aiuti d’Emergenza – ha presentato al Consiglio di Sicurezza una documentata relazione, di cui riportiamo alcuni stralci:

“A Gaza sono state colpite 134 strutture della Agenzia delle Nazioni Unite per il soccorso dei rifugiati palestinesi, e sono stati uccisi 148 membri del personale delle Nazioni Unite.

Sono stati colpiti i centri di soccorso umanitario, nonostante che fossero identificati e notificati alle Forze israeliane. Mentre le operazioni di terra si spostano verso Sud, si sono intensificati i bombardamenti aerei nelle aree in cui i civili erano stati invitati a trasferirsi per la loro sicurezza.

Sempre più persone vengono stipate in una porzione di territorio sempre più piccola, solo per trovarvi ancora più violenza e privazioni, ripari inadeguati e la quasi assenza dei servizi più basilari. Rafah, dove prima della crisi la popolazione era di 280 mila abitanti, ospita oggi un milione di sfollati. E ogni giorno ne arrivano altri.

I nostri sforzi per inviare convogli umanitari nel Nord si sono scontrati con dinieghi e l’imposizione di condizioni impossibili. Colleghi che sono riusciti a raggiungere il Nord descrivono scene di assoluto orrore: cadaveri abbandonati sulle strade, persone affamate che bloccano i camion in cerca di tutto ciò che possono trovare per sopravvivere. E anche se riescono a tornare a casa, non hanno più una casa in cui vivere.

Cresce la pressione per lo spostamento in massa dei palestinesi nei Paesi vicini. Voglio sottolineare che a tutte le persone sfollate da Gaza deve essere permesso di tornarvi come richiede il Diritto Internazionale. Siamo profondamente allarmati dalle recenti dichiarazioni dei ministri israeliani sui piani per incoraggiare il trasferimento in massa di civili palestinesi da Gaza verso Paesi terzi, definito “trasferimento volontario”.

Queste dichiarazioni sollevano gravi preoccupazioni riguardo al possibile trasferimento forzato in massa o alla deportazione della popolazione palestinese dalla Striscia di Gaza, cosa che sarebbe rigorosamente vietata dal Diritto Internazionale.

Quello che abbiamo visto dal 7 Ottobre è una macchia sulla nostra coscienza collettiva. Se non agiamo, diventerà un marchio indelebile sulla nostra umanità. Resto estremamente preoccupato del rischio di un’ulteriore diffusione regionale di questo conflitto.

Non possiamo permettere che questa situazione si diffonda ulteriormente: le conseguenze di una conflagrazione più ampia sarebbero inimmaginabili.

 

VIDEO :

https://www.byoblu.com/2024/01/19/da-gaza-al-medioriente-la-strategia-della-catastrofe-onu-conseguenze-inimmaginabili/

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

This year will be decisive for the future agenda, with the upcoming United Nations Summit of the Future in September. This will lay the foundation for a strengthened economic global governance with the G20 in an elevated position within the UN and the international financial system.

The UN policy brief Reforms to the International Financial Architecture, that builds on proposals from United Nations Our Common Agenda, has suggested an “apex body” for economic coordination that will serve as a key component in order to achieve Agenda 2030 and the SDGs. This body is planned to include G20, UN and the global financial institutions and will gather at a biennial summit.

The slogan of G20 (Group of twenty), under the chairmanship of Brazil and President Lula da Silva, is “building a just world and a sustainable planet”. The focus areas are: “The three dimensions of sustainable development”, “Fighting hunger, poverty and inequality”, and “Global Governance Reform”.[1]

G20 was established after the Asian financial crisis in 1999 and evolved into the premier global forum to discuss and manage global challenges during the global financial crisis barely ten years later.

This kind of arrangement had previously been discussed at an Informal Gathering of World Economic Leaders (IGWEL) during the World Economic Forums annual summit in 1998.[2]

This resulted in a proposal from G7 finance ministers “to broaden the dialogue on key economic and financial policy issues among systemically significant economies.” They then invited these “significant economies” to a meeting in Berlin in December 1999.[3]

The ideas for this global governance arrangement had, however, been suggested as early as the 1970s by members of the Trilateral Commission. To be successful, it was deemed important to include the largest emerging economies. This was reflected in their 1976 report The Reform of International Institutions by C. Fred Bergsten, Georges Berthoin, and Kinhide Mushakoji.

At first, only finance ministers and central bank governors attended the meetings but since the 2008 G20 Summit on Financial Markets and the World Economy, heads of state or heads of government have been invited (among the first participants were Lula da Silva).

This upgrade was realised after advocacy from WEF. As stated in their 50 anniversary book WEF: A Partner in Shaping History 1971–2020:

Klaus Schwab, among others, proposed in several speeches to elevate the G20 meeting to become a true global summit.

G20 has since gradually been given more focus areas and is in effect an embryo for a world government. The G20 member states reach about 80 % of the world’s population, and the organisation functions like an executive council for implementing the UN Sustainable Development Goals as well as the WHO Health Agenda.

Former leader of the Soviet Union, Mikhael Gorbachev, once labeled it the “Global Politburo”. The group consists of 19 member states plus the European Union (EU) and the recently accepted the African Union (AU) as a member.

The Secretary General of the United Nations is a permanent guest attendee, together with representatives from The Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD), ASEAN, WTO, ILO, IMF, World Bank and the Financial Stability Board.

A major part of their work is done through the “finance track” and the “sherpa track”.

The finance track, with seven technical groups and one task force, deals with macro economics, and the building of a new international financial architecture. Attendees are representatives from the international financial institutions (The World Bank, IMF, BIS), regional development banks, finance ministers and central bank governors (FMCBGs).

Their Joint Task Force on Finance and Health is a forum that enhances Pandemic Prevention, Preparedness and Response (PPR) in “alignment with the One Health Approach and World Health Organization (WHO) priorities and objectives”. The secretariat is located at the WHO headquarters in Geneva and has support from The World Bank.[4]

The sherpa track has fifteen working groups (in areas like health, agriculture, education and the energy transition), two task forces and one “Bioeconomy Initiative”. The work is led by the personal emissaries of the G20 leaders. Other attendees are ministers from the G20 member countries and international organisations like OECD and United Nations.

G20 also constitutes 13 engagement groups from different parts of society. These include Women20, Youth20, Cities20 (mayors), Science20, Business20, and Think20 (think tanks). The latter two are the most powerful among these groupings. B20 has also close ties to WEF with Klaus Schwab as a member of the advisory council.

The latest addition is Oceans20, that promotes marine sustainability with support from the World Economic Forum.

These groupings claim to represent the voices of “civil society”. A Social Summit is held in November to reflect their proposals before the leaders summit.

G20 is this year governed by the three BRICS-countries Brazil (chair), South-Africa (incoming chair) and India (previous chair). This arrangement serves as a guarantee for a continuation of the agenda.

The connection between climate and health is as always a part of the program. This can be viewed in the light of this years World Health Assembly which is set to give WHO extended authority and give rise to the “One Health Regime”. WHO Director-General Tedros Adhanom recently recently praised Brazil’s priorities.[5]

One of the proposals is “Resilient Health Systems”, that “aims to defend universal health systems to face the major challenges of global health governance, such as those caused by the climate crisis”. A mechanism will be discussed that “allows creditor governments to exchange debts for health results”.[6]

This is framed as a part of achieving the United Nations SDG 3 – Health and Well-being.

Will this result in forced vaccination of the populations in the poor countries in order to be saved from bankruptcy?

One wonders what kind of surprises that are hidden up their sleeves?

Should we be worried that one of the panels (including Tedros Adhanom and Brazil’s Health Minister Nisia Trindade Lima) at next weeks annual WEF-meeting is called “Preparing for Disease X”?

With fresh warnings from the World Health Organization that an unknown “Disease X” could result in 20 times more fatalities than the coronavirus pandemic, what novel efforts are needed to prepare healthcare systems for the multiple challenges ahead?[7]

Brazil will also launch the Task Force for the Global Mobilization Against Climate Change “to enhance global macroeconomic and financial alignment to implement the goals of the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change and the Paris Agreement”.[8]

Brazil is the world’s seventh largest oil producer, and it is not very likely that they would kill the goose that lays their golden eggs. This has more to do with the creation of a new technocratic economic system built around the use of energy and a carbon currency.

The academic think tank Sustainable Finance Lab recently proposed a global carbon coin. A currency based on “natural stock of some sort, or the remaining carbon budget.”

This way a new global reserve currency can emerge. This not only has environmental benefits but also answers a growing call to bring more balance into the now unipolar global monetary system — a call coming clearly from the large emerging BRICS economies.[9]

BRICS – The Voice of the Global South

So let’s talk about BRICS. Are they an alternative? Many people seem to think so.

The group was founded by Brazil, Russia, India and China in Yekaterinburg, Russia, in 2009 as BRIC, and are seen as a counterweight to the West-dominated G7. The voice of the Global South. One year later, with the addition of South Africa, they became BRICS.

The 2024 BRICS summit was initially to be held in Brazil but was transferred to Russia and Vladimir Putin due to Brazil’s commitments as host of G20 this year.

The Leader’s Summit will take place in Kazan, Tatarstan, in October with the mission to establish a “fair” world order.[10] This stands, according to Putin, in opposition to the “rules based” order that is promoted by the West and G7. The motto is “Strengthening Multilateralism for Equitable Global Development and Security”.[11] This time with the participation of five new member states.

One of the new countries is the United Arab Emirate, also the host of the WEF-affiliated World Governments Summit and the latest international climate summit – COP28. UAE is a role model country for the futuristic agenda that WEF is promoting through the Fourth Industrial Revolution. They are a key partner of WEF as well as the main hub for the United Nations in the Middle East.

A more surprising new edition is the theocratic Islamic republic Iran. An arch-enemy of the US and Israel that has forged alliances with China and Russia, and sells oil to India.

With the addition of Saudi-Arabia, this also means that six of the world’s ten top oil producers are members of BRICS.

World's biggest oil producers

This gives the BRICS some muscles. But it is a group with clear dividing lines between the member states. They are dispersed on three continents, have cultural and religious differences and are somewhat crippled by a leadership struggle between India and China.

The new members Iran and Saudi-Arabia also compete for influence in the Middle East and have been involved in proxy-wars against each other. Iran is the leading Shia Muslim power whereas Saudi Arabia is the leading Sunni Muslim power. Diplomatic relations are, however, restored with the help of China since March 2023.

G7 are a lot more homogenous with a clear defined leader (but with waning power).

BRICS are not, as often portrayed in alternative media, a real contender on the world scene. They do not challenge United Nations Agenda 2030 or WEFs Fourth Industrial Revolution. BRICS acts within the limits of the international system. All BRICS countries imposed lockdowns and mask mandates during COVID-19. They all take part in the endless string of climate summits (Brazil will arrange COP 30 in 2025).

Six of the BRICS-members are members of G20 (Brazil, Russia, India, China, South Africa, and Saudi-Arabia). These are countries that all want to secure their seats and have a say in the emerging global management system. The old hegemony is slowly dying and the sociopaths of the world are in need of a new host. This is what their new “apex body” for the world economy is planned to be.

One of the criteria for applying for BRICS-membership is furthermore to “be committed to the achievement of the Sustainable Development Goals”.[12]

At the latest BRICS summit in South Africa, BRICS underlined their commitment to “mobilising the means required to implement the 2030 Agenda” and highlighted the “significant opportunities” that Summit of the Future constitutes in the Johannesburg II Leaders Declaration. The summit was also attended by UN Secretary General António Guterres.

WEF – The Bridge Builder

The real masters, the owners of business and banking, are lurking behind BRICS as well as behind the G7. This is especially true for the most visible manifestation of the their influence: The World Economic Forum.

WEF operates all over the globe. As Klaus Schwab said in 2020:

The Forum has built an excellent relationship with the Russian Federation. Both with the business community as well as with the government.

The Russian Sberbank CEO and a close ally to Vladimir Putin, Hermann Gref, was a member of the WEF Board of Directors for eleven years (2011–22), whereas Putin has known Schwab since a meeting in St Petersburg in 1992.[13] This “excellent relationship” did, however, turn a bit frosty after the war in Ukraine broke out.[14] At least officially.

The Russian attack could hardly have been a surprise for WEF as there has been an ongoing conflict between Russia and Ukraine since 2014. Despite sanctions from the US and the European Union, WEF continued to collaborate with Russia during the Cyber Polygon exercise that was arranged annually by Sberbank 2019–2021, as well as forging deeper bonds through a close partnership between WEF and S:t Petersburg Economic Forum.

It is not a wild guess that the relationship will be restored once the conflict has been settled.

China has also developed close ties to WEF. The “Summer Davos” Annual Meeting of the New Champions has been arranged in the Chinese cities Tiunjan and Dalian since 2007.[15]

WEF has opened Centers for the Fourth Industrial Revolution (C4IR) in Brazil, China, South-Africa, India, UAE, Saudi-Arabia, whereas the centre in Russia (that opened as late as 2021) has been suspended due to the conflict in Ukraine.[16]

WEFs Global Shapers Community (for young people between 20 and 29) has hubs in 152 countries with the mission to “inspire, empower and connect young leaders to strengthen their communities and change the world” under the leadership of Klaus Schwab and the Council on Foreign Relations-chairman David Rubenstein. All BRICS-countries except Iran has or has had hubs.[17]

WEF has also “penetrated” BRICS with their Young Global Leader (and predecessor Global Leaders of Tomorrow) programs. There are now over 800 WEF-trained leaders in the BRICS countries. Several of them in government positions, but most of them in the business community.

The following list of Young Global Leaders in BRICS-countries is produced by data from the Pharos WEF YGL list.

  • Brazil: 73
  • Russia: 69
  • India: 204
  • China: 206
  • South Africa: 120
  • Egypt: 23
  • Ethiopia: 10
  • Iran: 9
  • Saudi Arabia: 44
  • UAE: 47

WEF has also, for obvious reasons, an influence on the West. The G7 Summit will this year be hosted by Italy, and Prime Minister Giorgia Meloni, with a focus on Climate Change, Artificial Intelligence and food security. Another key focus is the “defence of the rules-based international system” that Russia, according to G7, has “undermined” because of their “war of aggression on Ukraine”.[18]

These are practically the same topics as those that will be discussed at next week’s annual WEF Summit. Guests invited to Davos this year includes Ukraine’s president Volodymyr Zelenskyy, who will discuss the “principles and implementation” of his peace plan.[19] However, no Russian leader has been invited this time.

We can expect that what transpires out of Davos will affect the agenda for all venues of global cooperation. Be it G7, BRICS or G20.

Next month, World Government Summit will be held in Dubai, UAE, with the mission to “shape future governments” with “smart technology”.

The real struggle is about who will control the future world order once the architecture is in place. Perhaps a “trustworthy” AI?

We can be sure that WEF will be a winner, regardless the outcome. In their ranks we find the crisis and war profiteers who get rich from the ongoing conflicts and “challenges” in the world. They make big bucks on the Russian “special operations”, Israeli counter-terrorism warfare, COVID-vaccinations, climate change mitigation, as well as on “smart” AI-systems.[20] Their profiteering respect no borders.

It is telling that the WEF’s newly published Global Risks Report 2024 does not see “armed conflict” as the most threatening global catastrophic risk for the coming two years, but rather “misinformation and disinformation”.

Can we guess that they are afraid of exposure?

WEF has been subjected to a lot of criticism in the aftermath of the pandemic that has tarnished their reputation.

There will also be elections that affect three billion people this year. This may, according to the report, intensify the use of mis- and disinformation to disrupt electoral processes and risk “undermine the legitimacy of newly elected governments”, resulting in violence and unrest.

The worst global threats for the coming two years, according to WEFs latest report

This could incite authoritarian response. As is stated in the report:

…the proliferation of misinformation and disinformation may be leveraged to strengthen digital authoritarianism and the use of technology to control citizens. Governments themselves will be increasingly in a position to determine what is true, potentially allowing political parties to monopolize the public discourse and suppress dissenting voices, including journalists and opponents.

The findings in the report is already a part of the G20 agenda:

Working Groups such as the Digital Economy WG—to combat disinformation—and the Global Mobilization Task Force against Climate Change, proposed by Brazil, are examples of G20 forums whose mission is to propose consensus and concrete measures to face the serious issues highlighted by the WEF report.[21]

I close with som fitting lyrics and music by Megadeth’s Dave Mustaine.

Peace sells… but who’s buying?

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Notes

1 www.g20.org/en/about-the-g20/e-book-brasil-na-presidencia-do-g20

2 www3.weforum.org/docs/WEF_A_Partner_in_Shaping_History.pdf

3 www.g20.utoronto.ca/docs/g20history.pdf

4 www.mef.gov.it/inevidenza/2021/article_00067/G20-Joint-Finance-and-Health-Ministers-Communique-29-October-2021.pdf

5 www.g20.org/en/news/world-health-organization-defends-global-equity-in-health-and-finance

6 www.g20.org/en/news/sus-is-a-reference-for-brasils-health-proposal-at-the-g20

7 www.weforum.org/events/world-economic-forum-annual-meeting-2024/sessions/preparing-for-a-disease-x

8 www.g20.org/en/tracks/sherpa-track/climate-change

9 globalchallenges.org//app/uploads/2023/12/The-climate-trillions-we-need-4.pdf

10 www.ft.com/content/dec93c8a-35f0-48cf-9630-17b6c58a9631

11 en.kremlin.ru/events/president/news/73202

12 brics2023.gov.za/wp-content/uploads/2023/11/BRICS-Membership-expansion-guiding-principles-criteria-and-standards-2023.pdf

13 www3.weforum.org/docs/WEF_A_Partner_in_Shaping_History.pdf

14 www.weforum.org/agenda/2022/02/ukraine-our-full-solidarity/

15 www.china.org.cn/business/summerdavos2009/node_7076769.htm

16 c4ir.ru/en/

17 weforum.ent.box.com/s/s1pu3rhxv4757degjrtom1mzow6x7i8b

18 www.g7italy.it/en/

19 www.weforum.org/events/world-economic-forum-annual-meeting-2024/sessions/press-conference-national-security-advisers-on-ukraine

20 www.aftonbladet.se/nyheter/kolumnister/a/8J2zXW/saab-tjanar-miljarder-pa-hot-om-krig

21 www.g20.org/en/news/world-economic-forum-report-states-that-disinformation-and-extreme-weather-are-the-main-threats-to-the-world-today 

All images in this article are from the author unless otherwise stated